Manual Lexus LS 350 - 2020 (page 3 of 586) (English)

810995

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/586

Owner’s Manual

Toyota Motor Europe NV/SA Address: Avenue du bourget

60 –1140 Brussels, Belgium

2015 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION All rights

reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in

whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota

Motor Corportation

LS500-LS350EE

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety

and security

Make sure to read through them

(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)

Vehicle status

information and

indicators

Reading driving-related information

(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)

Before driving

Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment

before driving

(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats, power windows)

Driving

Operations and advice which are necessary for driving

(Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)

Interior features

Usage of the interior features

(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)

Maintenance

and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures

(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)

When trouble

arises

What to do in case of malfunction and emergency

(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)

Vehicle

specifications

Vehicle specifications, customizable features

(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)

Index

Search by symptom

Search alphabetically

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information......................................6

Reading this manual.......................................9

How to search ............................................... 10

Pictorial index..................................................11

1-1. For safe use

Before driving....................................24

For safe driving..................................25

Seat belts .............................................26

SRS airbags ....................................... 30

Pop Up Hood ................................... 38

Exhaust gas precautions.............. 40

1-2. Child safety

Airbag manual on-off system.......41

Riding with children.........................42

Child restraint systems ..................43

1-3. Emergency assistance

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK............ 60

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system..........64

Double locking system ..................76

Alarm ....................................................77

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators.... 82

Gauges and meters (except F

SPORT models) ........................... 86

Gauges and meters (F SPORT

models)............................................. 89

Multi-information display............. 93

Head-up display .............................101

Fuel consumption information

........................................................... 105

3-1. Key information

Keys..................................................... 110

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the

doors and trunk

Doors...................................................114

Trunk....................................................119

Smart entry & start system.........126

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats.........................................165

Power rear seat ..............................172

Driving position memory............177

Rear seat position memory........ 181

Head restraints .............................. 182

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and

mirrors

Steering wheel ............................... 185

Inside rear view mirror ............... 186

Digital Rearview Mirror............. 187

Outside rear view mirrors..........195

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and

moon roof

Power windows ............................. 198

Moon roof........................................ 201

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle....................... 207

Cargo and luggage.......................214

Trailer towing...................................215

For safety and security

Vehicle status information and

indicators

Before driving

Driving

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch .............. 216

Automatic transmission.............. 219

Turn signal lever ........................... 226

Parking brake ................................ 227

Brake Hold......................................230

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch........................... 232

AHS (Adaptive High-beam Sys-

tem)................................................. 235

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

...........................................................238

Multi Weather Lights................... 241

Rear fog lights................................ 242

Windshield wipers and washer

........................................................... 243

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap........248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus Safety System + A...........250

Lexus Safety System + ............... 262

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System +

A) ..................................................... 273

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System +)

...........................................................285

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

........................................................... 293

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)........ 297

RSA (Road Sign Assist).............307

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range........................... 311

Cruise control ............................... 323

Stop & Start system..................... 325

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ....... 332

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)

.......................................................... 349

Lexus parking assist-sensor ......351

RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert)

function ......................................... 355

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)

function ......................................... 359

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)

...........................................................362

Parking Support Brake function

(static objects)............................ 367

Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) ..........372

Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians)..................... 375

Driving mode select switch .....378

Electronically modulated air sus-

pension..........................................380

Driving assist systems ................ 384

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips.......................390

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Remote Touch............................... 394

Center Display.............................. 396

Rear Multi Operation Panel ...398

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge ........ 401

5-3. Using the air conditioning system

and defogger

Front automatic air conditioning

system............................................ 403

Rear automatic air conditioning

system..............................................413

Interior features

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Heated steering wheel/seat heat-

ers/seat ventilators.................... 416

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list............................420

5-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features .............. 424

Trunk features................................ 429

5-6. Using the other interior features

Other interior features .............. 432

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehi-

cle exterior................................... 442

Cleaning and protecting the vehi-

cle interior .................................... 445

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements.....448

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

...........................................................450

Hood .................................................. 451

Positioning a floor jack............... 452

Engine compartment.................. 453

Battery .............................................. 463

Tires ................................................... 465

Replacing the tire......................... 482

Tire inflation pressure.................486

Wheels..............................................487

Air conditioning filter..................488

Electronic key battery................490

Checking and replacing fuses

........................................................... 492

Light bulbs.......................................495

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers .................... 498

If your vehicle has to be stopped in

an emergency ............................ 498

If the vehicle is trapped in rising

water .............................................. 499

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

........................................................... 501

If you think something is wrong

.......................................................... 505

Fuel pump shut off system........ 506

If a warning light turns on or a warn-

ing buzzer sounds..................... 507

If a warning message is displayed

............................................................515

If you have a flat tire ..................... 518

If the engine will not start............519

If you lose your keys.................... 520

If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened ............................................521

If the electronic key does not oper-

ate properly...................................521

If the vehicle battery is discharged

...........................................................524

If your vehicle overheats........... 530

If the vehicle becomes stuck ... 534

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,

etc.)................................................. 536

Maintenance and care

When trouble arises

Vehicle specifications

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Fuel information............................ 545

8-2. Customization

Customizable features ..............546

8-3. Initialization

Items to initialize...........................563

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

...........................................................566

Alphabetical Index ...................... 569

Index

Please note that this manual applies to

all models and explains all equipment,

including options. Therefore, you may

find some explanations for equipment

not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this man-

ual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Lexus policy

of continual product improvement, we

reserve the right to make changes at

any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehi-

cle shown in the illustrations may differ

from your vehicle in terms of color and

equipment.

For Eurasian Economic Union: The

information on the procedure for the

safe use of the vehicle and its systems,

presented on the manufacturer’s labels

on the body in English, is intended only

for service workers.

Both genuine Lexus and a wide variety

of other spare parts and accessories

for Lexus vehicles are currently availa-

ble on the market. Should it be deter-

mined that any of the genuine Lexus

parts or accessories supplied with the

vehicle need to be replaced, Lexus

recommends that genuine Lexus parts

or accessories, be used to replace

them. Other parts or accessories of

matching quality can also be used.

Lexus cannot accept any liability or

guarantee spare parts and accessories

which are not genuine Lexus products,

nor for replacement or installation

involving such parts. In addition, dam-

age or performance problems result-

ing from the use of non-genuine Lexus

spare parts or accessories may not be

covered under warranty.

The installation of an RF-transmitter

system in your vehicle could affect

electronic systems such as:

Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

Lexus Safety System + A

Lexus Safety System +

Cruise control system

Anti-lock brake system

Vehicle dynamics integrated man-

agement

SRS airbag system

Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer for

precautionary measures or special

instructions regarding installation of an

RF-transmitter system.

Further information regarding fre-

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Accessories, spare parts and

modification of your Lexus

Installation of an RF-transmitter

system

quency bands, power levels, antenna

positions and installation provisions for

the installation of RF-transmitters, is

available on request at any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

The vehicle is equipped with sophisti-

cated computers that will record cer-

tain data, such as:

• Engine speed / Electric motor

speed (traction motor speed)

• Accelerator status

•Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Operation status of the driving

assist systems

• Images from the cameras

Your vehicle is equipped with cameras.

Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for the location of recording cam-

eras.

The recorded data varies according to

the vehicle grade level, options and

destinations with which it is equipped.

These computers do not record con-

versations or sounds, and only record

images outside of the vehicle in certain

situations.

Data usage

Lexus may use the data recorded in this

computer to diagnose malfunctions, con-

duct research and development, and

improve quality.

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to

a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or

with the consent of the lessee if the vehi-

cle is leased

• In response to an official request by the

police, a court of law or a government

agency

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is

not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle

owner

Recorded image information can be

erased by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

The image recording function can be disa-

bled. However, if the function is disabled,

data from when the system operates will

not be available.

The SRS airbag, seat belt pretensioner

devices and Pop Up Hood system in

your Lexus contain explosive chemi-

cals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the

airbags, seat belt pretensioners and

Pop Up Hood micro gas generators

left as they are, this may cause an acci-

dent such as fire. Be sure to have the

systems of the SRS airbag, seat belt

pretensioner and Pop Up Hood micro

gas generators removed and disposed

of by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer before you scrap your

vehicle.

Vehicle data recording

Scrapping of your Lexus

For Russia and Kazakhstan:

TECHNICAL REGULATION OF

THE CUSTOMS UNION “ON THE

SAFETY OF WHEELED VEHICLES”

TR CU 018/2011 Attachment No.3,

Section 2 (Requirements for vehicles

concerning their interior noise), Table

2.1, Remarks 3

This vehicle may not be used for public

purposes (as taxis, for example).

Toyota Motor Europe NV/SA, Avenue

du Bourget 60 - 1140 Brussels, Bel-

gium www.toyota-europe.com

Noise levels inside the vehicle

(LS500 only)

WARNING

■

General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive

your vehicle when under the influence of

alcohol or drugs that have impaired your

ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol

and certain drugs delay reaction time,

impair judgment and reduce coordina-

tion, which could lead to an accident that

could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defen-

sively. Anticipate mistakes that other

drivers or pedestrians might make and

be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full

attention to driving. Anything that dis-

tracts the driver, such as adjusting con-

trols, talking on a cellular phone or

reading can result in a collision with

resulting death or serious injury to you,

your occupants or others.

■

General precaution regarding chil-

dren’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle, and never allow children to have

or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle

or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is

also a danger that children may injure

themselves by playing with the windows,

the moon roof, or other features of the

vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or

extremely cold temperatures inside the

vehicle can be fatal to children.

Reading this manual

Explains symbols used in this man-

ual.

Symbols in this manual

Symbols Meanings

WARNING:

Explains something that,

if not obeyed, could

cause death or serious

injury to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something that,

if not obeyed, could

cause damage to or a

malfunction in the vehi-

cle or its equipment.

Indicates operating or

working procedures. Fol-

low the steps in numeri-

cal order.

Symbols in illustrations

Symbols Meanings

Indicates the action

(pushing, turning, etc.)

used to operate switches

and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of

an operation (e.g. a lid

opens).

Symbols Meanings

Indicates the component

or position being

explained.

Means Do not, Do not do

this, or Do not let this

happen.

■

Searching by name

Alphabetical index: P.569

■

Searching by installation position

Pictorial index: P.11

■

Searching by symptom or sound

What to do if... (Troubleshooting):

P.566

■

Searching by title

Table of contents: P.2

How to search

Pictorial index

■Exterior

Doors ...........................................................................................................................P.114

Locking/unlocking.............................................................................................................. P.114

Opening/closing the side windows............................................................................P.198

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key..................................................P.521

Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515

Trunk............................................................................................................................P.119

Opening from inside the cabin...................................................................................... P.121

Opening from outside....................................................................................................... P.121

Opening by using the mechanical key.................................................................... P.522

Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515

Outside rear view mirrors....................................................................................P.195

Adjusting the mirror angle..............................................................................................P.195

Folding the mirrors ............................................................................................................P.196

Driving position memory................................................................................................. P.177

Defogging the mirrors....................................................................................................P.403

Pictorial index

Windshield wipers................................................................................................. P.243

Precautions for winter season.....................................................................................P.390

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)

................................................ P.407

Precautions for car wash............................................................................................... P.443

Fuel filler door ........................................................................................................ P.248

Refueling method.............................................................................................................P.248

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity.........................................................................................P.538

Tires............................................................................................................................P.465

Tire size/inflation pressure................................................................................P.465, 543

Winter tires/tire chains..................................................................................................P.390

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system ............................................. P.465

Coping with flat tires........................................................................................................ P.518

Hood ...........................................................................................................................P.451

Opening.................................................................................................................................P.451

Engine compartment cover.........................................................................................P.455

Engine oil..............................................................................................................................P.539

Coping with overheating ..............................................................................................P.530

Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515

Headlights/front position lights/daytime running lights/

cornering lights...................................................................................................... P.232

Turn signal lights .....................................................................................................P.226

Tail lights .................................................................................................................. P.232

Stop lights

Hill-start assist control....................................................................................................P.384

License plate lights ............................................................................................... P.232

Back-up lights

Changing the shift position to R...................................................................................P.219

Rear fog lights ..........................................................................................................P.241

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P.495)

Pictorial index

:If equipped

Pictorial index

■Instrument panel

Engine switch............................................................................................................P.216

Starting the engine/changing the modes.................................................................P.216

Emergency stop of the engine....................................................................................P.498

When the engine will not start ......................................................................................P.519

Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515

Shift lever...................................................................................................................P.219

Changing the shift position.............................................................................................P.221

Precautions for towing.....................................................................................................P.501

Meters ................................................................................................................. P.86, 89

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light .........P.86, 88, 89, 92

Warning lights/indicator lights...................................................................................... P.82

When a warning light turns on.................................................................................... P.507

Multi-information display ...................................................................................... P.93

Display...................................................................................................................................... P.93

When a warning message is displayed .....................................................................P.515

Pictorial index

Parking brake switch.............................................................................................P.227

Applying/releasing the parking brake.....................................................................P.227

Precautions for winter season.......................................................................................P.391

Warning buzzer/messages ...........................................................................................P.515

Turn signal lever .....................................................................................................P.226

Headlight switch.................................................................................................... P.232

Headlights/front position lights/tail lights/license plate lights/daytime running

lights....................................................................................................................................... P.232

AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)

.................................................................... P.235

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

.................................................................................P.238

Multi Weather Lights........................................................................................................P.241

Rear fog lights.....................................................................................................................P.242

Windshield wiper and washer switch.............................................................. P.243

Usage .................................................................................................................................... P.243

Adding washer fluid..........................................................................................................P.462

Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515

Emergency flasher switch .................................................................................. P.498

Hood lock release lever........................................................................................P.451

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch..................................................... P.185

Adjustment........................................................................................................................... P.185

Driving position memory................................................................................................. P.177

Air conditioning system....................................................................................... P.403

Usage ....................................................................................................................................P.403

Rear window defogger ..................................................................................................P.403

Audio system

Brake hold switch .................................................................................................. P.230

Trunk opener main switch ....................................................................................P.125

: If equipped

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

■Switches

HUD (Head-up display) switch

.........................................................................P.101

Camera switch

Stop & Start cancel switch................................................................................... P.331

Instrument panel light control switches .................................................... P.88, 92

“ODO TRIP” switch .........................................................................................P.87, 92

VSC OFF switch.................................................................................................... P.385

Snow mode switch ................................................................................................ P.223

Driving mode select switch................................................................................ P.378

Trunk opener switch................................................................................................P.121

Fuel filler door opener switch............................................................................ P.249

: If equipped

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

Position memory buttons...................................................................................... P.177

Mode change button.............................................................................................. P.167

Window lock switch.............................................................................................. P.200

Outside rear view mirror switches ....................................................................P.195

Door lock switches .................................................................................................. P.116

Power window switches ....................................................................................... P.198

Rear door sunshade switches

...........................................................................P.436

:If equipped

Meter control switches .......................................................................................... P.94

Pictorial index

Paddle shift switches ..................................................................................P.224, 225

Phone switch

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch

..................................................................P.297

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch

...............................................................P.315

Cruise control switches

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

........................................ P.311

Cruise control

................................................................................................................ P.323

Audio remote control switches

Talk switch

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

: If equipped

Remote Touch

..................................................................................................... P.394

Seat switch ................................................................................................................P.166

Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators switch

...............P.417

Rear sunshade switch ...........................................................................................P.437

Vehicle height adjustment switch

................................................................ P.380

P position switch .................................................................................................... P.222

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

: If equipped

Pictorial index

■Interior

SRS airbags................................................................................................................ P.30

Floor mats................................................................................................................... P.24

Front seats .................................................................................................................P.165

Head restraints ....................................................................................................... P.182

Seat belts .....................................................................................................................P.26

Inside lock buttons ...................................................................................................P.116

Console box.............................................................................................................P.427

Cup holders .............................................................................................................P.426

Assist grips .............................................................................................................. P.433

Coat hooks.............................................................................................................. P.434

Rear Multi Operation Panel

........................................................................... P.398

Rear seat entertainment system

*1, 2

: If equipped

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

■Ceiling

Moon roof switches ............................................................................................... P.201

Personal lights..........................................................................................................P.421

“SOS” button

.......................................................................................................... P.60

Auxiliary box

........................................................................................................ P.428

Vanity mirrors ........................................................................................................ P.435

Sun visors

............................................................................................................. P.435

Door-linked interior light switch ........................................................................P.421

Inside rear view mirror

.......................................................................................P.186

Digital Rearview Mirror

.....................................................................................P.187

Interior light ..............................................................................................................P.421

Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor cancel switch ................................................. P.78

: If equipped

: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIR-

BAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. (P.46)

Pictorial index

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.................................24

For safe driving...............................25

Seat belts ..........................................26

SRS airbags .................................... 30

Pop Up Hood ................................ 38

Exhaust gas precautions ........... 40

1-2. Child safety

Airbag manual on-off system....41

Riding with children .....................42

Child restraint systems ...............43

1-3. Emergency assistance

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK......... 60

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system.......64

Double locking system ...............76

Alarm .................................................77

1-1. For safe use

1-1.For safe use

Use only floor mats designed specifi-

cally for vehicles of the same model

and model year as your vehicle. Fix

them securely in place onto the carpet.

1Insert the retaining hooks (clips)

into the floor mat eyelets.

2Turn the upper knob of each retain-

ing hook (clip) to secure the floor

mats in place.

Always align the marks .

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips)

may differ from that shown in the illustra-

tion.

Before driving

Observe the following before start-

ing off in the vehicle to ensure

safety of driving.

Installing floor mats

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s

floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with

the pedals while driving. An unexpect-

edly high speed may result or it may

become difficult to stop the vehicle. This

could lead to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

■

When installing the driver’s floor mat

●

Do not use floor mats designed for

other models or different model year

vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genu-

ine floor mats.

●

Only use floor mats designed for the

driver’s seat.

●

Always install the floor mat securely

using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-

vided.

●

Do not use two or more floor mats on

top of each other.

●

Do not place the floor mat bot-

tom-side up or upside-down.

■

Before driving

●

Check that the floor mat is securely

fixed in the correct place with all the

provided retaining hooks (clips). Be

especially careful to perform this

check after cleaning the floor.

●

With the engine stopped and the shift

position in P, fully depress each pedal

to the floor to make sure it does not

interfere with the floor mat.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

Adjust the angle of the seatback so

that you are sitting straight up and

so that you do not have to lean for-

ward to steer. (P.165)

Adjust the seat so that you can

depress the pedals fully and so that

your arms bend slightly at the

elbow when gripping the steering

wheel. (P.165)

Lock the head restraint in place

with the center of the head restraint

closest to the top of your ears.

(P.182)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(P.26)

Make sure that all occupants are wear-

ing their seat belts before driving the

vehicle. (P.26)

Use a child restraint system appropri-

ate for the child until the child becomes

large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belt. (P.43)

Make sure that you can see backward

clearly by adjusting the inside and out-

side rear view mirrors properly.

(P.186, 187, 195)

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and

mirror to an appropriate position

before driving.

Correct driving posture

WARNING

■

For safe driving

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●

Do not adjust the position of the

driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle.

●

Do not place a cushion between the

driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct pos-

ture from being achieved, and reduce

the effectiveness of the seat belt and

head restraint.

●

Do not place anything under the front

seats.

Objects placed under the front seats

may become jammed in the seat

tracks and stop the seat from locking in

place. This may lead to an accident

and the adjustment mechanism may

also be damaged.

●

When driving over long distances, take

regular breaks before you start to feel

tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while

driving, do not force yourself to con-

tinue driving and take a break immedi-

ately.

Correct use of the seat belts

Adjusting the mirrors

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are

wearing their seat belts before driv-

ing the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

■

Wearing a seat belt

●

Ensure that all passengers wear a seat

belt.

●

Always wear a seat belt properly.

●

Each seat belt should be used by one

person only. Do not use a seat belt for

more than one person at once, includ-

ing children.

●

Lexus recommends that children be

seated in the rear seat and always use

a seat belt and/or an appropriate child

restraint system.

●

To achieve a proper seating position,

do not recline the seat more than nec-

essary. The seat belt is most effective

when the occupants are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats.

●

Do not wear the shoulder belt under

your arm.

●

Always wear your seat belt low and

snug across your hips.

■

Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (



P.27)

Women who are pregnant should posi-

tion the lap belt as low as possible over

the hips in the same manner as other

occupants, extending the shoulder belt

completely over the shoulder and avoid-

ing belt contact with the rounding of the

abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not

only the pregnant woman, but also the

fetus could suffer death or serious injury

as a result of sudden braking or a colli-

sion.

■

People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (



P.27)

■

When children are in the vehicle



P.56

■

Seat belt damage and wear

●

Do not damage the seat belts by allow-

ing the belt, plate, or buckle to be

jammed in the door.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

Extend the shoulder belt so that it

comes fully over the shoulder, but

does not come into contact with the

neck or slide off the shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low as possi-

ble over the hips.

Adjust the position of the seatback.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat.

Do not twist the seat belt.

■

Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were princi-

pally designed for persons of adult size.

●

Use a child restraint system appropriate

for the child, until the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the vehicle’s

seat belt. (P.43)

●

When the child becomes large enough to

properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, fol-

low the instructions regarding seat belt

usage. (P.26)

■

Seat belt regulations

If seat belt regulations exist in the country

where you reside, please contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer, for

seat belt replacement or installation.

1To fasten the seat belt, push the

plate into the buckle until a click

sound is heard.

2To release the seat belt, press the

release button .

WARNING

●

Inspect the seat belt system periodi-

cally. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt

until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts

cannot protect an occupant from

death or serious injury.

●

Ensure that the belt and plate are

locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function cor-

rectly, immediately contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

Replace the seat assembly, including

the belts, if your vehicle has been

involved in a serious accident, even if

there is no obvious damage.

●

Do not attempt to install, remove,

modify, disassemble or dispose of the

seat belts. Have any necessary repairs

carried out by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer. Inappropriate

handling may lead to incorrect opera-

tion.

Correct use of the seat belts

Fastening and releasing the seat

belt

1-1. For safe use

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it.

■

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sud-

den stop or on impact. It may also lock if you

lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy

motion will allow the belt to extend so that

you can move around fully.

The front seat belt buckles move out-

ward automatically for easier access.



When entering the vehicle

When a front door is opened, the seat

belt buckle for the corresponding seat

will move outward automatically. The

buckle will retract automatically after

the plate is inserted and locked to the

buckle.



When exiting the vehicle (driver’s

seat only)

If the engine switch is turned off when

the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the

driver’s seat belt buckle will move out-

ward. The buckle will retract automati-

cally when the driver’s seat belt is

released.

:If equipped

■

Easy Access Buckle

●

When the seat belt buckle is in the out-

ward position and not latched, if the front

passenger’s seat is not occupied and the

vehicle is driven, the seat belt buckle will

return to its original position.

●

If an occupant exits the vehicle and leaves

the front door open and then enters the

vehicle again, the seat belt buckle will not

operate until the door is closed and then

opened again.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

1Push the seat belt shoulder anchor

down while pressing the release

button .

2Push the seat belt shoulder anchor

up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as

needed until you hear a click.

Easy Access Buckle (front

seats)*

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder

anchor height (front seats)

WARNING

■

Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of your

shoulder. The belt should be kept away

from your neck, but not falling off your

shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce

the amount of protection in an accident

and cause death or serious injuries in the

event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or

accident.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

The pretensioners help the seat belts to

quickly restrain the occupants by

retracting the seat belts when the vehi-

cle is subjected to certain types of

severe frontal or side collision.

The pretensioners do not activate in the

event of a minor frontal impact, a minor

side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle

rollover.

■

Replacing the belt after the

pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple colli-

sions, the pretensioner will activate for the

first collision, but will not activate for the

second or subsequent collisions.

When the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 20 km/h (12 mph) or

higher, the seat belts will retract slightly

to remove any slack.

If the system determines that a collision

is unavoidable, the front seat belts will

retract before the collision. (P.274)

■

Active Assist

A motor sound may be heard when a front

seat belt is released or a front door is

opened. This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

Seat belt pretensioners (front

and outboard rear seats)

WARNING

■

Seat belt pretensioners

If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS

warning light will come on. In that case,

the seat belt cannot be used again and

must be replaced at any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

Active Assist (front seats of vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System +

1-1. For safe use

■

Location of the SRS airbags



SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from

impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection



SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS front side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS rear side airbags

Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe

impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together

with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS airbag system

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

SRS curtain shield airbags

Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

SRS seat cushion airbags (if equipped)

Can help restrain the power rear seat occupants

■

SRS airbag system components

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Side impact sensors (front door)

Airbag manual on-off switch

Knee airbags

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbags

“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator light

Front side airbags

Side impact sensors (front)

SRS warning light

Rear side airbags

Seat belt pretensioners

Driver airbag

Seat cushion airbags (if equipped)

Rear seat belt buckle switches (if equipped)

Side impact sensors (rear)

1-1. For safe use

Driver’s seat position sensor

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Airbag sensor assembly

Front impact sensors

Pop Up Hood computer assembly

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag sys-

tem is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As the airbags deploy, a chemical

reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain

the motion of the occupants.

■

If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

●

Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may

be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the

extremely high speed deployment (infla-

tion) by hot gases.

●

A loud noise and white powder will be

emitted.

●

Parts of the airbag module (steering

wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as

well as the seats, parts of the front and

rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot

for several minutes. The airbag itself may

also be hot.

●

The windshield may crack.

●

All of the doors will be unlocked.

(P.115)

●

The brakes and stop lights will be con-

trolled automatically. (P.385)

●

The interior lights will turn on automati-

cally. (P.422)

●

The emergency flashers will be turned on

automatically. (P.498)

●

Fuel supply to the engine will be stopped.

(P.506)

●

Vehicle with ERA-GLONASS/EVAK: If

any of the following situations occur, the

system is designed to send an emergency

call

to the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK con-

trol center, notifying them of the vehicle’s

location (without needing to push the

“SOS” button) and an agent will attempt

to speak with the occupants to ascertain

the level of emergency and assistance

required. If the occupants are unable to

communicate, the agent automatically

treats the call as an emergency and helps

to dispatch the necessary emergency

services. (P.60)

• An SRS airbag is deployed.

• A seat belt pretensioner is activated.

• The vehicle is involved in a severe

rear-end collision.

• The vehicle is involved in a rollover acci-

dent.

: In some cases, the call cannot be made.

(P.62)

■

PCS-linked SRS airbag deployment

control (vehicles with Lexus Safety Sys-

tem + A)

If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) deter-

mines that the possibility of a side collision is

high, the SRS side and curtain shield

airbags will be prepared to operate.

■

SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS

front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags)

●

The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cush-

ion airbags will deploy in the event of an

impact that exceeds the set threshold

level (the level of force corresponding to

an approximately 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18

mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that

does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher in the following situa-

tions:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a

parked vehicle or sign pole, which can

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

move or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride

collision, such as a collision in which the

front of the vehicle underrides, or goes

under, the bed of a truck

●

Depending on the type of collision, it is

possible that only the seat belt

pretensioners will activate.

●

The SRS seat cushion airbags on the rear

seat will not operate if the occupant is not

wearing a seat belt.

■

SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS

side and curtain shield airbags)

●

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags

will deploy in the event of an impact that

exceeds the set threshold level (the level

of force corresponding to the impact

force produced by an approximately

1500 kg [3300 lb.] vehicle colliding with

the vehicle cabin from a direction per-

pendicular to the vehicle orientation at an

approximate speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 -

18 mph]).

●

Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also

deploy in the event of a severe frontal col-

lision.

■

Conditions under which the SRS

airbags may deploy (inflate), other than

a collision

The SRS front airbags, SRS curtain shield

airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may

also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the

underside of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

●

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

●

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

●

Landing hard or falling

■

Types of collisions that may not deploy

the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags/SRS

seat cushion airbags)

The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion

airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle

is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls

over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal

collision. But, whenever a collision of any

type causes sufficient forward deceleration

of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front

airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may

occur.

●

Collision from the side

●

Collision from the rear

●

Vehicle rollover

■

Types of collisions that may not deploy

the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain

shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags

may not activate if the vehicle is subjected

to a collision from the side at certain angles,

or a collision to the side of the vehicle body

other than the passenger compartment.

●

Collision from the side to the vehicle

body other than the passenger compart-

ment

●

Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not generally

inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or

rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved

1-1. For safe use

in a low-speed side collision.

●

Collision from the front

●

Collision from the rear

●

Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not gen-

erally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a

rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved

in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal

collision.

●

Collision from the rear

●

Vehicle rollover

■

When to contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer

In the following cases, the vehicle will

require inspection and/or repair. Contact

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer

as soon as possible.

●

Any of the SRS airbags have been

inflated.

●

The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause the

SRS front airbags and SRS cushion

airbags to inflate.

●

A portion of a door or its surrounding

area is damaged, deformed or has had a

hole made in it, or the vehicle was

involved in an accident that was not

severe enough to cause the SRS side and

curtain shield airbags to inflate.

●

The pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard near the front passenger

airbag or lower portion of the instrument

panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise

damaged.

●

Vehicles with power rear seat: The seat

cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or

otherwise damaged.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

●

The surface of the seats with the side

airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

●

The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars

or roof side rail garnishes (padding) con-

taining the curtain shield airbags inside is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

WARNING

■

SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions

regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

●

The driver and all passengers in the

vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental

devices to be used with the seat belts.

●

The SRS driver airbag deploys with

considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the

driver is very close to the airbag.

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag

is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.) of infla-

tion, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.)

from your driver airbag provides you with

a clear margin of safety. This distance is

measured from the center of the steering

wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less

than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can

change your driving position in several

ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as

you can while still reaching the pedals

comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many

drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10

in.) distance, even with the driver seat

all the way forward, simply by reclining

the back of the seat somewhat. If

reclining the back of your seat makes it

hard to see the road, raise yourself by

using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or

raise the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

•If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt

it downward. This points the airbag

toward your chest instead of your head

and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recom-

mended above, while still maintaining

control of the foot pedals, steering wheel,

and your view of the instrument panel

controls.

●

The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury

especially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passen-

ger seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

●

Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed or

seriously injured by a deploying airbag.

An infant or child who is too small to

use a seat belt should be properly

secured using a child restraint system.

Lexus strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in the

rear seats of the vehicle and properly

restrained. The rear seats are safer for

infants and children than the front pas-

senger seat. (



P.43)

●

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or

lean against the dashboard.

●

Do not allow a child to stand in front of

the SRS front passenger airbag unit or

sit on the knees of a front passenger.

●

Do not allow the front seat occupants

to hold items on their knees.

●

Do not lean against the door, the roof

side rail or the front, side and rear pil-

lars.

●

Do not allow anyone to kneel on the

passenger seats toward the door or

put their head or hands outside the

vehicle.

●

Do not attach anything to or lean any-

thing against areas such as the dash-

board, steering wheel pad and lower

portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles

when the SRS driver, front passenger

and knee airbags deploy.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

WARNING

●

Do not attach anything to areas such

as a door, windshield, side windows,

front or rear pillar, roof side rail and

assist grip.

●

Do not hang coat hangers or hard

objects on the coat hooks. All of these

items could become projectiles and

may cause death or serious injury,

should the SRS curtain shield airbags

deploy.

●

If a vinyl cover is put on the area where

the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be

sure to remove it.

●

Do not use seat accessories which

cover the parts where the SRS side

airbags inflate as they may interfere

with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such

accessories may prevent the side

airbags from activating correctly, disa-

ble the system or cause the side

airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting

in death or serious injury.

●

Do not strike or apply significant levels

of force to the area of the SRS airbag

components or the front doors. Doing

so can cause the SRS airbags to mal-

function.

●

Do not touch any of the component

parts immediately after the SRS

airbags have deployed (inflated) as

they may be hot.

●

If breathing becomes difficult after the

SRS airbags have deployed, open a

door or window to allow fresh air in, or

leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so.

Wash off any residue as soon as possi-

ble to prevent skin irritation.

●

If the areas where the SRS airbags are

stored, such as the steering wheel pad

and front and rear pillar garnishes, are

damaged or cracked, have them

replaced by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

■

Modification and disposal of SRS

airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or per-

form any of the following modifications

without consulting any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer. The SRS airbags

may malfunction or deploy (inflate) acci-

dentally, causing death or serious injury.

●

Installation, removal, disassembly and

repair of the SRS airbags

●

Repairs, modifications, removal or

replacement of the steering wheel,

instrument panel, dashboard, seats or

seat upholstery, front, side and rear pil-

lars, roof side rails, front door panels,

front door trims or front door speakers

●

Modifications to the front door panel

(such as making a hole in it)

●

Repairs or modifications of the front

fender, front bumper, or side of the

occupant compartment

●

Installation of a grille guard (bull bars,

kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or

winches

●

Modifications to the vehicle’s suspen-

sion system

●

Installation of electronic devices such

as mobile two-way radios (RF-trans-

mitter) and CD players

1-1. For safe use

Sensors

Hood

Lifters

■

Pop Up Hood precautions

●

Before scrapping your vehicle, make sure

to contact any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer.

●

The Pop Up Hood system cannot be

reused once it has operated. Have it

replaced by any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer.

■

PCS-linked Pop Up Hood operation

control (Vehicles with Lexus Safety Sys-

tem + A or Lexus Safety System +

)

If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) deter-

mines that the possibility of a collision with a

pedestrian or bicyclist is high, the Pop Up

Hood will be prepared to operate.

: For countries/areas specified as Region

A (P.286)

■

Pop Up Hood operational conditions

The Pop Up Hood will operate when the

vehicle detects an impact such as the fol-

lowing:

●

The front bumper detects a frontal impact

equivalent to or greater than that of a

pedestrian while the vehicle being driven

within the operational speed range of

approximately 25 to 55 km/h (16 to 34

mph). (The system is operated by an

impact of threshold level or greater, even

in the case of a minor collision that may

not leave a trace on the front bumper.

Also, depending on the impact condi-

tions or vehicle speed, the system may

operate by a collision with a light or small

object or a small animal.)

●

In other situations, such as the following

the system may operate when an impact

is applied to the lower part of the vehicle

or front bumper:

• Colliding with a curb

• Falling into a deep hole

•Landing hard

• Hitting the slope of a parking lot, an

undulating road, a protruding object or

falling object

■

Conditions under which the Pop Up

Hood may not operate properly

●

If a pedestrian collides with the right or

left corner of the front bumper or the side

of the vehicle. As such impacts may be

difficult to detect, the system may not

operate.

Pop Up Hood

In the event of a frontal collision

with a body, such as a pedestrian,

the Pop Up Hood system raises the

hood to reduce the possibility of a

serious impact to the pedestrian’s

head area by adding clearance to

the engine compartment.

When the sensors located at the

back of the front bumper detect a

frontal impact with a body, such as a

pedestrian, which meets or

exceeds the threshold level while

the vehicle is being driven within

the operational speed range, the

system operates.

System components

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

●

If the vehicle speed is not detected cor-

rectly, such as if the vehicle is sliding side-

ways, the system may not operate

properly.

■

Conditions under which the Pop Up

Hood will not operate

The Pop Up Hood will not operate in the

following situations:

●

Colliding with a lying person

●

A frontal impact applied to the front

bumper while driving at speeds outside

of the operational speed range

●

A side impact or rear impact

●

A vehicle rollover (In some accident situ-

ations, the Pop Up Hood may operate.)

WARNING

■

When the Pop Up Hood is operated

●

Do not pull the hood lock release lever.

Doing so after the Pop Up Hood has

operated will further raise the hood

and may cause an injury. Do not drive

with the hood raised, as doing so may

block the driver’s vision, possibly caus-

ing an accident.

●

Do not forcibly push down the hood.

As the popped up hood cannot be

lowered by hand, doing so may deform

the hood or cause an injury.

●

If the Pop Up Hood has operated, have

it replaced by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer. If the Pop Up

Hood has operated, stop the vehicle in

a safe place and contact any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

Do not touch the lifters immediately

after the Pop Up Hood has operated,

as the lifters may be hot and burn you.

NOTICE

■

Pop Up Hood precautions

●

Make sure to close the hood before

driving, as the system may not operate

properly if the hood is not fully closed.

●

Make sure that all 4 tires are of the

specified size and inflated to the speci-

fied tire pressure. If tires of a different

size are used, the system may not

operate properly.

●

If something has hit the area around

the front bumper, the sensors may be

damaged even if the Pop Up Hood has

not operated. Have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

●

Do not remove or repair the parts or

wiring of the Pop Up Hood, as doing

so may cause accidental operation or

prevent the system from operating

properly. If repair or replacement is

necessary, contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

Do not remove such components as

the front bumper, hood or suspension,

or replace them with non-genuine

parts, as doing so may prevent the sys-

tem from operating properly.

●

Do not install anything to the front

bumper or hood, as doing so may pre-

vent the sensors from detecting an

impact correctly and prevent the sys-

tem from operating properly.

●

Do not close the hood with force or

apply load to the lifters, as doing so

may damage the lifters and prevent the

system from operating properly.

●

Do not modify the suspension, as

changes made to the vehicle height

may prevent the system from operat-

ing properly.

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human

body is included in exhaust gases if

inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases

enter the vehicle and may lead to an

accident caused by light-headedness, or

may lead to death or a serious health

hazard.

■

Important points while driving

●

Keep the trunk lid closed.

●

If you smell exhaust gases in the vehi-

cle even when the trunk lid is closed,

open the windows and have the vehi-

cle inspected at any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer as soon as pos-

sible.

■

When parking

●

If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated

area or a closed area, such as a

garage, stop the engine.

●

Do not leave the vehicle with the

engine on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided,

park the vehicle in an open space and

ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter

the vehicle interior.

●

Do not leave the engine running in an

area with snow build-up, or where it is

snowing. If snowbanks build up around

the vehicle while the engine is running,

exhaust gases may collect and enter

the vehicle.

■

Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked

periodically. If there is a hole or crack

caused by corrosion, damage to a joint

or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to

have the vehicle inspected and repaired

by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

1-2.Child safety

“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indica-

tor

“PASSENGER AIR BAG” and “ON” indi-

cator light turns on when the airbag system

is on, and about after 60 seconds they go

off. (only when the engine switch is in

IGNITION ON mode)

Airbag manual on-off switch

Insert the mechanical key into the cyl-

inder and rotate to the “OFF” position.

The “OFF” indicator light turns on (only

when the engine switch is in IGNITION

ON mode).

■

“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator

information

If any of the following problems occur, it is

possible that there is a malfunction in the

system. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

The “OFF” indicator does not illuminate

when the airbag manual on-off switch is

set to “OFF”.

●

The indicator light does not change when

the airbag manual on-off switch is

switched to “ON” or “OFF”.

Airbag manual on-off system

This system deactivates the front

passenger airbag and front passen-

ger knee airbag.

Only deactivate the airbags when

using a child restraint system on the

front passenger seat.

System components

Deactivating the front seat pas-

senger airbag and front passen-

ger knee airbag

1-2. Child safety

WARNING

■

When installing a child restraint sys-

tem

For safety reasons, always install a child

restraint system in a rear seat. In the

event that the rear seat cannot be used,

the front seat can be used as long as the

airbag manual on-off system is set to

“OFF”.

If the airbag manual on-off system is left

on, the strong impact of the airbag

deployment (inflation) may cause serious

injury or even death.

■

When a child restraint system is not

installed on the front passenger seat

Ensure that the airbag manual on-off sys-

tem is set to “ON”.

If it is left off, the airbag may not deploy in

the event of an accident, which may

result in serious injury or even death.

Riding with children

Observe the following precautions

when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appro-

priate for the child, until the child

becomes large enough to properly

wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

It is recommended that children

sit in the rear seats to avoid acci-

dental contact with the shift lever,

wiper switch etc.

Use the rear door child-protector

lock or the window lock switch to

avoid children opening the door

while driving or operating the

power window accidentally.

(P.118, 200)

Do not let small children operate

equipment which may catch or

pinch body parts, such as the

power window, hood, trunk, seats

etc.

WARNING

■

When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle, and never allow children to have

or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle

or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is

also a danger that children may injure

themselves by playing with the windows,

the moon roof, or other features of the

vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or

extremely cold temperatures inside the

vehicle can be fatal to children.

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

Points to remember: P.43

When using a child restraint system:

P.44

Child restraint system compatibility for

each seating position: P.48

Child restraint system installation

method: P.54

• Fixed with a seat belt: P.55

• Fixed with an ISOFIX lower anchor-

age: P.57

• Using a top tether anchorage: P.58

Prioritize and observe the warn-

ings, as well as the laws and regula-

tions for child restraint systems.

Use a child restraint system until the

child becomes large enough to

properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

Choose a child restraint system

appropriate to the age and size of

the child.

Note that not all child restraint sys-

tems can fit in all vehicles.

Before using or purchasing a child

restraint system, check the compati-

bility of the child restraint system

with seat positions. (P.48)

Child restraint systems

Before installing a child restraint

system in the vehicle, there are pre-

cautions that need to be observed,

different types of child restraint sys-

tems, as well as installation meth-

ods, etc., written in this manual.

Use a child restraint system when

riding with a small child that can-

not properly use a seat belt. For

the child’s safety, install the child

restraint system to a rear seat. Be

sure to follow the installation

method that is in the operation

manual enclosed with the

restraint system.

The use of a Lexus genuine child

restraint system is recom-

mended, as it is safer to use in this

vehicle. Lexus genuine child

restraint systems are made specif-

ically for Lexus vehicles. They can

be purchased at a Lexus dealer.

Table of contents

Points to remember

WARNING

■

When a child is riding

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●

For effective protection in automobile

accidents and sudden stops, a child

must be properly restrained, using a

seat belt or child restraint system

which is correctly installed. For installa-

tion details, refer to the operation man-

ual enclosed with the child restraint

system. General installation instruction

is provided in this manual.

●

Lexus strongly urges the use of a

proper child restraint system that con-

forms to the weight and size of the

child, installed on the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, the

child is safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front seat.

1-2. Child safety

■

When installing a child restraint

system to a front passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install child

restraint systems to a rear seats. When

installing child restraint system to a

front passenger seat is unavoidable,

adjust the seat as follows and install the

child restraint system:

Move the front seat fully rearward.

Adjust the seatback angle to the

most upright position.

When installing a forward-facing child

seat, if there is a gap between the child seat

and the seatback, adjust the seatback

angle until good contact is achieved.

Adjust the front of the seat cushion

to the lowest position.

Adjust the seat height to the upper-

most position.

Adjust the lumbar support to the

lowest position.

Adjust the shoulder bolster to the

lowest position (if equipped).

Adjust the pelvic support to the low-

est position.

Adjust the seatback side bolster to

the widest position (if equipped).

Adjust the seat cushion side bolster

to the lowest position (if equipped).

Adjust the hip support to the lowest

position (if equipped).

If the head restraint interferes with

WARNING

●

Holding a child in your or someone

else’s arms is not a substitute for a child

restraint system. In an accident, the

child can be crushed against the wind-

shield or between the holder and the

interior of the vehicle.

■

Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not prop-

erly fixed in place, the child or other pas-

sengers may be seriously injured or even

killed in the event of sudden braking, sud-

den swerving, or an accident.

●

If the vehicle were to receive a strong

impact from an accident, etc., it is pos-

sible that the child restraint system has

damage that is not readily visible. In

such cases, do not reuse the restraint

system.

●

Depending on the child restraint sys-

tem, installation may be difficult or

impossible. In those cases, check

whether the child restraint system is

suitable for installment in the vehicle.

(



P.48) Be sure to install and

observe the usage rules after carefully

reading the child restraint system fixing

method in this manual, as well as the

operation manual enclosed with the

child restraint system.

●

Keep the child restraint system prop-

erly secured on the seat even if it is not

in use. Do not store the child restraint

system unsecured in the passenger

compartment.

●

If it is necessary to detach the child

restraint system, remove it from the

vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.

When using a child restraint sys-

tem

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

the child restraint system installa-

tion and the head restraint can be

removed, remove the head restraint.

Otherwise, put the head restraint in

the upper most position.

■

When installing a child restraint

system to a power rear seat (if

equipped)

When using a child restraint system in

an outer rear seat, adjust the seat as

follows and install the child restraint

system:

Adjust the seat cushion to the fully

rearward position.

Adjust the upper seatback to the

rearmost position.

Adjust the front of the seat cushion

to the lowest position.

Adjust the head restraint to the low-

est and rearmost position.

Adjust the shoulder bolster to the

lowest position.

Adjust the lumbar support to the

lowest position.

Adjust the pelvic support to the low-

est position.

Disable the automatic rear seat

operation. (P.175)

For the rear seat with an ottoman (if

equipped): Adjust the seatback to

the most upright position and otto-

man (footrest) to the stowed posi-

tion.

WARNING

■

When using a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

1-2. Child safety

WARNING

●

Never use a rear-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat

when the airbag manual on-off switch

is on. (P.41)

The force of the rapid inflation of the

front passenger airbag can cause

death or serious injury to children in

the event of an accident.

●

There is a label(s) on the passenger

side sun visor, indicating it is forbidden

to attach a rear-facing child restraint

system to the front passenger seat.

Details of the label(s) are shown in the

illustration below.

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

WARNING

●

Only put a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front seat when

unavoidable. When installing a for-

ward-facing child restraint on the front

passenger seat, move the seat as far

back as possible. Failing to do so may

result in death or serious injury if the

airbags deploy (inflate).

●

Do not allow the child to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the seat,

front or rear pillars, or roof side rails

from which the SRS side airbags or

SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even

if the child is seated in the child

restraint system. It is dangerous if the

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

inflate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

●

When a junior seat is installed, always

ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the center of the child’s

shoulder. The belt should be kept away

from the child’s neck, but not so that it

could fall off the child’s shoulder.

●

Use child restraint system suitable to

the age and size of the child and install

it to the rear seat.

1-2. Child safety

■

Child restraint system compatibil-

ity for each seating position

Compatibility of each seating position

with child restraint systems (P.49)

displays the type of child restraint sys-

tems that can be used and possible

seating positions for installation using

symbols. Also, the recommended child

restraint system that is suitable for your

child can be selected.

Otherwise, check [Recommended

child restraint systems and Compatibil-

ity table] for recommended child

restraint systems. (P.52)

Check the selected child restraint sys-

tem together with the following

[Before confirming the compatibility of

each seating position with child

restraint systems].

■

Before confirming the compatibil-

ity of each seating position with

child restraint systems

1Checking the child restraint system

standards.

Use a child restraint system that

conforms to UN(ECE) R44

UN(ECE) R129

*1, 2

The following approval mark is dis-

played on child restraint systems

which are conformed.

Check for an approval mark

attached to the child restraint sys-

tem.

Example of the displayed regulation Num-

ber

UN(ECE) R44 approval mark

The weight range of the child who is

applicable for an UN(ECE) R44

approval mark is indicated.

UN(ECE) R129 approval mark

The height range of the child who is

applicable as well as available

weights for an UN(ECE) R129

approval mark is indicated.

WARNING

●

If the driver’s seat interferes with the

child restraint system and prevents it

from being attached correctly, attach

the child restraint system to the

right-hand rear seat. (P.52)

Child restraint system compati-

bility for each seating position

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

2Checking the category of the child

restraint system.

Check the approval mark of the

child restraint system for which of

the following categories the child

restraint system is suitable.

Also, if there are any uncertainties,

check the user’s guide included

with the child restraint system or

contact the retailer of the child

restraint system.

• “universal”

•“semi-universal”

•“restricted”

• “vehicle specific”

: UN(ECE) R44 and UN(ECE) R129

are U.N. regulations for child restraint

systems.

: The child restraint systems mentioned in

the table may not be available outside of

the EU area.

: The displayed mark may differ depend-

ing on the product.

■

Compatibility of each seating posi-

tion with child restraint systems

*1, 2, 3

*2, 3

Suitable for “universal” category

child restraint system fixed with

the seat belt.

Suitable for child restraint systems

given on recommended child

restraint systems and compatibility

table (P.52)

Suitable for i-Size and ISOFIX

child restraint system.

Includes a top tether anchorage

point.

1-2. Child safety

: Move the front seat fully rearward. If the

passenger seat height can be adjusted,

move it to the upper most position.

: Adjust the seatback angle to the most

upright position. When installing a for-

ward-facing child seat, if there is a gap

between the child seat and the

seatback, adjust the seatback angle

until good contact is achieved.

: If the head restraint interferes with your

child restraint system, and the head

restraint can be removed, remove the

head restraint.

Otherwise, put the head restraint in the

upper most position.

: Use only a front-facing child restraint

system when the airbag manual on-off

switch is on.

■

Detail information for CRS installation

Not suitable for child restraint sys-

tem.

Never use a rear-facing child

restraint system on the front pas-

senger seat when the airbag man-

ual on-off switch is on.

Seating position

Seat position number Airbag manual on-off

switch

ON OFF

Seating position suitable for uni-

versal belted (yes/no)

yes

Forward

facing only

yes yes yes

i-Size seating position (yes/no) no no yes yes

Seating position suitable for lateral

fixture (L1/L2/no) no no no no

Suitable rearward facing fixture

(R1/R2X/R2/R3/no) no no R1, R2X, R2,

R1, R2X, R2,

Suitable forward facing fixture

(F2X/F2/F3/no) no no F2X, F2, F3 F2X, F2, F3

Suitable junior seat fixture

(B2/B3/no) no no B2, B3 B2, B3

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

ISOFIX child restraint systems are divided into different “fixture”. The child

restraint system can be used in the seating positions for “fixture” mentioned in the

table above. For kind of “fixture” relation, confirm the following table.

If your child restraint system has no kind of “fixture” (or if you cannot find informa-

tion in the table below), please refer to the child restraint system “vehicle list” for

compatibility information or ask the retailer of your child seat.

Fixture Description

F3 Full-height, forward-facing child restraint systems

F2 Reduced-height forward-facing child restraint systems

F2X Reduced-height forward-facing child restraint systems

R3 Full-size, rearward-facing child restraint systems

R2 Reduced-size, rearward-facing child restraint systems

R2X Reduced-size, rearward-facing child restraint systems

R1 Rearward-facing infant seat

L1 Left lateral-facing (carrycot) infant seat

L2 Right lateral-facing (carrycot) infant seat

B2 Junior seat

B3 Junior seat

1-2. Child safety

■

Recommended child restraint systems and Compatibility table



Vehicles without power rear seat

Mass groups Recommended Child

Restraint System

Seating position

Airbag manual

on-off switch

ON OFF

0, 0+

Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)

LEXUS G0+, BABY SAFE

PLUS (yes/no) no yes yes yes

LEXUS G0+ BABY SAFE

PLUS with SEAT BELT FIX-

ATION, BASE PLATFORM

(yes/no)

no yes no no

LEXUS MINI (yes/no) no yes yes yes

LEXUS MINI with

ISO-BASE (yes/no) no no yes yes

LEXUS MIDI (yes/no) no no yes yes

9 to 18 kg (20 to

39 lb.)

LEXUS DUO PLUS

(yes/no)

yes

Belt fix

only

yes

Belt fix

only

yes yes

LEXUS MIDI (yes/no) no no yes yes

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security



Vehicles with power rear seat

The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be available outside the

EU area.

When securing some types of child

restraint systems in rear seat, it may not

be possible to properly use the seat

belts in positions next to the child

restraint without interfering with it or

affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be

sure your seat belt fits snugly across

your shoulder and low on your hips. If it

does not, or if it interferes with the child

restraint, move to a different position.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

When installing a child restraint in

the rear seats, adjust the front seat

so that it does not interfere with the

child or child restraint system.

When installing a child seat with

support base, if the child seat inter-

feres with the seatback when latch-

ing it into the support base, adjust

the seatback rearward until there is

no interference.

If the seat belt shoulder anchor is

Mass groups Recommended Child

Restraint System

Seating position

Airbag manual

on-off switch

ON OFF

0, 0+

Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)

LEXUS G0+, BABY SAFE

PLUS (yes/no) no yes yes yes

LEXUS G0+ BABY SAFE

PLUS with SEAT BELT FIX-

ATION, BASE PLATFORM

(yes/no)

no yes yes yes

LEXUS MINI (yes/no) no yes yes yes

LEXUS MINI with

ISO-BASE (yes/no) no no yes yes

LEXUS MIDI (yes/no) no no yes yes

9 to 18 kg (20 to

39 lb.)

LEXUS DUO PLUS

(yes/no)

yes

Belt fix

only

yes

Belt fix

only

yes yes

LEXUS MIDI (yes/no) no no yes yes

1-2. Child safety

ahead of the child seat belt guide,

move the seat cushion forward.

When installing a junior seat, if the

child in your child restraint system is

in a very upright position, adjust the

seatback angle to the most comfort-

able position. And if the seat belt

shoulder anchor is ahead of the

child seat belt guide, move the seat

cushion forward.

Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about

the installation of the child restraint system.

Child restraint system installation method

Installation method Page

Seat belt attachment P.55

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

■

Installing child restraint system

using a seat belt

Install the child restraint system in

accordance to the operation manual

enclosed with the child restraint sys-

tem.

If the child restraint system on hand is

not within the “universal” category (or

the necessary information is not in the

table), refer to the “Vehicle List” pro-

vided by the child restraint system

maker for various possible installation

positions, or check the compatibility

after asking the retailer of the child

seat. (P.48, 49)

1Adjust the seat



When using the front passenger

seat

If installing the child restraint system to the

front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer

to P.44for the front passenger seat adjust-

ment.



When using the power rear seat (if

equipped)

If there is a gap between the child seat and

the seatback, adjust the seatback angle

until good contact is achieved. (P.45)

2Run the seat belt through the child

restraint system and insert the plate

into the buckle. Make sure that the

belt is not twisted. Securely fix the

seat belt to the child restraint sys-

tem in accordance to the directions

ISOFIX lower anchorage

attachment P.57

Top tether anchorage

attachment P.58

Installation method Page

Child restraint system fixed with

a seat belt

1-2. Child safety

enclosed with the child restraint

system.

3If your child restraint system is not

equipped with a lock-off (a seat belt

locking feature), secure the child

restraint system using a locking clip.

4After installing the child restraint

system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

(P.56)

■

Removing a child restraint system

installed with a seat belt

Press the buckle release button and

fully retract the seat belt.

When releasing the buckle, the child

restraint system may spring up due to the

rebound of the seat cushion. Release the

buckle while holding down the child

restraint system.

Since the seat belt automatically reels itself,

slowly return it to the stowing position.

■

When installing a child restraint system

You may need a locking clip to install the

child restraint system. Follow the instruc-

tions provided by the manufacturer of the

system. If your child restraint system does

not provide a locking clip, you can purchase

the following item from any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer: Locking clip for

child restraint system

(Part No. 73119-22010)

WARNING

■

When installing a child restraint sys-

tem

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may

lead to choking or other serious inju-

ries that could result in death. If this

occurs and the buckle cannot be

unfastened, scissors should be used to

cut the belt.

●

Ensure that the belt and plate are

securely locked and the seat belt is not

twisted.

●

Shake the child restraint system left

and right, and forward and backward

to ensure that it has been securely

installed.

●

After securing a child restraint system,

never adjust the seat.

●

When a junior seat is installed, always

ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the center of the child’s

shoulder. The belt should be kept away

from the child’s neck, but not so that it

could fall off the child’s shoulder.

●

Follow all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

■

ISOFIX lower anchorages

(ISOFIX child restraint system)

Lower anchorages are provided for the

outboard rear seats. (Tags displaying

the location of the anchorages are

attached to the seats.)

■

Installation with ISOFIX lower

anchorage (ISOFIX child restraint

system)

Install the child restraint system in

accordance to the operation manual

enclosed with the child restraint sys-

tem.

If the child restraint system on hand is

not within the “universal” category (or

the necessary information is not in the

table), refer to the “Vehicle List” pro-

vided by the child restraint system

maker for various possible installation

positions, or check the compatibility

after asking the retailer of the child

seat. (P.48, 49)

1Vehicles with power rear seat:

Adjust the seat

If there is a gap between the child seat and

the seatback, adjust the seatback angle

until good contact is achieved. (P.45)

2Open the cover.

3Insert the tab into the slit of

the cover.

The cover will be held open.

4Check the positions of the exclu-

sive fixing bars, and install the child

restraint system to the seat.

The bars are installed in the clearance

Child restraint system fixed with

an ISOFIX lower anchorage

1-2. Child safety

between the seat cushion and seatback.

5After installing the child restraint

system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

(P.56)

■

Top tether anchorages

Top tether anchorages are provided

for the outboard rear seats.

Use top tether anchorages when fixing

the top strap.

Top tether anchorages

Top strap

■

Fixing the top strap to the top

tether anchorages

Install the child restraint system in

accordance to the operation manual

enclosed with the child restraint sys-

tem.

Open the top tether anchorages cover,

latch the hook onto the top tether

anchorage and tighten the top strap.

Make sure the top strap is securely latched.

(P.56)

WARNING

■

When installing a child restraint sys-

tem

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●

After securing a child restraint system,

never adjust the seat.

●

When using the lower anchorages, be

sure that there are no foreign objects

around the anchorages and that the

seat belt is not caught behind the child

restraint system.

●

Follow all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

Using a top tether anchorage

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

Hook

Top strap

WARNING

■

When installing a child restraint sys-

tem

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●

Firmly attach the top strap and make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

●

Do not attach the top strap to anything

other than the top tether anchorages.

●

After securing a child restraint system,

never adjust the seat.

●

Follow all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

NOTICE

■

Top tether anchorages

When not in use, make certain to close

the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be

damaged.

1-3. Emergency assistance

1-3.Emergency assist ance

: If equipped

: Operates within regions offering emer-

gency notification services. Ask any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details.

: The system name differs depending on

the country.

Microphone

“SOS” button

Indicator lights

: This button is intended for communica-

tion with the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK

system operator.

Other SOS buttons available in other

systems of a motor vehicle do not relate

to the device and are not intended for

communication with the

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK system opera-

tor.

■

Automatic Emergency Calls

If any airbag deploys, the system is

designed to automatically call the

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control

center.

The answering operator

receives the vehicle’s location, the time

of the incident and the vehicle VIN,

and attempts to speak with the vehicle

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK*1, 2, 3

The Emergency Call system is a

device installed on a vehicle to

determine its location and move-

ment direction (using GLONASS

[Global Navigation Satellite Sys-

tem] and GPS [Global Positioning

System] signals), and ensure the

generation and transmission of

vehicle information (in a nonadjust-

able form) in case of traffic acci-

dents or other incidents on motor

roads in the countries offering

emergency notification services. In

addition, it ensures two-way voice

communication between the vehi-

cle and an ERA-GLONASS/EVAK

system operator through cellular

networks (GSM).

Automatic Emergency Calls (via

Automatic Collision Notification)

and manual Emergency Calls (by

pressing the “SOS” button) can be

made to the

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control

center.

This service is mandatory accord-

ing to the technical regulations of

the Customs Union.

System components

Emergency Notification Ser-

vices

1-3. Emergency assistance

For safety and security

occupants to assess the situation. If the

occupants are unable to communicate,

the operator automatically treats the

call as an emergency and contacts the

nearest emergency services provider

(112 system etc.) to describe the situa-

tion and request that assistance be sent

to the location.

: In some cases, the call cannot be made.

(P.62)

■

Manual Emergency Calls

In the event of an emergency, press the

“SOS” button to call the

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control

center.

The answering operator will

determine your vehicle’s location,

assess the situation, and dispatch the

necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the “SOS” button,

tell the operator that you are not experi-

encing an emergency.

: In some cases, the call cannot be made.

(P.62)

When the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode, the red indica-

tor light will illuminate for 10 seconds

and then the green indicator light will

illuminate, indicating that the system is

enabled. The indicator lights indicate

the following:

If the green indicator light illumi-

nates and stays on, the system is

enabled.

If the green indicator light flashes

twice per second, an automatic or

manual Emergency Call is being

made.

If no indicator lights illuminate, the

system is not enabled.

If the red indicator light illuminates

at any time other than immediately

after the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode, the system

may be malfunctioning or the

backup battery may be depleted.

If the red indicator light blinks for

approximately 30 seconds during

an Emergency Call, the call has

been disconnected or the cellular

network signal is weak.

The service life of the backup battery does

not exceed 3 years.

A test mode is provided for to check

the performance of the Emergency

Call system. To test the device, contact

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Free/Open Source Software Informa-

tion

This product contains Free/Open Source

Software (FOSS). The license information

and/or the source code of such FOSS can

be found at the following URL.

http://www.opensourceautomotive.com/

dcm/lexus/

Indicator lights

Device test mode

1-3. Emergency assistance

WARNING

■

When the Emergency Call may not

be made

●

It may not be possible to make Emer-

gency Calls in any of the following situ-

ations. In such cases, report to

emergency services provider (112 sys-

tem etc.) by other means such as

nearby public phones.

• Even when the vehicle is in the cellular

phone service area, it may be difficult

to connect to the

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control

center if the reception is poor or the

line is busy. In such cases, even though

the system attempts to connect to the

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control

center, you may not be able to connect

to the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK con-

trol center to make Emergency Calls

and contact emergency services.

• When the vehicle is out of the cellular

phone service area, the Emergency

Calls cannot be made.

• When any related equipment (such as

the “SOS” button panel, indicator

lights, microphone, speaker, DCM,

antenna, or any wires connecting the

equipment) is malfunctioning, dam-

aged or broken, the Emergency Call

cannot be made.

• During an Emergency Call, the system

makes repeated attempts to connect

to the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK con-

trol center. However, if it cannot con-

nect to the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK

control center due to poor radio wave

reception, the system may not be able

to connect to the cellular network and

the call may finish without connecting.

The red indicator light will blink for

approximately 30 seconds to indicate

this disconnection.

• This device may not function if a shock

is applied to it.

●

If the battery’s voltage decreases or

there is a disconnection, the system

may not be able to connect to the

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control

center.

■

When the Emergency Call system is

replaced with a new one

The Emergency Call system should be

registered. Contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

For your safety

●

Please drive safely.

The function of this system is to assist

you in making the Emergency Call in

case of accidents such as traffic acci-

dents or sudden medical emergencies,

and it does not protect the driver or

passengers in any way. Please drive

safely and fasten your seatbelts at all

times for your safety.

●

In case of an emergency, make lives

the top priority.

●

If you smell anything burning or other

unusual smells, leave the vehicle and

evacuate to a safe area immediately.

●

Since the system detects shocks, the

automatic reporting may not always

occur synchronized with the operation

of the airbag system. (If the vehicle is

struck from behind, etc.)

●

For safety, do not make the Emergency

Call while driving.

Making calls during driving may cause

mishandling of the steering wheel,

which may lead to unexpected acci-

dents.

Stop the vehicle and confirm the safety

of your surroundings before making

the Emergency Call.

●

When changing fuses, please use the

specified fuses. Using other fuses may

cause ignition or smoke in the circuit

and lead to a fire.

1-3. Emergency assistance

For safety and security

WARNING

●

Using the system while there is smoke

or an unusual smell may cause a fire.

Stop using the system immediately and

consult any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage

Do not pour any liquids onto the “SOS”

button panel, etc. and do not impact it.

■

If the “SOS” button panel, speaker or

microphone malfunctions during an

Emergency Call or manual mainte-

nance check

It may not be possible to make Emer-

gency Calls, confirm the system status, or

communicate with the

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control center

operator. If any of the above equipment is

damaged, please consult any authorized

Lexus retailer, Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

1-4. Theft deterrent system

1-4.Theft deterrent system

The indicator light flashes after the

engine switch has been turned off to

indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after

the engine switch has been turned to

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode to indicate that the system has

been canceled.

■

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type

engine immobilizer system.

■

Conditions that may cause the system to

malfunction

●

If the grip portion of the key is in contact

with a metallic object

●

If the key is in close proximity to or touch-

ing a key to the security system (key with

a built-in transponder chip) of another

vehicle

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle’s keys have built-in

transponder chips that prevent the

engine from starting if a key has not

been previously registered in the

vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help pre-

vent vehicle theft but does not

guarantee absolute security

against all vehicle thefts.

Operating the system

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

■

Certification for the engine immobilizer system

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

NOTICE

■

To ensure the system operates cor-

rectly

Do not modify or remove the system. If

modified or removed, the proper opera-

tion of the system cannot be guaranteed.

1-4. Theft deterrent system

■

Setting

Turn the engine switch off, have all the

passengers exit the vehicle and ensure

that all the doors are closed.

Using the entry function: Touch the

sensor area on the outside door handle

twice within 5 seconds.

Using the wireless remote control:

Press twice within 5 seconds.

■

Canceling

Using the entry function: Hold the out-

side door handle, press the power

trunk lid switch or move your foot

under the center of the rear bumper

(vehicles with a Hands Free Power

Trunk Lid).

Using the wireless remote control:

Press .

Double locking system

Unauthorized access to the vehicle

is prevented by disabling the door

unlocking function from both the

interior and exterior of the vehicle.

Vehicles employing this system

have labels on the window glass of

both front doors.

Setting/canceling the double

locking system

WARNING

■

Double locking system precaution

Never activate the double locking sys-

tem when there are people in the vehicle

because all the doors cannot be opened

from inside the vehicle.

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

■

Items to check before locking the

vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of

the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure

of the following:

Nobody is in the vehicle.

The windows and moon roof are

closed before the alarm is set.

No valuables or other personal

items are left in the vehicle.

■

Setting

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and

lock all the doors using the entry func-

tion or wireless remote control. The

system will be set automatically after

30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on

to flashing when the system is set.

■

Deactivating or stopping

Do one of the following to deactivate

or stop the alarms:

Unlock the doors or open the trunk

using the entry function or wireless

remote control.

Starting the engine. (The alarm will

be deactivated or stopped after a

few seconds.)

■

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type

alarm system.

■

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following

situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm

system.)

●

The doors are unlocked using the

mechanical key.

Alarm

The alarm uses light and sound to

give an alert when an intrusion is

detected.

The alarm is triggered in the follow-

ing situations when the alarm is set:

A locked door or trunk is

unlocked or opened in any way

other than using the entry func-

tion or wireless remote control.

(The doors will lock again auto-

matically.)

The hood is opened.

The intrusion sensor detects

something moving inside the

vehicle. (Example: an intruder

breaks a window and gets into the

vehicle.)

The tilt sensor detects a change of

vehicle inclination.

Setting/deactivating/stopping

the alarm system

1-4. Theft deterrent system

●

The trunk is opened using the mechanical

key.

●

A person inside the vehicle opens a door,

the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle.

●

The battery is recharged or replaced

when the vehicle is locked. (P.527)

■

Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the sit-

uation, the door may automatically lock to

prevent improper entry into the vehicle:

●

When a person remaining in the vehicle

unlocks the door and the alarm is acti-

vated.

●

While the alarm is activated, a person

remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.

■

The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor

detection

The intrusion sensor detects intrud-

ers or movement in the vehicle.

The tilt sensor detects changes in

vehicle inclination, such as when the

vehicle is towed away.

This system is designed to deter and

prevent vehicle theft but does not

guarantee absolute security against all

intrusions.

■

Setting the intrusion sensor and tilt

sensor

The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor will

be set automatically when the alarm is

set. (P.77)

■

Canceling the intrusion sensor and

tilt sensor

If you are leaving pets or other moving

things inside the vehicle, make sure to

disable the intrusion sensor and tilt

sensor before setting the alarm, as they

will respond to movement inside the

vehicle.

1Turn the engine switch off.

NOTICE

■

To ensure the system operates cor-

rectly

Do not modify or remove the system. If

modified or removed, the proper opera-

tion of the system cannot be guaranteed.

The intrusion sensor and tilt sen-

sor detection

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

2Press the intrusion sensor and tilt

sensor cancel switch.

Press the switch again to re-enable the

intrusion sensor and tilt sensor.

Each time the intrusion sensor and tilt sen-

sor are canceled/set, a message will be

shown on the multi-information display.

■

Canceling and automatic re-enabling of

the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor

●

The alarm will still be set even when the

intrusion sensor and tilt sensor are

canceled.

●

After the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor

are canceled, pressing the engine switch

or unlocking the doors using the entry

function or wireless remote control will

re-enable the intrusion sensor and tilt

sensor.

●

The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor will

automatically be re-enabled when the

alarm system is deactivated.

■

Intrusion sensor detection considera-

tions

The sensor may trigger the alarm in the fol-

lowing situations:

●

People or pets are in the vehicle.

●

A window or moon roof is open.

In this case, the sensor may detect the fol-

lowing:

• Wind or the movement of objects such as

leaves and insects inside the vehicle

• Ultrasonic waves emitted from devices

such as the intrusion sensors of other

vehicles

• The movement of people outside the

vehicle

●

Small insects such as moths or flies are in

the vehicle.

●

Unstable items, such as dangling acces-

sories or clothes hanging on the coat

hooks, are in the vehicle.

●

The vehicle is parked in a place where

extreme vibrations or noises occur, such

as in a parking garage.

●

Ice or snow is removed from the vehicle,

causing the vehicle to receive repeated

impacts or vibrations.

1-4. Theft deterrent system

●

The vehicle is inside an automatic or

high-pressure car wash.

●

The vehicle experiences impacts, such as

hail, lightning strikes, and other kinds of

repeated impacts or vibrations.

■

Tilt sensor detection considerations

The sensor may trigger the alarm in the fol-

lowing situations:

●

The vehicle is transported by a ferry,

trailer, train, etc.

●

The vehicle is parked in a parking garage.

●

The vehicle is inside a car wash that

moves the vehicle.

●

Any of the tires loses air pressure.

●

The vehicle is jacked up.

●

An earthquake occurs or the road caves

in.

●

Cargo is loaded onto or unloaded from

the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

■

To ensure the intrusion sensor func-

tion correctly

●

To ensure that the sensors operate

properly, do not touch or cover them.

●

Do not spray air fresheners or other

products directly into the sensor holes.

●

Installing accessories other than genu-

ine Lexus parts or leaving objects

between the driver’s seat and front

passenger’s seat may reduce the

detection performance.

Vehicle status information and indicators

Vehicle status information

and indicators

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

........................................................... 82

Gauges and meters (except F

SPORT models) ........................ 86

Gauges and meters (F SPORT

models).......................................... 89

Multi-information display.......... 93

Head-up display .......................... 101

Fuel consumption information

.........................................................105

2-1. Instrument cluster

2-1.Instrument cluster

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights

and indicators illuminated.



Except F SPORT models



F SPORT models

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and

outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various

systems.

Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instrument cluster

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Warning lights inform the driver of mal-

functions in the indicated vehicle’s sys-

tems.

: These lights come on when the engine

switch is turned to IGNITION ON

mode to indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will turn off after

the engine is started, or after a few sec-

onds. There may be a malfunction in a

system if the lights do not come on, or

turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-

Warning lights

(red)

Brake system warning light

(P.507)

(yellow)

Brake system warning light

(P.507)

High coolant temperature

warning light

(P.507)

Charging system warning

light

(P.508)

Low engine oil pressure warn-

ing light

(P.508)

Malfunction indicator lamp

(P.508)

SRS warning light

(P.508)

Pop Up Hood warning light

(P.509)

ABS warning light

(P.509)

Inappropriate pedal operation

warning light

(P.509)

(red)

Electric power steering system

warning light

(P.510)

(yellow)

Electric power steering system

warning light

(P.510)

Low fuel level warning light

(P.510)

Driver’s and front passenger’s

seat belt reminder light

(P.510)

Rear passengers’ seat

belt reminder lights

(except F SPORT mod-

els) (P.511)

Rear passengers’ seat belt

reminder lights (F SPORT mod-

els) (P.511)

Tire pressure warning light

(P.511)

(orange)

LTA indicator (if equipped)

(P.511)

(flashes)

Stop & Start cancel indicator

(P.512)

(flashes)

RCD OFF indicator (if

equipped) (P.512)

(flashes or

illuminates)

PCS warning light

(if

equipped) (P.512)

Slip indicator

(P.513)

(flashes)

Parking brake indicator

(P.513)

(flashes)

Brake hold operated indicator

(P.513)

2-1. Instrument cluster

mation display.

The indicators inform the driver of the

operating state of the vehicle’s various

systems.

WARNING

■

If a safety system warning light does

not come on

Should a safety system light such as the

ABS and SRS warning light not come on

when you start the engine, this could

mean that these systems are not available

to help protect you in an accident, which

could result in death or serious injury.

Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer immediately if this occurs.

Indicators

Turn signal indicator (P.226)

Tail light indicator (P.232)

Headlight high beam indicator

(P.233)

AHS indicator (if equipped)

(P.235)

AHB indicator (if equipped)

(P.238)

Multi Weather Lights indicator

(P.241)

Rear fog light indicator

(P.242)

PCS warning light

*1, 2

(if

equipped) (P.276, 288)

Cruise control indicator

(P.311, 323)

Dynamic radar cruise control

indicator (if equipped) (P.311)

Cruise control “SET” indicator

(P.311, 323)

(white)

LTA indicator (if equipped)

(P.302)

(green)

LTA indicator (if equipped)

(P.302)

(orange)

(flashes)

LTA indicator (if equipped)

(P.302)

BSM outside rear view mirror

indicators

*1, 3

(if equipped)

(P.332, 355)

BSM OFF indicator

*1, 2

(if

equipped) (P.332)

Lexus parking assist-sensor

OFF indicator

*1, 2

(P.351)

RCTA OFF indicator

*1, 2

(if

equipped) (P.355)

RCD OFF indicator

(if

equipped) (P.359)

PKSB OFF indicator

*1, 2

(if

equipped) (P.363)

Stop & Start indicator

(P.325)

Stop & Start cancel indicator

*1,

(P.331)

(flashes)

Slip indicator

(P.385)

VSC OFF indicator

*1, 2

(P.385)

High mode indicator (if

equipped) (P.381)

Smart entry & start system indi-

cator

(P.216)

Parking brake indicator

(P.227)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Drive mode indicators



Except F SPORT models



F SPORT models

: These lights come on when the engine

switch is turned to IGNITION ON

mode to indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will turn off after

the engine is started, or after a few sec-

onds. There may be a malfunction in a

system if the lights do not come on, or

turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

: This light comes on when the system is

turned off.

: This light illuminates on the outside rear

view mirrors.

: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-

mation display.

: When the outside temperature is

approximately 3°C (37°F) or lower, this

indicator will flash for approximately 10

seconds, then stay on.

: This light illuminates on the center

panel.

Brake hold standby indicator

(P.230)

Brake hold operated indicator

(P.230)

Eco Driving Indicator Light

(P.97)

Low outside temperature indi-

cator

(P.86, 89)

Security indicator

(P.64,

77)

“PASSENGER AIR

BAG” indicator

*1, 6

(P.41)

Snow mode indicator

(P.223)

Normal mode indicator

(P.378)

Custom mode indicator (if

equipped) (P.378)

Comfort mode indicator (if

equipped) (P.378)

Eco drive mode indicator

(P.378)

Sport mode indicator (if

equipped) (P.378)

Sport S mode indicator (if

equipped) (P.378)

Sport S+ mode indicator (if

equipped) (P.378)

Snow mode indicator

(P.223)

Normal mode indicator

(P.378)

Custom mode indicator

(P.378)

Comfort mode indicator

(P.378)

Eco drive mode indicator

(P.378)

Sport S mode indicator

(P.378)

Sport S+ mode indicator

(P.378)

2-1. Instrument cluster

■

Locations of gauges and meters

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Odometer and trip meter display (P.87)

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F)

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will

change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.

Speedometer

Clock

Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (P.434)

Shift position indicator (P.221)

Shift range/gear position (P.219)

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Multi-information display

Gauges and meters (except F SPORT models)

Meter display

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.93)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.515)

■

Outside temperature display

●

In the following situations, the correct

outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer

than normal to change:

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds

(less than 20 km/h [12 mph])

• When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of

a garage, tunnel, etc.)

●

When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system

may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle

to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Liquid crystal display

P.94

■

Customization

The gauges and meters can be customized

on of the multi-information display.

(P.99)

■

Display items

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has

been driven.

Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been

driven since the meter was last reset. Trip

meters A and B can be used to record and

display different distances independently.

Distance until next engine oil

change

Displays the distance the vehicle can be

driven until an oil change is necessary.

■

Changing the display

Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is

pressed, the displayed item will be

changed. When the trip meter is dis-

played, pressing and holding the switch

will reset the trip meter.

WARNING

■

The information display at low tem-

peratures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm

up before using the liquid crystal infor-

mation display. At extremely low temper-

atures, the information display monitor

may respond slowly, and display changes

may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the

driver’s shifting and the new gear number

appearing on the display. This lag could

cause the driver to downshift again,

causing rapid and excessive engine brak-

ing and possibly an accident resulting in

death or injury.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the engine and

its components

●

Do not let the indicator needle of the

tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

●

The engine may be overheating if the

engine coolant temperature gauge is

in the red zone (H). In this case, imme-

diately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and check the engine after it has

cooled completely. (P.530)

Odometer and trip meter dis-

play

2-1. Instrument cluster

■

Pop-up display

In some situations the following will be

temporarily displayed:

Stop & Start system operation time

(current) (P.325)

Stop & Start system operating state

(P.329)

Distance until next engine oil

change

When a warning message indicating that

oil maintenance should be performed soon

or is required is displayed.

The brightness of the instrument panel

lights can be adjusted.

1Darker

2Brighter

■

Brightness of the meters (day mode and

night mode)

The brightness of the meters changes

between day mode and night mode.

●

Day mode: When the tail lights are off or

when the tail lights are on but the sur-

rounding area is bright

●

Night mode: When the tail lights are on

and the surrounding area is dark

Changing the instrument panel

light brightness

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

■

Locations of gauges and meters

When the main meter is moved to the right, some of the meter displays and the

gauge layout will change. (P.93)



Main meter in center position

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.

Odometer and trip meter display (P.92)

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F)

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will

change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.

• Rev indicator (P.91)

•Rev peak (P.91)

Shift position/shift range/gear position (P.219)

Speedometer

Clock

Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (P.434)

Gauges and meters (F SPORT models)

Meter display

2-1. Instrument cluster

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Shift position indicator (P.221)

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.93)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.515)



Main meter moved to the right

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F)

Clock

Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (P.434)

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will

change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.

• Rev indicator (P.91)

•Rev peak (P.91)

Shift position/shift range/gear position (P.219)

Speedometer

Shift position indicator (P.221)

Odometer and trip meter display (P.92)

Fuel gauge

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.93)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.515)

■

Rev indicator

When the engine speed reaches a set

speed or the red zone, a ring-shaped

indicator ( ) will be displayed on the

tachometer.

The indicators will be displayed in amber

when the engine speed reaches a set

speed, and in red when the engine speed

reaches the red zone.

The engine speed at which the rev indica-

tor will begin to be displayed can be set on

of the multi-information display.

(P.99)

■

Rev peak

When the engine speed reaches or

exceeds 5000 r/min, an afterimage of

the tachometer will be displayed at the

highest engine speed for approxi-

mately 1 second.

■

Outside temperature display

●

In the following situations, the correct

outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer

than normal to change:

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds

(less than 20 km/h [12 mph])

• When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of

a garage, tunnel, etc.)

●

When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system

may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle

to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Liquid crystal display

P.94

■

Customization

The gauges and meters can be customized

on of the multi-information display.

(P.99)

2-1. Instrument cluster

■

Display items

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has

been driven.

Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been

driven since the meter was last reset. Trip

meters A and B can be used to record and

display different distances independently.

Distance until next engine oil

change

Displays the distance the vehicle can be

driven until an oil change is necessary.

■

Changing the display

Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is

pressed, the displayed item will be

changed. When the trip meter is dis-

played, pressing and holding the switch

will reset the trip meter.

■

Pop-up display

In some situations the following will be

temporarily displayed:

Stop & Start system operation time

(current) (P.325)

Stop & Start system operating state

(P.329)

Distance until next engine oil

change

When a warning message indicating that

oil maintenance should be performed soon

or is required is displayed.

The brightness of the instrument panel

lights can be adjusted.

WARNING

■

The information display at low tem-

peratures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm

up before using the liquid crystal infor-

mation display. At extremely low temper-

atures, the information display monitor

may respond slowly, and display changes

may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the

driver’s shifting and the new gear number

appearing on the display. This lag could

cause the driver to downshift again,

causing rapid and excessive engine brak-

ing and possibly an accident resulting in

death or injury.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the engine and

its components

●

Do not let the indicator needle of the

tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

●

The engine may be overheating if the

engine coolant temperature gauge is

in the red zone (H). In this case, imme-

diately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and check the engine after it has

cooled completely. (P.530)

Odometer and trip meter dis-

play

Changing the instrument panel

light brightness

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

1Darker

2Brighter

■

Brightness of the meters (day mode and

night mode)

The brightness of the meters changes

between day mode and night mode.

●

Day mode: When the tail lights are off or

when the tail lights are on but the sur-

rounding area is bright

●

Night mode: When the tail lights are on

and the surrounding area is dark

The display can be switched between

the center and side positions.

■

Display (except F SPORT models)

By selecting menu icons on the

multi-information display, a variety of

driving-related information can be dis-

played. The multi-information display

can also be used to change display set-

tings and other vehicle settings.

Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up

displays are also displayed in certain

situations.

■

Display (F SPORT models)



Main meter in center position

The multi-information display presents

the driver with a variety of driv-

ing-related information.

Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up

displays are also displayed in certain

situations.

Changing the main meter loca-

tion

Multi-information display

Display and menu icons

2-1. Instrument cluster



Main meter moved to the right

By selecting menu icons on the

multi-information display, a variety of

driving-related information can be dis-

played. The multi-information display

can also be used to change display set-

tings and other vehicle settings.

Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up

displays are also displayed in certain

situations.

■

Menu icons

The menu icons will be displayed by

pressing or of the meter con-

trol switch.

F SPORT models: The menu icons can be

displayed when the main meter is moved to

the right.

■

Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the

display. This phenomenon is characteristic

of liquid crystal displays, and there is no

problem continuing to use the display.

The multi-information display is oper-

ated using the meter control switches.

Driving information display

(P.95)

Navigation system-linked dis-

play (if equipped) (P.98)

Audio system-linked display

(P.98)

Driving support system infor-

mation display (P.99)

Warning message display

(P.515)

Settings display (P.99)

WARNING

■

Caution for use while driving

●

When operating the multi-information

display while driving, pay extra atten-

tion to the safety of the area around the

vehicle.

●

Do not look continuously at the

multi-information display while driving

as you may fail to see pedestrians,

objects on the road, etc. ahead of the

vehicle.

■

The information display at low tem-

peratures

P.87, 92

Changing the meter display

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

/ : Select menu icons

/ : Change displayed con-

tent, scroll up/down the screen and

move the cursor up/down

Press: Enter/Set

Press and hold: Reset

Move the main meter

and return

to the previous screen

Call sending/receiving and history

display

Linked with the hands-free system, sending

or receiving call is displayed. For details

regarding the hands-free system, refer to

the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

: F SPORT models

■

Display items (except F SPORT

models)

Press or of the meter control

switch and select . Then press

or to display the following items:

Drive information 1

Drive information 2

Stop & Start system information

Eco Driving Indicator

Boost gauge (LS500)

Tire pressure (P.467)

Display off

■

Display items (F SPORT models)



Main meter in center position

Press or of the meter control

switch to display the following items:

Drive information 1

Drive information 2

Tire pressure (P.467)

Gear positions

Units (if equipped)

Display off

Driving support system information

(P.99)

: Can be selected when a driving support

system is enabled. (P.297, 311)



Main meter moved to the right

Press or of the meter control

switch and select . Then press

or to display the following items:

Drive information 1

Drive information 2

Stop & Start system information

Eco Driving Indicator

Boost gauge (LS500)

G-force

Gear Position

Tire pressure (P.467)

Content of driving information

2-1. Instrument cluster

Display off

■

Drive information 1/Drive infor-

mation 2

Displays drive information such as the

following:

Use the displayed values as a reference

only.

Drive information 1

• Current fuel consumption

• Average fuel economy (after reset)

Drive information 2

• Distance (driving range)

• Average vehicle speed (after reset)

Displayed items (listed below) can be

changed on . (P.99)

Current fuel consumption

Bar type: Displays instantaneous current

fuel consumption

Average fuel economy

After reset: Displays average fuel con-

sumption since the display was reset

After start: Displays average fuel con-

sumption since engine start

After refuel: Displays average fuel con-

sumption since refuel

Average vehicle speed

After reset: Displays average vehicle

speed since the display was reset

After start: Displays average vehicle speed

since engine start

Elapsed time

After reset: Displays elapsed time since the

display was reset

After start: Displays elapsed time since

engine start

Distance

Driving range: Displays driving range with

remaining fuel

*2, 3

After start: Displays the distance driven

since engine start

Other

Blank: No item

: To reset, display the desired item and

press and hold of the meter control

switch.

: This distance is computed based on

your average fuel consumption. As a

result, the actual distance that can be

driven may differ from that displayed.

: When only a small amount of fuel is

added to the tank, the display may not

be updated.

When refueling, turn the engine switch

off. If the vehicle is refueled without

turning the engine switch off, the display

may not be updated.

■

Stop & Start system information

Display items

• Stop & Start system operation time (cur-

rent)/status notification

Displays the current amount of time the

engine has been stopped due to the opera-

tion of the Stop & Start system.

Also shows the status of the Stop & Start

system with a pop-up display. (P.329)

• Stop & Start system operation time since

engine start

• Stop & Start system operation time since

display was reset

Stop & Start system settings

Press

of the meter control switch to

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

display the Stop & Start system settings

screen.

On this screen, the following operations

can be performed:

• Stop & Start

The length of time the Stop & Start system

will operate when the “A/C” switch of the

air conditioning system is on can be set to

2 different levels.

This setting can also be changed on .

•Reset

Resets the Stop & Start system operation

time and amount of fuel saved.

To reset the recorded values, move the

cursor to “Reset”, and then press and hold

of the meter control switch.

• Stop & Start system display

Select to display Stop & Start system oper-

ation time (since engine start and since dis-

play was reset) or amount of fuel saved

(since engine start and since display was

reset).

: Use the displayed amount of saved fuel

for reference only.

■

Eco Driving Indicator

Eco Driving Indicator Light

During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco

driving), the Eco Driving Indicator Light

will turn on. When the acceleration

exceeds the Zone of Eco driving, or when

the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.

Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display

Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with cur-

rent Eco driving ratio based on accelera-

tion.

Eco driving ratio based on acceler-

ation

If the acceleration exceeds the Zone of

Eco driving, the right side of the Eco Driv-

ing Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.

At this time, the Eco Driving Indicator Light

will turn off.

Zone of Eco driving

■

Boost gauge (LS500)

Displays the boost pressure. The dis-

play will change color if the specified

pressure is exceeded.

This display is intended for use as a guide-

line. Depending on factors such as the road

surface condition, temperature and vehicle

speed, the display may not show the actual

condition of the vehicle.

■

G-force (F SPORT models)

Displays lateral G-forces on the vehi-

cle. Also displays, around the periph-

ery of the G-force display, the left and

right steering amount, accelerator

pedal input, and brake fluid pressure.

2-1. Instrument cluster

Acceleration G-force on the vehi-

cle

Current G-force value (analyzed

value of front/rear and left/right

G-forces)

Record of the maximum G-forces

Accelerator pedal input

Brake fluid pressure

Steering amount

This display is intended for use as a guide-

line. Depending on factors such as the road

surface condition, temperature and vehicle

speed, the display may not show the actual

condition of the vehicle.

Resetting the record of maximum

G-forces

Press and hold of the meter control

switch to reset the record.

Peak hold function

If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are

generated, the G-force value display will

turn amber and be held for 2 seconds.

■

Gear Position (F SPORT models)

Displays the current shift range or gear

position when the shift position is in D

or M.

■

Units (F SPORT models)

On some models, the units of measure

used can be changed while driving.

Unlike the units setting performed on the

settings display, the units setting per-

formed on the drive information display

can be changed while driving.

■

Eco Driving Indicator

Eco Driving Indicator will not operate

under the following conditions:

●

The shift position is in any position other

than D.

●

A paddle shift switch is operated.

●

The driving mode is set to sport mode.

●

The driving mode is set to custom mode

and the powertrain control is set to power

(P.378)

●

Snow mode is selected.

●

The vehicle speed is approximately 130

km/h (80 mph) or higher.

Select to display the following naviga-

tion system-linked information.

Route guidance to destination

Compass display (heading-up dis-

play)

■

Route guidance to destination display

When the route guidance to destination

display is enabled on the head-up display, it

will not be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display. (P.103)

Select to enable selection of an audio

source or track on the meter using the

Navigation system-linked dis-

play (if equipped)

Audio system-linked display

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

meter control switches.

Select to display the operational status

of the following systems:

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if

equipped) (P.297)

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range (if equipped)

(P.311)

Cruise control (if equipped)

(P.323)

RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if

equipped) (P.307)

■

Meter display settings that can be

changed

Language

Select to change the language displayed.

Units

Select to change the units of measure dis-

played.

Speedometer display (except F

SPORT models)

Select to set the display of the speedome-

ter to digital/analog/both digital and ana-

log.

Drive information 1/Drive informa-

tion 2

Select to select up to 2 items (P.96) that

will be displayed on each Drive information

screen (Drive information 1 screen and

Drive information 2 screen) respectively.

Clock

Select to switch between 24-hour display

and 12-hour display.

Pop-up display

Select to enable/disable pop-up displays

for each relevant system.

Accent color

Select to change the accent color on the

screen, such as the cursor color.

Rev indicator (F SPORT models)

• Select to enable/disable the rev indica-

tor.

• Select to set the engine speed at which

the rev indicator (amber) will begin to be

displayed.

Rev peak (F SPORT models)

Select to enable/disable the rev peak.

Eco Driving Indicator Light

Select to enable/disable the Eco Driving

Indicator Light.

Default setting

Select to reset the meter display settings to

the default setting.

■

Vehicle functions and settings that

can be changed

P.546

■

Suspension of the settings display

●

Some settings cannot be changed while

driving. When changing settings, park

the vehicle in a safe place.

●

If a warning message is displayed, opera-

tion of the settings display will be sus-

pended.

Driving support system informa-

tion display

Settings display

100

2-1. Instrument cluster

Displays suggestions to the driver in

the following situations. To select a

response to a displayed suggestion,

use the meter control switches.

■

Suggestion to turn off the head-

lights

If the headlights are left on for a certain

amount of time with the headlight

switch in after the engine switch

has been turned off, a suggestion mes-

sage will be displayed asking if you

wish to turn the headlights off.

To turn the headlights off, select “Yes”.

If a front door is opened after the engine

switch is turned off, this suggestion mes-

sage will not be displayed.

■

Suggestion to close the power win-

dows (linked to windshield wiper

operation)

If the windshield wipers are operated

with a power window open, a sugges-

tion message will be displayed asking if

you wish to close the power windows.

To close all of the power windows,

select “Yes”.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

WARNING

■

Cautions during setting up the dis-

play

As the engine needs to be running dur-

ing setting up the display, ensure that the

vehicle is parked in a place with ade-

quate ventilation. In a closed area such as

a garage, exhaust gases including harm-

ful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect

and enter the vehicle. This may lead to

death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■

During setting up the display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that

the engine is running while setting up the

display features.

Suggestion function

101

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

:If equipped

Illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is

actually displayed by the head-up display.

Navigation system-linked display area (if equipped)

Displays the following items which are linked to the navigation system:

• Route guidance to destination

•Street name

• Compass (heading-up display)

Driving support system display area (P.104)

RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area (if equipped) (P.307)

Outside temperature display area

Driving information display area

Displays the following items:

• Speedometer

Head-up display*

The head-up display projects a variety of driving-related information and the

operating state of the driving support systems on the windshield.

System components

102

2-1. Instrument cluster

• Shift position/shift range/gear position (P.219)

Tachometer/Eco Driving Indicator display area (P.105)

HUD (Head-up display) switch

■

Head-up display will operate when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

When using the head-up display

The head-up display may seem dark or hard

to see when viewed through sunglasses,

especially polarized sunglasses. Adjust the

brightness of the head-up display or

remove your sunglasses.

■

Street name display

Only street names which are included in the

map data will be displayed.

■

Outside temperature display

●

When the ambient temperature is

approximately 3°C (37°F) or lower, the

low outside temperature indicator will

flash for approximately 10 seconds and

the outside temperature display will turn

off. In this case, the display will be dis-

played again when the outside tempera-

ture becomes approximately 5°C (41°F)

or higher.

●

In the following situations, the correct

outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer

than normal to change:

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds

(less than 20 km/h [12 mph])

• When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of

a garage, tunnel, etc.)

●

When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system

may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle

to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

WARNING

■

When using the head-up display

●

Check that the position and brightness

of the head-up display image does not

interfere with safe driving. Incorrect

adjustment of the image’s position or

brightness may obstruct the driver’s

view and lead to an accident, resulting

in death or serious injury.

●

Do not continuously look at the

head-up display while driving as you

may fail to see pedestrians, objects on

the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

NOTICE

■

Head-up display projector

●

Do not place any drinks near the

head-up display projector. If the pro-

jector gets wet, electrical malfunctions

may result.

●

Do not place anything on or put stick-

ers onto the head-up display projector.

Doing so could interrupt head-up dis-

play indications.

●

Do not touch the inside of the head-up

display projector or thrust sharp edges

or the like into the projector.

Doing so could cause mechanical mal-

functions.

103

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

■

Enabling/disabling the head-up dis-

play

Press the HUD switch.

■

Changing settings of the head-up

display

The following settings can be changed

on of the multi-information display.

(P.546)

Brightness and vertical position of

the head-up display

Select to adjust the brightness or vertical

position of the head-up display.

Tachometer/Eco Driving Indicator

Select to display the tachometer, Eco Driv-

ing Indicator or no content.

Display content

Select to enable/disable the following

items:

• Route guidance to destination/street

name

• Driving support system display

• Compass (heading-up display)

• Audio system operation status

: Make sure to enable this display when

using the driving support systems

Display angle

Select to adjust the angle of the head-up

display.

■

Enabling/disabling of the head-up dis-

play

If the head-up display is disabled, it will

remain disabled when the engine switch is

turned off then back to IGNITION ON

mode.

■

Display brightness

The brightness of the head-up display can

be adjusted on of the multi-information

display. Also, it is automatically adjusted

according to the ambient brightness.

■

Head-up display automatic position

adjustment

If the display position is recorded into mem-

ory, the head-up display will be automati-

cally adjusted to the desired position.

(P.177)

■

When the battery is disconnected

The customize settings of the head-up dis-

play will be reset.

Using the head-up display

WARNING

■

Caution for changing settings of the

head-up display

As the engine needs to be running while

changing the settings of the head-up dis-

play, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a

place with adequate ventilation. In a

closed area such as a garage, exhaust

gases including harmful carbon monox-

ide (CO) may collect and enter the vehi-

cle. This may lead to death or a serious

health hazard.

104

2-1. Instrument cluster

Displays the operational status of the

following systems:

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if

equipped) (P.297)

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range (if equipped)

(P.311)

Details of content displayed on the

head-up display may differ from that dis-

played on the multi-information display. For

details, refer to the explanation of each sys-

tem.

Pop-up displays for the following sys-

tems will be displayed when necessary.

■

Driving support systems

Displays a warning/suggestion/advice

message or the operating state of a rel-

evant system.

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if

equipped) (P.273, 285)

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (if

equipped) (P.293)

Lexus parking assist-sensor

(P.351)

Parking Support Brake function (for

static objects) (if equipped)

(P.367)

Brake Override System (P.208)

Drive-Start Control (P.213)

Details of content displayed on the

head-up display may differ from that dis-

played on the multi-information display. For

details, refer to the explanation of each sys-

tem.

■

/ icons

These icons are linked to the

multi-information display

: Master warning icon

Displayed when a warning message is dis-

played on the multi-information display.

(P.515)

: Information icon

Displayed when a suggestion pop-up dis-

play (P.100) or advice pop-up display is

displayed on the multi-information display.

■

Warning message

Some warning messages are displayed

when necessary, according to certain

conditions.

Details of content displayed on the

head-up display may differ from that dis-

played on the multi-information display.

■

Audio system operation status

Displayed when an audio remote con-

trol switch on the steering wheel is

operated.

■

Hands-free system status

Displayed when the hands-free system

is operated.

NOTICE

■

When changing the settings of the

head-up display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that

the engine is running while the changing

the settings of the head-up display.

Driving support system display

area

Pop-up display

105

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

■

When a pop-up display is displayed

When a pop-up display is displayed, a cur-

rent display may no longer be displayed. In

this case, the display will return after the

pop-up display disappears.

■

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolu-

tions per minute.

■

Eco Driving Indicator

Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display

Eco driving ratio based on acceler-

ation

Zone of Eco driving

Displayed content is the same as that dis-

played on the multi-information display

(Eco Driving Indicator). For details, refer to

P.97.

Center Display

“MENU” button

Touchpad

■

Trip information

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select on the

Tachometer/Eco Driving Indica-

tor

Fuel consumption informa-

tion

Fuel consumption information can

be displayed on the Center Display.

The fuel consumption information

can be displayed and operated on

the side display.

System components

Consumption

106

2-1. Instrument cluster

menu screen.

If a screen other than “Trip information”

is displayed, select “Trip information”.

This system can also be operated by the

touch screen.

Resetting the consumption data

Fuel consumption in the past 15

minutes

Current fuel consumption

Average vehicle speed since the

engine was started.

Elapsed time since the engine was

started.

Cruising range

Average fuel consumption for the past

15 minutes is divided by color into past

averages and averages attained since

the engine switch was last turned to

IGNITION ON mode. Use the dis-

played average fuel consumption as a

reference.

The image is an example only, and may

vary slightly from actual conditions.

■

History

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select on the

menu screen.

If a screen other than “History” is dis-

played, select “History”.

This system can also be operated by the

touch screen.

Best recorded fuel consumption

Latest fuel consumption

Previous fuel consumption record

Resetting the history data

Updating the latest fuel consump-

tion data

The average fuel consumption history

is divided by color into past averages

and the average fuel consumption

since the last updated. Use the dis-

played average fuel consumption as a

reference.

The image is an example only, and may

vary slightly from actual conditions.

■

Updating the history data

Update the latest fuel consumption by

selecting “Update” to measure the current

fuel consumption again.

■

Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted

by selecting “Clear”.

■

Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance

that can be driven with the quantity of fuel

107

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

remaining.

This distance is computed based on your

average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be

driven may differ from that displayed.

Display the vehicle information on the

side display (P.397), and then select

or to display the desired

screen.

The image is an example only, and may

vary slightly from actual conditions.

■

Trip information (type A)

Displays the average fuel consumption

for the past 10 minutes in 1 minute

intervals, as well as the cruising range.

Use the displayed average fuel consump-

tion as a reference.

■

Trip information (type B)

Displays the cruising range, latest fuel

consumption and the amount of time

elapsed since the engine was started.

Use the displayed average fuel consump-

tion as a reference.

■

History

Displays the average fuel consumption

and highest fuel consumption.

Use the displayed average fuel consump-

tion as a reference.

Using the side display

108

2-1. Instrument cluster

109

Before driving

3-1. Key information

Keys .................................................. 110

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the

doors and trunk

Doors ............................................... 114

Trunk ................................................ 119

Smart entry & start system..... 126

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats..................................... 165

Power rear seat .......................... 172

Driving position memory ........ 177

Rear seat position memory..... 181

Head restraints............................182

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and

mirrors

Steering wheel ............................185

Inside rear view mirror.............186

Digital Rearview Mirror ..........187

Outside rear view mirrors...... 195

3-5. Opening, closing the windows

and moon roof

Power windows ..........................198

Moon roof ..................................... 201

110

3-1. Key information

3-1.Key informat ion

The following keys are provided with

the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart entry & start sys-

tem (P.126)

• Operating the wireless remote control

function (P.112)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Card key (electronic key) (if

equipped)

Operating the smart entry & start system

(P.126)

■

Card key (if equipped)

●

The card key is not waterproof.

●

The mechanical key that is stored inside

the card key should be used only if a

problem arises, such as when the card

key does not operate properly.

●

If it is difficult to take out the mechanical

key, push down the lock release button

using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to

pull it out, use a coin etc.

●

To store the mechanical key in the card

key, insert it while pressing the lock

release button.

●

If the battery cover is not installed and the

battery falls out or if the battery was

removed because the key got wet, rein-

stall the battery with the positive terminal

facing the Lexus emblem.

■

When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an

aircraft, make sure you do not press any

buttons on the electronic key while inside

the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an

electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that

the buttons are not likely to be pressed acci-

dentally. Pressing a button may cause the

electronic key to emit radio waves that

could interfere with the operation of the air-

craft.

■

Electronic key battery depletion

●

The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

(The card key battery life is about a year

and a half.)

●

If the battery becomes low, an alarm will

sound in the cabin and a message will be

Keys

The keys

111

3-1. Key information

Before driving

shown on the multi-information display

when the engine is stopped.

●

To reduce key battery depletion when the

electronic key is to not be used for long

periods of time, set the electronic key to

the battery-saving mode. (P.127)

●

As the electronic key always receives

radio waves, the battery will become

depleted even if the electronic key is not

used. The following symptoms indicate

that the electronic key battery may be

depleted. Replace the battery when nec-

essary.

• The smart entry & start system or the

wireless remote control does not oper-

ate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

• The LED indicator on the key surface

does not turn on.

●

To avoid serious deterioration, do not

leave the electronic key within 1 m (3 ft.)

of the following electrical appliances that

produce a magnetic field:

•TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and

battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless

phones

• Table lamps

• Induction cookers

■

Replacing the battery

P.490

■

Confirmation of the number of regis-

tered keys

The number of keys already registered to

the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer for

details.

■

If “A New Key has been Registered

Contact Your Dealer for Details” is

shown on the multi-information display

This message will be displayed each time

the driver’s door is opened when the doors

are unlocked from the outside for approxi-

mately 10 days after a new electronic key

has been registered.

If this message is displayed but you have not

had a new electronic key registered, ask

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer

to check if an unknown electronic key

(other than those in your possession) has

been registered.

NOTICE

■

To prevent key damage

●

Do not drop the keys, subject them to

strong shocks or bend them.

●

Do not expose the keys to high tem-

peratures for a long period of time.

●

Do not get the keys wet or wash them

in an ultrasonic washer etc.

●

Do not attach metallic or magnetic

materials to the keys or place the keys

close to such materials.

●

Do not disassemble the keys.

●

Do not attach a sticker or anything else

to the surface of the electronic key.

●

Do not place the keys near objects that

produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,

audio systems and induction cookers,

or medical electrical equipment, such

as low-frequency therapy equipment.

■

Carrying the electronic key on your

person

Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.)

or more away from electric appliances

that are turned on. Radio waves emitted

from electric appliances within 10 cm

(3.9 in.) of the electronic key may inter-

fere with the key, causing the key to not

function properly.

■

In case of a smart entry & start system

malfunction or other key-related

problems



P.521

■

When an electronic key is lost

P.520

112

3-1. Key information

The electronic keys are equipped with

the following wireless remote control:

Locks the doors (P.114)

Closes the windows and moon

roof

(P.114)

Unlocks the doors (P.114)

Opens the windows and moon

roof

(P.114)

Opens the trunk (P.121)

: These settings must be customized at

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

To take out the mechanical key, push

the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in

one direction, as the key only has grooves

on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in

a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt

to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in

the electronic key. Carry the mechanical

key together with the electronic key. If the

electronic key battery is depleted or the

NOTICE

■

Handling the card key (if equipped)

●

Do not apply excess force when insert-

ing the mechanical key into the card

key. Doing so may damage the card

key.

●

If the battery or card key terminals get

wet, the battery may corrode and the

card key may stop working.

If the key is dropped into water, or if

drinking water, etc. is spilled on the key,

immediately remove the battery cover

and wipe the battery and terminals. (To

remove the battery cover, lightly grasp

and pull it.) If the battery is corroded,

have any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer replace the battery.

●

Do not crush the battery cover or use

a screwdriver to remove the battery

cover.

Forcibly removing the battery cover

may bend or damage the key.

●

If the battery cover is frequently

removed, the battery cover may

become loose.

●

When installing the battery, make sure

to check the direction of the battery.

Installing the battery in the wrong

direction may cause the battery to

deplete rapidly.

●

The surface of the card key may be

damaged, or its coating may peel off in

the following situations:

• The card key is carried together with

hard objects, such as coins and keys.

• The card key is scraped with a sharp

object, such as the tip of a mechanical

pencil.

• The surface of the card key is wiped

with thinner or benzene.

Wireless remote control

Using the mechanical key

113

3-1. Key information

Before driving

entry function does not operate properly,

you will need the mechanical key.

(P.521)

■

When required to leave the vehicle’s

key with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch off

(P.125) and lock the glove box (P.425)

as circumstances demand.

Remove the mechanical key for your own

use and provide the attendant with the elec-

tronic key only.

■

If you lose your mechanical keys

P.520

■

If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated

from the internal mechanism.

114

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3-2.Opening, closing and locking t he doors and trunk

■

Smart entry & start system

Carry the electronic key to enable this

function.

1Grip the door handle to unlock the

doors.*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back

of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 sec-

onds after the doors are locked.

: The door unlock settings can be

changed.

2Touch the lock sensor (indentation

on the upper part of the door han-

dle) to lock all the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

■

Wireless remote control

1Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

Press and hold to close the windows and

moon roof.

2Unlocks all the doors

Press and hold to open the windows and

moon roof.

: These settings must be customized at

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry

function unlocks using the wireless remote

control.

1Turn the engine switch off.

2Cancel the intrusion sensor and tilt sen-

sor of the alarm system to prevent unin-

tended triggering of the alarm while

changing the settings. (if equipped)

(P.78)

3When the indicator light on the key sur-

face is not on, press and hold or

for approximately 5 seconds

while pressing and holding .

The setting changes each time an operation

is performed, as shown below. (When

changing the setting continuously, release

the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and

repeat step 3.)

Doors

Unlocking and locking the doors

from the outside

115

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

To prevent unintended triggering of the

alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless

remote control and open and close a door

once after the settings have been changed.

(If a door is not opened within 30 seconds

after is pressed, the doors will be

locked again and the alarm will automati-

cally be set.)

In a case that the alarm is triggered, imme-

diately stop the alarm. (P.77)

■

Impact detection door lock release sys-

tem

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a

strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.

Depending on the force of the impact or the

type of accident, however, the system may

not operate.

■

Operation signals

The emergency flashers flash to indicate

that the doors have been locked/unlocked.

(Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the win-

dows and moon roof are operating.

■

Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately

30 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked,

the security feature automatically locks the

vehicle again.

■

When the doors cannot be locked by the

lock sensor on the upper part of the

door handle

When the doors cannot be locked even if

the lock sensor on the upper part of the

door handle is touched by a finger, touch

the lock sensor with the palm.

If you are wearing gloves, remove them.

■

Open door warning buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when

a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds

continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the

door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehi-

cle once more.

■

Setting the alarm

Locking the doors will set the alarm system.

(P.77)

■

Conditions affecting the operation of

the smart entry & start system or wire-

less remote control

P.127

■

If the smart entry & start system or the

wireless remote control does not oper-

ate properly

Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock

the doors. (P.521)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it

is depleted. (P.490)

■

If the battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked and unlocked

using the smart entry & start system or

wireless remote control. Lock or unlock the

doors using the mechanical key. (P.521)

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

Multi-information

display/Beep Unlocking function

Exterior: Beeps 3

times

Interior: Pings once

Holding the driver’s

door handle unlocks

only the driver’s

door.

Holding any of the

passenger door

handles unlocks all

the doors.

Exterior: Beeps

twice

Interior: Pings once

Holding a door han-

dle unlocks all the

doors.

116

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

(P.546)

■

Door lock switches (to

lock/unlock)

1Locks all the doors

2Unlocks all the doors

■

Inside lock buttons (to lock)

Push down the inside lock button to

lock the door.

WARNING

■

To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while

driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door

opening and an occupant throwing out of

the vehicle, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●

Ensure that all doors are properly

closed.

●

Do not pull the inside handle of the

doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the front doors,

as the doors may be opened even if the

inside lock buttons are in locked position.

●

Set the rear door child-protector locks

when children are seated in the rear

seats.

■

When opening or closing a door

Check the surroundings of the vehicle

such as whether the vehicle is on an

incline, whether there is enough space

for a door to open and whether a strong

wind is blowing. When opening or clos-

ing the door, hold the door handle tightly

to prepare for any unpredictable move-

ment.

■

When using the wireless remote con-

trol and operating the power windows

or moon roof

Operate the power windows or the

moon roof after checking to make sure

that there is no possibility of any passen-

ger having any of their body parts caught

in the windows or the moon roof. Also, do

not allow children to operate the wireless

remote control. It is possible for children

and other passengers to get caught in

the power windows or the moon roof.

■

Vehicle height control precautions

(vehicles with electronically modu-

lated air suspension)

In the following situations, make sure to

check the safety of the area around the

vehicle, as the vehicle height may change

and part of someone’s body may be

caught in the vehicle, possibly causing

injury or the vehicle may be damaged.

●

When opening or closing a door

●

When locking the doors

Unlocking and locking the doors

from the inside

117

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

■

Inside door handles (to unlock)



For the front doors

Pull the handle to unlock and open the

door.

When the door is unlocked, the inside lock

button will pop up.



For the rear doors

Pull the handle to unlock the door. Pull

the handle a second time to open the

door.

When the door is unlocked, the inside lock

button will pop up.

■

Locking the front doors from the outside

without a key

1Push down the inside lock button.

2Close the door while pulling the door

handle.

The door cannot be locked if the engine

switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode, or the electronic key is left

inside the vehicle. However, the key may not

be detected correctly and the door may be

locked.

■

Door closer

In the event that a door is left slightly open,

the door closer will automatically close it to

the fully closed position.

●

The door closer will operate regardless

of the engine switch mode.

●

The door closer will not function if the

door has been closed while pulling the

inside or outside door handle.

●

The door can be opened by pulling the

inside or outside door handle, even when

the door closer is operating (except

when the lock button is in the lock posi-

tion or the child-protector lock is set).

●

A motor sound may be heard for several

seconds after the door closer closes the

door. This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

■

Open door warning buzzer

If a door or the trunk is not fully closed, a

buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed

reaches 5 km/h (3 mph).

The open door(s) or trunk is indicated on

the multi-information display.

WARNING

■

Door closer

In the event that a door is left slightly

open, the door closer will automatically

close it to the fully closed position. It

takes several seconds before the door

easy closer begins to operate.

If the child-protector lock is set, the door

closer will not stop during operation even

if an attempt is made to open the door

from inside the vehicle. Be careful not to

catch fingers or anything else in the door.

Failure to do so may result in serious

injury.

NOTICE

■

To prevent door closer malfunction

Do not frequently repeat opening and

closing of doors, or apply excessive force

to a door while the door closer is operat-

ing.

118

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

The door cannot be opened from

inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

1Unlock

2Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children

from opening the rear doors. Push down

on each rear door switch to lock both rear

doors.

The following functions can be set or

canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to

P.546.

Rear door child-protector lock

Automatic door locking and

unlocking systems

Function Operation

Speed linked

door locking

function

All doors are automati-

cally locked when vehi-

cle speed is

approximately 20

km/h (12 mph) or

higher.

Shift position

linked door lock-

ing function

All doors are automati-

cally locked when the

shift position is shifted

to a position other than

Shift position

linked door

unlocking func-

tion

All doors are automati-

cally unlocked when

the shift position is

shifted to P.

Driver’s door

linked door

unlocking func-

tion

All doors are automati-

cally unlocked when

driver’s door is opened

within approximately

45 seconds after turn-

ing the engine switch

off.

Function Operation

119

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the

trunk opener switch, entry function

or wireless remote control.

The trunk can be closed using the

trunk closer.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■

Before driving

●

Make sure that the trunk lid is fully

closed. If the trunk lid is not fully

closed, it may open unexpectedly

while driving and hit near-by objects or

luggage in the trunk may be thrown

out, causing an accident.

●

Do not allow children to play in the

trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the

trunk, they could suffer from heat

exhaustion, suffocation or other inju-

ries.

●

Do not allow a child to open or close

the trunk lid.

Doing so may cause the trunk lid to

open unexpectedly, or cause the

child’s hands, head, or neck to be

caught by the closing trunk lid.

■

Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the

event of sudden braking or a collision,

they are susceptible to death or serious

injury.

■

Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the

body to be caught, resulting in serious

injury.

●

Remove any heavy loads, such as snow

and ice, from the trunk lid before

opening it. Failure to do so may cause

the trunk lid to suddenly shut again

after it is opened.

●

When opening or closing the trunk lid,

thoroughly check to make sure the

surrounding area is safe.

●

If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure

they are safe and let them know that

the trunk is about to open or close.

●

Use caution when opening or closing

the trunk lid in windy weather as it may

move abruptly in strong wind.

●

The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is

not opened fully. It is more difficult to

open or close the trunk lid on an

incline than on a level surface, so

beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly

opening or closing by itself. Make sure

that the trunk lid is fully open and

secure before using the trunk.

●

When closing the trunk lid, take extra

care to prevent your fingers etc. from

being caught.

120

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

WARNING

●

When closing the trunk lid, make sure

to press it lightly on its outer surface. If

the trunk handle is used to fully close

the trunk lid, it may result in hands or

arms being caught.

●

Do not attach any accessories other

than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk

lid. Such additional weight on the trunk

lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut

again after it is opened.

■

Trunk easy closer

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly

open, the trunk easy closer will automati-

cally close it to the fully closed position. It

takes several seconds before the trunk

easy closer begins to operate. Be careful

not to catch fingers or anything else in

the trunk lid, as this may cause bone frac-

tures or other serious injuries.

■

Power trunk lid

Observe the following precautions when

operating the power trunk lid.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

●

Check the safety of the surrounding

area to make sure there are no obsta-

cles or anything that could cause any

of your belongings to get caught.

●

If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure

they are safe and let them know that

the trunk is about to open or close.

●

If the trunk closer switch is pressed

while the trunk lid is opening during

automatic operation, the trunk lid

stops opening. Take extra care when

on an incline, as the trunk lid may open

or close suddenly.

●

On an incline, the trunk lid may sud-

denly shut after it opens automatically.

Make sure the trunk lid is fully open

and secure before using the trunk.

●

In the following situations, the power

trunk lid may detect an abnormality

and automatic operation may be

stopped. In this case, the trunk lid has

to be operated manually. Take extra

care in this situation, as the stopped

trunk lid may suddenly shut, causing an

accident.

• When the trunk lid contacts an obsta-

cle

• When the battery voltage suddenly

drops, such as when the engine switch

is turned to IGNITION ON mode or

the engine is started during automatic

operation

●

Do not attach any accessories other

than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk

lid. The power trunk lid may not oper-

ate, causing itself to malfunction, or the

trunk lid may suddenly shut again after

it is opened.

■

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if

equipped)

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

●

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust

pipes to become quite hot. When

operating the Hands Free Power Trunk

Lid, be careful not to touch the exhaust

pipe.

●

Do not operate the Hands Free Power

Trunk Lid if there is little space under

the rear bumper.

121

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

■

Trunk opener switch

Press the trunk opener switch.

The trunk lid will fully open.

■

Smart entry & start system

While carrying the electronic key,

press the button.

The trunk lid will fully open.

If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is

opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.

When all the doors are unlocked using

one of the following methods, the trunk

can be opened without the electronic

key:

Entry function

Wireless remote control

Door lock switches

Automatic door unlocking system

Mechanical key

■

Wireless remote control

Press and hold the switch.

The trunk lid will fully open.

If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is

WARNING

■

Jam protection function

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

●

Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protec-

tion function.

●

The jam protection function may not

work if something gets caught just

before the trunk lid fully closes. Be

careful not to catch fingers or anything

else in the trunk lid.

●

The jam protection function may not

work depending on the shape of the

object that is caught. Be careful not to

catch fingers or anything else.

NOTICE

■

To prevent trunk easy closer malfunc-

tions

Do not apply force to the trunk lid while

the trunk easy closer is operating.

■

To prevent damage to the power

trunk lid

●

Make sure that there is no luggage or

snow on the trunk lid before operating

the power trunk lid. In addition, make

sure that there is no ice between the

trunk lid and frame that prevents

movement of the trunk lid. Operating

the power trunk lid when excessive

load is present on the trunk lid may

cause a malfunction.

●

Do not apply excessive force to the

trunk lid while the power trunk lid is

operating.

Opening/closing the trunk

122

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.

■

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if

equipped)

1While carrying an electronic key,

stand within the smart entry & start

system operation area, approxi-

mately 30 to 50 cm (11.8 to 19.7

in.) from the rear bumper.

Kick sensor

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid opera-

tion detection area

Smart entry & start system opera-

tion detection area (P.126)

2Perform a kick operation by mov-

ing your foot to within approxi-

mately 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the rear

bumper and then pulling it back.

• Perform the entire kick operation

within 1 second.

• The trunk lid will not start operating

while a foot is detected under the

rear bumper.

• Operate the Hands Free Power

Trunk Lid without contacting the

rear bumper with your foot.

• If another electronic key is in the

cabin or trunk, it may take slightly

longer than normal for the opera-

tion to begin.

Kick sensor

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid opera-

tion detection area

3When the kick sensor detects that

your foot is pulled back, a buzzer

will sound and the trunk will auto-

matically fully open/close.

If a foot is moved under the rear bumper

while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid

will stop moving.

If a foot is moved under the rear bumper

while the trunk lid is closing, the trunk lid

will open.

123

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

■

Trunk closer switch

Press the trunk closer switch.

A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will

fully close.

Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is

closing opens the trunk lid again.

■

Trunk grip

Using the trunk grip, pull down the

trunk lid without applying sideways

force and push the trunk lid down from

the outside to close it.

■

Trunk lid light/trunk light

●

The trunk lid light/trunk light turns on

when the trunk is opened.

●

If the trunk lid light/trunk light is left on

when the engine switch is turned off, the

light will go off automatically after 20

minutes.

■

Trunk easy closer

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly

open, the trunk easy closer will automati-

cally close it to the fully closed position.

●

The trunk easy closer will operate

regardless of the engine switch mode.

●

If the trunk easy closer does not operate,

open the trunk to the half open position

or more and then close it.

■

Function to prevent the trunk being

locked with the electronic key inside

●

When all doors are locked, closing the

trunk lid with the electronic key left inside

the trunk will sound an alarm.

In this case, the trunk lid can be opened

pressing the trunk release button on the

trunk lid.

●

If the spare electronic key is put in the

trunk with all the doors locked, the key

confinement prevention function is acti-

vated so the trunk can be opened. In

order to prevent theft, take all electronic

keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

●

If the electronic key is put in the trunk with

all the doors locked, the key may not be

detected depending on the location of

the key and the surrounding radio wave

conditions. In this case, the key confine-

ment prevention function cannot be acti-

vated, causing the doors to lock when the

trunk is closed. Make sure to check

where the key is before closing the trunk.

●

The key confinement prevention function

cannot be activated if any one of the

doors is unlocked. In this case, open the

trunk using the trunk opener.

■

Overload protection function

The trunk lid will not operate when exces-

sive load is present on the top of the trunk

lid.

■

Fall-down protection function

While the trunk lid is opening automatically,

applying excessive force to it will stop the

opening operation to prevent the trunk lid

from rapidly falling down.

■

Jam protection function

While the trunk lid is closing automatically,

the trunk lid will stop closing and open if

something gets caught.

124

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■

Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the

mechanical key. (P.522)

If the trunk is unlocked using the mechani-

cal key, the power trunk lid and trunk easy

closer will not be operational. To return

them to an operational state, fully close the

trunk lid by hand.

■

If the smart entry & start system or the

wireless remote control does not oper-

ate properly

Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk.

(P.522)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it

is depleted.

■

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid operating

conditions (if equipped)

●

When the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid

(kick sensor) operation setting is turned

on and the engine switch is turned off

●

When an electronic key is carried within

the operation range

■

Situations in which the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid may not operate prop-

erly (if equipped)

In the following situations, the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid may not operate properly:

●

When a foot remains under the rear

bumper

●

If the rear bumper is strongly hit with a

foot or is touched for a while

If the rear bumper has been touched for a

while, wait for a short time before

attempting to operate the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid again.

●

When standing excessively close to the

rear bumper

●

When an external radio wave source

interferes with the communication

between the electronic key and the vehi-

cle (P.127)

●

When the vehicle is parked near an elec-

trical noise source which affects the sen-

sitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid,

such as a pay parking spot, gas station,

electrically heated road, or fluorescent

light

●

When the vehicle is near a TV tower,

electric power plant, radio station, large

display, airport or other facility that gen-

erates strong radio waves or electrical

noise

●

When a large amount of water is applied

to the rear bumper, such as when the

vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain

●

When mud, snow, ice, etc. is attached to

the rear bumper

●

When the vehicle has been parked for a

while near objects that may move and

contact the rear bumper, such as plants

●

When an accessory is installed to the rear

bumper

If an accessory has been installed, turn the

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor)

operation setting off.

■

Preventing unintentional operation of

the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if

equipped)

When an electronic key is in the operation

detection area, the Hands Free Power Trunk

Lid may operate unintentionally, so be care-

ful in the following situations:

●

When a large amount of water is applied

to the rear bumper, such as when the

vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain

●

When dirt is wiped off the rear bumper

●

When a small animal or small object, such

as a ball, moves under the rear bumper

●

When an object is moved from under the

rear bumper

●

If someone is swinging their legs while sit-

ting on the rear bumper

●

If the legs or another part of someone’s

body contacts the rear bumper while

passing by the vehicle

●

When the vehicle is parked near an elec-

trical noise source which affects the sen-

sitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid,

such as a pay parking spot, gas station,

electrically heated road, or fluorescent

light

●

When the vehicle is near a TV tower,

electric power plant, radio station, large

125

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

display, airport or other facility that gen-

erates strong radio waves or electrical

noise

●

When the vehicle is parked in a place

where objects such as plants are near the

rear bumper

●

If luggage, etc. is set near the rear

bumper

●

If accessories or a vehicle cover is

installed/removed near the rear bumper

●

When the vehicle is being towed

To prevent unintentional operation, turn the

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor)

operation setting off.

■

Open door warning buzzer

P.117

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

The trunk opener switch can be tem-

porarily disabled to protect luggage

stored in the trunk against theft.

Turn the main switch in the glove box

off to disable the trunk opener.

Off

The trunk lid cannot be opened even with

the wireless remote control, entry function

or Hands Free Power Trunk Lid.

■

When leaving a key to the vehicle with a

parking attendant

P.113

Luggage security system

126

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■

Antenna location

Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna inside the trunk

Antenna outside the trunk

■

Effective range (areas within which the

electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the

electronic key is within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.)

of an outside door handle. (Only the doors

detecting the key can be operated.)

When opening the trunk

The system can be operated when the

electronic key is within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.)

of the trunk release button.

When starting the engine or changing

engine switch modes

The system can be operated when the

electronic key is inside the vehicle.

■

Alarms and warning messages

An alarm sounds and warning messages

are displayed on the multi-information dis-

play to protect against unexpected acci-

dents or theft of the vehicle resulting from

erroneous operation. When a warning mes-

sage is displayed, take appropriate meas-

ures based on the displayed message.

(P.515)

When only an alarm sounds, circumstances

and correction procedures are as follows.

●

When an exterior alarm sounds once for

5 seconds

Smart entry & start system

The following operations can be

performed simply by carrying the

electronic key (including the card

key) on your person, for example in

your pocket. The driver should

always carry the electronic key.

Locks and unlocks the doors

(P.114)

Opens the trunk (P.121)

Starts the engine (P.216)

127

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

●

When an interior alarm sounds continu-

ously

■

If “Key Detected in Vehicle” is shown on

the multi-information display

An attempt was made to lock the doors

using the smart entry & start system while

the electronic key was still inside the vehi-

cle. Retrieve the electronic key from the

vehicle and lock the doors again.

■

Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be acti-

vated in order to prevent the electronic key

battery and the battery from being dis-

charged while the vehicle is not in operation

for a long time.

●

In the following situations, the smart entry

& start system may take some time to

unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an

area of approximately 2 m (6 ft.) of the

outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or

longer.

• The smart entry & start system has not

been used for 5 days or longer.

●

If the smart entry & start system has not

been used for 14 days or longer, the

doors cannot be unlocked at any doors

except the driver’s door. In this case, take

hold of the driver’s door handle, or use

the wireless remote control or the

mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

■

Turning an electronic key to bat-

tery-saving mode

When battery-saving mode is set, battery

depletion is minimized by stopping the elec-

tronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and holding

. Confirm that the electronic key indica-

tor flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the

smart entry & start system cannot be used.

To cancel the function, press any of the elec-

tronic key buttons.

■

Conditions affecting operation

The smart entry & start system uses weak

radio waves. In the following situations, the

communication between the electronic key

and the vehicle may be affected, preventing

the smart entry & start system, wireless

remote control and engine immobilizer sys-

tem from operating properly. (Ways of cop-

ing: P.521)

●

When the electronic key battery is

depleted

●

Near a TV tower, electric power plant,

gas station, radio station, large display,

Situation Correction

procedure

An attempt was made to

lock the vehicle while a

door was open.

Close all of the

doors and lock

the doors

again.

The trunk was closed

while the electronic key

was still inside the trunk

and all the doors were

locked.

Retrieve the

electronic key

from the trunk

and close the

trunk lid.

Situation Correction

procedure

The engine switch was

turned to ACCESSORY

mode while the driver’s

door was open (The

driver’s door was opened

when the engine switch

was in ACCESSORY

mode).

Turn the engine

switch off and

close the

driver’s door.

The engine switch was

turned off while the

driver’s door was open.

Close the

driver’s door.

128

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

airport or other facility that generates

strong radio waves or electrical noise

●

When carrying a portable radio, cellular

phone, cordless phone or other wireless

communication device

●

When the electronic key is in contact

with, or is covered by the following metal-

lic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil

inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

•Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

●

When other wireless keys (that emit radio

waves) are being used nearby

●

When carrying the electronic key

together with the following devices that

emit radio waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a

wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital

assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

●

If window tint with a metallic content or

metallic objects are attached to the rear

window

●

When the electronic key is placed near a

battery charger or electronic devices

●

When the vehicle is parked in a pay park-

ing spot where radio waves are emitted.

■

Note for the entry function

●

Even when the electronic key is within the

effective range (detection areas), the sys-

tem may not operate properly in the fol-

lowing cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the win-

dow or outside door handle, near the

ground, or in a high place when the doors

are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or

in a high place, or too close to the center

of the rear bumper when the trunk is

opened.

• The electronic key is on the instrument

panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the

door pockets or glove box when the

engine is started or engine switch modes

are changed.

●

Do not leave the electronic key on top of

the instrument panel or near the door

pockets when exiting the vehicle.

Depending on the radio wave reception

conditions, it may be detected by the

antenna outside the cabin and the doors

will become lockable from the outside,

possibly trapping the electronic key

inside the vehicle.

●

As long as the electronic key is within the

effective range, the doors may be locked

or unlocked by anyone. However, only

the doors detecting the electronic key

can be used to unlock the vehicle.

●

Even if the electronic key is not inside the

vehicle, it may be possible to start the

engine if the electronic key is near the

window.

●

The doors may unlock or lock if a large

amount of water splashes on the door

handle, such as in the rain or in a car

wash, when the electronic key is within

the effective range. (The doors will auto-

matically be locked after approximately

30 seconds if the doors are not opened

and closed.)

●

If the wireless remote control is used to

lock the doors when the electronic key is

near the vehicle, there is a possibility that

the door may not be unlocked by the

entry function. (Use the wireless remote

control to unlock the doors.)

●

Touching the door lock sensor while

wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock

operation.

●

If the door handle becomes wet while the

electronic key is within the effective

range, the door may lock and unlock

repeatedly. In this case, follow the follow-

ing correction procedures to wash the

vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 2 m

(6 ft.) or more away from the vehicle.

(Take care to ensure that the key is not

stolen.)

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving

mode to disable the smart entry & start

system. (P.127)

129

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

●

If the electronic key is inside the vehicle

and a door handle becomes wet during a

car wash, a message may be shown on

the multi-information display and a

buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To

turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

●

The lock sensor may not work properly if

it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud,

etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to

operate it again.

●

A sudden approach to the effective

range or door handle may prevent the

doors from being unlocked. In this case,

return the door handle to the original

position and check that the doors unlock

before pulling the door handle again.

●

If there is another electronic key in the

detection area, it may take slightly longer

to unlock the doors after the door handle

is gripped.

■

When the vehicle is not driven for

extended periods

●

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not

leave the electronic key within 2 m (6 ft.)

of the vehicle.

●

The smart entry & start system can be

deactivated in advance.

●

Setting the electronic key to battery-sav-

ing mode helps to reduce key battery

depletion. (P.127)

■

To operate the system properly

●

Make sure to carry the electronic key

when operating the system. Do not get

the electronic key too close to the vehicle

when operating the system from the out-

side of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding

condition of the electronic key, the key may

not be detected correctly and the system

may not operate properly. (The alarm may

go off accidentally, or the door lock pre-

vention function may not operate.)

●

Do not leave the electronic key inside the

trunk.

The key confinement prevention function

may not operate, depending on the loca-

tion of the key (the inside edge of the

trunk), conditions (inside a metal bag,

close to metallic objects) and the radio

waves in the surrounding area. (P.123)

■

If the smart entry & start system does

not operate properly

●

Locking and unlocking the doors and

trunk: P.521

●

Starting the engine: P.523

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

■

If the smart entry & start system has

been deactivated in a customized set-

ting

●

Locking and unlocking the doors and

opening the trunk:

Use the wireless remote control or

mechanical key. (P.114, 121, 521)

●

Starting the engine and changing engine

switch modes: P.523

●

Stopping the engine: P.217

130

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■

Certification for the smart entry & start system

131

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

132

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

133

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

134

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

135

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

136

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

137

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

138

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

139

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

140

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

141

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

142

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

143

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

144

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

145

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

146

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

147

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

148

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

149

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

150

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

151

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

152

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

153

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

154

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

155

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

156

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

157

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

158

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

159

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

160

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

161

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

162

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

163

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

164

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

WARNING

■

Caution regarding interference with

electronic devices

●

People with implantable cardiac pace-

makers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should

maintain a reasonable distance

between themselves and the smart

entry & start system antennas.

(P.126)

The radio waves may affect the opera-

tion of such devices. If necessary, the

entry function can be disabled. Ask

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details, such as the fre-

quency of radio waves and timing of

the emitted radio waves. Then, consult

your doctor to see if you should disa-

ble the entry function.

●

Users of any electrical medical device

other than implantable cardiac pace-

makers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should con-

sult the manufacturer of the device for

information about its operation under

the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected

effects on the operation of such medi-

cal devices.

Ask any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details on disabling the entry

function.

165

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

3-3.Adjusting the seats

■

Seat adjustment switches

Seat position adjustment

Seatback angle adjustment

Head restraint height adjustment (if

equipped) (P.182)

Front seats

WARNING

■

When adjusting the seat position

●

Take care when adjusting the seat

position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving

seat.

●

Do not put your hands under the seat

or near the moving parts to avoid

injury.

Fingers or hands may become

jammed in the seat mechanism.

●

Make sure to leave enough space

around the feet so they do not get

stuck.

■

Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap

belt during a collision, do not recline the

seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may

slide past the hips and apply restraint

forces directly to the abdomen, or your

neck may contact the shoulder belt,

increasing the risk of death or serious

injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while

driving as the seat may unexpectedly

move and cause the driver to lose control

of the vehicle.

■

Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the driver’s seat or rear seat

Do not operate the front passenger’s seat

when a passenger is seated in it. In addi-

tion, do not let anyone sit down in the

front passenger’s seat while the seat is

being operated or when the head

restraint is being folded. The front pas-

senger may catch their legs between the

instrument panel and seat, or the head

restraint may interfere with their head,

resulting in injury.

■

When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward

If the outside rear view mirror is difficult

to see, due to the position of the front

passenger’s seat, move the front passen-

ger’s seat to an appropriate position.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the

vehicle and cause an accident, resulting

in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■

Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the driver’s seat or rear seat

Before operating the front passenger’s

seat, make sure that there is no luggage

or any other objects on the seat or in the

footwell that could prevent its operation.

Such items may result in excess force

being applied, causing damage to the

seat and/or the luggage.

Adjustment procedure

166

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-

ment

Vertical height adjustment

Lumbar support adjustment

Seat cushion length adjustment (if

equipped)

■

Center Display

1Press the seat switch.

2Using the Remote Touch pad,

select “Driver seat adjustment” or

“Passenger seat adjustment”.

3Select the button for the desired

adjustment.

Head restraint adjustment (if

equipped) (P.182)

Shoulder bolster adjustment (if

equipped)

Lumbar support adjustment

Pelvic support adjustment

Seatback side bolster adjustment (if

equipped)

Seat cushion side bolster adjust-

ment (if equipped)

Hip support adjustment (if

equipped)

4Perform adjustment using the dis-

played buttons.

The seat will move while a button is

selected.

■

When adjusting the front seats

While adjusting a front seat, to avoid con-

tact with the ceiling, instrument panel or

rear seats, the operation of the seat may be

restricted or parts of the seat other than that

being adjusted may move.

■

Operation after the engine switch is

turned off

After a certain time elapses after the engine

switch is turned off, the following parts of

the front seats will move to their neutral

positions.

●

Shoulder bolster (if equipped)

●

Lumbar support

●

Pelvic support

●

Seatback side bolster (if equipped)

●

Seat cushion side bolster (if equipped)

●

Hip support (if equipped)

■

Automatic angle adjustment of the rear

displays (if equipped)

When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the

rear display will be adjusted automatically

to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the

rear display from the rear seat.

■

Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen-

ger seats (vehicles with Lexus Safety

System + A or Lexus Safety System +)

P.274, 286

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

167

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

(P.546)

■

Using the driver’s seat adjustment

switches to adjust the front passen-

ger’s seat (front passenger mode)

The mode of the driver’s seat adjust-

ment switches can be changed to

adjust the front passenger’s seat.

1Press the mode change button on

the driver’s side door.

The indicator will illuminate when front

passenger mode is selected.

2Using the seat adjustment switches

on the driver’s seat, adjust the front

passenger’s seat.

To cancel front passenger mode, press the

mode change button again.

Front passenger mode will be canceled

automatically if the driver’s seat adjustment

switches are not operated for approxi-

mately 30 seconds.

■

Using the Center Display (vehicles

with a foldable head restraint)

1Press the seat switch.

2Select the button for the desired

operation.

“Full front” of “Passenger”: Move the

front passenger’s seat forward and folds

the seatback and head restraint.

“Return” of “Passenger”: Move the

front passenger’s seat rearward and the

seatback and head restraint to the upright

position.

If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s

seat is not in the upright position, it will

move to the upright position before the

front passenger’s seat moves to its upright

position.

Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment

system: If the front passenger’s seat is

moved to the upright position and then

is selected again, the front passenger’s seat

will move rearward.

To stop the front passenger's seat while

it is moving, select the or pas-

senger’s seat operation button or press

the seat switch.

■

Operating the foldable head restraint

using the driver’s seat adjustment

switches in front passenger mode (if

equipped)

●

When the front passenger’s seatback

angle is adjusted using the driver’s seat

Operating the front passenger’s

seat from the driver’s seat

168

3-3. Adjusting the seats

adjustment switches in front passenger

mode, the front passenger’s head

restraint will operate automatically as fol-

lows:

• When the front passenger’s seatback is

moved forward to the upright position,

the head restraint will lower and fold for-

ward when the seatback angle adjust-

ment switch is released.

• When the front passenger’s seatback is

moved backward to the upright position,

the head restraint will move to the upright

position when the seatback angle adjust-

ment switch is released.

●

If any of the following conditions are met,

the front passenger’s head restraint will

not fold forward even though the front

passenger’s seatback angle is being

adjusted using the driver’s seat adjust-

ment switches in front passenger mode:

• The engine switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

• The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front pas-

senger’s seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the engine switch is turned off.

• Vehicles without a rear seat entertain-

ment system:The front passenger’s seat is

in the rear most position.

• The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

• The front passenger’s door is open. (The

front seat will not move forward.)

• The front passenger’s seat is not in the

lowest position.

• The front passenger’s seat seat cushion

(front) is not in the lowest position.

• The front passenger’s seat seat cushion is

extended (if equipped).

●

If either of the following conditions is met,

the front passenger’s head restraint will

not return to the upright position even

though the front passenger’s seatback

angle is being adjusted using the driver’s

seat adjustment switches in front passen-

ger mode:

• The engine switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

• The front passenger’s seat position is

moved to a position forward of the neu-

tral position.

■

Operating the foldable head restraint

using the front passenger’s seat adjust-

ment switches (if equipped)

When the front passenger’s head restraint is

folded forward and the front passenger’s

door is open, if the front passenger’s seat

adjustment switches are used to move the

seat backward or recline the seatback, the

head restraint will move to the upright posi-

tion automatically when the switch is

released.

To stop the operation of the front passen-

ger’s head restraint part-way, perform any

of the following operations:

●

Operate any front passenger’s seat

adjustment switch.

The head restraint will stop when the seat

position adjustment switch or seatback

angle adjustment switch is operated to

move the seat backward or recline the

seatback, and will resume operating when

the switch is released.

●

Press the “SET” button.

●

Press the “1”, “2” or “3” button.

●

Press the seat switch.

■

Operation of the front passenger’s seat

using the Center Display will be

canceled when (vehicles with a foldable

head restraint)

In the following situations, the front passen-

ger’s seat cannot be operated using the

Center Display:

●

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

●

The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front pas-

senger’s seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the engine switch is turned off.

●

The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

169

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

tened.

●

The front passenger’s door is open. (The

front seat will not move forward.)

■

When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward

By reclining the front passenger’s seat

seatback, the forward view of the rear pas-

senger can be improved.

1Press and hold to move the front

passenger’s seat forward and fold

the seatback forward.

2Press and hold to move the front

passenger’s seat backward and

move the seatback to the upright

position.

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Passenger”.

3Touch the button for the desired

operation.

When the operating conditions are not

met, the buttons will be grayed out.

Move the front passenger’s seat

forward and fold the seatback for-

ward.

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,

the head restraint will also fold forward.

To stop the front passenger seat while it is

moving, touch “STOP”.

Move the front passenger’s seat

backward and the seatback to the

upright position.

If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s

seat is not in the upright position, it will

move to the upright position before the

front passenger’s seat moves to its previous

position.

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,

the head restraint will also move to the

upright position.

Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment

system: If the front passenger’s seat is

moved to the upright position and then

is selected again, the front passenger’s seat

will move rearward.

To stop the front passenger seat while it is

moving, touch “STOP”.

Move the front passenger’s seat

forward or backward

The seat will move while a button is

Operating the front passenger’s

seat from the rear seat (vehicles

without power rear seat)

Operating the front passenger’s

seat from the rear seat (vehicles

with power rear seat)

170

3-3. Adjusting the seats

touched and held.

Adjust the angle of the front pas-

senger’s seat seatback

The seatback will move while a button is

touched and held.

: Vehicles with a foldable head restraint

■

Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the rear seat

●

In the following situations, the front pas-

senger’s seat cannot be operated using

the Rear Multi Operation Panel:

• The engine switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

• The rear seat belt is not fastened and

weight is not detected on the rear seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until a rear

door is opened then closed or the engine

switch is turned off and the doors are

locked.

• The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front pas-

senger’s seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the engine switch is turned off.

• The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

• The front passenger’s door is open. (The

front seat will not move forward.)

: Vehicles with foldable head restraint:

Even when the engine switch is in

ACCESSORY mode or off, the front

passenger seat position and seatback

angle can be adjusted.

●

If the rear armrest is stowed while the

seat position is being adjusted, the opera-

tion will stop.

■

Canceling an operation

To cancel an operation, press and hold the

button of the Rear Multi Opera-

tion Panel or press it 3 times in quick suc-

cession.

■

When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward

P.169

Pneumatic chambers built into the

front seat apply pressure to the occu-

pant’s body at different modes and

intensities.

1Press the seat switch.

2Using the Remote Touch pad,

select “Driver seat refresh” or “Pas-

senger seat refresh”.

3Select the desired mode.

“Centripetal”

Applies pressure sequentially from the

front of the seat cushion to top of the

seatback

“Centrifugal”

Applies pressure sequentially from the top

of the seatback to the front of the seat

cushion

“Upper body”

Front seat refresh system (if

equipped)

171

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

Applies pressure sequentially from the bot-

tom to the top of the seatback

“Lower body”

Applies pressure sequentially from the

front to the back of the seat cushion

“Lumbar”

Applies pressure sequentially from the bot-

tom to the top of the lumbar area of the

seatback

4Select the desired intensity and

then confirm the setting.

The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.

To stop the operation select “Stop”.

If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the

front seat refresh system for that seat.

■

Refresh system

●

Operating conditions

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

• The temperature in the cabin is not

extremely high.

• For the front passenger’s seat: The weight

of an occupant is detected on the front

passenger’s seat or the front passenger’s

seat belt is fastened.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the engine switch is turned off.

●

Automatic stop function

• The operation will be canceled automati-

cally after approximately 15 minutes.

•If the power easy access system begins

operating, the front seat refresh system

will stop.

WARNING

■

Important points while driving

Do not adjust the driver’s seat refresh

system while driving.

Using it may affect your ability to control

the vehicle, possibly leading to an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious injury.

■

Using the refresh system

●

Those who are pregnant, have recently

given birth, or suffer from ailments

requiring rest (heart disease etc.)

should consult a doctor before use.

●

Do not allow children to use the

refresh function.

●

Do not use immediately after consum-

ing a meal or alcohol, or for an

extended period of time.

●

If you feel sick while using the refresh

function, immediately discontinue use.

172

3-3. Adjusting the seats

:If equipped

■

Automatic operation

The seat can be moved to preset posi-

tions.

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Left” or “Right”.

3Touch the desired preset button.

When the operating conditions are not

Power rear seat*

WARNING

■

When adjusting the seat position

●

Take care when adjusting the seat

position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving

seat.

●

When adjusting the rear seat with an

ottoman, make sure there is sufficient

space so that a foot does not get

caught between the ottoman and front

passenger seat. (If equipped)

●

Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment

system: When the rear seat is moving

to the Entertainment Mode position,

do not allow hands near the rear dis-

play. Otherwise, a hand or finger may

be caught, possibly causing injury.

■

Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap

belt during a collision, do not recline the

seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may

slide past the hips and apply restraint

forces directly to the abdomen, or your

neck may contact the shoulder belt,

increasing the risk of death or serious

injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while

driving as the seat may unexpectedly

move and cause the driver to lose control

of the vehicle.

■

Using the ottoman (if equipped)

●

Do not sit on the ottoman.

If someone sits on the ottoman, the seat

belt cannot be fitted properly, and they

may be thrown from the seat, resulting in

death or serious injury in the event of an

accident or sudden braking.

●

When getting in or out of the vehicle,

retract the ottoman. If the ottoman is

not retracted, it may cause a fall, result-

ing in injury.

●

Do not operate the ottoman when the

vehicle is moving.

●

Do not allow anyone to put their hands

or feet under the rear seat when stow-

ing the ottoman.

NOTICE

■

To prevent an ottoman malfunction (if

equipped)

●

Do not place any objects in the rear

seat footwell that could prevent the

operation of the ottoman.

●

Do not place heavy luggage on the

ottoman.

●

Do not place any objects under the

ottoman while it is raised for use. These

objects may interfere with the ottoman

being folded, causing damage to the

ottoman or the objects themselves.

■

To prevent a rear display malfunction

(if equipped)

Do not attempt to move the rear display

by hand, as doing so may damage the

rear display.

Adjustment procedure

173

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

met, the preset buttons will be grayed out.

/ : Moves the rear seat

to the upright position (Business

Mode)

/ : Moves the rear seat

with an ottoman to a slightly reclined

position (Entertainment Mode) (if

equipped)

Vehicles without a rear seat entertainment

system: Moves the front passenger’s seat

forward.

Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment

system: Moves the front passenger’s seat

and rear display to allow the rear display to

be comfortably viewed.

: Moves the rear seat with an

ottoman to a deeply reclined position

(Relaxation Mode) (if equipped)

Moves the front passenger’s seat forward

and folds the seatback and head restraint

forward.

To stop the front passenger seat while it is

moving, touch “STOP”.

■

Manual operation

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Left” or “Right”.

3Touch the button for the desired

adjustment.

Select the part you wish to adjust.

Adjust the position of the selected

part.

The part will move while a button is

touched.

■

Adjustment of the rear seat

●

When a rear seat is close to a front seat,

the operation of the rear seat may be

restricted.

●

If the rear armrest is stowed while the

seat position is being adjusted, the opera-

tion will stop.

■

Operating conditions of Business Mode

When the rear seat belt is not fastened and

weight is not detected on the rear seat,

Business Mode cannot be selected.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until a rear

door is opened then closed or the engine

switch is turned off and the doors are

locked.

■

The rear seat with an ottoman cannot be

moved to Entertainment Mode/Relaxa-

tion Mode when (if equipped)

In the following situations, Entertainment

Mode or Relaxation Mode cannot be

selected:

●

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY

174

3-3. Adjusting the seats

mode or off.

●

The rear seat belt is not fastened and

weight is not detected on the rear seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until a rear

door is opened then closed or the engine

switch is turned off and the doors are

locked.

●

The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front pas-

senger’s seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the engine switch is turned off.

●

The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

●

The front passenger’s door is open.

■

When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward

P.169

■

Automatic angle adjustment of the rear

displays (if equipped)

When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the

rear display will be adjusted automatically

to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the

rear display from the rear seat.

■

Operation after the engine switch is

turned off

After a certain time elapses after the engine

switch is turned off, the following parts of

the rear seats will move to their neutral

positions.

●

Shoulder bolster

●

Lumbar/pelvic support

■

Canceling an operation

To cancel an operation, press and hold the

button of the Rear Multi Opera-

tion Panel or press it 3 times in quick suc-

cession.

■

Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen-

ger seats (vehicles with Lexus Safety

System + A or Lexus Safety System +)

P.274, 286

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

1Press the seat switch.

2Select “Return” of “Rear”.

The rear seat will move to the upright posi-

tion.

■

Operation of the rear seats from the

front seats

In the following situations, the rear seats

cannot be operated from the front seats.

●

When the armrest is stowed and weight

of an occupant, heavy object, etc. is

detected on a rear seat

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until a rear

door is opened then closed or the engine

switch is turned off and the doors are

locked.

●

When the armrest is stowed and a rear

seat belt is fastened.

Returning the rear seat from the

front seats

175

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

The rear seat relaxation system utilizes

pneumatic chambers and dedicated

heaters, and applies pressure to the

occupant’s body at different modes

and intensities.

To display the rear seat relaxation sys-

tem screen, display the home screen

on the Rear Multi Operation Panel

(P.398) and then touch “Relaxa-

tion”.

Touch to select the desired rear

seat.

Touch to select the desired mode.

When a button is touched, operation will

begin.

Touch to adjust the intensity.

The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.

Touch to turn the spot heaters

on/off.

Touch to stop the operation.

If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the

rear seat relaxation system for that seat.

■

Relaxation system

●

Operating conditions

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

• The temperature in the cabin is not

extremely high.

• The weight of an occupant is detected on

the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fas-

tened.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until a rear

door is opened then closed or the engine

switch is turned off and the doors are

locked.

●

Automatic stop function

• The operation will be canceled automati-

cally after approximately 15 minutes.

• If the door for a seat that the relaxation

system is currently being used is opened,

the relaxation system will stop operating.

The following functions will cause the

WARNING

■

When returning the rear seats to the

neutral position

To avoid injuring the rear passengers,

wait until they have gotten out of the

vehicle before operating the switch.

Rear seat relaxation system (if

equipped)

WARNING

■

Using the relaxation system

●

Those who are pregnant, have recently

given birth, or suffer from ailments

requiring rest (heart disease etc.)

should consult a doctor before use.

●

Do not allow children to use the relax-

ation function.

●

Do not use immediately after consum-

ing a meal or alcohol, or for an

extended period of time.

●

If you feel sick while using the relaxa-

tion function, immediately discontinue

use.

Automatic Seat Operation

176

3-3. Adjusting the seats

rear seats to move automatically.

■

Seat return function linked to the

door opening operation

The rear seat will return to the upright

position automatically when the rear

door is opened for easier entry and exit

of the vehicle.

For the rear seat with an ottoman (if

equipped): When the rear door on the

side with the rear seat with an ottoman

is opened, the seatback of the rear seat

with an ottoman will move to a more

upright position. The seatback will

move to the upright position after the

door is closed and the system deter-

mines that the rear passenger has

exited.

However, if the armrest is stowed, the

rear seat will not move.

■

Shift-linked rear seat reclining

function

When the shift position is shifted from

P, to enhance rear visibility for the

driver, the rear seats will recline slightly.

However, the shift-linked rear seat

reclining function will not operate in

the following situations:

The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on a rear

seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until a rear

door is opened then closed or the engine

switch is turned off and the doors are

locked.

A rear seat belt is fastened.

A rear door is open.

The armrest is stowed.

When a front seat is close to a rear

seat, the rear seats may not operate or

the range of movement may be

restricted.

■

Changing automatic seat opera-

tion settings

The settings can be changed on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel.

(P.398)

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Left” or “Right”.

3Touch .

4Touch a button to change the set-

ting.

Rear right seat automatic operation

Rear right seatback movement

amount when door-linked rear seat

return function operates

Rear left seat automatic operation

: Vehicles with a rear seat with an ottoman

177

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

The seat and steering wheel are auto-

matically adjusted to allow the driver to

enter and exit the vehicle easily.



Driver’s seat

When all of the following have been

performed, the seat and steering

wheel are automatically adjusted to a

position that allows driver to enter and

exit the vehicle easily.

• The shift position has been shifted to

• The engine switch has been turned

off.

• The driver’s seat belt has been

unfastened.

When the driver’s seat adjustment

switches are in front passenger mode

(P.167), the seat and steering wheel will

not move.

On vehicles with adjustable seat cush-

ion side bolsters, when the driver’s

door is opened with the engine switch

off, the seat cushion side bolsters will

lower if they are in the default position.

When any of the following has been

performed, the seat and steering

wheel automatically return to their

original positions.

• The engine switch has been turned

to ACCESSORY mode or IGNI-

TION ON mode.

• The driver’s seat belt has been fas-

tened.



Front passenger’s seat

If all of the following have been per-

formed while the vehicle is stopped,

the lumbar support, pelvic support,

shoulder bolster (if equipped),

seatback side bolster (if equipped),

and hip support (if equipped) will be

moved to their default position. On

vehicles with adjustable seat cushion

side bolsters, the seat cushion side bol-

sters will lower.

• The passenger’s seat belt has been

unfastened.

• The front passenger’s door is

opened.

Driving position memory

This feature automatically adjusts

the positions of the front seats,

steering wheel, outside rear view

mirrors and head-up display (if

equipped) to make entering and

exiting the vehicle easier or to suit

your preferences.

Up to 3 different driving positions

can be recorded.

Each electronic key (including a

card key) can be registered to

recall your preferred driving posi-

tion.

Power easy access system

178

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■

Operation of the power easy access sys-

tem

●

When exiting the vehicle, the power easy

access system may not operate if the seat

is already in the rearmost or uppermost

position or close to the rear seat.

●

If the seat position is adjusted during

power easy access system operation, the

automatic operation will stop. (The seat

will change to manual operation.)

●

If the seat position is adjusted during or

after the power easy access system oper-

ation when the driver is exiting the vehi-

cle, the power easy access system will not

operate when entering the vehicle.

■

Seat cushion side bolster adjustment (if

equipped)

If the seat cushion side bolsters have been

lowered, when the front door is closed, the

seat cushion side bolsters will move to their

default position.

If the seat is adjusted while the seat cushion

side bolsters are moving to the default posi-

tion, their movement will be temporarily

suspended. (The seat cushion side bolsters

will move to the default position after a cer-

tain amount of time.)

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

2Check that the shift position is in P.

3Adjust the driver’s seat, steering

wheel, outside rear view mirrors

and head-up display (if equipped)

to the desired positions.

4While pressing the “SET” button, or

within 3 seconds after the “SET”

button is pressed, press button “1”,

“2” or “3” until the buzzer sounds.

If the selected button has already been

preset, the previously recorded position

will be overwritten.

When the driver’s seat adjustment

switches are in front passenger mode

(P.167), the position of the driver’s seat

cannot be registered.

To record the position of the front pas-

senger’s seat, adjust the front passen-

ger’s seat to the desired position and

perform step 4 using the buttons on

the front passenger’s side.

■

In order to correctly use the driving

position memory function

If a seat position is already in the furthest

possible position and the seat is operated in

the same direction, the recorded position

may be slightly different when it is recalled.

1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

Recording a driving position into

memory

WARNING

■

Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that

the seat does not strike the rear passen-

ger or squeeze your body against the

steering wheel.

Recalling a driving position

179

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

2Check that the shift position is in P.

3Press one of the buttons for the

driving position you want to recall

until the buzzer sounds.

When the driver’s seat adjustment

switches are in front passenger mode

(P.167), a driving position cannot be

recalled.

■

To stop the position recall operation

part-way through

Perform any of the following operations:

●

Press the “SET” button.

●

Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.

●

Press the mode change button.

●

Operate any of the seat adjustment

switches (only cancels seat position

recall).

●

Operate the tilt and telescopic steering

control switch (only cancels steering

wheel position recall).

■

Recalling a driving position

If a driving position is recalled, the move-

ment of the front seat may be stopped part-

way if the seat moves close to the rear seat.

If a rear passenger is determined to be in

the vehicle, the rearward movement of the

front seat may be stopped partway to

ensure sufficient space for the rear passen-

ger.

■

Recalling the front passenger’s seat

position (vehicles with a rear seat with

an ottoman)

If the ottoman of the rear seat is extended,

the front passenger’s seat position cannot

be recalled.

■

Operating the driving position memory

after turning the engine switch off

Driver’s seat:

Recorded seat positions can be activated

up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is

opened and another 60 seconds after it is

closed again.

Front passenger’s seat:

Recorded seat positions can be recalled up

to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s

door is opened.

■

When the recorded seat position can-

not be recalled

The seat position may not be recalled in

some situations when the seat position is

recorded in a certain range. For details,

contact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button

“1”, “2” or “3” before performing the

following:

Carry only the key you want to register,

and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the

driving position cannot be recorded

properly.

1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

2Check that the shift position is in P.

3Recall the driving position that you

want to record.

Registering/canceling/recall a

driving position to an electronic

key (including a card key) (mem-

ory recall function)

180

3-3. Adjusting the seats

4While pressing the recalled button,

press and hold the door lock switch

(either lock or unlock) until the

buzzer sounds.

If the button could not be registered, the

buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

■

Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel

and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the

driving position cannot be canceled

properly.

1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

2Check that the shift position is in P.

3While pressing the “SET” button,

press and hold the door lock switch

(either lock or unlock) until the

buzzer sounds twice.

If the button could not be canceled, the

buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

■

Recall procedure

1Make sure that the doors are

locked before recalling the driving

position. Carry the electronic key

that has been registered to the driv-

ing position, and then unlock and

open the driver’s door using the

smart entry & start system or wire-

less remote control.

The driving position will move to the

recorded position (not including the steer-

ing wheel and head-up display [if

equipped]). However, the seat will move to

a position slightly behind the recorded

position in order to make entering the vehi-

cle easier.

If the driving position is in a position that

has already been recorded, the seat and

outside rear view mirrors will not move.

2Turn the engine switch to ACCES-

SORY mode or IGNITION ON

mode, or fasten a seat belt.

The seat, steering wheel and head-up dis-

play (if equipped) will move to the

recorded position.

■

Recalling the driving position using the

memory recall function

●

Different driving positions can be regis-

tered for each electronic key. Therefore,

the driving position that is recalled may

be different depending on the key being

carried.

●

If a door other than the driver’s door is

unlocked with the smart entry & start sys-

tem, the driving position cannot be

recalled. In this case, press the driving

position button which has been set.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

181

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

:If equipped

1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

2Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.

3Touch “Left” or “Right”.

4Adjust the rear seat to the desired

position and then touch “SET”.

5Touch “1” or “2”.

If the preset is being used, the previously

recorded seat position will be overwritten.

■

In order to correctly use the position

memory function

If a seat position is already in the furthest

possible position and the seat is operated in

the same direction, the recorded position

may be slightly different when it is recalled.

1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

2Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.

3Touch “Left” or “Right”.

4Touch “1” or “2”.

When the operating conditions are not

met, the buttons will be grayed out.

To stop the operation touch “STOP”.

If the seat is adjusted while a memorized

position is being recalled, the automatic

operation will stop. (The seat will change to

manual operation.)

■

Operating condition

The weight of an occupant is detected on

the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fas-

tened.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

rear door is opened then closed or the

engine switch is turned off.

■

Recalling a rear seat position

If a memorized rear seat position is recalled,

the seat may stop part-way to ensure suffi-

cient space for the rear passenger.

■

Recalling the ottoman position (if

equipped)

When a seat position is recalled, the otto-

man will not raise or extend. The ottoman

position can only be recalled if the memo-

rized position is lower and shorter than the

current position.

Rear seat position memory*

The rear seat position can be mem-

orized and recalled with the touch

of a button.

Recording a position into mem-

ory

WARNING

■

Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that

the rear passengers do not strike the

front seats.

Recalling the memorized posi-

tion

182

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■

Front seats



Center Display

1Press the seat switch.

2Using the Remote Touch pad,

select “Driver seat adjustment” or

“Passenger seat adjustment”.

3Select then the desired adjust-

ment button , , , or to

adjust the head restraint.

Backward

Down

Forward

The head restraint moves while the adjust-

ment button is selected.

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all

seats.

Vehicles with power rear seat: The

head restraint for the rear center

seat is integrated into the seatback

and cannot be adjusted.

WARNING

■

Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions

regarding the head restraints. Failure to

do so may result in death or serious

injury.

●

Use the head restraints designed for

each respective seat.

●

Adjust the head restraints to the cor-

rect position at all times.

●

Manual type: After adjusting the head

restraints, push down on them and

make sure they are locked in position.

●

Do not drive with the head restraints

removed.

Adjusting a head restraint verti-

cally and horizontally (power

head restraints)

183

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving



Seat adjustment switches (on some

models)

1Up

2Down

■

Rear seats

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Left” or “Right”.

3Touch then the desired adjust-

ment button , , , or to

adjust the head restraint.

Backward

Down

Forward

The head restraint moves while the adjust-

ment button is touched.

1Up

Pull the head restraints up.

2Down

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the lock release button .

■

Front seat head restraints (power head

restraints)

Depending on the position of the front seat,

the front head restraint may not be able to

be adjusted upward if it is close to the ceil-

ing.

■

Adjusting the height of the head

restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are

adjusted so that the center of the head

restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

■

Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

(manual head restraints)

Always raise the head restraint one level

from the stowed position when using.

D E

Adjusting a head restraint verti-

cally (manual head restraints)

184

3-3. Adjusting the seats

The position of the head restraint can

be adjusted forward in 4 stages.

If the head restraint is pulled forward from

the foremost position, it will return to the

rearmost position.

Push the sides of the head restraint.

Pull the head restraint up while press-

ing the lock release button .

■

Removing the head restraints (power

head restraints)

For removal and installation of the head

restraint, ask any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Align the head restraint with the instal-

lation holes and push it down to the

lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button

when lowering the head restraint.

Adjusting a head restraint hori-

zontally (manual head restraints)

Adjusting the side supports (if

equipped)

Removing the head restraints

(manual head restraints)

Installing the head restraints

(manual head restraints)

185

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

3-4.Adjusting t he steering wheel an d mirrors

Operating the switch moves the steer-

ing wheel in the following directions:

1Up

2Down

3Toward the driver

4Away from the driver

■

The steering wheel can be adjusted

when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode

: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the

steering wheel can be adjusted regard-

less of engine switch mode.

■

Automatic adjustment of the steering

position

A desired steering position can be entered

to memory and recalled automatically by

the driving position memory system.

(P.177)

■

Power easy access system

The steering wheel and driver’s seat move

in accordance with engine switch mode and

the driver’s seat belt condition. (P.177)

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

Press on or close to the mark.

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

WARNING

■

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mis-

handle the vehicle and cause an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

Sounding the horn

186

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

:If equipped

The height of the rear view mirror can

be adjusted to suit your driving pos-

ture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mir-

ror by moving it up and down.

Responding to the level of brightness

of the headlights of vehicles behind, the

reflected light is automatically

reduced.

Turn the automatic anti-glare function

mode on/off

When the automatic anti-glare function is

in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each

time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to

OFF mode. (The indicator also turns

off.)

■

To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly,

do not touch or cover them.

Inside rear view mirror*

The rear view mirror’s position can

be adjusted to enable sufficient

confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view

mirror

WARNING

■

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror

while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the

vehicle and cause an accident, resulting

in death or serious injury.

Anti-glare function

187

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

:If equipped

Camera indicator

Indicates that the camera is operating nor-

mally.

Icon display area

Displays icons, adjusting gauge, etc.

(P.189)

Select button

Press to change the setting of the item you

want to adjust.

Menu button

Press to display the icon display area and

select the item you want to adjust.

Lever

Operate to change between digital mirror

mode and optical mirror mode.

Operate the lever to change between

digital mirror mode and optical mirror

mode.

Digital Rearview Mirror*

The Digital Rearview Mirror is a

system that uses the camera on the

rear of the vehicle and displays its

image on the display of the Digital

Rearview Mirror.

The Digital Rearview Mirror can be

changed between optical mirror

mode and digital mirror mode by

operating the lever.

The Digital Rearview Mirror allows

the driver to see the rear view

despite obstructions, such as the

head restraints, luggage or rear

sunshade ensuring rear visibility.

Also, the rear seats are not dis-

played and privacy of the passen-

gers is enhanced.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■

Before using the Digital Rearview

Mirror

●

Make sure to adjust the mirror before

driving. (P.188)

• Change to optical mirror mode and

adjust the position of the Digital Rear-

view Mirror so that the area behind

your vehicle can be viewed properly.

• Change to digital mirror mode and

adjust the display settings.

●

As the range of the image displayed by

the Digital Rearview Mirror is different

from that of the optical mirror, make

sure to check this difference before

driving.

System components

Changing modes

188

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

1Digital mirror mode

Displays an image of the area behind the

vehicle.

will illuminate in this mode.

2Optical mirror mode

Turns off the display of the Digital Rearview

Mirror allows it to be used as an optical

mirror.

■

Digital mirror mode operating condi-

tion

The engine switch is turned to IGNITION

ON mode.

When the engine switch is changed from

IGNITION ON mode to off or ACCES-

SORY mode, the image will disappear after

several seconds.

■

When using the Digital Rearview Mir-

ror in digital mirror mode

●

If it is difficult to see the displayed image

due to light reflected off the Digital Rear-

view Mirror, the camera being dirty, or if

lights of a vehicle behind your vehicle or

the displayed image are bothering you,

change to optical mirror mode.

●

When the trunk is open, the Digital Rear-

view Mirror image may not display prop-

erly. Before driving, make sure the trunk

is closed.

●

If the display is difficult to see due to

reflected light, close the sunshade for the

moon roof or the electronic sunshade for

the panoramic moon roof.

●

Any of the following conditions may

occur when driving in the dark, such as at

night. None of them indicates that a mal-

function has occurred.

• Colors of objects in the displayed image

may differ from their actual color.

• Depending on the height of the lights of

the vehicle behind, the area around the

vehicle may appear white and blurry.

• Automatic image adjustment for brighter

surrounding image may cause flickering.

If it is difficult to see the displayed image or

flickering bothers you, change to optical

mirror mode.

●

The Digital Rearview Mirror may

become hot while it is in digital mirror

mode.

This is not a malfunction.

●

Depending on your physical condition or

age, it may take longer than usual to focus

on the displayed image. In this case,

change to optical mirror mode.

●

Do not let passengers stare at the dis-

played image when the vehicle is being

driven, as doing so may cause motion

sickness.

■

When the system malfunctions

If the symbol shown in the illustration is dis-

played when using the Digital Rearview

Mirror in digital mirror mode, the system

may be malfunctioning. The symbol will dis-

appear in a few seconds. Operate the lever,

change to optical mirror mode and have the

vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

■

Adjusting the mirror height

The height of the rear view mirror can

Adjusting the mirror

189

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

be adjusted to suit your driving pos-

ture.

Change to optical mirror mode, adjust-

ing the height of the rear view mirror by

moving it up and down.

■

Display settings (digital mirror

mode)

Settings of the display in the digital mir-

ror mode, on/off operation of the auto-

matic anti-glare function, etc. can be

changed.

1Press the menu button.

The icons will be displayed.

2Press the menu button repeatedly

and select the item you want to

adjust.

3Press or to change the set-

ting.

The icons will disappear if a button is not

operated for approximately 5 seconds or

more.

: This is a function for the optical mirror

mode, however, the setting can also be

changed while using the digital mirror

mode.

■

Enabling/disabling the automatic

anti-glare function (optical mirror

mode)

The automatic anti-glare function in the

optical mirror mode can be ena-

bled/disabled. The setting can be

changed in both the digital mirror

mode and the optical mirror mode.



When using the digital mirror mode

P.189

Icons Settings

Select to adjust the brightness of

the display.

Select to adjust the area dis-

played up/down.

Select to adjust the area dis-

played to the left/right.

Select to adjust the angle of the

displayed image.

Select to zoom in/out the dis-

played image.

Select to enable/disable the

automatic anti-glare function.

Responding to the brightness of

the headlights of vehicles

behind, the reflected light is

automatically adjusted.

The automatic anti-glare func-

tion is enabled each time the

engine switch is changed to

IGNITION ON mode.

190

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors



When using the optical mirror mode

1Press the menu button.

The icons will be displayed.

2Press the menu button repeatedly

and select .

The setting display will be displayed.

3Press or to enable

(“ON”)/disable (“OFF”) the auto-

matic anti-glare function.

The icons will disappear if a button is not

operated for approximately 5 seconds or

more.

■

Adjusting the display (digital mirror

mode)

●

If the displayed image is adjusted, it may

appear distorted. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

●

If the brightness of the Digital Rearview

Mirror is set too high, it may cause eye

strain. Adjust the Digital Rearview Mirror

to an appropriate brightness. If your eyes

become tired, change to optical mirror

mode.

●

The brightness of the Digital Rearview

Mirror will change automatically accord-

ing to the brightness of the area in front of

your vehicle.

■

To prevent the light sensors from mal-

functioning

To prevent the light sensors from malfunc-

tioning, do not touch or cover them.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■

While driving

●

Do not adjust the position of the Digital

Rearview Mirror or adjust the display

settings while driving.

Stop the vehicle and operate the Digi-

tal Rearview Mirror control switches.

Failure to do so may cause a steering

wheel operation error, resulting in an

unexpected accident.

●

Always pay attention to the vehicle’s

surroundings.

The size of the vehicles and other objects

may look different when in digital mirror

mode and optical mirror mode.

When backing up, make sure to directly

check the safety of the area around your

vehicle, especially behind the vehicle.

Additionally, if a vehicle approaches from

the rear in the dark, such as at night, the

surrounding area may appear dim.

■

To prevent causes of fire

If the driver continues using the Digital

Rearview Mirror while smoke or odor

comes from the mirror, it may result in

fire. Stop using the system immediately

and contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer.

191

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

■

Cleaning the mirror surface

If the mirror surface is dirty, the image

on the display may be difficult to see.

Clean the mirror surface gently using a

soft dry cloth.

■

Cleaning the camera

If the camera lens is dirty or covered

with foreign matter, such as water

droplets, snow, mud, etc., the displayed

image may not be clear. In this case,

rinse the camera lens with a large

quantity of water and then wipe it clean

with a soft cloth dampened with water.

Dirt on the camera lens can be cleaned

by operating the dedicated camera

cleaning washer. (P.243)

■

The camera

The camera for the Digital Rearview Mirror

is located as shown.

Cleaning the Digital Rearview

Mirror

NOTICE

■

To prevent the Digital Rearview Mir-

ror from malfunctioning

●

Do not use detergents, such as thinner,

benzine, and alcohol to clean the mir-

ror. They may discolor, deteriorate or

damage the mirror surface.

●

Do not smoke, use matches, use ciga-

rette lighters or allow open flames

near the mirror. It may damage the

mirror or cause a fire.

●

Do not remove, disassemble or modify

the mirror.

■

To prevent the camera from malfunc-

tioning

●

Observe the following precautions,

otherwise the Digital Rearview Mirror

may not operate properly.

• Do not strike or hit the camera or sub-

ject it to a strong impact, as the camera

installation position and angle may be

changed.

• Do not remove, disassemble or modify

the camera.

• When washing the camera, rinse it

with a large quantity of water and then

wipe it clean with a soft cloth damp-

ened with water.

Do not strongly rub the camera lens,

as it may be scratched and will not be

able to transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,

window cleaner or glass coat to

adhere to the camera cover. If this hap-

pens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

• Do not apply hot water to the camera

in cold weather, as the sudden change

of temperature may cause the camera

to not operate properly.

• When using a high pressure washer to

wash the vehicle, do not directly spray

the camera and its surrounding area,

as doing so may cause the camera to

not operate properly.

●

Do not subject the camera to a strong

impact as this could cause a malfunc-

tion.

If this happens, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer as soon as pos-

sible.

192

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the following table for the likely

cause and the solution.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

If you notice any symptoms

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to

see.

The mirror surface is dirty. Clean the mirror surface

gently, using a soft dry cloth.

Sunlight or headlights are shining

directly into the Digital Rearview

Mirror.

Change to optical mirror

mode.

(If the light is coming through

the moon roof, close the sun-

shade.)

• The vehicle is in a dark area.

• The vehicle is near a TV tower,

broadcasting station, electric

power plant, or other location

where strong radio waves or

electrical noise may be pres-

ent.

• The temperature around the

camera is extremely high/low.

• The ambient temperature is

extremely low.

• It is raining or humid.

• Sunlight or headlights are shin-

ing directly into the camera

lens.

• The vehicle is under fluores-

cent lights, sodium lights, mer-

cury lights, etc.

• Exhaust gas is obstructing the

camera.

Change to optical mirror

mode.

(Change back to digital mir-

ror mode when the condi-

tions have improved.)

193

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

The image is difficult to

see.

Foreign matters (such as water

droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is on

the camera lens.

Operate the dedicated

camera cleaning washer

and clean the camera lens.

(P.243)

Change to optical mirror

mode.

Rinse the camera with a

large quantity of water,

wipe it clean with a soft

cloth dampened with water,

and then change back to

digital mirror mode.

The image is out of

alignment.

The trunk is not fully closed. Fully close the trunk.

The camera or its surrounding

area has received a strong

impact.

Change to optical mirror

mode and have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

The display is dim and

is displayed. The system may be malfunction-

ing.

Change to optical mirror

mode and have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

goes off.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

194

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

is displayed.

The Digital Rearview Mirror is

extremely hot.

(The display will gradually

become more dim. If the temper-

ature continues to increase, the

Digital Rearview Mirror will turn

off.)

Reducing the cabin tempera-

ture is recommended to

reduce the temperature of

the mirror.

( will disappear when the

mirror becomes cool.)

If does not disappear

even though the mirror is

cool, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

The lever cannot be

operated properly. The lever may be malfunctioning.

Change to optical mirror

mode and have the vehicle

inspected by your any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

(To change to optical mirror

mode, press and hold the

menu button for approxi-

mately 10 seconds.)

Symptom Likely cause Solution

195

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

1To select a mirror to adjust, press

the switch.

The indicator comes on.

Left

Right

Pressing the same switch again will put the

switch in neutral.

2To adjust the mirror, press the

switch.

Right

Down

Left

■

Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode.

■

Defogging the mirrors

The outside rear view mirrors can be

cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on

the rear window defogger to turn on the

outside rear view mirror defoggers.

(P.404)

■

Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror

is set to automatic mode, the outside rear

view mirrors will activate in conjunction with

the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to

reduce reflected light. (P.186, 189)

■

Automatic adjustment of the mirror

angle

A desired mirror face angle can be entered

to memory and recalled automatically by

the driving position memory. (P.177)

■

Linked mirror function when reversing

When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select

switch is selected, the outside rear view mir-

rors will automatically angle downwards

when the vehicle is reversing in order to

give a better view of the ground.

Outside rear view mirrors

The rear view mirror’s position can

be adjusted to enable sufficient

confirmation of the rear view.

WARNING

■

Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while

driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of con-

trol of the vehicle and cause an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

●

Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

●

Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

●

Both the driver and passenger side

mirrors must be extended and prop-

erly adjusted before driving.

Adjustment procedure

196

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

To disable this function, select neither “L”

nor “R”.

To set the mirror angle used when the vehi-

cle is reversing, adjust the mirror angle at a

desired position with the shift position in R.

The adjusted angle will be memorized and

the mirror will automatically tilt to the mem-

orized angle whenever the shift position is

shifted to R from next time.

The memorized downward tilt position of

the mirror is linked to the normal position

(angle adjusted with the shift position in

other than R). Therefore, if the normal posi-

tion is changed after adjustment, the tilt

position will also change.

When the normal position is changed, read-

just the angle in reversing.

■

Using the switch

Press the switch to fold the mirrors.

Press it again to extend them to the original

position.

■

Setting automatic mode

Automatic mode allows the folding or

extending of the mirrors to be linked to

locking/unlocking of the doors.

Press the “AUTO” switch to set auto-

matic mode.

The indicator will come on.

Pressing the switch once more will return

to manual mode.

■

When disconnecting and reconnecting

battery terminals

The automatic folding/extending mirror

function will return to off as default. To turn

the function on, press the switch again to

select on.

■

Using automatic mode in cold weather

When automatic mode is used in cold

weather, the door mirror could freeze up

and automatic stowing and return may not

be possible. In this case, remove any ice and

snow from the door mirror, then either

operate the mirror using manual mode or

move the mirror by hand.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

WARNING

■

When the mirror defoggers are oper-

ating

Do not touch the rear view mirror sur-

faces, as they can become very hot and

burn you.

Folding and extending the mir-

rors

197

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

WARNING

■

When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror mal-

function, be careful not to get your hand

caught by the moving mirror.

198

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

3-5.Opening, clo sing the windows and mo on roof

The power windows can be opened

and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the win-

dows as follows:

1Closing

2One-touch closing

3Opening

4One-touch opening

: To stop the window partway, operate the

switch in the opposite direction.

■

The power windows can be operated

when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

When the driver’s power window switch

is used to open a rear power window

(vehicles with rear door sunshades)

If a rear door sunshade is extended or being

extended when the driver’s power window

switch is pushed, only the rear door sun-

shade will be retracted. To open the rear

power window from the driver’s seat, push

the driver’s power window switch again.

■

Operating the power windows after

turning the engine off

The power windows can be operated for

approximately 45 seconds even after the

engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY

mode or turned off. They cannot, however,

be operated once either front door is

opened.

■

Jam protection function

If an object becomes jammed between the

window and the window frame while the

window is closing, window movement is

stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■

Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught between the

door and window while the window is open-

ing, window movement is stopped.

■

When the side window cannot be

opened or closed

When the jam protection function or catch

protection function operates unusually and

the side window cannot be opened or

closed, perform the following operations

with the power window switch of that door.

●

Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch

in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 sec-

onds of the jam protection function or

catch protection function activating, con-

tinuously operate the power window

switch in the one-touch closing direction

or one-touch opening direction so that

the side window can be opened and

closed.

●

If the side window cannot be opened and

closed even when performing the above

operations, perform the following proce-

dure for function initialization.

1Turn the engine switch to IGNITION

ON mode.

2Pull and hold the power window switch

in the one-touch closing direction and

completely close the side window.

3Release the power window switch for a

moment, resume pulling the switch in

the one-touch closing direction, and

hold it there for approximately 6 sec-

onds or more.

Power windows

Opening and closing the power

windows

199

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

4Press and hold the power window

switch in the one-touch opening direc-

tion. After the side window is com-

pletely opened, continue holding the

switch for an additional 1 second or

more.

5Release the power window switch for a

moment, resume pushing the switch in

the one-touch opening direction, and

hold it there for approximately 4 sec-

onds or more.

6Pull and hold the power window switch

in the one-touch closing direction

again. After the side window is com-

pletely closed, continue holding the

switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is

moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window reverses and cannot be fully

closed or opened, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Door lock linked window operation

●

The power windows can be opened and

closed using the mechanical key.

(P.522)

●

The power windows can be opened and

closed using the wireless remote con-

trol.

(P.114)

: These settings must be customized at

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Power windows open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown

on the multi-information display in the

instrument cluster when the engine switch

is turned off and the driver’s door is opened

with the power windows open.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■

Closing the windows

●

The driver is responsible for all the

power window operations, including

the operation for the passengers. In

order to prevent accidental operation,

especially by a child, do not let a child

operate the power windows. It is possi-

ble for children and other passengers

to have body parts caught in the power

window. Also, when riding with a child,

it is recommended to use the window

lock switch. (



P.200)

●

Check to make sure that all passen-

gers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught

when a window is being operated.

●

When using the wireless remote con-

trol or mechanical key and operating

the power windows, operate the

power window after checking to make

sure that there is no possibility of any

passenger having any of their body

parts caught in the window. Also do

not let a child operate window by the

wireless remote control or mechanical

key. It is possible for children and other

passengers to get caught in the power

window.

●

When exiting the vehicle, turn the

engine switch off, carry the key and

exit the vehicle along with the child.

There may be accidental operation,

due to mischief, etc., that may possibly

lead to an accident.

200

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

This function can be used to prevent

children from accidentally opening or

closing a passenger window.

Press the switch.

The indicator will come on and the pas-

senger windows will be locked.

The passenger windows can still be

opened and closed using the driver’s

switch even if the lock switch is on.

■

The power windows can be operated

when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

When the battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If nec-

essary, press the window lock switch after

reconnecting the battery.

WARNING

■

Jam protection function

●

Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protec-

tion function.

●

The jam protection function may not

work if something gets jammed just

before the window is fully closed. Be

careful not to get any part of your body

jammed in the window.

■

Catch protection function

●

Never use any part of your body or

clothing to intentionally activate the

catch protection function.

●

The catch protection function may not

work if something gets caught just

before the window is fully opened. Be

careful not to get any part of your body

or clothing caught in the window.

Preventing accidental operation

(window lock switch)

201

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

■

Opening and closing

1Opens the moon roof

The moon roof tilts up and then fully opens.

2Closes the moon roof

: Lightly press either side of the moon roof

switch to stop the moon roof partway.

■

Tilting up and down

1Tilts the moon roof up

2Tilts the moon roof down

: Lightly press either side of the moon roof

switch to stop the moon roof partway.

■

The moon roof can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

Operating the moon roof after turning

the engine off

The moon roof can be operated for approx-

imately 45 seconds after the engine switch

is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned

off. It cannot, however, be operated once

either front door is opened.

■

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon

roof and the frame while the moon roof is

closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and

the moon roof opens slightly.

■

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed

manually. However, the sunshade will open

automatically when the moon roof is

opened.

■

Door lock linked moon roof operation

●

The moon roof can be opened and

closed using the mechanical key.

(P.522)

●

The moon roof can be opened and

closed using the wireless remote con-

trol.

(P.114)

: These settings must be customized at

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

When the moon roof does not close nor-

mally

Perform the following procedure:

1Stop the vehicle.

2Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause

for approximately 10 seconds. Then it will

close again and stop at the completely

closed position.

3Check to make sure that the moon roof

is completely closed and then release

the switch.

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches to open

and close the moon roof and tilt it

up and down.

Operating the moon roof

202

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

: If the switch is released at the incorrect

time, the procedure will have to be per-

formed again from the beginning.

If the moon roof does not fully close even

after performing the above procedure cor-

rectly, have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

If the moon roof does not move normally

If the moon roof does not open or close

normally or the automatic opening function

does not operate, perform the following ini-

tialization procedure.

1Stop the vehicle.

2Press and hold the “DOWN” switch.

The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up posi-

tion. After that, it will open, close, tilt up, tilt

down, and stop at the fully closed position.

3Confirm that the moon roof has com-

pletely stopped and release the switch.

: If you release the switch while the moon

roof is moving, perform the procedure

again from the beginning.

If, after performing the above procedures

correctly, the moon roof still does not open

or close normally or the automatic opening

function does not operate, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Moon roof open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown

on the multi-information display in the

instrument cluster when the engine switch

is turned off and the driver’s door is opened

with the moon roof open.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

■

Opening the moon roof

●

Do not allow any passengers to put

their hands or heads outside the vehi-

cle while it is moving.

●

Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■

Opening and closing the moon roof

●

The driver is responsible for moon roof

opening and closing operations.

In order to prevent accidental opera-

tion, especially by a child, do not let a

child operate the moon roof. It is possi-

ble for children and other passengers

to have body parts caught in the moon

roof.

●

Check to make sure that all passen-

gers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught

when the moon roof is being operated.

●

When using the wireless remote con-

trol or mechanical key and operating

the moon roof, operate the moon roof

after checking to make sure that there

is no possibility of any passenger hav-

ing any of their body parts caught in

the moon roof. Also, do not let a child

operate moon roof by the wireless

remote control or mechanical key. It is

possible for children and other passen-

gers to get caught in the moon roof.

203

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

WARNING

●

When exiting the vehicle, turn the

engine switch off, carry the key and

exit the vehicle along with the child.

There may be accidental operation,

due to mischief, etc., that may possibly

lead to an accident.

■

Jam protection function

●

Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protec-

tion function.

●

The jam protection function may not

work if something gets caught just

before the moon roof is fully closed.

Also, the jam protection function is not

designed to operate while the moon

roof switch is being pressed. Take care

so that your fingers, etc. do not get

caught.

204

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

205

Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle....................207

Cargo and luggage................... 214

Trailer towing............................... 215

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch ........... 216

Automatic transmission........... 219

Turn signal lever ........................ 226

Parking brake ............................. 227

Brake Hold...................................230

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch........................ 232

AHS (Adaptive High-beam Sys-

tem).............................................. 235

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

........................................................238

Multi Weather Lights ............... 241

Rear fog lights............................. 242

Windshield wipers and washer

........................................................ 243

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap..... 248

4-5. Using the driving support sys-

tems

Lexus Safety System + A........250

Lexus Safety System + ............ 262

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System +

A) .................................................. 273

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System +)

....................................................... 285

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

....................................................... 293

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .....297

RSA (Road Sign Assist) .........307

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range ........................311

Cruise control............................ 323

Stop & Start system.................. 325

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).... 332

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)

....................................................... 349

Lexus parking assist-sensor .. 351

RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert)

function ...................................... 355

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)

function ...................................... 359

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)

....................................................... 362

Parking Support Brake function

(static objects)......................... 367

Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) .......372

Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians).................. 375

Driving mode select switch ..378

Electronically modulated air sus-

pension.......................................380

Driving assist systems ............. 384

206

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips ....................390

207

4-1. Before driving

Driving

4-1.Before driving

■

Starting the engine

P.216

■

Driving

1With the brake pedal depressed,

shift the shift position to D.

(P.219)

Check that the shift position indicator

shows D.

2If the parking brake is in manual

mode, release the parking brake.

(P.227)

3Gradually release the brake pedal

and gently depress the accelerator

pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■

Stopping

1With the shift position in D, depress

the brake pedal.

If the Stop & Start system is enabled,

depressing the brake pedal will stop the

engine.

2If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an

extended period of time, shift the shift posi-

tion to P. (P.222)

■

Parking the vehicle

1With the shift position in D, depress

the brake pedal to stop the vehicle

completely.

2If the parking brake is in manual

mode, set the parking brake.

(P.227)

3Shift the shift position to P.

(P.222)

Check that the shift position indicator

shows P and the parking brake indicator is

illuminated.

4Press the engine switch to stop the

engine.

5Slowly release the brake pedal.

6Lock the door, making sure that you

have the electronic key on your

person.

■

Starting off on a steep uphill

1Make sure that the parking brake is

set and shift the shift position to D.

2Gently depress the accelerator

pedal.

3Release the parking brake.

■

Driving in the rain

●

Drive carefully when it is raining, because

visibility will be reduced, the windows

may become fogged-up, and the road

will be slippery.

●

Drive carefully when it starts to rain,

because the road surface will be espe-

cially slippery.

●

Refrain from high speeds when driving on

an expressway in the rain, because there

may be a layer of water between the tires

and the road surface, preventing the

steering and brakes from operating prop-

erly.

■

Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine

speed may become high while driving. This

is due to automatic up-shifting control or

down-shifting implementation to meet driv-

ing conditions. It does not indicate sudden

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be

observed to ensure safe driving:

Driving procedure

208

4-1. Before driving

acceleration.

●

The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill

or downhill

●

When the accelerator pedal is released

●

When the brake pedal is depressed

■

Restraining the engine output (Brake

Override System)

●

When the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time, the

engine output may be restrained.

●

A warning message is displayed on the

multi-information display while the sys-

tem is operating.

■

Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing

the following precautions is recommended:

●

For the first 300 km (186 miles):

Avoid sudden stops.

●

For the first 1000 km (621 miles):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for

extended periods.

■

Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type park-

ing brake system. This type of brake system

needs bedding-down of the brake shoes

periodically or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer per-

form the bedding down operation.

■

Operating your vehicle in a foreign

country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registra-

tion laws and confirm the availability of the

correct fuel. (P.538)

■

Idling time before engine stop (LS500)

To prevent damage to the turbocharger,

allow the engine to idle immediately after

high-speed driving or hill climbing.

To allow the engine to idle when the vehicle

is stopped, disable the Stop & Start cancel

switch. (P.331) (With the Stop & Strat

system enabled, the engine will be stopped

by the Stop & Start system when the vehicle

is stopped.)

Driving condition Idling time

Normal city driving Not neces-

sary

High-speed driving (Con-

stant speed of approx.

100km/h [62 mph])

Not neces-

sary

Steep hill driving or continu-

ous driving at 100 km/h (62

mph) or more (race track

driving etc.)

Approxi-

mately 1

minute

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■

When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine run-

ning. This prevents the vehicle from

creeping.

■

When driving the vehicle

●

Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with

the location of the brake and accelera-

tor pedals to avoid depressing the

wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelera-

tor pedal instead of the brake pedal

will result in sudden acceleration that

may lead to an accident.

• When backing up, you may twist your

body around, leading to a difficulty in

operating the pedals. Make sure to

operate the pedals properly.

209

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

• Make sure to keep a correct driving

posture even when moving the vehicle

only slightly. This allows you to depress

the brake and accelerator pedals

properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your

right foot. Depressing the brake pedal

using your left foot may delay

response in an emergency, resulting in

an accident.

●

Do not drive the vehicle over or stop

the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases

can be extremely hot. These hot parts

may cause a fire if there is any flamma-

ble material nearby.

●

Vehicles without Lexus Safety System

+ A: During normal driving, do not turn

off the engine. Turning the engine off

while driving will not cause loss of

steering or braking control, but the

power assist to these systems will be

lost. This will make it more difficult to

steer and brake, so you should pull

over and stop the vehicle as soon as it

is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emer-

gency, such as if it becomes impossible

to stop the vehicle in the normal way:



P.498

●

Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A:

During normal driving, do not turn off

the engine. Turning the engine off

while driving will not cause loss of

steering or braking control, however,

power assist to the steering will be lost.

This will make it more difficult to steer

smoothly, so you should pull over and

stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to

do so.

In the event of an emergency, such as if

it becomes impossible to stop the vehi-

cle in the normal way:



P.498

●

Use engine braking (downshift) to

maintain a safe speed when driving

down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may

cause the brakes to overheat and lose

effectiveness. (



P.219)

●

Do not adjust the positions of the

steering wheel, the seat, or the inside

or outside rear view mirrors while driv-

ing.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

●

Always check that all passengers’

arms, heads or other parts of their

body are not outside the vehicle.

■

When driving on slippery road sur-

faces

●

Sudden braking, acceleration and

steering may cause tire slippage and

reduce your ability to control the vehi-

cle.

●

Sudden acceleration, engine braking

due to shifting, or changes in engine

speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

●

After driving through a puddle, lightly

depress the brake pedal to make sure

that the brakes are functioning prop-

erly. Wet brake pads may prevent the

brakes from functioning properly. If the

brakes on only one side are wet and

not functioning properly, steering con-

trol may be affected.

■

When shifting the shift position

●

Do not let the vehicle roll backward

while a forward driving position is

selected, or roll forward while the shift

position is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall

or lead to poor brake and steering

performance, resulting in an accident

or damage to the vehicle.

210

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

●

Do not shift the shift position to P while

the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission

and may result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol.

●

Do not shift the shift position to R while

the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission

and may result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol.

●

Do not shift the shift position to a driv-

ing position while the vehicle is moving

backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission

and may result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol.

●

Changing the shift position to N while

the vehicle is moving will disengage

the engine from the transmission.

Engine braking is not available when N

is selected.

●

Be careful not to change the shift posi-

tion with the accelerator pedal

depressed. Changing the shift posi-

tion to any positions other than P or N

may lead to unexpected rapid acceler-

ation of the vehicle that may cause an

accident and result in death or serious

injury.

After changing the shift position, make

sure to confirm the current shift posi-

tion displayed on the shift position indi-

cator inside the meter.

■

Brake pad wear

If any of the following situations occurs,

have the brake pads visually checked and

replaced by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer as soon as possible.

●

If the brake pad wear limit of a brake

pad is found to have been exceeded

when visually checking the brake pads

for each wheel (for the brake pad wear

limit, refer to P.542)

●

If a warning message is displayed on

the multi-information display (only the

right-side pads can be detected)

Rotor damage may result if the pads are

not replaced when needed.

Moderate levels of the brake pad and

disc wear allow enhanced braking power.

As a result, the discs may wear more

quickly than conventional brake discs.

Therefore, when replacing the brake

pads, Lexus recommends that you also

have the thickness of the discs measured.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when

the wear limits of the brake pads and/or

those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■

When the vehicle is stopped

●

Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P

or N, the vehicle may accelerate sud-

denly and unexpectedly, causing an

accident.

●

In order to prevent accidents due to

the vehicle rolling away, always keep

depressing the brake pedal while the

engine is running, and apply the park-

ing brake as necessary.

●

If the vehicle is stopped on an incline,

in order to prevent accidents caused

by the vehicle rolling forward or back-

ward, always depress the brake pedal

and securely apply the parking brake

as needed.

●

Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed

while the vehicle is stopped may cause

the exhaust system to overheat, which

could result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

211

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

■

When the vehicle is parked

●

Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters,

spray cans, or soft drink cans in the

vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter

or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle

may cause the plastic lenses and plas-

tic material of glasses to deform or

crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing

the contents to spray over the interior

of the vehicle, and may also cause a

short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical

components.

●

Do not leave cigarette lighters in the

vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a

place such as the glove box or on the

floor, it may be lit accidentally when

luggage is loaded or the seat is

adjusted, causing a fire.

●

Do not attach adhesive discs to the

windshield or windows. Do not place

containers such as air fresheners on

the instrument panel or dashboard.

Adhesive discs or containers may act

as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

●

Do not leave a door or window open if

the curved glass is coated with a

metallized film such as a silver-colored

one. Reflected sunlight may cause the

glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

●

Always apply the parking brake, shift

the shift position to P, stop the engine

and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended

while the engine is running.

If the vehicle is parked with the shift

position in P but the parking brake is

not set, the vehicle may start to move,

possibly leading to an accident.

●

Do not touch the exhaust pipes while

the engine is running or immediately

after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

■

When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if

you accidentally move the shift lever or

depress the accelerator pedal, this could

cause an accident or fire due to engine

overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is

parked in a poorly ventilated area,

exhaust gases may collect and enter the

vehicle, leading to death or a serious

health hazard.

■

When braking

●

When the brakes are wet, drive more

cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the

brakes are wet, and this may cause one

side of the vehicle to brake differently

than the other side. Also, the parking

brake may not securely hold the vehi-

cle.

●

Vehicles without Lexus Safety System

+ A: If the brake booster device does

not operate, do not follow other vehi-

cles closely and avoid hills or sharp

turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but

the brake pedal should be depressed

more firmly than usual. Also, the brak-

ing distance will increase. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

●

Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A:

If the electronically controlled brake

system does not operate, do not follow

other vehicles closely and avoid hills or

sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but

the brake pedal should be depressed

more firmly than usual. Also, the brak-

ing distance will increase. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

212

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

●

Vehicles without Lexus Safety System

+ A: Do not pump the brake pedal if

the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up

the reserve for the power-assisted

brakes.

●

Vehicles without Lexus Safety System

+ A: The brake system consists of 2

individual hydraulic systems; if one of

the systems fails, the other will still

operate. In this case, the brake pedal

should be depressed more firmly than

usual and the braking distance will

increase. Have your brakes fixed

immediately.

●

Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A:

The brake system consists of 2 or more

individual hydraulic systems; if one of

the systems fails, the other(s) will still

operate. In this case, the brake pedal

should be depressed more firmly than

usual and the braking distance will

increase. Have your brakes fixed

immediately.

■

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when

a driven wheel is up in the air, or the vehi-

cle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may

damage the driveline components or

propel the vehicle forward or backward,

causing an accident.

NOTICE

■

When driving the vehicle

●

Do not depress the accelerator and

brake pedals at the same time during

driving, as this may restrain the engine

output.

●

Do not use the accelerator pedal or

depress the accelerator and brake

pedals at the same time to hold the

vehicle on a hill.

■

When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift

the shift position to P. Failure to do so

may cause the vehicle to move or the

vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the

accelerator pedal is accidentally

depressed.

■

Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

●

Do not turn the steering wheel fully in

either direction and hold it there for an

extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power

steering motor.

●

When driving over bumps in the road,

drive as slowly as possible to avoid

damaging the wheels, underside of the

vehicle, etc.

●

LS500: Make sure to idle the engine

immediately after high-load driving.

Stop the engine only after the

turbocharger has cooled down.

Failure to do so may cause damage to

the turbocharger.

■

If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the fol-

lowing situations. Hold the steering

wheel firmly and gradually depress the

brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

●

It may be difficult to control your vehi-

cle.

●

The vehicle will make abnormal

sounds or vibrations.

●

The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat

tire (



P.518)

■

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded

after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause

the following serious damage to the vehi-

cle:

●

Engine stalling

213

4-1. Before driving

Driving

When the following unusual operation

is performed with the accelerator

pedal depressed, the engine output

may be restrained.

When the shift lever is shifted to R

When the shift lever is shifted from P

or R to forward drive shift positon

such as D

When the system operates, a message

appears on the multi-information display.

Read the message and follow the instruc-

tion.

: Depending on the situation, the shift

position may not be changed.

■

Drive-Start Control (DSC)

When the TRC is turned off (P.385),

sudden start restraint control also does not

operate. If your vehicle have trouble escap-

ing from the mud or fresh snow by operat-

ing sudden start restraint control,

deactivate TRC (P.385) so that the vehi-

cle may become able to escape from the

mud or fresh snow.

NOTICE

●

Short in electrical components

●

Engine damage caused by water

immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded

road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure

to have any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer check the following:

●

Brake function

●

Changes in quantity and quality of oil

and fluid used for the engine, transmis-

sion, transfer (AWD models), differen-

tial, etc.

●

Lubricant condition for the propeller

shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible), and the function of

all joints, bearings, etc.

If the shift control system is damaged by

flooding, it may not be possible to shift

the shift position to P, or from P to other

positions. In this case, contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Sudden start restraint control

(Drive-Start Control [DSC])

214

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following infor-

mation about storage precautions,

cargo capacity and load:

WARNING

■

Things that must not be carried in the

trunk

The following things may cause a fire if

loaded in the trunk:

●

Receptacles containing gasoline

●

Aerosol cans

■

Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals

from being depressed properly, may

block the driver’s vision, or may result in

items hitting the driver or passengers,

possibly causing an accident.

●

Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk

whenever possible.

●

Do not place cargo or luggage in or on

the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats

(when stacking items)

• On the package tray

• On the instrument panel

•On the dashboard

• In front of the Center Display

●

Secure all items in the occupant com-

partment.

■

Load and distribution

●

Do not overload your vehicle.

●

Do not apply loads unevenly.

Improper loading may cause deterio-

ration of steering or braking control

which may cause death or serious

injury.

215

4-1. Before driving

Driving

Trailer towing

Lexus does not recommend towing

a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus

also does not recommend the

installation of a tow hitch or the use

of a tow hitch carrier for a wheel-

chair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your

vehicle is not designed for trailer

towing or for the use of tow hitch

mounted carriers.

216

4-2. Driving procedures

4-2.Driving pro cedures

1Press the parking brake switch to

check that the parking brake is set.

(P.227)

The parking brake indicator will come on.

2Firmly depress the brake pedal.

and a message will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be

started.

3Press the engine switch shortly and

firmly.

When operating the engine switch, one

short, firm press is enough. It is not neces-

sary to press and hold the switch.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up

to 30 seconds, whichever is less.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until

the engine is completely started.

The engine can be started from any engine

switch mode.

■

Engine switch illumination

According to the situation, the engine

switch illumination operates as follows.

●

When a door is opened, or the engine

switch mode is changed from ACCES-

SORY or IGNITION ON mode to off,

the engine switch illumination slowly

blinks.

●

When depressing the brake pedal with

carrying the electronic key on your per-

son, the engine switch illumination rapidly

blinks.

●

When the engine switch is in ACCES-

SORY or IGNITION ON mode, the

engine switch illumination illuminates.

■

If the engine does not start

●

The engine immobilizer system may not

have been deactivated. (P.64)

Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

If a message related to start-up is shown

on the multi-information display, read the

message and follow the instructions.

■

If the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started using the

smart entry & start system. Refer to P.524to

restart the engine.

■

Electronic key battery depletion

P.110

■

Conditions affecting operation

P.127

■

Notes for the entry function

P.128

■

Steering lock function

●

After turning the engine switch off and

opening and closing the doors, the steer-

ing wheel will be locked due to the steer-

ing lock function. Operating the engine

switch again automatically cancels the

steering lock.

●

When the steering lock cannot be

released, “Push Engine Switch While

Turning Steering Wheel in Either Direc-

Engine (ignition) switch

Performing the following opera-

tions when carrying the electronic

key on your person starts the

engine or changes engine switch

modes.

Starting the engine

217

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

tion” will be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display.

Press the engine switch shortly and firmly

while turning the steering wheel left and

right.

●

To prevent the steering lock motor from

overheating, operation of the motor may

be suspended if the engine is turned on

and off repeatedly in a short period of

time. In this case, refrain from operating

the engine switch. After about 10 sec-

onds, the steering lock motor will resume

functioning.

■

Electronic key battery

P.490

■

Operation of the engine switch

●

If the switch is not pressed shortly and

firmly, the engine switch mode may not

change or the engine may not start.

●

If attempting to restart the engine imme-

diately after turning the engine switch off,

the engine may not start in some cases.

After turning the engine switch off, please

wait a few seconds before restarting the

engine.

■

Customization

If the smart entry & start system has been

deactivated in a customized setting, refer to

P.521.

1Stop the vehicle completely.

2If the parking brake is in manual

mode, set the parking brake.

(P.227)

3Shift the shift position to P.

(P.222)

Check that the shift position indicator

shows P and the parking brake indicator is

illuminated.

4Press the engine switch.

The engine will stop, and the meter display

will be extinguished (the shift position indi-

cator will be extinguished a few seconds

after the meter display).

WARNING

■

When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in

the driver’s seat. Do not depress the

accelerator pedal while starting the

engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident result-

ing in death or serious injury.

■

Caution while driving

If engine failure occurs while the vehicle

is moving, do not lock or open the doors

until the vehicle reaches a safe and com-

plete stop. Activation of the steering lock

in this circumstance may lead to an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■

When starting the engine

●

Do not race a cold engine.

●

If the engine becomes difficult to start

or stalls frequently, have your vehicle

checked by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer immediately.

■

Symptoms indicating a malfunction

with the engine switch

If the engine switch seems to be operat-

ing somewhat differently than usual, such

as the switch sticking slightly, there may

be a malfunction. Contact any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer immedi-

ately.

Stopping the engine

218

4-2. Driving procedures

5Release the brake pedal and check

that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNI-

TION ON” is not shown on the

meter.

■

Automatic P position selection function

P.222

Modes can be changed by pressing

the engine switch with the brake pedal

released. (The mode changes each

time the switch is pressed.)

1Off

The emergency flashers can be used.

2ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the

audio system can be used.

“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the

meter.

3IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on the

meter.

■

Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode

for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION

ON mode (with the engine not running) for

more than an hour with the shift position in

P, the engine switch will automatically turn

off. However, this function cannot entirely

prevent the battery discharge. Do not leave

the vehicle with the engine switch in

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode

for long periods of time when the engine is

not running.

WARNING

■

Stopping the engine in an emergency

●

If you want to stop the engine in an

emergency while driving the vehicle,

press and hold the engine switch for

more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly

3 times or more in succession.

(P.498)

However, do not touch the engine

switch while driving except in an emer-

gency. Turning the engine off while

driving will not cause loss of steering

or braking control, however, power

assist to the steering will be lost. This

will make it more difficult to steer

smoothly, so you should pull over and

stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to

do so.

●

If the engine switch is operated while

the vehicle is running, a warning mes-

sage will be shown on the multi-infor-

mation display and a buzzer sounds.

●

When restarting the engine after an

emergency shutdown, press the

engine switch.

Changing engine switch modes

219

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

■

When the shift control system malfunc-

tions

When attempting to turn the engine switch

off while there is a malfunction in the shift

control system, the engine switch mode

may change to ACCESSORY mode. In this

case, ACCESSORY mode may be turned

off by applying the parking brake and press-

ing the engine switch again. If there is a mal-

function in the system, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer immediately.

: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce

noise, set the shift position in D for nor-

mal driving. You can choose gear range

suitable for your driving situation by

operating the paddle shift switches.

: Any gear range can be fixed when driv-

ing in M mode.

■

For the shift positions

●

When the engine switch is off or in

ACCESSORY mode, the shift position

cannot be changed.

●

When the engine switch is in IGNITION

ON mode, the shift position can only be

changed to N.

●

When the engine is running, the shift

position can be changed from P to D, N

or R.

●

The shift position can only be changed to

NOTICE

■

To prevent battery discharge

●

Do not leave the engine switch in

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode for long periods of time without

the engine running.

●

If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION

ON” is displayed on the meter, the

engine switch is not off.

Exit the vehicle after turning the

engine switch off.

Automatic transmission

Select the shift position depending

on your purpose and situation.

Shift position purpose and func-

tions

Shift posi-

tion Objective or function

PParking the vehicle/starting

the engine

RReversing

Neutral

(Condition in which the

power is not transmitted)

DNormal driving

MM mode driving

(P.225)

220

4-2. Driving procedures

M directly from D.

In addition, if an attempt is made to change

the shift position by moving the shift lever or

by pressing the P position switch in any of

the following situations, the buzzer will

sound and the shifting operation will be dis-

abled or the shift position will automatically

change to N. When this happens, select an

appropriate shift position.

●

Situations where the shifting operation

will be disabled:

• When an attempt is made to change the

shift position from P to another position

by moving the shift lever without depress-

ing the brake pedal.

• When an attempt is made to change the

shift position from P or N to M by moving

the shift lever.

• When the P position switch is pressed

while the vehicle is running.

• When the shift lever is moved to attempt

to change the shift position from P or N

with the accelerator pedal depressed and

the vehicle stopped

●

Situations where the shift position will

automatically change to N:

• When an attempt is made to select the R

position by moving the shift lever when

the vehicle is moving forward.

• When an attempt is made to select the D

position by moving the shift lever when

the vehicle is moving in reverse.

• When the shift position is changed from

R to M

●

If N is selected while driving at a certain

speed, even if the shift lever is not held in

the N position, the shift position changes

to N. In this situation, the buzzer sounds

and a confirmation message is displayed

on the multi-information display to inform

the driver that the shift position has

changed to N.

: Shift position may be changed to P

when driving at extremely low speeds.

: Shift position may be changed to R

when driving at low speeds.

: Shift position may be changed to D

when driving at low speeds.

■

Reverse warning buzzer

When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to

inform the driver that the shift position is in

■

To protect the automatic transmission

If the automatic transmission fluid tempera-

ture is high, “Transmission Fluid Temp High

See Owner’s Manual” will be displayed on

the multi-information display and the vehi-

cle will go into transmission protection

mode automatically. Have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

When driving with cruise control or

dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range activated

Even when performing the following

actions with the intent of enabling engine

braking, engine braking will not be acti-

vated because cruise control or dynamic

radar cruise control with full-speed range

will not be canceled.

●

While driving in the D position,

downshifting to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 or 4.

●

When switching the driving mode to

sport mode while driving in the D position

(P.378)

■

Sudden start restraint control

(Drive-Start Control [DSC])

P.213

■

AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suit-

able gear according to driver performance

and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when

the shift position is in D. (Shifting the shift

position to the M position cancels the func-

tion.)

■

If a message about a shift operation is

shown

To prevent the shift position from being

selected incorrectly or the vehicle from

moving unexpectedly, the shift position may

be changed automatically or operating the

shift lever may be required. In this case,

change the shift position following the mes-

221

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

sages on the multi-information display.

■

After recharging/reconnecting the bat-

tery

P.463

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

Shift lever

Operate the shift lever gently and securely

in the direction of the arrow on the shift

position indicator.

To shift to N, slide the shift lever in the

direction of the arrow and hold it.

Release the shift lever after each shifting

operation to allow it to return to its regular

position ( ).

Shifting to M is only possible when the shift

position is in D.

When shifting from P to N, D or R, from N,

D, M or R to P, from D or M to R, or from R

to D, ensure that the brake pedal is being

depressed and the vehicle is stationary.

Shift position indicator

Meter display:

The current shift position is highlighted.

When any shift position other than D or M

is selected, the arrow toward M and the M

WARNING

■

When driving on slippery road sur-

faces

Do not accelerate or shift the shift posi-

tion suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may

cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting

in an accident.

NOTICE

■

Situations where shift control system

malfunctions are possible

If any of the following situations occurs,

shift control system malfunctions are

possible.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place on level ground, apply the parking

brake, and then contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

When the warning message indicating

the shift control system appears on the

multi-information display. (P.515)

●

The display indicates that no shift posi-

tion is selected for more than a few

seconds.

Shifting the shift lever

222

4-2. Driving procedures

position indicator are displayed in gray.

Shift lever display:

The current shift position is illuminated.

When selecting the shift position, make

sure that the shift position has been

changed to the desired position by check-

ing the shift position indicator provided on

the instrument cluster.

P position switch

■

When shifting the shift position to P

Fully stop the vehicle and set the park-

ing brake, and then press the P position

switch.

When the shift position is changed to P, the

switch illuminates.

Check that the shift position indicator

shows P.

■

Shifting the shift position from P to

other positions

While depressing the brake pedal

firmly, operate the shift lever. If the

shift lever is operated without

depressing the brake pedal, the

buzzer will sound and the shifting

operation will be disabled.

When selecting the shift position,

make sure that the shift position has

been changed to the desired posi-

tion by checking the shift position

indicator provided on the instru-

ment cluster.

The shift position cannot be

changed from P to M directly.

■

Automatic P position selection function

In the following situations, the shift position

is automatically changed to P.

●

When pressing the engine switch with the

vehicle stopped while the engine switch is

in IGNITION ON mode and the shift

position is in a position other than P (after

the shift position has changed to P, the

engine switch will turn off)

●

If the driver’s door is opened and all of the

following conditions are met, while the

shift position is in a position other than P

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

• The driver is not wearing the seat belt.

WARNING

■

For the shift lever

●

Do not remove the shift lever knob or

use anything but a genuine Lexus shift

lever knob. Also, do not hang anything

on the shift lever.

Doing so could prevent the shift lever

from returning to position, causing

unexpected accidents to occur when

the vehicle is in motion.

●

In order to prevent the shift position

from accidentally being changed, do

not touch the shift lever when not using

them.

P position switch

223

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

• The brake pedal is not depressed.

To start off the vehicle after the shift posi-

tion is changed to P, operate the shift lever

again.

●

When the vehicle is stopped after the

engine has been stopped in an emer-

gency while driving

●

When voltage of the battery drops while

the shift position is in a position other than

: When the engine switch is pressed while

driving at extremely slow speeds, such

as immediately before stopping the vehi-

cle, the shift position may automatically

change to P. Make sure that the vehicle

is completely stopped before pressing

the engine switch.

■

If the shift position cannot be shifted

from P

There is a possibility that the battery is dis-

charged. Check the battery in this situation.

(P.524)

■

Driving mode

P.378

■

Snow mode

Snow mode can be selected to suit the

conditions when driving on slippery

road surfaces, such as on snow.

Turn the snow mode switch backward.

The snow mode indicator illuminates.

Turn the snow mode switch backward

again to return to normal mode.

WARNING

■

P position switch

●

Do not press the P position switch

while the vehicle is moving.

If the P position switch is pressed when

driving at very low speeds (for exam-

ple, directly before stopping the vehi-

cle), the vehicle may stop suddenly

when the shift position switches to P,

which could lead to an accident.

●

In order to prevent the shift position

from accidentally being changed, do

not touch the P position switch when

not using them.

●

After changing the shift position to P,

do not release the brake pedal until the

shift position indicator shows P and the

parking brake indicator is illuminated.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move,

possibly leading to an accident.

NOTICE

■

Notes regarding shift lever and P

position switch operation

Avoid repeatedly operating the shift

lever and P position switch in quick suc-

cession.

The system protection function may acti-

vate and it will not be temporarily possi-

ble to shift the shift position other than P.

If this happens, please wait for a while

before attempting to change the shift

position again.

■

When exiting the vehicle (driver’s

seat only)

Check that the shift position indicator

shows P and that the parking brake indi-

cator is illuminated before opening the

door and exiting the vehicle.

Selecting the driving mode

224

4-2. Driving procedures

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

■

Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if

the engine switch is turned off after driving

in snow mode.

To drive using temporary shift range

selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle

shift switch.

When the “-” paddle shift switch is

operated, the shift range switches to a

range that enables engine braking

force that is suitable to driving condi-

tions. When the “+” paddle shift switch

is operated, the shift range switches to

a range that is one range higher than

the current range.

Changing the shift range allows

restriction of the highest gear, prevent-

ing unnecessary upshifting and ena-

bling the level of engine braking force

to be selected.

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

1Upshifting

2Downshifting

The selected shift range, from D1 to D10,

will be displayed on the meter.

To return to normal D position driving, the

“+” paddle shift switch must be held down

for a period of time.

A lower shift range will provide greater

engine braking forces than a higher shift

range.

■

Automatic deactivation of shift range

selection in the D position

Shift range selection in the D position will

be deactivated in the following situations:

●

When the vehicle comes to a stop

●

If the accelerator pedal is depressed for

more than a certain period of time

●

When the shift position is shifted to a

position other than D.

●

When pressing and holding the “+” pad-

dle shift switch

■

Downshifting restriction warning

buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving perfor-

mance, downshifting operation may some-

times be restricted. In some circumstances,

downshifting may not be possible even

when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A

buzzer will sound twice.)

Selecting shift ranges in the D

position

Meter dis-

play Function

D2 - D10

A gear in the range between

D1 and the selected shift

range is automatically cho-

sen depending on vehicle

speed and driving condi-

tions

D1 Setting the shift range at D1

225

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

To enter M mode, shift the shift position

to M. Gears can be selected by oper-

ating the paddle shift switches, allowing

you to drive in the gear of your choos-

ing.

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

1Upshifting

2Downshifting

The gear changes once every time the

paddle shift switch is operated.

The selected gear, from M1 to M10, will be

fixed and displayed on the meter.

When in the M position, the gear will

not change unless the paddle shift

switches are operated.

However, even when in the M position,

the gears will be automatically

changed in the following situations:

When vehicle speed drops

(downshift only).

When it is necessary to protect the

engine or automatic transmission

when the engine coolant tempera-

ture is low, the automatic transmis-

sion fluid temperature is high or low,

or other reasons.

Also, the gear will not shift when the

vehicle speed is low, even if an upshift

operation is performed.

■

Downshifting restriction warning

buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving perfor-

mance, downshifting operation may some-

times be restricted. In some circumstances,

downshifting may not be possible even

when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A

buzzer will sound twice.)

Performing the following opera-

tions allows the engine switch to be

set to ACCESSORY mode with the

shift position held in N.

1Operate the shift lever and change

the shift position to N when the

engine is running.

2Return the shift lever to its regular

position ( ).

3Operate the shift lever to N and

hold it there until the buzzer

sounds.

4Press the engine switch within 5

seconds after the buzzer sounds.

The engine switch will be set to ACCES-

SORY mode with the shift position in N.

Make sure to check that the buzzer

sounds and “Holding N Push P Switch

When Done” is displayed on the

multi-information display.

Selecting gears in the M position

When the engine switch is

changed to ACCESSORY mode

with the shift position held in N

226

4-2. Driving procedures

To change to a shift position other

than N, press the P position switch.

The shift position will be changed to

Even if the engine is not running, by

operating the shift lever and the

engine switch, the engine switch

may be changed to ACCESSORY

mode with the shift position held in

N. Make sure that the engine is run-

ning before performing the opera-

tion.

: To keep this state, do not operate the

engine switch. If the engine switch is

operated repeatedly, the engine switch

will turn off after the shift position has

automatically changed to P.

1Right turn

2Lane change to the right (move the

lever partway and release it)

The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

3Lane change to the left (move the

lever partway and release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

4Left turn

■

Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear

turn signal lights has not burned out.

■

If the turn signals stop flashing before a

lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

NOTICE

■

Keeping the shift position in N when

changing to ACCESSORY mode

When you wish to keep the shift position

in N when changing the engine switch to

ACCESSORY mode, make sure that the

engine is running before operating the

engine switch. If the engine switch mode

is changed without the engine running,

the shift position may change to P.

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

227

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

■

Using the manual mode

The parking brake can be set and

released manually.

1Push the switch to set the parking

brake

The parking brake indicator light will turn

on.

Press and hold the parking brake switch if

an emergency occurs and it is necessary to

operate the parking brake while driving.

2Pull the switch to release the park-

ing brake

Parking brake

The parking brake can be set or

released automatically or manually.

In automatic mode, the parking

brake can be set or released auto-

matically according to the shift

lever operation. Also, even in auto-

matic mode, the parking brake can

be set or released manually.

Operating instructions

228

4-2. Driving procedures

• Operate the parking brake switch while

depressing the brake pedal.

• Using the parking brake automatic

release function, the parking brake can

be released by depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. When using this function,

slowly depress the accelerator pedal.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator

light turn off.

■

Turns automatic mode on

While the vehicle is stopped, press and

hold the parking brake switch until a

message is shown on the multi-infor-

mation display.

When the automatic mode is turned

on, the parking brake operates as fol-

lows.

When the shift position is shifted

from P, the parking brake will be

released, and the parking brake

indicator light will turn off.

When the shift position is shifted to

P, the parking brake will be set, and

the parking brake indicator light will

turn on.

Operate the shift lever and P position

switch with the vehicle stopped and the

brake pedal depressed.

■

Turns automatic mode off

While the vehicle is stopped, pull and

hold the parking brake switch until a

message is shown on the multi-infor-

mation display.

■

Parking brake operation

●

When the engine switch is not in IGNI-

TION ON mode, the parking brake can-

not be released using the parking brake

switch.

●

When the engine switch is not in IGNI-

TION ON mode, automatic mode (auto-

matic brake setting and releasing) is not

available.

■

Parking brake automatic release func-

tion

●

When the shift position is shifted from P,

the parking brake will be released in

automatic mode.

●

When all of the following conditions are

met in manual mode, the parking brake

can be released by depressing the accel-

erator pedal.

• The driver’s door is closed

• The driver is wearing the seat belt

• The shift position is in D, M or R

■

If “EPB Frequently Operated Wait a

Minute” is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

If the parking brake is operated repeatedly

over a short period of time, the system may

restrict operation to prevent overheating. If

this happens, refrain from operating the

parking brake. Normal operation will return

after about 1 minute.

229

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

■

If “EPB Activation Stopped Incom-

pletely” or “EPB Unavailable” is dis-

played on the multi-information display

Operate the parking brake switch. If the

message does not disappear after operat-

ing the switch several times, the system may

be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor

sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

■

Parking brake operation

●

Depending on the engine switch mode,

the parking brake indicator light will turn

on and stay on as described below:

IGNITION ON mode: Comes on until

the parking brake is released.

Not in IGNITION ON mode: Stays on

for approximately 15 seconds.

●

When the engine switch is turned off with

the parking brake set, the parking brake

indicator light will stay on for about 15

seconds. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

■

When the parking brake switch mal-

functions

Automatic mode (automatic brake setting

and releasing) will be turned on automati-

cally.

■

Parking the vehicle

P.207

■

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven

with the parking brake engaged. “EPB

Applied” is displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display. (with the vehicle reached a

speed of 5 km/h [3 mph])

■

If the brake system warning light comes

P.507

■

Usage in winter time

P.390

WARNING

■

When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone.

The parking brake may be released unin-

tentionally and there is the danger of the

vehicle moving that may lead to an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■

When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, set the

parking brake, shift the shift position to P

and make sure that the vehicle does not

move.

■

When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and

check the warning messages.

■

When the parking brake cannot be

released due to a malfunction

Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake set will lead to brake components

overheating, which may affect braking

performance and increase brake wear.

Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer immediately if this occurs.

230

4-2. Driving procedures

Turns the brake hold system on

The brake hold standby indicator (green)

comes on. While the system is holding

the brake, the brake hold operated indica-

tor (yellow) comes on.

■

Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on

in the following conditions:

●

The driver’s door is not closed.

●

The driver is not wearing the seat belt.

If any of the conditions above are detected

when the brake hold system is enabled, the

system will turn off and the brake hold

standby indicator light will go off. In addi-

tion, if any of the conditions are detected

while the system is holding the brake, a

warning buzzer will sound and a message

will be shown on the multi-information dis-

play. The parking brake will then be set

automatically.

■

Brake hold function

●

If the brake pedal is left released for a

period of about 3 minutes after the sys-

tem has started holding the brake, the

parking brake will be set automatically. In

this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a

message is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display.

●

To turn the system off while the system is

holding the brake, firmly depress the

brake pedal and press the button again.

●

The brake hold function may not hold the

vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep

incline. In this situation, it may be neces-

sary for the driver to apply the brakes. A

warning buzzer will sound and the

multi-information display will inform the

driver of this situation. If a warning mes-

sage is shown on the multi-information

display, read the message and follow the

instructions.

■

When the parking brake is set automati-

cally while the system is holding the

brakes

Perform any of the following operations to

release the parking brake.

●

Depress the accelerator pedal. (The

parking brake will not be released auto-

matically if the seat belt is not fastened.)

●

Operate the parking brake switch with

the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator

light goes off. (P.227)

■

When an inspection at any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer is nec-

essary

When the brake hold standby indicator

(green) does not illuminate even when the

brake hold switch is pressed with the brake

hold system operating conditions met, the

system may be malfunctioning. Have the

vehicle inspected at any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

Brake Hold

The brake hold system keeps the

brake applied when the shift posi-

tion is in D, M or N with the system

on and the brake pedal has been

depressed to stop the vehicle. The

system releases the brake when the

accelerator pedal is depressed with

the shift position in D or M to allow

smooth start off.

Enabling the system

231

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

reliable repairer.

■

If “Brake Hold Malfunction Press Brake

to Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or

“Brake Hold Malfunction Visit Your

Dealer” is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

■

Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to

indicate a system malfunction or to inform

the driver of the need for caution. If a warn-

ing message is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display, read the message and follow

the instructions.

■

If the brake hold operated indicator

flashes

P.513

WARNING

■

When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a

steep incline exercise caution. The brake

hold function may not hold the vehicle in

such a situation.

■

When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when

the gripping ability of the tires has been

exceeded. Do not use the system when

stopped on a slippery road.

NOTICE

■

When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed

for use when parking the vehicle for a

long period of time. Turning the engine

switch off while the system is holding the

brake may release the brake, which

would cause the vehicle to move. When

operating the engine switch, depress the

brake pedal, shift the shift position to P

and set the parking brake.

232

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

4-3.Operating the lights and wipers

Operating the switch turns on

the lights as follows:

1 The front position, tail, license

plate and instrument panel lights

turn on.

2 The headlights and all the

lights listed above turn on.

3 The headlights, daytime run-

ning lights (P.232) and all the

lights listed above turn on and off

automatically.

■

AUTO mode can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

Daytime running light system

To make your vehicle more visible to other

drivers during daytime driving, the daytime

running lights turn on automatically when-

ever the engine is started and the parking

brake is released with the headlight switch

in the position. (Illuminate brighter

than the front position lights.) Daytime run-

ning lights are not designed for use at night.

■

Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an

object is placed on the sensor, or anything

that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-

shield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detect-

ing the level of ambient light and may cause

the automatic headlight system to malfunc-

tion.

■

Automatic light off system

●

When the light switch is in or :

The headlights turn off automatically if

the engine switch is turned to ACCES-

SORY mode or turned off, and the

driver’s door is opened.

●

When the light switch is in : The

headlights and all lights turn off automati-

cally if the engine switch is turned to

ACCESSORY mode or turned off, and

the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine

switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the

light switch off once and then back to

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated

manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

233

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

or .

■

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is

turned off or turned to ACCESSORY

mode and the driver’s door is opened while

the lights are turned on.

■

Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically

adjusted according to the number of pas-

sengers and the loading condition of the

vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not

interfere with other road users.

■

Battery-saving function

In order to prevent the battery of the vehicle

from discharging, if the light switch is in the

or position when the engine

switch is turned off the battery saving func-

tion will operate and automatically turn off

all the lights after approximately 20 min-

utes. When the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode, the battery-saving

function will be disabled.

When any of the following are performed,

the battery-saving function is canceled

once and then reactivated. All the lights will

turn off automatically 20 minutes after the

battery-saving function has been reacti-

vated:

●

When the headlight switch is operated

●

When a door or the trunk is opened or

closed

■

Welcome light illumination control

The front position lights automatically turn

on at night when the doors are unlocked

using the entry function or wireless remote

control if the light switch is in the posi-

tion.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

1With the headlights on, push the

lever away from you to turn on the

high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center

position to turn the high beams off.

2Pull the lever toward you and

release it to flash the high beams

once.

You can flash the high beams with the

headlights on or off.

This system allows the headlights to be

turned on for 30 seconds when the

engine switch is off.

Pull the lever toward you and release it

with the light switch in after turn-

ing the engine switch off.

NOTICE

■

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than

necessary when the engine is not run-

ning.

Turning on the high beam head-

lights

Extended Headlight Lighting

system

234

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

The lights are turned off in the following

situations.

The engine switch is turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

The light switch is turned on.

The light switch is pulled toward you

and then released.

When the steering wheel or turn

signal lever is operated while the

headlights are on (low beam), a cor-

nering light will turn on and light up

the direction of movement of the

vehicle. The cornering lights are

designed to ensure excellent visibil-

ity when making a turn at an inter-

section.

However, when vehicle speed is more than

approximately 35 km/h (22 mph), the cor-

nering lights will not turn on.

When the shift position is in R while

the headlights are on (low beam),

both cornering lights will turn on.

This is designed to enhance visibility

when parking.

■

Cornering lights

When the cornering lights are on for more

than 30 minutes, they will turn off automati-

cally.

Cornering lights

235

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

:If equipped

Adjusts the brightness and illumi-

nated area of the high beams

according to the vehicle speed.

Adjusts the intensity of the high

beams, while driving on a curve, so

that the area in the direction that the

vehicle is turning will be illuminated

more brightly than other areas.

Operates the shaded high beams so

that the area around vehicles ahead

is partially not illuminated while all

other areas continue to be illumi-

nated with the high beams.

The shaded high beams help optimize for-

ward visibility while reducing the dazzling

effect on the drivers of vehicles ahead.

Adjusts the distance that the low

beams are projected according to

the distance to a preceding vehicle.

1Press the Adaptive High-beam Sys-

tem switch.

2Turn the headlight switch to the

or position.

When the headlight switch lever is in the

low beam position, the AHS system will be

enabled and the AHS indicator will illumi-

AHS (Adaptive High-beam

System)*

The Adaptive High-beam System

uses a camera sensor located

behind the upper portion of the

windshield to assess the brightness

of the lights of vehicles ahead,

streetlights, etc., and automatically

controls the headlight light distribu-

tion as necessary.

WARNING

■

Limitations of the Adaptive

High-beam System

Do not overly rely on the Adaptive

High-beam System. Always drive safely,

taking care to observe your surroundings

and turning the high beams on or off

manually if necessary.

■

To prevent incorrect operation of the

Adaptive High-beam System

Do not overload the vehicle.

System functions

Activating the Adaptive

High-beam System

236

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

nate.

■

Operating conditions of the Adaptive

High-beam System

●

When all of the following conditions are

met, the high beams will be turned on

automatically and the system will operate:

• The vehicle speed is approximately 15

km/h (10 mph) or more.

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

: When the vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 30 km/h (19 mph) or more, the

area in the direction that the vehicle is

turning will be illuminated more brightly

than other areas while driving on a

curve.

●

When all of the following conditions are

met, the shaded high beams will turn on

and the distance that the low beams are

projected will be adjusted automatically,

depending on the location of vehicles

ahead:

• The vehicle speed is approximately 15

km/h (10 mph) or more.

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

• There are vehicles ahead with headlights

or tail lights turned on.

●

If any of the following conditions are met,

the high beams or shaded high beams will

be changed to the low beams automati-

cally:

• The vehicle speed is below approxi-

mately 15 km/h (10 mph).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

• There are many vehicles ahead.

• Vehicles ahead are moving quickly and

the high beams may blind the drivers of

the other vehicles.

●

When the vehicle speed is between

approximately 3 and 15 km/h (1.9 and 9.3

mph), the cornering lights will turn on.

■

Camera sensor detection information

●

The high beams may not be automatically

changed to the shaded high beams in the

following situations:

• When vehicles ahead suddenly appear

from a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by

another vehicle

• When vehicles ahead are hidden from

sight due to repeated curves, road divid-

ers or roadside trees

• When vehicles ahead appear from the

faraway lane on wide road

• When vehicles ahead have no lights

●

The high beams may be changed to the

shaded high beams if a vehicle ahead that

is using fog lights without its headlights

turned on is detected.

●

House lights, street lights, traffic signals,

and illuminated billboards or signs and

other reflective objects may cause the

high beams to change to the shaded high

beams, cause the high beams not to

change to the shaded high beams, or

change the area that is not illuminated.

●

The following factors may affect the

amount of time taken to turn the high

beam on or off, or the speed by which the

areas not illuminated change:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights,

and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles

ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has opera-

tional lights on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled

vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient,

curve, condition of the road surface etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of

luggage

●

The light distribution control of the head-

lights may change unexpectedly.

●

Bicycles or similar objects may not be

detected.

●

In the following situations the system may

237

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

not be able to correctly detect the sur-

rounding brightness level. This may cause

the low beams to remain on or the high

beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or

vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is neces-

sary to manually switch between the high

and low beams.

• When driving in inclement weather

(heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)

• When the windshield is obscured by fog,

mist, ice, dirt, etc.

• When the windshield is cracked or dam-

aged

• When the camera sensor is deformed or

dirty

• When the temperature of the camera

sensor is extremely high

• When the surrounding brightness level is

equal to that of headlights, tail lights or

fog lights

• When headlights or tail lights of vehicles

ahead are turned off, dirty, changing

color, or not aimed properly

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,

dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle

• When driving through an area of inter-

mittently changing brightness and dark-

ness

• When frequently and repeatedly driving

ascending/descending roads, or roads

with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces

(such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads,

etc.)

• When frequently and repeatedly taking

curves or driving on a winding road

• When there is a highly reflective object

ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or

mirror

• When the back of a preceding vehicle is

highly reflective, such as a container on a

truck

• When the vehicle’s headlights are dam-

aged or dirty, or are not aimed properly

• When the vehicle is listing or tilting due to

a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

• When the headlights are changed

between the high beams and low beams

repeatedly in an abnormal manner

• When the driver believes that the high

beams may be flashing or dazzling

pedestrians or other drivers

• When the vehicle is used in an area in

which vehicles travel on the opposite side

of the road of the country for which the

vehicle was designed, for example using

a vehicle designed for right-hand traffic in

a left-hand traffic area, or vice versa

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

■

Switching to the high beams

Push the lever away from you.

The AHS indicator will turn off and the high

beam indicator will turn on.

Pull the lever to its original position to acti-

vate the Adaptive High-beam System

again.

■

Switching to the low beams

Press the Adaptive High-beam System

switch.

The AHS indicator will turn off.

Press the switch to activate the Adaptive

High-beam System again.

Turning the high beams on/off

manually

238

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■

Temporarily switching to the low

beams

Pull the lever toward you and then

return it to its original position.

The high beams are on while the lever is

pulled toward you. However, after the lever

is returned to its original position, the low

beams remain on for a certain period of

time. Afterwards, the Adaptive High-beam

System will be activated again.

■

Temporarily switching to the low beams

It is recommended to switch to the low

beams when the high beam may cause

problems or distress to other drivers or

pedestrians nearby.

: If equipped

1Press the Automatic High Beam

switch.

AHB (Automatic High

Beam)*

The Automatic High Beam uses a

camera sensor located behind the

upper portion of the windshield to

assess the brightness of the lights of

vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc.,

and automatically turns the high

beams on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■

Limitations of the Automatic High

Beam

Do not overly rely on the Automatic High

Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to

observe your surroundings and turning

the high beams on or off manually if nec-

essary.

■

To prevent incorrect operation of the

Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High

Beam

239

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

2Turn the headlight switch to the

or position.

When the headlight switch lever is in the

low beam position, the AHB system will be

enabled and the AHB indicator will illumi-

nate.

■

Conditions to turn the high beams on/off

automatically

●

When all of the following conditions are

met, the high beams will be turned on

automatically (after approximately 1 sec-

ond):

• The vehicle speed is approximately 30

km/h (19 mph) or more.

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with head-

lights or tail lights turned on.

• There are few streetlights on the road

ahead.

●

If any of the following conditions are met,

the high beams will turn off automatically:

• The vehicle speed is below approxi-

mately 25 km/h (16 mph).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

• Vehicles ahead have their headlights or

tail lights turned on.

• There are many streetlights on the road

ahead.

■

Camera sensor detection information

●

The high beams may not be automatically

turned off in the following situations:

• When a vehicle suddenly appears from

around a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by

another vehicle

• When vehicles ahead cannot be

detected due to repeated curves, road

dividers or roadside trees

• When vehicles ahead appear in a fara-

way lane on a wide road

• When the lights of vehicles ahead are not

●

The high beams may be turned off if a

vehicle ahead that is using fog lights with-

out its headlights turned on is detected.

●

House lights, street lights, traffic signals,

and illuminated billboards or signs and

other reflective objects may cause the

high beams to change to the low beams,

or the low beams to remain on.

●

The following factors may affect the

amount of time taken for the high beams

to turn on or off:

• The brightness of the headlights, fog

lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles

ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has opera-

tional lights on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled

vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient,

curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of

luggage in the vehicle

●

The high beams may turn on or off unex-

pectedly.

●

Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be

detected.

●

In the following situations the system may

not be able to correctly detect the sur-

rounding brightness level. This may cause

the low beams to remain on or the high

beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or

vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is neces-

sary to manually switch between the high

and low beams.

• When driving in inclement weather

(heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)

• When the windshield is obscured by fog,

mist, ice, dirt, etc.

• When the windshield is cracked or dam-

aged

• When the camera sensor is deformed or

dirty

• When the temperature of the camera

240

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

sensor is extremely high

• When the surrounding brightness level is

equal to that of headlights, tail lights or

fog lights

• When headlights or tail lights of vehicles

ahead are turned off, dirty, changing

color, or not aimed properly

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,

dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle

• When driving through an area of inter-

mittently changing brightness and dark-

ness

• When frequently and repeatedly driving

ascending/descending roads, or roads

with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces

(such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads,

etc.)

• When frequently and repeatedly taking

curves or driving on a winding road

• When there is a highly reflective object

ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or

mirror

• When the back of a preceding vehicle is

highly reflective, such as a container on a

truck

• When the vehicle’s headlights are dam-

aged or dirty, or are not aimed properly

• When the vehicle is listing or titling due to

a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

• When the headlights are changed

between the high beams and low beams

repeatedly in an abnormal manner

• When the driver believes that the high

beams may be flashing or dazzling

pedestrians or other drivers

• When the vehicle is used in an area in

which vehicles travel on the opposite side

of the road of the country for which the

vehicle was designed, for example using

a vehicle designed for right-hand traffic in

a left-hand traffic area, or vice versa

■

Switching to the high beams

Push the lever away from you.

The AHB indicator will turn off and the

high beam indicator will turn on.

Pull the lever to its original position to acti-

vate the Automatic High Beam system.

■

Switching to the low beams

Press the Automatic High Beam

switch.

The AHB indicator will turn off.

Press the switch to activate the Automatic

High Beam system again.

■

Temporarily switching to the low

beams

Pull the lever toward you and then

return it to its original position.

The high beams are on while the lever is

pulled toward you. However, after the lever

is returned to its original position, the low

beams remain on for a certain period of

time. Afterwards, the Automatic High

Beam will be activated again.

Turning the high beams on/off

manually

241

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

■

Temporarily switching to the low beams

It is recommended to switch to the low

beams when the high beam may cause

problems or distress to other drivers or

pedestrians nearby.

1Turn the headlight switch to the

or position.

2Turn the switch ring to the

position.

When the switch is released, it returns to

When the Multi Weather Lights system is

enabled, the Multi Weather Lights indica-

tor on the meter will illuminate.

Turn the switch ring to the position

again to disable the system.

■

Operating conditions

The cornering lights will illuminate when the

Multi Weather Lights are enabled and both

of the following conditions are met:

●

The headlights are on

Multi Weather Lights

The Multi Weather Lights is a sys-

tem that illuminates the cornering

lights to ensure visibility when driv-

ing in inclement weather, such as

rain or fog.

Enabling/disabling the Multi

Weather Lights

242

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

●

The vehicle speed is lower than approxi-

mately 45 km/h (28 mph).

When the vehicle speed increases to

approximately 45 km/h (28 mph) or

higher, the lights will be temporarily turned

off. The lights will turn on again when the

vehicle speed becomes lower than

approximately 35 km/h (22 mph).

■

Rear fog lights

When the Multi Weather Lights system is

enabled, the rear fog lights may also be illu-

minated. (P.242)

■

Customization

Enabling of the Multi Weather Lights sys-

tem when the rear fog lights are enabled

can be turned on/off. (P.546)

1Turn the headlight switch to the

or position.

2Turn the switch ring to the

position.

When the switch is released, it returns to

When the rear fog lights are enabled, the

rear fog light indicator on the meter will

illuminate.

Turn the switch ring to the position

again to disable the rear fog lights.

■

Illumination conditions

●

When enabled, the rear fog lights oper-

ate when the headlights are illuminated.

●

When illuminated, the rear fog lights will

remain on until the tail lights are turned

off.

Rear fog lights

When driving in inclement weather,

such as rain or fog, the rear fog

lights can be used to make your

vehicle more visible to following

vehicles.

Operating instructions

243

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

■

Using the rear fog lights

Use the rear fog lights only when necessary.

If the rear fog lights are used when visibility

is not poor, they may impede the visibility of

drivers in following vehicles.

■

Multi Weather Lights system-linked

operation

When the rear fog lights are illuminated, the

Multi Weather Lights system may also

operate. (P.241)

■

Customization

Enabling of the Multi Weather Lights sys-

tem when the rear fog lights are enabled

can be turned on/off. (P.546)

Operating the lever operates

the wipers or washer as follows. When

is selected, the wipers will operate

automatically when the sensor detects

falling rain. The system automatically

adjusts wiper timing in accordance

with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Windshield wipers and

washer

Operating the lever can switch

between automatic operation and

manual operation, or can use the

washer.

NOTICE

■

When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may dam-

age the windshield.

Operating the wiper lever

244

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

1 Off

2 Rain-sensing operation

The wipers will operate automatically when

the sensor detects falling rain. The system

automatically adjusts wiper timing in

accordance with rain volume and vehicle

speed.

3 Low speed operation

4 High speed operation

5 Temporary operation

When is selected, the sensor sen-

sitivity can be adjusted by turning the

switch ring.

6Increases the sensitivity

7Decreases the sensitivity

8 Windshield washer/wiper

dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the windshield

wipers and washer.

(After operating several times, the wipers

operate once more time after a short delay

to prevent dripping. However, the dripping

prevention does not operate while the

vehicle is moving.)

When the engine switch is in IGNITION

ON mode and the headlights are on, if the

lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners will

operate once. After this, the headlight

cleaners will operate every 5th time the

lever is pulled.

Rear camera washer opera-

tion

Pushing the lever operates the rear cam-

era washer and cleans the rear camera and

the camera for the Digital Rearview Mirror.

245

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

: Vehicles with Digital Rearview Mirror

■

The windshield wiper and washer can be

operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

Effects of vehicle speed on wiper opera-

tion

Even when the wipers are not in AUTO

mode, vehicle speed affects the time until

the drip prevention wiper sweep occurs.

With low speed windshield wiper operation

selected, wiper operation will be switched

from low speed to intermittent wiper opera-

tion only when the vehicle is stationary.

(However, when the sensor sensitivity is

adjusted to the highest level, the mode can-

not be switched.)

■

Raindrop sensor

●

The raindrop sensor judges the amount

of raindrops.

An optical sensor is adopted. It may not

operate properly when sunlight from the

rising or setting of the sun intermittently

strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are

present on the windshield.

●

If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode

while the engine switch is in IGNITION

ON mode, the wipers will operate once

to show that AUTO mode is activated.

●

If the temperature of the raindrop sensor

is 85°C (185°F) or higher, or -15°C

(5°F) or lower, automatic operation may

not occur. In this case, operate the wipers

in any mode other than AUTO mode.

■

If no washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not

blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer

fluid reservoir.

■

Front door opening linked windshield

wiper stop function

When is selected and the windshield

wipers are operating, if a front door is

opened while the vehicle is stopped and the

P shift position is selected, operation of the

windshield wipers will be stopped to pre-

vent anyone near the vehicle from being

sprayed by water from the wipers. When

the front door is closed, wiper operation will

resume.

■

When stopping the engine in an emer-

gency while driving

If the windshield wipers are operating when

the engine is stopped, the windshield wipers

will operate in high speed operation. After

the vehicle is stopped, operation will return

to normal when the engine switch is turned

to IGNITION ON mode, or operation will

stop when the driver’s door is opened.

■

Outside rear view mirror defogger acti-

vation linked to windshield wiper opera-

tion

The outside rear view mirror defoggers

automatically turn on when you operate the

windshield wipers.

The outside rear view mirror defoggers

automatically turn off approximately 15

minutes after the wipers stop.

For details about the outside rear view mir-

ror defoggers: P.404

246

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When the windshield wipers are not

being used, they retract to below the

hood. To enable the windshield wipers

to be lifted when parking in cold condi-

tions or when replacing a windshield

wiper insert, change the rest position of

the windshield wipers to the service

position using the wiper lever.

■

Raising the wipers to the service

position

Within approximately 45 seconds of

turning the engine switch off, move the

wiper lever to the position and

hold it for approximately 2 seconds or

more.

The wipers will move to the service posi-

tion.

■

Lifting the windshield wipers

While holding the hook portion of

the wiper arm, lift the windshield wiper

from the windshield.

WARNING

■

Caution regarding the use of wind-

shield wipers in AUTO mode

The windshield wipers may operate

unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or

the windshield is subject to vibration in

AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers

or anything else do not become caught

in the windshield wipers.

■

Caution regarding the use of washer

fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer

fluid until the windshield becomes warm.

The fluid may freeze on the windshield

and cause low visibility. This may lead to

an accident, resulting in death or serious

injury.

NOTICE

■

When there is no washer fluid spray

from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may

be caused if the lever is pulled toward

you and held continually.

■

When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other

object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Changing the windshield wiper

rest position/Lifting the wind-

shield wipers

247

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

■

Lowering the windshield wipers to the

retracted position

With the windshield wipers placed on the

windshield, turn the engine switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode and then move the wiper

lever to an operating position. When the

wiper switch is turned off, the windshield

wipers will stop at the retracted position.

Even if the wipers deviate while the engine

switch is off, the wipers will return to the

normal position.

NOTICE

■

When lifting the windshield wipers

●

Do not lift the windshield wipers when

they are in the retracted position

below the hood. Otherwise, they may

contact the hood, possibly resulting in

damage to a windshield wiper and/or

the hood.

●

Do not lift a windshield wiper by the

wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper

blade may be deformed.

●

Do not operate the wiper lever when

the windshield wipers are lifted. Oth-

erwise, the windshield wipers may

contact the hood, possibly resulting in

damage to the windshield wipers

and/or hood.

248

4-4. Refueling

4-4.Refueling

Close all the doors and windows,

and turn the engine switch off.

Confirm the type of fuel.

■

Fuel types

P.545

■

Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehi-

cle has a fuel tank opening that only accom-

modates the special nozzle on unleaded

fuel pumps.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open

the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

WARNING

■

When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while

refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may

result in death or serious injury.

●

After exiting the vehicle and before

opening the fuel door, touch an

unpainted metal surface to discharge

any static electricity. It is important to

discharge static electricity before

refueling because sparks resulting

from static electricity can cause fuel

vapors to ignite while refueling.

●

Always hold the grips on the fuel tank

cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard

when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard

before fully removing the cap. In hot

weather, pressurized fuel may spray

out the filler neck and cause injury.

●

Do not allow anyone that has not dis-

charged static electricity from their

body to come close to an open fuel

tank.

●

Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are

harmful if inhaled.

●

Do not smoke while refueling the vehi-

cle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite

and cause a fire.

●

Do not return to the vehicle or touch

any person or object that is statically

charged.

This may cause static electricity to

build up, resulting in a possible ignition

hazard.

■

When refueling

Observe the following precautions to

prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel

tank:

●

Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the

fuel filler neck.

●

Stop filling the tank after the fuel noz-

zle automatically clicks off.

●

Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

■

Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such

as causing the emission control system to

operate abnormally or damaging fuel

system components or the vehicle’s

painted surface.

249

4-4. Refueling

Driving

1Press the opener switch.

2Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and

remove it, then put it into the holder

on the fuel filler door.

■

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

P.521

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap

until you hear a click. Once the cap is

released, it will turn slightly in the oppo-

site direction.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Closing the fuel tank cap

WARNING

■

When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus

fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.

Doing so may cause a fire or other inci-

dent which may result in death or serious

injury.

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

4-5.Using the driving su pport systems

:If equipped

■

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System + A)

P.273

■

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

P.293

■

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

P.297

■

AHS (Adaptive High-beam Sys-

tem)

P.235

■

RSA (Road Sign Assist)

P.307

■

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

P.311

Four types of sensors, located behind

the front grille, front bumper, rear

bumper and windshield, detect infor-

mation necessary to operate the drive

assist systems.



Front

Front radar sensor

Front side radar sensors

Front camera



Rear

Rear side radar sensors (P.332)

Lexus Safety System + A*

The Lexus Safety System + A con-

sists of the following drive assist sys-

tems and contributes to a safe and

comfortable driving experience:

Drive assist system

WARNING

■

Lexus Safety System + A

The Lexus Safety System + A is designed

to operate under the assumption that the

driver will drive safely, and is designed to

help reduce the impact to the occupants

and the vehicle in the case of a collision

or assist the driver in normal driving con-

ditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recog-

nition accuracy and control performance

that this system can provide, do not

overly rely on this system. The driver is

always responsible for paying attention

to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving

safely.

Sensors

251

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■

To avoid malfunction of the front

radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

●

Keep the radar sensor and the radar

sensor cover clean at all times.

Radar sensor

Radar sensor cover

If the front of the radar sensor or the front

or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty

or covered with water droplets, snow,

etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and radar sensor

cover with a soft cloth to avoid damaging

them.

●

Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers) or

other items to the radar sensor, radar

sensor cover or surrounding area.

●

Do not subject the radar sensor or its

surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the radar sensor is moved even

slightly off position, the system may

malfunction and objects may not be

detected correctly.

If the radar sensor, front grille, or front

bumper has been subjected to a

strong impact, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

●

Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

●

Do not modify or paint the radar sen-

sor or radar sensor cover.

●

In the following cases, the radar sensor

must be recalibrated. Contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details.

• When the radar sensor or front grille

are removed and installed, or replaced

• When the front bumper is replaced

■

To avoid malfunction of the front side

radar sensors

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

●

Keep the radar sensors and their sur-

rounding areas on the front bumper

clean at all times.

If a radar sensor or its surrounding area

on the front bumper is dirty or covered

with snow, the system may not operate

and a warning message (



P.516) will be

displayed.

If this occurs, clean off the dirt or snow

and drive the vehicle for approximately

10 minutes.

If the warning message does not disap-

pear, have your vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), alumi-

num tape or other items to the radar

sensors or their surrounding area.

●

Do not subject a radar sensor or its

surrounding area on the front bumper

to a strong impact.

If a radar sensor is moved even slightly

off position, the system may malfunction

and vehicles may not be detected cor-

rectly.

In the following situations, have your

vehicle inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

• If a radar sensor or its surrounding

area is subject to a strong impact

• If the area on the front bumper around

a radar sensor is scratched or dented,

or the front bumper has become par-

tially disengaged

●

Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

●

Do not modify the radar sensors or

their surrounding area on the front

bumper.

●

In the following cases, the radar sensor

must be recalibrated. Contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details.

• When the radar sensor is removed and

installed, or replaced

• When the front bumper is replaced

●

Do not paint the front bumper any

color other than an official Lexus color.

■

To avoid malfunction of the front cam-

era

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the front camera may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

●

Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered

with an oily film, water droplets, snow,

etc., clean the windshield.

• As some glass coating agents may

affect the detection performance of

the front camera, consult any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer. when

using a glass coating agent.

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the

windshield, it will still be necessary to

use the windshield wipers to remove

water droplets, etc. from the area of

the windshield in front of the front

camera.

253

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

• If the inner side of the windshield

where the front camera is installed is

dirty, contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

●

Do not attach objects, such as stickers,

transparent stickers, and so forth, to

the outer side of the windshield in front

of the front camera (shaded area in the

illustration).

From the top of the windshield to

approximately 1 cm (0.4 in.) below

the bottom of the front camera

Approximately 36 cm (14.2 in.)

(Approximately 18 cm [7.1 in.] to the

right and left from the center of the

front camera)

●

If the part of the windshield in front of

the front camera is fogged up or cov-

ered with condensation or ice, use the

windshield defogger to remove the

fog, condensation or ice. (



P.404)

●

If water droplets cannot be properly

removed from the area of the wind-

shield in front of the front camera by

the windshield wipers, replace the

wiper insert or wiper blade.

●

Do not attach window tint to the wind-

shield.

●

Replace the windshield if it is damaged

or cracked.

After replacing the windshield, the

front camera must be recalibrated.

Contact any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer for details.

●

Do not allow liquids to contact the

front camera.

●

Do not allow bright lights to shine into

the front camera.

●

Do not dirty or damage the front cam-

era.

When cleaning the inside of the wind-

shield, do not allow glass cleaner to

contact the lens of the front camera.

Also, do not touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

Do not subject the front camera to a

strong impact.

●

Do not change the installation position

or direction of the front camera or

remove it.

●

Do not disassemble the front camera.

●

Do not modify any components of the

vehicle around the front camera

(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

●

Do not attach any accessories to the

hood, front grille or front bumper that

may obstruct the front camera. Con-

tact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer for details.

●

If a surfboard or other long object is to

be mounted on the roof, make sure

that it will not obstruct the front cam-

era.

●

Do not modify the headlights or other

lights.

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Certification

255

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

257

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems

259

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

260

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

●

In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal

operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will

become operational.

261

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

If the message does not disappear, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has been driven for

some time) and the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear

and the system will become operational.

If the message does not disappear, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such

as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment

• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such as when driving

in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining into the front camera

Situation Actions

When the area around a sensor is covered

with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with

condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign

matter

To clean the part of the windshield in front of

the front camera , use the windshield wipers

or the windshield defogger of the air condi-

tioning system (P.404).

When the temperature around the front

camera is outside of the operational range,

such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an

extremely cold environment

If the front camera is hot, such as after the

vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the

air conditioning system to decrease the tem-

perature around the front camera.

If a sunshade was used when the vehicle

was parked, depending on its type, the sun-

light reflected from the surface of the sun-

shade may cause the temperature of the

front camera to become excessively high.

If the front camera is cold, such after the

vehicle is parked in an extremely cold envi-

ronment, use the air conditioning system to

increase the temperature around the front

camera.

The area in front of the front camera is

obstructed, such as when the hood is open

or a sticker is attached to the part of the

windshield in front of the front camera.

Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to

clear the obstruction.

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems

:If equipped

■

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System +)

P.285

■

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

P.297

■

AHS (Adaptive High-beam Sys-

tem)

P.235

:If equipped

■

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

P.238

:If equipped

■

RSA (Road Sign Assist)

P.307

:If equipped

■

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

P.311

Two types of sensors, located behind

the front grille and windshield, detect

information necessary to operate the

drive assist systems.

Radar sensor

Front camera

Lexus Safety System +*

The Lexus Safety System + consists

of the following drive assist systems

and contributes to a safe and com-

fortable driving experience:

Driving assist system

WARNING

■

Lexus Safety System +

The Lexus Safety System + is designed to

operate under the assumption that the

driver will drive safely, and is designed to

help reduce the impact to the occupants

and the vehicle in the case of a collision

or assist the driver in normal driving con-

ditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recog-

nition accuracy and control performance

that this system can provide, do not

overly rely on this system. The driver is

always responsible for paying attention

to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving

safely.

Sensors

263

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■

To avoid malfunction of the radar sen-

sor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

●

Keep the radar sensor and the radar

sensor cover clean at all times.

Radar sensor

Radar sensor cover

If the front of the radar sensor or the front

or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty

or covered with water droplets, snow,

etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and radar sensor

cover with a soft cloth to avoid damaging

them.

●

Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers) or

other items to the radar sensor, radar

sensor cover or surrounding area.

●

Do not subject the radar sensor or its

surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the radar sensor, front grille, or front

bumper has been subjected to a

strong impact, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

●

Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

●

Do not modify or paint the radar sen-

sor or radar sensor cover.

●

In the following cases, the radar sensor

must be recalibrated. Contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details.

• When the radar sensor or front grille

are removed and installed, or replaced

• When the front bumper is replaced

■

To avoid malfunction of the front cam-

era

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the front camera may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

●

Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered

with an oily film, water droplets, snow,

etc., clean the windshield.

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the

windshield, it will still be necessary to

use the windshield wipers to remove

water droplets, etc. from the area of

the windshield in front of the front

camera.

• If the inner side of the windshield

where the front camera is installed is

dirty, contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

●

Do not attach objects, such as stickers,

transparent stickers, etc., to the outer

side of the windshield in front of the

front camera (shaded area in the illus-

tration).

From the top of the windshield to

approximately 1 cm (0.4 in.) below

the bottom of the front camera

Approximately 20 cm (7.9 in.)

(Approximately 10 cm [4.0 in.] to the

right and left from the center of the

front camera)

●

If the part of the windshield in front of

the front camera is fogged up or cov-

ered with condensation, or ice, use the

windshield defogger to remove the

fog, condensation, or ice. (



P.404)

●

If water droplets cannot be properly

removed from the area of the wind-

shield in front of the front camera by

the windshield wipers, replace the

wiper insert or wiper blade.

●

Do not attach window tint to the wind-

shield.

●

Replace the windshield if it is damaged

or cracked.

After replacing the windshield, the

front camera must be recalibrated.

Contact any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer for details.

●

Do not allow liquids to contact the

front camera.

●

Do not allow bright lights to shine into

the front camera.

●

Do not dirty or damage the front cam-

era.

When cleaning the inside of the wind-

shield, do not allow glass cleaner to

contact the lens of the front camera.

Also, do not touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

Do not subject the front camera to a

strong impact.

●

Do not change the installation position

or direction of the front camera or

remove it.

●

Do not disassemble the front camera.

●

Do not modify any components of the

vehicle around the front camera

(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

●

Do not attach any accessories to the

hood, front grille or front bumper that

may obstruct the front camera. Con-

tact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer for details.

●

If a surfboard or other long object is to

be mounted on the roof, make sure

that it will not obstruct the front cam-

era.

●

Do not modify the headlights or other

lights.

265

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Certification

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

267

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

268

4-5. Using the driving support systems

269

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

270

4-5. Using the driving support systems

271

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

●

In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal

operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will

become operational.

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

If the message does not disappear, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has been driven for

some time) and the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear

and the system will become operational.

If the message does not disappear, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such

as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment

• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such as when driving

in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining into the front camera

Situation Actions

When the area around a sensor is covered

with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with

condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign

matter

To clean the part of the windshield in front of

the front camera , use the windshield wipers

or the windshield defogger of the air condi-

tioning system (P.404).

When the temperature around the front

camera is outside of the operational range,

such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an

extremely cold environment

If the front camera is hot, such as after the

vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the

air conditioning system to decrease the tem-

perature around the front camera.

If a sunshade was used when the vehicle

was parked, depending on its type, the sun-

light reflected from the surface of the sun-

shade may cause the temperature of the

front camera to become excessively high.

If the front camera is cold, such after the

vehicle is parked in an extremely cold envi-

ronment, use the air conditioning system to

increase the temperature around the front

camera.

The area in front of the front camera is

obstructed, such as when the hood is open

or a sticker is attached to the part of the

windshield in front of the front camera.

Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to

clear the obstruction.

273

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Pedestrian alert

When the system determines that

there is a possibility of a frontal collision

with a stationary or moving pedestrian

in front of your vehicle, a message will

be displayed on the head-up display to

warn the driver.

■

Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high, a

buzzer will sound and a warning mes-

sage will be displayed on the

multi-information display to urge the

driver to take evasive action.

■

Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the system applies greater braking

force in relation to how strongly the

brake pedal is depressed.

■

Pre-collision braking

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision is extremely

high, the brakes are automatically

applied to help avoid the collision or

reduce the impact of the collision.

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

(vehicles with Lexus Safety

System + A)

The pre-collision system uses a

front radar sensor and front camera

to detect vehicles and pedestri-

ans/bicyclists in front of your vehi-

cle and front side radar sensors to

detect vehicles approaching from

the front left or right side. When the

system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision with a

vehicle or pedestrian/bicyclist is

high, a warning operates to urge

the driver to take evasive action

and the potential brake pressure is

increased to help the driver avoid

the collision. If the system deter-

mines that the possibility of a frontal

collision with a vehicle or pedes-

trian/bicyclist is extremely high, the

brakes are automatically applied to

help avoid the collision or help

reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disa-

bled/enabled and the warning timing

can be changed. (P.277)

System functions

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Intersection right/left turn assis-

tance

If the system determines that there is a

high possibility of a collision in the fol-

lowing situations, it will assist with

Pre-collision warning and, if necessary

Pre-collision braking. Depending on

the configuration of the intersection, it

may not be possible to support.

When you turn right/left at an inter-

section and cross the path of an

oncoming vehicle

When you turn right/left, pedestrian

is detected in the forward direction

and estimated to enter your vehi-

cle’s path (bicyclists are not

detected.)

■

Active steering assist

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a collision with an object, such

as a guardrail, or pedestrian is high,

even though the brakes are applied,

and that the collision may be avoidable

through steering control, the system

will steer the vehicle automatically to

help avoid the collision or help reduce

the impact of the collision.

■

Active Assist for seat belts (front

seats only)

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision is high, the

system will retract the seat belts. Addi-

tionally, the system may retract the seat

belts if the brakes are applied suddenly

or control of the vehicle is lost.

■

Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas-

senger’s seat / power rear seat [if

equipped])

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision is high, it may

move the seatbacks of the front pas-

senger’s seat and power rear seats to

the upright position automatically, if

reclined.

If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be

moved by the pre-collision seat function.

■

Suspension control

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-

tem (P.384) will control the damp-

ing force of the shock absorbers to

help maintain an appropriate vehicle

posture.

275

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■

Limitations of the pre-collision system

●

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking

care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system

instead of normal braking operations

under any circumstances. This system

will not prevent collisions or lessen col-

lision damage or injury in every situa-

tion. Do not overly rely on this system.

Failure to do so may lead to an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●

Although this system is designed to

help avoid a collision or help reduce

the impact of the collision, its effective-

ness may change according to various

conditions, therefore the system may

not always be able to achieve the same

level of performance.

Read the following conditions care-

fully. Do not overly rely on this system

and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system

may operate even if there is no possi-

bility of a collision:



P.280

• Conditions under which the system

may not operate properly:



P.282

●

Do not attempt to test the operation of

the pre-collision system yourself.

Depending on the objects used for

testing (dummies, cardboard objects

imitating detectable objects, etc.), the

system may not operate properly, pos-

sibly leading to an accident.

■

Pre-collision braking

●

When the pre-collision braking func-

tion is operating, a large amount of

braking force will be applied.

●

If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-

tion of the pre-collision braking func-

tion, the pre-collision braking function

operation will be canceled after

approximately 2 seconds. Depress the

brake pedal as necessary.

●

The pre-collision braking function may

not operate if certain operations are

performed by the driver. If the acceler-

ator pedal is being depressed strongly

or the steering wheel is being turned,

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and pos-

sibly prevent the pre-collision braking

function from operating.

●

In some situations, while the pre-colli-

sion braking function is operating,

operation of the function may be

canceled if the accelerator pedal is

depressed strongly or the steering

wheel is turned and the system deter-

mines that the driver is taking evasive

action.

●

If the brake pedal is being depressed,

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and pos-

sibly delay the operation timing of the

pre-collision braking function.

■

Active steering assist

●

The steering wheel may turn automati-

cally when active steering assist is

operating.

●

As active steering assist operation will

be canceled when the system deter-

mines that a collision has been

avoided, operate the steering wheel as

necessary.

●

In the following situations, the system

may determine that the driver is taking

evasive action. In this case, the active

steering assist may not operate or may

be canceled.

• If the accelerator pedal is being

depressed strongly or the steering

wheel is being operated. In this case

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and the

pre-collision braking may not operate.

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-

sion system

The pre-collision system can be ena-

bled/disabled on (P.93) of the

multi-information display.

WARNING

• In some situations, while the active

steering assist is operating, operation

of the function may be canceled if the

accelerator pedal is depressed

strongly or the steering wheel is turned

and the system determines that the

driver is taking evasive action.

• When the active steering assist is

operating, if the steering wheel is held

firmly or is operated in the opposite

direction to that which the system is

generating torque, the function may be

canceled.

• If the brake pedal is depressed, the sys-

tem may determine that the driver is

taking evasive action and the active

steering assist operation may be

delayed.

■

Active Asssit for seat belts

If the Active Assist has operated and the

seat belts are locked in a retracted posi-

tion, immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place, release and retract the seat

belts to unlock them and then fasten

them again.

Also, if a seat belt can be loosened, it can

be unlocked by slightly retracting it with-

out releasing it.

■

When to disable the pre-collision sys-

tem

In the following situations, disable the

system, as it may not operate properly,

possibly leading to an accident resulting

in death or serious injury:

●

When the vehicle is being towed

●

When your vehicle is towing another

vehicle

●

When transporting the vehicle via

truck, boat, train or similar means of

transportation

●

When the vehicle is raised on a lift with

the engine running and the tires are

allowed to rotate freely

●

When inspecting the vehicle using a

drum tester such as a chassis

dynamometer or speedometer tester,

or when using an on vehicle wheel bal-

ancer

●

When a strong impact has been

applied to the front bumper, rear

bumper or front grille, due to an acci-

dent or other reasons

●

If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-

ble manner, such as when the vehicle

has been in an accident or is malfunc-

tioning

●

When the vehicle is driven in a sporty

manner or off-road

●

When the tires are not properly

inflated

●

When the tires are very worn

●

When tires of a size other than speci-

fied are installed

●

When tire chains are installed

●

When a compact spare tire or an

emergency tire puncture repair kit is

used

●

If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may

obstruct a radar sensor or the front

camera is temporarily installed to the

vehicle

Changing settings of the pre-col-

lision system

277

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The system is automatically enabled each

time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

If the system is disabled, the PCS warn-

ing light will turn on and a message will

be displayed on the multi-information

display.

If the pre-collision system is disabled,

the pedestrian alert system will also be

disabled.

■

Enabling/Disabling the pedestrian

alert system

The pedestrian alert can be ena-

bled/disabled on (P.93) of the

multi-information display.

■

Changing the pre-collision warn-

ing timing

The pre-collision warning timing can

be changed on (P.93) of the

multi-information display.

The warning timing setting is retained

when the engine switch is turned off. How-

ever, if the pre-collision system is disabled

and re-enabled, the operation timing will

return to the default setting (middle).

1Early

2Middle

This is the default setting.

3Late

■

Changing the pedestrian alert tim-

ing

If the pre-collision warning timing is

changed, the pedestrian alert timing

will also be changed accordingly.

■

Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal

collision with a vehicle, pedestrian/bicyclist, guardrail, etc. or a front side collision with a

vehicle is high. Each function is operational at the following speeds:

●

Pedestrian alert

Detectable objects Vehicle speed

Pedestrians Approx. 30 to 65 km/h (20 to 40 mph)

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●

Pre-collision warning

●

Pre-collision brake assist

●

Pre-collision braking

●

Active steering assist

●

Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision warning)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your

vehicle and object

Preceding vehicles Approx. 5 to 180 km/h (3 to

110 mph)

Approx. 5 to 180 km/h (3 to

110 mph)

Bicyclists and pedestrians Approx. 5 to 80 km/h (3 to

50 mph)

Approx. 5 to 80 km/h (3 to

50 mph)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Approaching vehicle speed

Vehicles approaching from

the front left or right side

Approx. 10 to 60 km/h (7 to

37 mph)

Approx. 15 to 60 km/h (10 to

37 mph)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your

vehicle and object

Preceding vehicles Approx. 30 to 180 km/h (20

to 110 mph)

Approx. 30 to 180 km/h (20

to 110 mph)

Bicyclists and pedestrians Approx. 30 to 80 km/h (20

to 50 mph)

Approx. 30 to 80 km/h (20

to 50 mph)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Approaching vehicle speed

Vehicles approaching from

the front left or right side

Approx. 30 to 60 km/h (19

to 37 mph)

Approx. 15 to 60 km/h (10 to

37 mph)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your

vehicle and object

Preceding vehicles Approx. 5 to 180 km/h (3 to

110 mph)

Approx. 5 to 180 km/h (3 to

110 mph)

Bicyclists and pedestrians Approx. 5 to 80 km/h (3 to

50 mph)

Approx. 5 to 80 km/h (3 to

50 mph)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed

Pedestrians Approx. 40 to 65 km/h (25 to 40 mph)

Guardrail Approx. 60 to 80 km/h (37 to 50 mph)

279

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at an intersec-

tion which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.

●

Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision braking)

When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at an intersec-

tion which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.

The system may not operate in the following situations:

●

If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not

been driven for a certain amount of time

●

If the shift position is in R

●

When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pedestrian alert and pre-collision

warning function will be operational)

●

When there is insufficient safe or unobstructed space for the vehicle to be steered into

●

When an object is approaching the area the vehicle is to be steered into

■

Vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist detec-

tion function

The pre-collision system detects vehicles,

pedestrians and bicyclists based on the size,

profile, and motion of the person. However,

a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist may not be

detected depending on the surrounding

brightness and the motion, posture, and

angle of the person, preventing the system

from operating properly. (P.282)

The illustration shows an image of vehicles,

pedestrians and bicyclists.

■

Cancelation of pre-collision braking

and active steering assist

If either of the following occur while the

pre-collision braking function is operating, it

will be canceled:

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Oncoming vehicle

speed

Relative speed

between your vehicle

and object

Oncoming vehicles Approx. 10 to 25

km/h (7 to 15 mph)

Approx. 30 to 55

km/h (20 to 35 mph)

Approx. 40 to 80

km/h (25 to 50 mph)

Pedestrians Approx. 10 to 25

km/h (7 to 15 mph) —Approx. 10 to 25

km/h (7 to 15 mph)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Oncoming vehicle

speed

Relative speed

between your vehicle

and object

Oncoming vehicles Approx. 15 to 25 km/h

(10 to 15 mph)

Approx. 30 to 45

km/h (20 to 28 mph)

Approx. 45 to 70

km/h (28 to 43 mph)

Pedestrians Approx. 10 to 25

km/h (7 to 15 mph) —Approx. 10 to 25

km/h (7 to 15 mph)

280

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●

The accelerator pedal is depressed

strongly.

●

The steering wheel is turned sharply or

abruptly.

■

Conditions under which the system may

operate even if there is no possibility of a

collision

●

In some situations such as the following,

the system may determine that there is a

possibility of a frontal collision and oper-

ate.

• When passing a vehicle, pedestrian or

bicyclist

• When changing lanes while overtaking a

vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist

• When approaching a vehicle, pedestrian

or bicyclist in an adjacent lane or on the

roadside, such as when changing the

course of travel or driving on a winding

road

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle,

pedestrian, bicyclist, etc.

• When approaching objects on the road-

side, such as vehicle, pedestrian, bicyclist,

guardrails, traffic signs, utility poles, street

lights, trees, walls, etc.

• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, bicy-

clist or object by the roadside at the

entrance of a curve

• When there are patterns or paint in front

of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a

vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist

• When the front of your vehicle is hit by

water, snow, dust, etc.

• When overtaking a vehicle, pedestrian or

bicyclist that is changing lanes or making

a right/left turn

• When passing a vehicle, pedestrian or

bicyclist in an oncoming lane that is

stopped to make a right/left turn

• When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist

approaches very close and then stops

before entering the path of your vehicle

• If the front of your vehicle is raised or low-

ered, such as when on an uneven or

undulating road surface

• When driving on a road surrounded by a

structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron

bridge

• When there is a metal object (manhole

cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, dips, or a

protrusion on the road surface or road-

side

• When a crossing pedestrian or bicyclist

approaches very close to the vehicle

• When passing through a place with a low

281

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

structure above the road such as a low

ceiling, underpass, bridge girder, traffic

sign, etc.

• When passing under an object (road

sign, billboard, etc.)

• When approaching an electric toll gate

barrier, parking area barrier, or other

barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When driving through or under objects

that may contact the vehicle, such as thick

grass, tree branches, or a banner

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When driving near an object that reflects

radio waves, such as a large truck or

guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower, broad-

casting station, electric power plant,

radar equipped vehicles, etc., or other

location where strong radio waves or

electrical noise may be present

• When there are many things which can

reflect the radio waves of the radar in the

vicinity (tunnels, truss bridges, gravel

roads, snow covered road that have

tracks, etc.)

• While making a right/left turn, when an

oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedes-

trian has already exited the path of your

vehicle

• While making a right/left turn, closely in

front of an oncoming vehicle or a cross-

ing pedestrian.

• While making a right/left turn, when an

oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedes-

trian stops before entering the path of

your vehicle

• While making a right/left turn, when an

oncoming vehicle turns right/left in front

of your vehicle

• While steering into the direction of

oncoming traffic

• When passing an oncoming vehicle on a

narrow road

• When driving close to objects such as

walls or poles on a median

• When passing an oncoming vehicle

around a sharp curve

• When passing a vehicle which is making

a left/right turn

• When being passed by a vehicle

approaching from the left or right side in

front of your vehicle

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When making a left/right turn while a

vehicle is approaching from the left or

right side in front of your vehicle

• When passing an object on the side of the

road, such as a parked vehicle

• When passing an oncoming vehicle on a

S curve

• When there is an object that may be mis-

taken for a pedestrian, such as a utility

pole, tree, or pole on the roadside or at

the entrance of a curve

• When there is a bicycle or motorcycle on

the roadside at the entrance of a curve

• If the preceding vehicle is a bicycle or

motorcycle

●

The system may operate the pedestrian

alert unnecessarily if it detects the follow-

ing:

• Pedestrians on a sidewalk

• Bicycles and motorcycles

• Patterns or paint on the road, a wall,

median, billboard, etc. that may be mis-

taken for a pedestrian or bicyclist

■

Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

●

In some situations, such as the following,

a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist may not

be detected by the sensors, preventing

the system from operating properly:

• When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is

approaching your vehicle

• When your vehicle or a vehicle, pedes-

trian or bicyclist is wobbling

• If a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist makes

an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden

swerving, acceleration or deceleration)

• When your vehicle approaches a vehicle,

pedestrian or bicyclist rapidly

• When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is

not directly in front of your vehicle

• When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is

near a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole

cover, vehicle, steel plate on the road, etc.

• When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is

under a structure

• When part of a vehicle, pedestrian or

bicyclist is hidden by an object, such as

large baggage, an umbrella, or guardrail

• When there are many things which can

reflect the radio waves of the radar in the

vicinity (tunnels, truss bridges, gravel

roads, snow covered road that have

tracks, etc.)

• When there is an effect on the radio

waves to the radar that is installed on

another vehicle

• When multiple vehicles, pedestrians or

bicyclists are close together

• If the sun or other light is shining directly

on a vehicle, pedestrian, bicyclist or

guardrail ahead

• When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is

a shade of white and looks extremely

bright

• When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist

appears to be nearly the same color or

283

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

brightness as its surroundings

• If a vehicles, pedestrians or bicyclists cuts

or suddenly emerges in front of your

vehicle

• When the front of your vehicle is hit by

water, snow, dust, etc.

• When a very bright light ahead, such as

the sun or the headlights of oncoming

traffic, shines directly into the front cam-

era

• When approaching the side or front of a

vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle

• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a per-

sonal mobility vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear

end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,

such as a low bed trailer

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high

ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which

protrudes past its rear bumper

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,

such as a tractor or side car

• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized bicycle,

a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a

bicycle ridden by more than one person,

or a uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with

a child seat, tandem bicycle, etc.)

• If a pedestrian/or the riding height of a

bicyclist ahead is shorter than approxi-

mately 1 m (3.2 ft.) or taller than approxi-

mately 2 m (6.5 ft.)

• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing over-

sized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt,

etc.), making their silhouette obscure

• If a pedestrian is bending forward or

squatting or bicyclist is bending forward

• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving fast

• If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheel-

chair, bicycle or other vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such

as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When the surrounding area is dim, such

as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in

a tunnel, making a vehicle, pedestrian or

bicyclist appear to be nearly the same

color as its surroundings

• When driving in a place where the sur-

rounding brightness changes suddenly,

such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• When driving in a location where there

are many objects which reflect radar,

such as a tunnel or parking garage

• After the engine has started the vehicle

has not been driven for a certain amount

of time

• While making a left/right turn and for a

few seconds after making a left/right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few

seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the front cam-

era

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely

high speeds.

• When driving on a hill

• If the radar sensor or front camera is mis-

aligned

• If the headlights are misaligned

• When approaching a guardrail at a wide

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

or narrow angle

• When a vehicle approaches your vehicle

from the front left or right side while your

vehicle is entering an intersection with

poor visibility

• When a vehicle approaches your vehicle

from the rear left or right side

• When a vehicle approaches the side of

your vehicle at a shallow angle

• When driving on a road with a grade that

changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are not

illuminated by the headlights at night, in a

tunnel, etc.

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which change

speed or direction abruptly

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which suddenly

emerge from behind a vehicle or large

object

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are

extremely close to the side of the vehicle

(outside rear view mirror, etc.)

• When driving in a traffic lane separated

by more than one lane where oncoming

vehicles are driving while making a

right/left turn

• When largely out of place with the oppo-

site facing targeted oncoming vehicle

during a right/left turn

• While making a right/left turn, when a

pedestrian approaches from behind or

side of your vehicle

●

In some situations, such as the following,

the sensors may not detect the lane lines

or a safe space the vehicle can be steered

into, preventing the active steering assist

from operating properly:

• When the white (yellow) lane lines are

difficult to see, such as when they are

faint, diverging/merging, or a shadow is

cast upon them

• When the lane is more wide or narrow

than normal

• When there is a light and dark pattern on

the road surface, such as due to road

repairs

• If the system determines that a collision

can be avoided by only using the brakes

• When a pedestrian is detected near the

centerline of the vehicle

●

In some situations such as the following,

sufficient braking force or steering force

may not be obtained, preventing the sys-

tem from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to

their full extent, such as when the brake

parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,

or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained

(brakes or tires are excessively worn,

improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a

gravel road or other slippery surface

• If there are deep ruts in the road

• When driving on a slope

• When driving on a horizontally slanted

road

●

Some guardrails, such as the following,

may not be detected by the sensors, pre-

venting the system from operating prop-

erly:

• Guardrails which are less than approxi-

mately 60 cm (1.9 ft.) tall

• Short guardrails

• Irregularly-shaped guardrails (wire cable

guardrails, guardrails made of thin poles,

etc.)

• Guardrails which are not illuminated by

the headlights at night, in a tunnel, etc.

• Guardrails which appear to be nearly the

same color or brightness as their

surroundings

• Guardrails which appear to be nearly the

same shape as their surroundings (walls,

etc.)

285

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• Guardrails which are over a metal object

(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)

• Guardrails which are hidden behind thick

grass

• Guardrails which are extremely close to

the side of the vehicle (outside rear view

mirror, etc.)

• Curved guardrails or guardrails at the

entrance of a curve

●

In some situations such as the following,

the system may detect a pedestrian and

display a warning on the head-up display,

even though no pedestrian exists:

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered, such as when the road surface is

uneven or undulating (due to ruts, etc.)

• When driving on a slope

• When driving on a horizontally slanted

road

• If the driver’s posture (driver seat posi-

tion) is extreme, such as excessively

reclined

• If the head-up display position is set

extremely high

■

If VSC is disabled

●

If VSC is disabled (P.384), the

pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli-

sion braking functions are also disabled.

●

The PCS warning light will turn on and

“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake

System Unavailable” will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

(vehicles with Lexus Safety

System +)

The pre-collision system uses a

radar sensor and front camera to

detect objects (P.286) in front of

the vehicle. When the system

determines that the possibility of a

frontal collision with an object is

high, a warning operates to urge

the driver to take evasive action

and the potential brake pressure is

increased to help the driver avoid

the collision. If the system deter-

mines that the possibility of a frontal

collision with an object is extremely

high, the brakes are automatically

applied to help avoid the collision or

help reduce the impact of the colli-

sion.

The pre-collision system can be disa-

bled/enabled and the warning timing

can be changed. (P.288)

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The countries and areas for each region listed in the table are current as of Novem-

ber 2020. However, depending on when the vehicle was sold, the countries and

areas of each region may be different. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.

■

Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high, a

buzzer will sound and a warning mes-

sage will be displayed on the

multi-information display to urge the

driver to take evasive action.

■

Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the system applies greater braking

force in relation to how strongly the

brake pedal is depressed.

■

Pre-collision braking

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision is extremely

high, the brakes are automatically

applied to help avoid the collision or

reduce the impact of the collision.

■

Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas-

senger’s seat / power rear seat [if

equipped])

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision is high, it may

move the seatbacks of the front pas-

senger’s seat and power rear seats to

the upright position automatically, if

reclined.

If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be

moved by the pre-collision seat function.

■

Suspension control

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-

tem (P.384) will control the damp-

ing force of the shock absorbers to

help maintain an appropriate vehicle

posture.

Detectable objects

Regions Detectable objects Countries/areas

Vehicles

Bicyclists

Pedestrians

Ukraine, Kazakhstan, Russia

BVehicles Azerbaijan, Georgia

System functions

287

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■

Limitations of the pre-collision system

●

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking

care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system

instead of normal braking operations

under any circumstances. This system

will not prevent collisions or lessen col-

lision damage or injury in every situa-

tion. Do not overly rely on this system.

Failure to do so may lead to an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●

Although this system is designed to

help avoid a collision or help reduce

the impact of the collision, its effective-

ness may change according to various

conditions, therefore the system may

not always be able to achieve the same

level of performance.

Read the following conditions care-

fully. Do not overly rely on this system

and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system

may operate even if there is no possi-

bility of a collision:



P.290

• Conditions under which the system

may not operate properly:



P.291

●

Do not attempt to test the operation of

the pre-collision system yourself.

Depending on the objects used for

testing (dummies, cardboard objects

imitating detectable objects, etc.), the

system may not operate properly, pos-

sibly leading to an accident.

■

Pre-collision braking

●

When the pre-collision braking func-

tion is operating, a large amount of

braking force will be applied.

●

If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-

tion of the pre-collision braking func-

tion, the pre-collision braking function

operation will be canceled after

approximately 2 seconds. Depress the

brake pedal as necessary.

●

The pre-collision braking function may

not operate if certain operations are

performed by the driver. If the acceler-

ator pedal is being depressed strongly

or the steering wheel is being turned,

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and pos-

sibly prevent the pre-collision braking

function from operating.

●

In some situations, while the pre-colli-

sion braking function is operating,

operation of the function may be

canceled if the accelerator pedal is

depressed strongly or the steering

wheel is turned and the system deter-

mines that the driver is taking evasive

action.

●

If the brake pedal is being depressed,

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and pos-

sibly delay the operation timing of the

pre-collision braking function.

■

When to disable the pre-collision sys-

tem

In the following situations, disable the

system, as it may not operate properly,

possibly leading to an accident resulting

in death or serious injury:

●

When the vehicle is being towed

●

When your vehicle is towing another

vehicle

●

When transporting the vehicle via

truck, boat, train or similar means of

transportation

●

When the vehicle is raised on a lift with

the engine running and the tires are

allowed to rotate freely

●

When inspecting the vehicle using a

drum tester such as a chassis

dynamometer or speedometer tester,

or when using an on vehicle wheel bal-

ancer

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-

sion system

The pre-collision system can be ena-

bled/disabled on (P.93) of the

multi-information display.

The system is automatically enabled each

time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

If the system is disabled, the PCS warn-

ing light will turn on and a message will

be displayed on the multi-information

display.

■

Changing the pre-collision warn-

ing timing

The pre-collision warning timing can

be changed on (P.93) of the

multi-information display.

The warning timing setting is retained

when the engine switch is turned off. How-

ever, if the pre-collision system is disabled

and re-enabled, the operation timing will

return to the default setting (middle).

1Early

2Middle

This is the default setting.

3Late

WARNING

●

When a strong impact is applied to the

front bumper or front grille, due to an

accident or other reasons

●

If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-

ble manner, such as when the vehicle

has been in an accident or is malfunc-

tioning

●

When the vehicle is driven in a sporty

manner or off-road

●

When the tires are not properly

inflated

●

When the tires are very worn

●

When tires of a size other than speci-

fied are installed

●

When tire chains are installed

●

When a compact spare tire or an

emergency tire puncture repair kit is

used

●

If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may

obstruct the radar sensor or front cam-

era is temporarily installed to the vehi-

cle

Changing settings of the pre-col-

lision system

289

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal

collision with a detected object is high.

Each function is operational at the following speed

●

Pre-collision warning

●

Pre-collision brake assist

●

Pre-collision braking

: Applicable to vehicles designed for regions that detection of pedestrians and/or bicy-

clists is possible (P.286)

The system may not operate in the following situations:

●

If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not

been driven for a certain amount of time

●

If the shift position is in R

●

When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning function will

be operational)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your

vehicle and object

Vehicles Approx. 10 to 180 km/h (7 to

110 mph)

Approx. 10 to 180 km/h (7 to

110 mph)

Bicyclists and pedestrians

Approx. 10 to 80 km/h (7 to

50 mph)

Approx. 10 to 80 km/h (7 to

50 mph)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your

vehicle and object

Vehicles Approx. 30 to 180 km/h (20

to 110 mph)

Approx. 30 to 180 km/h (20

to 110 mph)

Bicyclists and pedestrians

Approx. 30 to 80 km/h (20

to 50 mph)

Approx. 30 to 80 km/h (20

to 50 mph)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your

vehicle and object

Vehicles Approx. 10 to 180 km/h (7 to

110 mph)

Approx. 10 to 180 km/h (7 to

110 mph)

Bicyclists and pedestrians

Approx. 10 to 80 km/h (7 to

50 mph)

Approx. 10 to 80 km/h (7 to

50 mph)

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Object detection function

The system detects objects based on their

size, profile, motion, etc. However, an object

may not be detected depending on the sur-

rounding brightness and the motion, pos-

ture, and angle of the detected object,

preventing the system from operating prop-

erly. (P.291)

The illustration shows an image of detecta-

ble objects.



Region A



Region B

■

Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

If either of the following occur while the

pre-collision braking function is operating, it

will be canceled:

●

The accelerator pedal is depressed

strongly.

●

The steering wheel is turned sharply or

abruptly.

■

Conditions under which the system may

operate even if there is no possibility of a

collision

●

In some situations such as the following,

the system may determine that there is a

possibility of a frontal collision and oper-

ate.

• When passing a detectable object, etc.

• When changing lanes while overtaking a

detectable object, etc.

• When approaching a detectable object

in an adjacent lane or on the roadside,

such as when changing the course of

travel or driving on a winding road

• When rapidly closing on a detectable

object, etc.

• When approaching objects on the road-

side, such as detectable objects, guard-

rails, utility poles, trees, or walls

• When there is detectable object or other

object by the roadside at the entrance of

a curve

• When there are patterns or paint in front

of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a

detectable object

• When the front of your vehicle is hit by

water, snow, dust, etc.

• When overtaking a detectable object

that is changing lanes or making a

right/left turn

• When passing a detectable object in an

oncoming lane that is stopped to make a

right/left turn

291

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• When a detectable object approaches

very close and then stops before entering

the path of your vehicle

• If the front of your vehicle is raised or low-

ered, such as when on an uneven or

undulating road surface

• When driving on a road surrounded by a

structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron

bridge

• When there is a metal object (manhole

cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protru-

sion in front of your vehicle

• When passing under an object (road

sign, billboard, etc.)

• When approaching an electric toll gate

barrier, parking area barrier, or other

barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When driving through or under objects

that may contact your vehicle, such as

thick grass, tree branches, or a banner

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When driving near an object that reflects

radio waves, such as a large truck or

guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower, broad-

casting station, electric power plant, or

other location where strong radio waves

or electrical noise may be present

■

Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

●

In some situations such as the following,

an object may not be detected by the

radar sensor and front camera, prevent-

ing the system from operating properly:

• When a detectable object is approaching

your vehicle

• When your vehicle or a detectable object

is wobbling

• If a detectable object makes an abrupt

maneuver (such as sudden swerving,

acceleration or deceleration)

• When your vehicle approaches a detect-

able object rapidly

• When a detectable object is not directly

in front of your vehicle

• When a detectable object is near a wall,

fence, guardrail, manhole cover, vehicle,

steel plate on the road, etc.

• When a detectable object is under a

structure

• When part of a detectable object is hid-

den by an object, such as large baggage,

an umbrella, or guardrail

• When multiple detectable objects are

close together

• If the sun or other light is shining directly

on a detectable object

• When a detectable object is a shade of

white and looks extremely bright

• When a detectable object appears to be

nearly the same color or brightness as its

surroundings

• If a detectable object cuts or suddenly

emerges in front of your vehicle

• When the front of your vehicle is hit by

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

water, snow, dust, etc.

• When a very bright light ahead, such as

the sun or the headlights of oncoming

traffic, shines directly into the front cam-

era

• When approaching the side or front of a

vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle ahead is a bicycle

or motor-

cycle

• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a per-

sonal mobility vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear

end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,

such as a low bed trailer

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high

ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which

protrudes past its rear bumper

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,

such as a tractor or side car

• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized bicycle,

a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a

bicycle ridden by more than one person,

or a uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with

a child seat, tandem bicycle, etc.)

• If a pedestrian/or the riding height of a

bicyclist ahead is shorter than approxi-

mately 1 m (3.2 ft.) or taller than approxi-

mately 2 m (6.5 ft.)

• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing over-

sized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt,

etc.), making their silhouette obscure

• If a pedestrian is bending forward or

squatting or bicyclist is bending for-

ward

• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving fast

• If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheel-

chair, bicycle or other vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such

as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When the surrounding area is dim, such

as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in

a tunnel, making a detectable object

appear to be nearly the same color as its

surroundings

• When driving in a place where the sur-

rounding brightness changes suddenly,

such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• After the engine has started the vehicle

has not been driven for a certain amount

of time

• While making a left/right turn and for a

few seconds after making a left/right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few

seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the front cam-

era

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely

high speeds

• When driving on a hill

• If the radar sensor or front camera is mis-

aligned

●

In some situations such as the following,

sufficient braking force may not be

obtained, preventing the system from

performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to

293

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

their full extent, such as when the brake

parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,

or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained

(brakes or tires are excessively worn,

improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a

gravel road or other slippery surface

: Applicable to vehicles designed for

countries/areas that detection of bicy-

clists is not possible (P.286)

: Applicable to vehicles designed for

countries/areas that detection of

pedestrians and/or bicyclists is possible

(P.286)

■

If VSC is disabled

●

If VSC is disabled (P.385), the

pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli-

sion braking functions are also disabled.

●

The PCS warning light will turn on and

“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake

System Unavailable” will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

: If equipped

When the system detects a vehicle

approaching from the left or right in

front of your vehicle when approaching

an intersection, a notification will be

displayed on the head-up display and

panoramic view monitor

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-

MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-

UAL”.

When the system determines that your

vehicle may be about to enter an inter-

section even though a vehicle is

approaching from the left or right in

front of your vehicle, a buzzer will

sound and a message will be displayed

on the multi-information display to

urge you to depress the brake pedal.

Head-up display

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic

Alert)*

When approaching an intersection

at low speed, the radar sensors on

the front side of the vehicle can

detect approaching vehicles to the

left and right of the front of the vehi-

cle. In this case, the head-up display

is used to inform the driver of

detected vehicles.

FCTA system functions

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Multi-information display

■

Enabling/disabling the FCTA sys-

tem

The FCTA system can be enabled/dis-

abled on (P.93) of the

multi-information display.

The system is automatically enabled each

time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

■

Changing the alert timing

The FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

timing can be changed on

(P.93) of the multi-information dis-

play.

The set alert timing is retained when the

engine switch is turned off. However, if the

FCTA system is disabled and re-enabled,

the alert timing will return to the default

setting (middle).

1Early

2Middle

This is the default setting.

3Late

WARNING

■

Cautions regarding the use of the

function

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking care

to observe your surroundings.

The FCTA system is a supplementary

system that informs the driver of vehicles

approaching from the left and right of the

front of the vehicle.

Do not overly rely on the FCTA system.

Over reliance on the system may lead to

an accident, resulting in death or serious

injury.

The details of the warning display may

differ from the actual traffic conditions.

Although the warning display will stop

being displayed after a certain amount of

time, this does not indicate that vehicles

or pedestrians are no longer around your

vehicle.

Changing settings of the FCTA

system

295

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

The FCTA function is operational when

The system operates when all of the follow-

ing conditions are met.

●

A shift position other than P or R is

selected.

●

Vehicle speed is approximately 15 km/h

(9 mph) or lower.

●

A vehicle is approaching from the left or

right in front of your vehicle at a speed

between approximately 10 km/h (6 mph)

and 60 km/h (37 mph).

●

There are no preceding vehicles ahead of

your vehicle.

●

The accelerator pedal is not strongly

depressed.

●

The brake pedal is not being strongly

depressed.

■

Situations in which the system may

operate even though no vehicles are

approaching

In certain situations, such as the following,

the system may operate even though no

vehicles are approaching:

●

When approaching objects on the road-

side, such as guardrails, traffic signs, util-

ity poles, street lights, trees, or walls

●

When driving near a TV tower, broad-

casting station, electric power plant, or

other location where strong radio waves

or electrical noise may be present

●

When passing an object on the side of the

road, such as a parked vehicle

●

When a vehicle or pedestrian is

approaching from the left or right in front

of your vehicle from far away

●

When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving

within a parking spot, etc. next to the lane

your vehicle is driving in

●

When a pedestrian or bicyclist is moving

on a sidewalk

●

When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving

away from your vehicle

●

When a vehicle approaching from the left

or right in front of your vehicle is deceler-

ating or stops

●

When a vehicle approaching from the left

or right in front of your vehicle makes a

left/right turn immediately in front of your

vehicle

●

When a pedestrian is approaching your

vehicle

●

When an oncoming vehicle makes a

left/right turn

●

When your vehicle enters an intersection

before a vehicle approaching from the

left or right in front of your vehicle

●

When stopped at traffic light and a vehi-

cle approaches from the left or right in

front of your vehicle

●

When driving in a location where there

are objects which reflect radar, such as

vehicles, guardrails, walls, traffic signs,

etc.

●

When making a left/right turn in front of

an approaching vehicle

●

When passing an oncoming vehicle

●

When being overtaken by another vehi-

cle

●

When driving next to another vehicle or a

pedestrian

●

When a vehicle or pedestrian

approaches the side of your vehicle

Some objects, such as the following, may be

detected and cause the FCTA system to

operate:

●

Pedestrians

■

Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

In some situations, such as the following, a

vehicle may not be detected by a front side

radar sensor, preventing the system from

operating properly:

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●

If the front end or side of an approaching

vehicle is small (sports cars, etc.)

●

If the front end of an approaching vehicle

is low (low-slung sports cars, etc.)

●

If the ground clearance of an approach-

ing vehicle is extremely high

●

If the shape of an approaching vehicle is

unusual (tractors, motorcycles with side-

cars, etc.)

●

If a vehicle suddenly enters the detection

area on the left or right in front of your

vehicle from a parking lot, etc.

●

If an approaching vehicle moves sud-

denly (sudden steering, acceleration,

deceleration, etc.)

●

When driving in inclement weather such

as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

●

After the engine has been started and the

vehicle has not been driven for a certain

amount of time

●

When driving on a road with a grade that

changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)

●

When driving around a sharp curve or on

an undulating road

●

If a vehicle is approaching from the left or

right of the front of your vehicle diago-

nally

●

When a vehicle is approaching from the

left or right in front of your vehicle from

far away

●

When there is an object between your

vehicle and an approaching vehicle

●

When driving in a location where there

are objects which reflect radar, such as

guardrails, walls, vehicles, etc.

●

When a group of vehicles which are close

together approach

●

Immediately after the FCTA system has

been enabled

■

If the PCS warning light illuminates and

a message is displayed on the

multi-information display

The system may be temporarily unavailable

or may be malfunctioning.

297

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

:If equipped

While driving on a road with clear

white (yellow) lane lines, the LTA sys-

tem warns the driver if the vehicle may

deviate from the current lane or

course

, and also can slightly operate

the steering wheel to help avoid devia-

tion from the lane or course

. Also,

while the dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range is operating, this

system will operate the steering wheel

to maintain the vehicle’s lane position.

The LTA system recognizes white (yel-

low) lane lines or a course

using the

front camera. Additionally, it detects

preceding vehicles using the front

camera and radar.

: Boundary between asphalt and the side

of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)*

Summary of function

WARNING

■

Before using LTA system

●

Do not rely solely upon the LTA sys-

tem. The LTA system does not auto-

matically drive the vehicle or reduce

the amount of attention that must be

paid to the area in front of the vehicle.

The driver must always assume full

responsibility for driving safely by pay-

ing careful attention to the surround-

ing conditions and operating the

steering wheel to correct the path of

the vehicle. Also, the driver must take

adequate breaks when fatigued, such

as from driving for a long period of

time.

●

Failure to perform appropriate driving

operations and pay careful attention

may lead to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

●

When not using the LTA system, use

the LTA switch to turn the system off.

■

Situations unsuitable for LTA system

In the following situations, use the LTA

switch to turn the system off. Failure to do

so may lead to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

●

Vehicle is driven on a road surface

which is slippery due to rainy weather,

fallen snow, freezing, etc.

●

Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered

road.

●

White (yellow) lines are difficult to see

due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

●

Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or

restricted lane due to construction

work.

●

Vehicle is driven in a construction

zone.

●

A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are

equipped.

298

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

●

When the tires have been excessively

worn, or when the tire inflation pres-

sure is low.

●

During emergency towing.

■

Preventing LTA system malfunctions

and operations performed by mistake

●

Do not modify the headlights or place

stickers, etc. on the surface of the

lights.

●

Do not modify the suspension etc. If

the suspension etc. needs to be

replaced, contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

Do not install or place anything on the

hood or grille. Also, do not install a

grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar,

etc.).

●

If your windshield needs repairs, con-

tact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer.

■

Conditions in which functions may

not operate properly

In the following situations, the functions

may not operate properly and the vehicle

may depart from its lane. Drive safely by

always paying careful attention to your

surroundings and operate the steering

wheel to correct the path of the vehicle

without relying solely on the functions.

●

When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (



P.302) and the preced-

ing vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehi-

cle may follow the preceding vehicle

and also change lanes.)

●

When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (



P.302) and the preced-

ing vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle

may sway accordingly and depart from

the lane.)

●

When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (



P.302) and the preced-

ing vehicle departs from its lane. (Your

vehicle may follow the preceding vehi-

cle and depart from the lane.)

●

When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (



P.302) and the preced-

ing vehicle is being driven extremely

close to the left/right lane line. (Your

vehicle may follow the preceding vehi-

cle and depart from the lane.)

●

Vehicle is being driven around a sharp

curve.

●

Objects or patterns that could be mis-

taken for white (yellow) lines are pres-

ent on the side of the road (guardrails,

reflective poles, etc.).

299

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

●

Vehicle is driven where the road

diverges, merges, etc.

●

Repair marks of asphalt, white (yellow)

lines, etc. are present due to road

repair.

●

There are shadows on the road that

run parallel with, or cover, the white

(yellow) lines.

●

The vehicle is driven in an area without

white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a

tollgate or checkpoint, or at an inter-

section, etc.

●

The white (yellow) lines are cracked,

“Raised pavement marker” or stones

are present.

●

The white (yellow) lines cannot be

seen or are difficult to see due to sand,

etc.

●

The vehicle is driven on a road surface

that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

●

The traffic lines are yellow (which may

be more difficult to recognize than

lines that are white).

●

The white (yellow) lines cross over a

curb, etc.

●

The vehicle is driven on a bright sur-

face, such as concrete.

●

If the edge of the road is not clear or

straight.

●

The vehicle is driven on a surface that

is bright due to reflected light, etc.

●

The vehicle is driven in an area where

the brightness changes suddenly, such

as at the entrances and exits of tunnels,

etc.

●

Light from the headlights of an oncom-

ing vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the

camera.

●

The vehicle is driven on a slope.

●

The vehicle is driven on a road which

tilts left or right, or a winding road.

●

The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or

rough road.

●

The traffic lane is excessively narrow

or wide.

●

The vehicle is extremely tilted due to

carrying heavy luggage or having

improper tire pressure.

●

The distance to the preceding vehicle

is extremely short.

●

The vehicle is moving up and down a

large amount due to road conditions

during driving (poor roads or road

seams).

●

When driving in a tunnel or at night

with the headlights off or when a head-

light is dim due to its lens being dirty or

it being misaligned.

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the

vehicle might depart from its lane or

course

, a warning is displayed on the

multi-information display, and either a

warning buzzer will sound or the steer-

ing wheel will vibrate to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds or the

steering wheel vibrates, check the area

around your vehicle and carefully operate

the steering wheel to move the vehicle

back to the center of the lane.

Vehicle with BSM: When the system deter-

mines that the vehicle might depart from its

lane and that the possibility of a collision

with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent

lane is high, the lane departure alert will

operate even if the turn signals are operat-

ing.

: Boundary between asphalt and the side

of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

■

Steering assist function

When the system determines that the

vehicle might depart from its lane or

course

, the system provides assis-

tance as necessary by operating the

steering wheel in small amounts for a

short period of time to keep the vehicle

in its lane.

If the system detects that the steering

wheel has not been operated for a fixed

amount of time or the steering wheel is not

being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed

on the multi-information display and the

function is temporarily canceled.

Vehicle with BSM: When the system deter-

mines that the vehicle might depart from its

lane and that the possibility of a collision

with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent

lane is high, the steering assist function will

operate even if the turn signals are operat-

ing.

: Boundary between asphalt and the side

of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

WARNING

●

The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.

●

The vehicle is affected by wind from a

vehicle driven in a nearby lane.

●

The vehicle has just changed lanes or

crossed an intersection.

●

Tires which differ by structure, manu-

facturer, brand or tread pattern are

used.

●

When tires of a size other than speci-

fied are installed.

●

Snow tires, etc. are equipped.

●

The vehicle is being driven at

extremely high speeds.

Functions included in LTA system

301

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Vehicle sway warning function

When the vehicle is swaying within a

lane, the warning buzzer will sound and

a message will be displayed on the

multi-information display to alert the

driver.

■

Lane centering function

This function is linked with dynamic

radar cruise control with full-speed

range and provides the required assis-

tance by operating the steering wheel

to keep the vehicle in its current lane.

When dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range is not operating, the lane

centering function does not operate.

In situations where the white (yellow) lane

lines are difficult to see or are not visible,

such as when in a traffic jam, this function

will operate to help follow a preceding

vehicle by monitoring the position of the

preceding vehicle.

If the system detects that the steering

wheel has not been operated for a fixed

amount of time or the steering wheel is not

being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed

on the multi-information display and the

function is temporarily canceled.

302

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA

system on.

The LTA indicator illuminates and a mes-

sage is displayed on the multi-information

display.

Press the LTA switch again to turn the LTA

system off.

When the LTA system is turned on or off,

operation of the LTA system continues in

the same condition the next time the

engine is started.

LTA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator

informs the driver of the system operation

status.

Illuminated in white: LTA system is operat-

ing.

Illuminated in green: Steering wheel assis-

tance of the steering assist function or lane

centering function is operating.

Flashing in orange: Lane departure alert

function is operating.

Operation display of steering

wheel operation support

Displayed when the multi-information dis-

play is switched to the driving support sys-

tem information display.

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of

the steering assist function or lane center-

ing function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are displayed:

Indicates that steering wheel assist of the

lane centering function is operating.

One outer side of the lane is displayed:

Indicates that steering wheel assist of the

steering assist function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are flashing:

Alerts the driver that their input is neces-

sary to stay in the center of the lane (lane

centering function).

Lane departure alert function dis-

play

Displayed when the multi-information dis-

play is switched to the driving support sys-

tem information display.



Inside of displayed lines is white

Indicates that the system is recognizing

Turning LTA system on

Indications on multi-information

display

303

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

white (yellow) lines or a course

. When

the vehicle departs from its lane, the

white line displayed on the side the

vehicle departs from flashes orange.



Inside of displayed lines is black

Indicates that the system is not able to

recognize white (yellow) lines or a

course

or is temporarily canceled.

: Boundary between asphalt and the side

of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

Follow-up cruising display

Displayed when the multi-information dis-

play is switched to the driving support sys-

tem information display.

Indicates that steering assist of the lane

centering function is operating by monitor-

ing the position of a preceding vehicle.

When the follow-up cruising display is dis-

played, if the preceding vehicle moves,

your vehicle may move in the same way.

Always pay careful attention to your

surroundings and operate the steering

wheel as necessary to correct the path of

the vehicle and ensure safety.

■

Warning display (vehicles with

Lexus Safety System + A)

When the lane centering function is oper-

ating and the system determines that the

vehicle may depart from its lane due to a

sharp curve, etc., a warning display urging

the driver to operate the steering wheel,

will be displayed.

In some situations a warning display may

not be displayed.

Some displays, which are the same as

those displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display, will be displayed.

■

LTA system curve display on the

head-up display

The curve display on the head-up display

changes according to the direction and

Indications on head-up display

(vehicles with Lexus Safety Sys-

tem + A)

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

curvature of the curve.

■

Operation conditions of each function

●

Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h

(32 mph) or more.

• System recognizes white (yellow) lane

lines or a course

. (When a white [yel-

low] line or course

is recognized on

only one side, the system will operate

only for the recognized side.)

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m

(9.8 ft.) or more.

• Turn signal lever is not operated. (Vehicle

with BSM: Except when another vehicle

is in the lane on the side where the turn

signal was operated)

• Vehicle is not being driven around a

sharp curve.

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(P.306)

: The function operates even if the vehi-

cle speed is less than approximately 50

km/h (32 mph) when the lane center-

ing function is operating.

: Boundary between asphalt and the side

of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

●

Steering assist function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met in addition to the

operation conditions for the lane depar-

ture alert function.

•Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the

multi-information display is set to “ON”.

(P.93)

• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated

by a fixed amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a

steering force level suitable for changing

lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRC and PCS are not oper-

ating.

• TRC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel warning is not

displayed. (P.305)

●

Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the

multi-information display is set to “ON”.

(P.93)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h

(32 mph) or more.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m

(9.8 ft.) or more.

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(P.306)

●

Lane centering function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.

• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane

Centre” in of the multi-information

display are set to “ON”. (P.93)

• This function recognizes white (yellow)

lane lines or the position of a preceding

vehicle (except when the preceding vehi-

cle is small, such as a motorcycle).

• The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range is operating in vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 to

4 m (10 to 13 ft.).

•Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is not being driven around a

sharp curve.

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(P.306)

• Vehicle does not accelerate or

decelerate by a fixed amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a

steering force level suitable for changing

lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRC and PCS are not oper-

ating.

• TRC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel warning is not

displayed. (P.305)

• The driver has one or both hands on the

steering wheel. (vehicles with Lexus

Safety System + A)

• The vehicle is being driven in the center

of a lane.

• Steering assist function is not operating.

305

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Temporary cancelation of functions

●

When operation conditions are no longer

met, a function may be temporarily

canceled. However, when the operation

conditions are met again, operation of the

function is automatically restored.

(P.304)

●

If the operation conditions (P.304) are

no longer met while the lane centering

function is operating, the steering wheel

may vibrate and the buzzer may sound to

indicate that the function has been tem-

porarily canceled. However, if the “Alert”

customization setting is set to ,

the system will notify the driver by vibrat-

ing the steering wheel instead of sound-

ing the buzzer.

■

Steering assist function/lane centering

function

●

Depending on the vehicle speed, lane

departure situation, road conditions, etc.,

the driver may not feel the function is

operating or the function may not oper-

ate at all.

●

Even if the curve speed reduction func-

tion (P.318) operates, the lane center-

ing function may not be able to drive the

vehicle around a curve successfully.

(vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A)

●

The steering control of the function is

overridden by the driver’s steering wheel

operation.

●

Do not attempt to test the operation of

the steering assist function.

■

Lane departure alert function

●

The warning buzzer may be difficult to

hear due to external noise, audio play-

back, etc. Also, it may be difficult to feel

steering wheel vibrations due to the road

conditions, etc.

●

If the edge of the course

is not clear or

straight, the lane departure alert function

may not operate.

●

Vehicle with BSM: It may not be possible

for the system to determine if there is a

danger of a collision with a vehicle in an

adjacent lane.

●

Do not attempt to test the operation of

the lane departure alert function.

: Boundary between asphalt and the side

of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

■

Hands off steering wheel warning

In the following situations, a warning mes-

sage urging the driver to hold the steering

wheel and the symbol shown in the illustra-

tion are displayed on the multi-information

display to warn the driver. The warning

stops when the system determines that the

driver holds the steering wheel. Always

keep your hands on the steering wheel

when using this system, regardless of warn-

ings.

Depending on the vehicle condition and

road conditions, the warning may not oper-

ate. Also, if the system determines that the

vehicle is driving around a curve, warnings

will occur earlier than during straight-lane

driving.

●

When the system determines that the

driver is driving without holding the steer-

ing wheel while the system is operating

If the driver continues to keep their hands

off of the steering wheel, the buzzer

sounds, the driver is warned and the func-

tion is temporarily canceled. This warning

also operates in the same way when the

driver continuously operates the steering

wheel only a small amount.

The buzzer also sounds even if the alert

type is set to .

●

Vehicles with Lexus Safety System +:

When the system determines that the

vehicle may deviate from the lane while

driving around a curve while the lane

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems

centering function is operating.

●

When the system determines that the

driver is driving without holding the steer-

ing wheel while the steering wheel assist

of the steering assist function is operating

If the driver continues to keep their hands

off of the steering wheel and the steering

wheel assist is operating, the buzzer

sounds and the driver is warned. Each time

the buzzer sounds, the continuing time of

the buzzer becomes longer.

The buzzer also sounds even if the alert

type is set to .

In situations such as the following, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect when the

driver’s hands are on the steering wheel

(vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A):

●

If a steering wheel cover is installed.

●

If the driver is wearing gloves.

●

If something is attached to the steering

wheel.

●

If the driver is gripping the wood trim,

stitched area, spokes, or other part of the

steering wheel that does not have sen-

sors.

In situations such as the following, the hands

off steering wheel alert may not operate

and the steering assist function and lane

centering function may operate even if the

driver’s hands are off the steering wheel

(vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A):

●

If an object contacts the steering wheel.

●

If a wide object or arms are held in front

of the steering wheel.

■

Vehicle sway warning function

When the system determines that the vehi-

cle is swaying while the vehicle sway warn-

ing function is operating, a buzzer sounds

and a warning message urging the driver to

rest and the symbol shown in the illustration

are simultaneously displayed on the

multi-information display.

Depending on the vehicle and road condi-

tions, the warning may not operate.

■

Warning message

If the following warning message is dis-

played on the multi-information display and

the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, fol-

low the appropriate troubleshooting proce-

dure. Also, if a different warning message is

displayed, follow the instructions displayed

on the screen.

●

“LTA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”

The system may not be operating properly.

Have the vehicle inspected by any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

“LTA Unavailable”

The system is temporarily canceled due to

a malfunction in a sensor other than the

front camera. Turn the LTA system off, wait

for a little while, and then turn the LTA sys-

tem back on.

●

“LTA Unavailable at Current Speed”

The function cannot be used as the vehicle

speed exceeds the LTA operation range.

Drive slower.

■

Customization

Function settings can be changed.

(Customizable features:P.546)

307

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

:If equipped

The RSA system recognizes specific

road signs using the front camera

and/or navigation system (when speed

limit information is available) to provide

information to the driver via the display.

If the system judges that the vehicle is

being driven over the speed limit, per-

forming prohibited actions, etc.

according to the recognized road

signs, it notifies the driver through a

visual notification and notification

buzzer or steering wheel vibration.

When the front camera recognizes a

sign and/or information of a sign is

available from the navigation system,

the sign will be displayed on the

multi-information display.

When the Driving support system

information display is selected, a

maximum of 3 signs can be dis-

played. (P.93)

When a tab other than the Driving

support system information display

is selected, the following types of

road signs will be displayed.

(P.93)

• Speed limit begins/ends sign

• Speed limit related information sign

(Expressway, Highway, Urban area, Res-

idential area)

• End of prohibition sign

•No-entry sign

(when notification is nec-

essary)

• Speed limit with supplemental sign

(Ramp way only)

: For vehicles with navigation system

RSA (Road Sign Assist)*

Summary of function

WARNING

■

Before using the RSA

Do not rely solely upon the RSA system.

RSA is a system which supports the

driver by providing information, but it is

not a replacement for a driver’s own

vision and awareness. Drive safely by

always paying careful attention to the

traffic rules.

Indication on the multi-informa-

tion display

308

4-5. Using the driving support systems

If signs other than speed limit signs are rec-

ognized, they will be displayed in an over-

lapping stack under the current speed limit

sign.

The following types of road signs,

including electronic signs and blinking

signs, are recognized.

A non-official (not meeting the Vienna

Convention) or a recently introduced traf-

fic sign may not be recognized.

Speed limit road signs

Speed limit related information

: Displayed when a sign is recognized but

speed limit information for the road is

not available from the navigation system

No-overtaking road signs

Other road signs

Supported types of road signs

Speed limit begins/Maximum

speed zone begins

Speed limit ends/Maximum

speed zone ends

Motorway entrance

Motorway exit

Expressway entrance

Expressway exit

Urban area beginning

Urban area ending

Urban area beginning

Urban area ending

Residential area beginning

Residential area ending

No overtaking begins

No overtaking ends

No-entry

309

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

: For vehicles with navigation system

Speed limit with supplemental

mark

: Displayed simultaneously with speed

limit.

: Contents not recognized.

: If the turn signal indicator is not oper-

ated when changing lanes, the mark

does not display.

In the following situations, the RSA sys-

tem will notify the driver.

When the vehicle speed exceeds

the speed notification threshold of

the speed limit sign displayed, the

sign display will be emphasized and

a buzzer will sound.

When the RSA system recognizes a

no-entry sign and detects that the

vehicle has entered a no-entry area

based on the map information of the

navigation system, the no-entry sign

flashes and a buzzer will sound. (For

vehicles with navigation system)

If it is detected that your vehicle is

overtaking when a no overtaking

sign is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display, the displayed sign

will flash and a steering wheel will

vibrate.

Depending on the situation, traffic

environment (traffic direction, speed

unit) may be detected incorrectly and a

notification function may not operate

properly.

■

Setting procedure

1Press or of the meter control

switches and select .

2Press or of the meter control

switches and select “Vehicle Settings”,

then press .

3Press or of the meter control

switches and select , then press

4Press or of the meter control

switches and select “RSA”, then press

■

Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display

One or more signs automatically turn off in

the following situations.

●

No sign has been recognized for a cer-

tain distance.

End of prohibition

Stop

Wet

Rain

Ice

Supplemental mark exists

Exit ramp on right

Exit ramp on left

Time

Notification function

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●

The road changes due to a left or right

turn, etc.

■

Conditions in which the function may

not operate or detect correctly

In the following situations, RSA does not

operate normally and may not recognize

signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. How-

ever, this does not indicate a malfunction.

●

The front camera is misaligned due to a

strong impact being applied to the sen-

sor, etc.

●

Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the wind-

shield near the front camera.

●

In inclement weather such as heavy rain,

fog, snow or sand storms.

●

Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun,

etc. enters the front camera.

●

The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent.

●

The contrast of electronic sign is low.

●

All or part of the sign is hidden by the

leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.

●

The sign is only visible to the front camera

for a short amount of time.

●

The driving scene (turning, lane change,

etc.) is judged incorrectly.

●

If a sign not appropriate for the currently

traveled lane, but the sign exists directly

after a freeway branches, or in an adja-

cent lane just before merging.

●

Stickers are attached to the rear of the

preceding vehicle.

●

A sign resembling a system compatible

sign is recognized.

●

Side road speed signs may be detected

and displayed (if positioned in sight of the

front camera) while the vehicle is

traveling on the main road.

●

Roundabout exit road speed signs may

be detected and displayed (if positioned

in sight of the front camera) while

traveling on a roundabout.

●

The front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load.

●

The surrounding brightness is not suffi-

cient or changes suddenly.

●

When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is

recognized.

●

The vehicle is driven in a country with a

different direction of traffic.

●

The navigation system map data is out-

dated.

●

The navigation system is not operating.

●

The speed information displayed on the

meter and on the navigation system may

be different due to the navigation system

using map data.

■

Speed limit sign display

If the engine switch was last turned off while

a speed limit sign was displayed on the

multi-information display, the same sign dis-

plays again when the engine switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode.

■

If “RSA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”

is shown

The system may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(Customizable features:P.546)

311

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

:If equipped

In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, the vehicle automatically accel-

erates, decelerates and stops to match

the speed changes of the preceding

vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is

not depressed. In constant speed con-

trol mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed

speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range on freeways and

highways.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode (P.313)

Constant speed control mode

(P.318)

■

Meter display

Multi-information display

Set speed

Indicators

■

Operation switches

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch

“+RES” switch

Cruise control main switch

Cancel switch

“-SET” switch

Dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range*

Summary of function

System Components

WARNING

■

Before using dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range

●

Driving safely is the sole responsibility

of the driver. Do not rely solely on the

system, and drive safely by always pay-

ing careful attention to your

surroundings.

●

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range provides driving

assistance to reduce the driver’s bur-

den. However, there are limitations to

the assistance provided.

Read the following conditions care-

fully. Do not overly rely on this system

and always drive carefully.

• When the sensor may not be correctly

detecting the vehicle ahead:



P.321

• Conditions under which the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode

may not function correctly:



P.322

312

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

●

Set the speed appropriately depend-

ing on the speed limit, traffic flow, road

conditions, weather conditions, etc.

The driver is responsible for checking

the set speed.

●

Even when the system is functioning

normally, the condition of the preced-

ing vehicle as detected by the system

may differ from the condition

observed by the driver. Therefore, the

driver must always remain alert, assess

the danger of each situation and drive

safely. Relying solely on this system or

assuming the system ensures safety

while driving can lead to an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

●

Switch the dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range setting to off,

using the cruise control main switch

when not in use.

■

Cautions regarding the driving assist

systems

Observe the following precautions, as

there are limitations to the assistance

provided by the system. Failure to do so

may cause an accident resulting in death

or serious injury.

●

Assisting the driver to measure follow-

ing distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range is only intended to help

the driver in determining the following

distance between the driver’s own vehi-

cle and a designated vehicle traveling

ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows

careless or inattentive driving, and it is

not a system that can assist the driver in

low-visibility conditions.

It is still necessary for driver to pay close

attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

●

Assisting the driver to judge proper

following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range determines whether the

following distance between the driver’s

own vehicle and a designated vehicle

traveling ahead is within a set range. It is

not capable of making any other type of

judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely

necessary for the driver to remain vigi-

lant and to determine whether or not

there is a possibility of danger in any

given situation.

●

Assisting the driver to operate the

vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range does not include func-

tions which will prevent or avoid colli-

sions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle.

Therefore, if there is ever any possibility

of danger, the driver must take immedi-

ate and direct control of the vehicle and

act appropriately in order to ensure the

safety of all involved.

■

Situations unsuitable for dynamic

radar cruise control with full-speed

range

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range in any of the follow-

ing situations. Doing so may result in

inappropriate speed control and could

cause an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

●

Roads where there are pedestrians,

cyclists, etc.

●

In heavy traffic

●

On roads with sharp bends

●

On winding roads

●

On slippery roads, such as those cov-

ered with rain, ice or snow

313

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately

100 m (328 ft.) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following dis-

tance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle

ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may become shorter.

WARNING

●

On steep downhills, or where there

are sudden changes between sharp up

and down gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set

speed when driving down a steep hill.

●

At entrances to freeways and highways

●

When weather conditions are bad

enough that they may prevent the sen-

sors from detecting correctly (fog,

snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

●

When there is rain, snow, etc. on the

front surface of the radar or front cam-

era

●

In traffic conditions that require fre-

quent repeated acceleration and

deceleration

●

During emergency towing

●

When an approach warning buzzer is

heard often

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

314

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.

Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates

your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies

the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in

the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by

the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to

prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by sys-

tem control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the “+RES” switch or depressing

the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off

operation is not performed, system control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.

When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to an overtaking lane while

driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, the vehicle will accelerate to help to overtake a

passing vehicle.

The system’s identification of what is an overtaking lane may be determined solely based on

the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left side driver position versus right side

driver position.) If the vehicle is driven to a region where the overtaking lane is on a different

side from where the vehicle is normally driven, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn

signal lever is operated in the opposite direction to the overtaking lane (e.g., if the driver

normally operates the vehicle in a region where the overtaking lane is to the right but then

drives to a region where the overtaking lane is to the left, the vehicle may accelerate when

the right turn signal is activated).

Example of acceleration

315

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set

speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant

speed cruising.

1Press the cruise control main switch

to activate the cruise control.

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator will

come on and a message will be displayed

on the multi-information display. Press the

switch again to deactivate the cruise con-

trol.

If the cruise control main switch is pressed

and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the sys-

tem turns on in constant speed control

mode. (P.318)

2Accelerate or decelerate, with

accelerator pedal operation, to the

desired vehicle speed (at or above

approximately 30 km/h [20 mph])

and press the “-SET” switch to set

the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come

on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the

switch is released becomes the set speed.



Adjusting the set speed by the

switch

To change the set speed, press the

“+RES” or “-SET” switch until the

desired set speed is displayed.

1Increases the speed (Except when

the vehicle has been stopped by

system control in vehicle-to-vehi-

cle distance control mode)

2Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Press the switch.

Large adjustment: Press and hold the

switch to change the speed, and release

Setting the vehicle speed (vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control

mode)

Adjusting the set speed

316

4-5. Using the driving support systems

when the desired speed is reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode, the set speed will be

increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

or 1

mph (1.6 km/h)

each time the switch is

pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases

in 5 km/h (3.1 mph)

or 5 mph (8

km/h)

increments for as long as the

switch is held

In the constant speed control mode

(P.318), the set speed will be

increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

or 1

mph (1.6 km/h)

each time the switch is

pressed

Large adjustment: The speed will continue

to change while the switch is held.

: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”



Increasing the set speed by the

accelerator pedal

1Accelerate with accelerator pedal

operation to the desired vehicle

speed

2Press the “-SET” switch

Pressing the switch changes the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

1Long

2Medium

3Short

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the

preceding vehicle mark will also be dis-

played.

Select a distance from the table below.

Note that the distances shown corre-

spond to a vehicle speed of 80 km/h

(50 mph). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

increases/decreases in accordance

with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is

stopped by system control, the vehicle

stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle

distance depending on the situation.

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode)

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance set-

tings (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode)

Distance

options

Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance

Long Approximately 50 m (160

ft.)

Medium Approximately 40 m (130

ft.)

Short Approximately 30 m (100

ft.)

317

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

After the vehicle ahead of you starts

off, press the “+RES” switch.

Your vehicle will also resume follow-up

cruising if the accelerator pedal is

depressed after the vehicle ahead of

you starts off.

1Pressing the cancel switch cancels

the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled when

the brake pedal is depressed. (When the

vehicle has been stopped by system con-

trol, depressing the brake pedal does not

cancel the setting.)

2Pressing the “+RES” switch

resumes the cruise control and

returns vehicle speed to the set

speed.

When your vehicle is too close to a

vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic

deceleration via the cruise control is

not possible, the display will flash and

the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

An example of this would be if another

driver cuts in front of you while you are

following a vehicle. Depress the brake

pedal to ensure an appropriate vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance.

■

Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings

may not occur even when the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance is small.

When the speed of the preceding

vehicle matches or exceeds your

vehicle speed

When the preceding vehicle is

traveling at an extremely slow speed

Resuming follow-up cruising

when the vehicle has been

stopped by system control (vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control

mode)

Canceling and resuming the

speed control

Approach warning (vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control

mode)

318

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Immediately after the cruise control

speed was set

When depressing the accelerator

pedal

While driving in vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode, this function will

reduce the vehicle speed, if it is deter-

mined to be necessary.

■

Function operation

When the steering wheel begins to be

turned, the vehicle speed will begin

being reduced. When the steering

wheel is returned to the center posi-

tion, the vehicle speed reduction will

end.

Depending on the situation, the vehicle

speed will then return to the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode

set speed.

In situations where vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control needs to operate,

such as when a preceding vehicle cuts

in front of your vehicle, the curve speed

reduction function will be canceled.

■

Operation display

Displayed when the vehicle speed is

being reduced.

When the vehicle speed reduction ends,

the display will disappear.

■

Changing the settings of the curve

speed reduction function

The curve speed reduction function

can be enabled/disabled and the vehi-

cle speed reduction strength can be

adjusted.

Press the or meter control

switch to select . Press or

to select “Curve Spd. Reduction” and

then press .

The setting will change each time the

meter control switch is pressed.

When constant speed control mode is

selected, your vehicle will maintain a

set speed without controlling the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance. Select this

mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode does not function

correctly due to a dirty radar, etc.

Curve speed reduction function

(vehicles with Lexus Safety Sys-

tem + A)

Selecting constant speed con-

trol mode

319

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

1With the cruise control off, press

and hold the cruise control main

switch for 1.5 seconds or more.

Immediately after the switch is pressed, the

dynamic radar cruise control indicator will

come on. Afterwards, it switches to the

cruise control indicator.

Switching to constant speed control mode

is only possible when operating the switch

with the cruise control off.

2Accelerate or decelerate, with

accelerator pedal operation, to the

desired vehicle speed (at or above

approximately 30 km/h [20 mph])

and press the “-SET” switch to set

the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come

on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the

switch is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting: P.315

Canceling and resuming the speed setting:

P.317

When this function is enabled and the

system is operating in vehicle-to-vehi-

cle distance control mode (P.313),

when a speed limit sign is detected, the

recognized speed limit will be dis-

played with an up/down arrow. The set

speed can be increased/reduced to

the recognized speed limit by pressing

and holding the “+RES”/“-SET” switch.

When the current set speed is lower

than the recognized speed limit

Press and hold the “+RES” switch.

When the current set speed is

higher than the recognized speed

limit

Press and hold the “-SET” switch.

Dynamic Radar Cruise Control

with Road Sign Assist

320

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Dynamic Radar Cruise Control with

Road Sign Assist can be enabled/disa-

bled in on the multi-information

display. (P.93)

■

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range can be set when

●

The shift position is in D.

●

The desired set speed can be set when

the vehicle speed is approximately 30

km/h (20 mph) or more.

(However, when the vehicle speed is set

while driving at below approximately 30

km/h [20 mph], the set speed will be set

to approximately 30 km/h [20 mph].)

■

Accelerating after setting the vehicle

speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the

accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the

set speed resumes. However, during vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the

vehicle speed may decrease below the set

speed in order to maintain the distance to

the preceding vehicle.

■

Excessive speed warning

While driving down a hill, the vehicle speed

may exceed the set speed. In this case, the

displayed set vehicle speed will be high-

lighted and a buzzer will sound to alert the

driver.

■

When the vehicle stops while follow-up

cruising

●

Pressing the “+RES” switch while the

vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up

cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off

within approximately 3 seconds after the

switch is pressed.

●

If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 sec-

onds after your vehicle stops, follow-up

cruising will be resumed.

■

Automatic cancelation of vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is

automatically canceled in the following situ-

ations.

●

VSC is activated.

●

TRC is activated for a period of time.

●

When the VSC or TRC system is turned

off.

●

When snow mode is set.

●

The sensor cannot detect correctly

because it is covered in some way.

●

When the brake control or output restric-

tion control of a driving support system

operates. (For example: Pre-Collision

System, Drive-Start Control)

●

The parking brake is operated.

●

The vehicle is stopped by system control

on a steep incline.

●

The following are detected when the

vehicle has been stopped by system con-

trol:

• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3

minutes.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

is automatically canceled for any reasons

other than the above, there may be a mal-

function in the system. Contact any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

Automatic cancelation of constant

speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automati-

cally canceled in the following situations:

●

Actual vehicle speed is more than

approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below

the set vehicle speed.

●

Actual vehicle speed falls below approxi-

mately 30 km/h (20 mph).

●

VSC is activated.

●

TRC is activated for a period of time.

●

When the VSC or TRC system is turned

off.

Enabling/Disabling the Dynamic

Radar Cruise Control with Road

Sign Assist

321

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●

When the brake control or output restric-

tion control of a driving support system

operates. (For example: Pre-Collision

System, Drive-Start Control)

●

The parking brake is operated.

If constant speed control mode is automati-

cally canceled for any reasons other than

the above, there may be a malfunction in the

system. Contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

■

Situations in which the curve speed

reduction function may not operate

(vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A)

In situations such as the following, the curve

speed reduction function may not operate:

●

When the vehicle is being driven around

a gentle curve

●

When the accelerator pedal is being

depressed

●

When the vehicle is being driven around

an extremely short curve

■

The Dynamic Radar Cruise Control

with Road Sign Assist may not operate

properly when

As the Dynamic Radar Cruise Control with

Road Sign Assist may not operate properly

in conditions in which RSA may not operate

or detect correctly (P.310), when using

this function, make sure to check the speed

limit sign displayed.

In the following situations, the set speed

may not be changed to the recognized

speed limit by pressing and holding the

“+RES”/“-SET” switch.

●

If speed limit information is not available

●

When the recognized speed limit is the

same as the set speed

●

When the recognized speed limit is out-

side of the speed range that the dynamic

radar cruise control system can operate

■

Brake operation

A brake operation sound may be heard and

the brake pedal response may change, but

these are not malfunctions.

■

Warning messages and buzzers for

dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

Warning messages and buzzers are used to

indicate a system malfunction or to inform

the driver of the need for caution while driv-

ing. If a warning message is shown on the

multi-information display, read the message

and follow the instructions.(P.260, 271,

515)

■

When the sensor may not be correctly

detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending

on the conditions, operate the brake pedal

when deceleration of the system is insuffi-

cient or operate the accelerator pedal

when acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly

detect these types of vehicles, the approach

warning (P.317) may not be activated.

●

Vehicles that cut in suddenly

●

Vehicles traveling at low speeds

●

Vehicles that are not moving in the same

lane

●

Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers

with no load on board, etc.)

●

Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

●

When water or snow thrown up by the

surrounding vehicles hinders the detect-

ing of the sensor

●

When your vehicle is pointing upwards

(caused by a heavy load in the luggage

compartment, etc.)

322

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●

Preceding vehicle has an extremely high

ground clearance

■

Conditions under which the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode

may not function correctly

In the case of the following conditions,

operate the brake pedal (or accelerator

pedal, depending on the situation) as nec-

essary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly

detect vehicles ahead, the system may not

operate properly.

●

When the road curves or when the lanes

are narrow

●

When steering wheel operation or your

position in the lane is unstable

●

When the vehicle ahead of you deceler-

ates suddenly

●

When driving on a road surrounded by a

structure, such as in a tunnel or on a

bridge

●

While the vehicle speed is decreasing to

the set speed after the vehicle acceler-

ates by depressing the accelerator pedal

■

Situations in which the curve speed

reduction function may not operate

properly (vehicles with Lexus Safety

System + A)

In situations such as the following, the curve

speed reduction function may not operate

properly:

●

When the vehicle is being driven around

a curve on an incline/decline

●

When the course of the vehicle differs

from the shape of the curve

●

When the vehicle speed is excessively

high when entering a curve

●

When the steering wheel is suddenly

operated

323

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

:If equipped

■

Meter display

Set speed

Indicators

■

Operation switches

“+RES” switch

Cruise control main switch

“-SET” switch

Cancel switch

1Press the cruise control main switch

to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the switch again to deactivate the

cruise control.

2Accelerate or decelerate the vehi-

cle to the desired speed, and press

the “-SET” switch to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come

on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the

switch is released becomes the set speed.

To change the set speed, press the

“+RES” or “-SET” switch until the

desired set speed is obtained.

Cruise control*

Use the cruise control to maintain a

set speed without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

System components

Setting the vehicle speed

Adjusting the set speed

324

4-5. Using the driving support systems

1Increases the speed

2Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Press the switch in the

desired direction.

Large adjustment: Press and hold switch.

The set speed will be increased or

decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

or 1

mph (1.6 km/h)

each time the switch is

pressed

Large adjustment: The set speed can be

increased or decreased continually until

the switch is released.

: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

1Pressing the cancel switch cancels

the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also canceled when

the brakes are applied.

2Pressing the “+RES” switch

resumes the constant speed con-

trol.

Resuming is available when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 30km/h

(20 mph).

■

Cruise control can be set when

●

The shift position is in D.

●

Range 4 or higher of D has been selected

by using the paddle shift.

●

Vehicle speed is above approximately 30

km/h (20 mph).

■

Accelerating after setting the vehicle

speed

●

The vehicle can be accelerated normally.

After acceleration, the set speed

resumes.

●

Even without canceling the cruise con-

trol, the set speed can be increased by

first accelerating the vehicle to the

desired speed and then pressing the

“-SET” switch to set the new speed.

■

Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the

vehicle speed in any of the following situa-

tions.

●

Actual vehicle speed falls more than

approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below

the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is

not retained.

●

Actual vehicle speed is below approxi-

mately 30 km/h (20 mph).

●

VSC is activated.

●

TRC is activated for a period of time.

●

When the VSC or TRC system is turned

off.

Canceling and resuming the

constant speed control

325

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

If the warning message for the cruise

control is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display

Press the cruise control main switch once to

deactivate the system, and then press the

switch again to reactivate the system. If the

cruise control speed cannot be set or if the

cruise control cancels immediately after

being activated, there may be a malfunction

in the cruise control system. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

■

When the brake hold system is not

operating with the shift position in



Stopping the engine

While driving with the shift position in

D, depress the brake pedal and stop

the vehicle.

The Stop & Start indicator will come on.



Restarting the engine

Release the brake pedal.

The Stop & Start indicator will turn off.

■

When the brake hold system is

operating with the shift position in

The Stop & Start system is operational

when the brake hold system is operat-

ing. (P.230)

WARNING

■

To avoid operating the cruise control

by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the

cruise control main switch when not in

use.

■

Situations unsuitable for cruise con-

trol

Do not use cruise control in any of the

following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and

could cause an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

●

In heavy traffic

●

On roads with sharp bends

●

On winding roads

●

On slippery roads, such as those cov-

ered with rain, ice or snow

●

On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed

when driving down a steep hill.

●

Duning emergency towing

Stop & Start system

The Stop & Start system stops and

restarts the engine according to

the brake pedal or shift lever opera-

tion when the vehicle is stopped.

Stop & Start system operation

326

4-5. Using the driving support systems



Stopping the engine

While driving with the shift position in

D, depress the brake pedal and stop

the vehicle.

The Stop & Start indicator will come on.

While the brake hold system is operating,

the brake hold operated indicator will

come on. If the brake pedal is released, the

engine will remain stopped by the Stop &

Start system.



Restarting the engine

Depress the accelerator pedal.

(Releasing the brake pedal will not

restart the engine.)

The Stop & Start indicator and brake hold

operated indicator will turn off.

■

When the dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range is

operating with the shift position in

D (if equipped)

The Stop & Start system is operational

during a controlled stop by the

dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range. (P.313)



Stopping the engine

While driving with the dynamic radar

cruise control with full-speed range in

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, the engine will stop automati-

cally if the vehicle comes to a complete

stop through a controlled stop. (The

engine will stop automatically even

though the brake pedal is not

depressed.)

The Stop & Start indicator will come on.



Restarting the engine

When the preceding vehicle starts off,

the engine will restart automatically.

The Stop & Start indicator will turn off.

■

When the shift position is shifted to



Stopping the engine

1While driving with the shift position

in D, depress the brake pedal and

stop the vehicle.

The engine will be stopped by the Stop &

Start system and the Stop & Start indicator

will come on.

327

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

2Shift the shift position to P.

(P.222)

The engine will remain stopped.

The engine may restart if the shift position

is shifted from D to P immediately after the

engine is stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem. Additionally, if the engine is not

stopped by the Stop & Start system when

vehicle is stopped with the shift position in

D, it may be stopped by the Stop & Start

system when the shift position is shifted to



Restarting the engine

With the brake pedal depressed, shift

the shift position to any position other

than P. (P.222)

If the brake pedal was released after the

engine was stopped by the Stop & Start

system, the engine will restart when the

brake pedal is depressed again. If the brake

pedal was not released after the engine

was stopped by the Stop & Start system,

the engine will restart when the shift posi-

tion is shifted to any position other than P.

The Stop & Start indicator will turn off.

■

Operating conditions

●

The Stop & Start system is operational

when all of the following conditions are

met:

• The brake pedal is being depressed

firmly. (Except when the vehicle comes to

a controlled stop while driving with the

dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range in vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode)

• The engine is adequately warmed up.

• The outside temperature is -5°C (23°F)

or higher.

• The shift position is in D or P.

• The windshield defogger is off.

• The hood is closed.

• The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

• The driver’s door is closed.

• The accelerator pedal is not being

depressed.

●

In the following situations the engine may

not be stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem. This is not a malfunction of the Stop

& Start system.

• The air conditioning system is being used

when the ambient temperature is high or

low.

• The battery is not sufficiently charged,

such as if the vehicle has been parked for

a long time and the battery charge has

decreased, the electric load is large, the

battery fluid temperature is excessively

low or the battery has deteriorated, or is

undergoing a periodic recharge.

• The brake booster vacuum is low.

• The vehicle is stopped on a steep incline.

• The steering wheel is being operated.

• Due to traffic or other circumstances the

vehicle is stopped repeatedly.

• The vehicle is being driven in a high alti-

tude area.

• Engine coolant temperature or transmis-

sion fluid temperature is extremely low or

high.

• The battery fluid temperature is

extremely low or high.

• For a while after the battery terminals

have been disconnected and recon-

nected.

• For a while after the battery has been

replaced.

●

In the following situations, the engine will

restart automatically if the engine is

stopped by the Stop & Start system. (To

enable stopping of the engine by the Stop

& Start system, drive the vehicle.)

• The air conditioning system is turned on.

• The pollen removal mode is turned on.

• The windshield defogger is turned on.

• The steering wheel is operated.

• The shift position is shifted to M, N or R

from D.

• The shift position is shifted from P.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The accelerator pedal is depressed.

• The Stop & Start cancel switch is pressed.

• The vehicle starts to roll on an incline.

●

In the following situations, the engine may

restart automatically if the engine is

328

4-5. Using the driving support systems

stopped by the Stop & Start system. (To

enable stopping of the engine by the Stop

& Start system, drive the vehicle.)

• The brake pedal is pumped or strongly

depressed.

• The air conditioning system is being used.

• The battery is not sufficiently charged.

■

Stop & Start system operation when the

brake hold system is operating

●

If the engine is restarted automatically by

the Stop & Start system when the brake

hold system is operating, the brake hold

system will continue to apply the brakes.

●

If the operation conditions of the brake

hold system are no longer met (P.230)

while the engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system, the brake hold system will

stop operating.

At this time, the parking brake will be

applied automatically and the engine will

be restarted automatically.

■

Stop & Start system operation during a

controlled stop by the dynamic radar

cruise control with full-speed range (if

equipped)

If the engine is restarted automatically by

the Stop & Start system during a controlled

stop by the dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range, the controlled stop

will continue. (Resuming follow-up cruising

after a controlled stop:P.317)

■

Hood

●

If the hood is opened while the engine is

stopped by the Stop & Start system, the

engine will stall and will not be able to be

restarted by the automatic engine start

function. In this case, restart the engine

using the normal engine starting proce-

dure. (P.216)

●

Even if the hood is closed after the engine

is started with the hood open, the Stop &

Start system will not operate. Close the

hood, turn the engine switch off, wait 30

seconds or more, and then start the

engine.

■

When to use the Stop & Start system

●

When stopping the vehicle for a longer

period of time, turn the engine switch off

and stop the engine completely.

●

When the system does not operate, is

canceled, or is malfunctioning, warning

messages and a warning buzzer are used

to inform the driver. (P.329)

●

If the engine switch is pressed when the

engine is stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem, the engine will stall and will not be

able to be restarted by the automatic

engine start function. In this case, restart

the engine using the normal engine start-

ing procedure. (P.216)

●

When the engine is restarted by the Stop

& Start system, the power outlet may be

temporarily unusable, but this is not a

malfunction.

●

Installation and removal of electrical

components and wireless devices may

affect the Stop & Start system. Contact

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details.

■

If the windshield is fogged up while the

engine is stopped by the Stop & Start

system

Turn the windshield defogger on. (The

engine will start due to the automatic

engine start function.): P.403

If the windshield fogs up frequently, press

the Stop & Start cancel switch to disable the

system.

■

Air conditioning system operation while

the engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system

●

If the air conditioning system is being

used in automatic mode, the fan speed

may be reduced or the fan may be

stopped while the engine is stopped by

the Stop & Start system in order to

reduce changes in the cabin tempera-

ture.

●

To ensure air conditioning system perfor-

mance when the vehicle is stopped, disa-

ble the Stop & Start system by pressing

the Stop & Start cancel switch.

329

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

If an odor comes from the air condition-

ing system while the engine is stopped

by the Stop & Start system

Press the Stop & Start cancel switch to

deactivate the Stop & Start system.

■

Changing the idling stop time with the

air conditioning system on

The length of time the Stop & Start system

will operate when the air conditioning sys-

tem is on can be changed by performing

the following operation. (The length of time

the Stop & Start system will operate when

the air conditioning system is off cannot be

changed.)

●

Setting by pressing and holding the Stop

& Start cancel switch

Each time the Stop & Start cancel switch

is pressed and held for 3 seconds or

more, the system changes between

standard and extended. The system sta-

tus can be confirmed on the multi-infor-

mation display screen. (P.96)

●

Settings using the multi-information dis-

play

(P.96) or (P.94).

■

The Stop & Start system protection

function

●

When the volume of the audio system is

excessively high, sound output from the

audio system may suddenly be cut off in

order to reduce battery consumption. To

prevent the audio system from being cut

off, keep the volume of audio system at a

moderate level.

If the audio system has been cut off, turn

the engine switch off, wait for 3 seconds

or more and then turn it to ACCES-

SORY mode or IGNITION ON mode to

re-enable the audio system.

●

The audio system may not be activated if

the battery terminals are disconnected

and then reconnected. If this occurs, turn

the engine switch off and then repeat the

following operation twice to activate the

audio system normally.

• Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON

mode and then to off.

■

Replacing the battery

P.528

■

Displaying the Stop & Start system sta-

tus

P.96

■

Multi-information display messages

If the following situations, and a mes-

sage may be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display.

●

When the engine cannot be stopped by

the Stop & Start system

“Depress Brake Firmly to Activate”

• The brake pedal is not depressed

enough.

 If the brake pedal is depressed further,

the system will operate.

“For Climate Control”

• The air conditioning system is being used

when the ambient temperature is high or

low.

 If the difference between the set tem-

perature and cabin temperature is small,

the system will be enabled.

• The windshield defogger is ON.

“Battery Charging”

• The battery charge amount may be low.

 Engine stop is temporarily prohibited to

prioritize charging of the battery, but if the

engine is operated for a short while, engine

stop is allowed.

• A refresh charge may be occurring, such

as when the battery is undergoing a peri-

odic recharge, for a while after the bat-

tery terminals have been disconnected

and reconnected, for a while after the

battery has been replaced, etc.

 After a refresh charge of approximately

5 to 60 minutes completes, the system can

be operated.

• Continuously displayed for a long term

330

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 The battery may be deteriorated. Con-

tact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details.

“In Preparation”

• The vehicle is being driven in a high alti-

tude area.

• The brake booster vacuum is low.

 When the brake booster vacuum

reaches a predetermined level, the system

will be enabled.

“Steering Wheel Turned”

• The steering wheel was operated.

“Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled”

• The driver seat belt is not fastened.

“Stop & Start Unavailable”

• The Stop & Start system is temporarily

disabled.

 Operate the engine for a short while.

• The engine may have been started with

the hood open.

 Close the hood, turn the engine switch

off, wait for 30 seconds or more, and then

start the engine.

“System Temperature Low”

• The battery may be cold.

 Operate the engine for a short while

allows the system to recover due to the

temperature increase in the trunk.

“System Temperature High”

• The battery may be extremely hot.

 If the engine compartment is allowed to

cool sufficiently, the system recovers.

“Non-Dedicated Battery.”

• A non-dedicated battery for the Stop &

Start system may have been installed.

 The Stop & Start system does not oper-

ate. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-

rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

When the engine automatically restarts

while stopped by the Stop & Start system

“For Climate Control”

• The air conditioning system has been

turned on or is being used.

• The windshield defogger has been

turned on.

“In Preparation”

• The brake pedal has been depressed fur-

ther or pumped.

 The system will be enabled after the

engine runs and the brake booster vacuum

reaches a predetermined level.

“Battery Charging”

• The battery charge amount may be low.

 The engine is restarted to prioritize bat-

tery charging. Operating the engine for a

short while allows the system to recover.

“Steering Wheel Turned”

• The steering wheel was operated.

“Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled”

• The driver seat belt has been unfastened.

■

Stop & Start system warning messages

If a system malfunction occurs, a warning

message will be displayed on the

multi-information display to inform the

driver of the need for caution. (P.515)

■

If the Stop & Start cancel indicator con-

tinues to flash

The system may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

331

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Press the Stop & Start cancel switch to

disable the Stop & Start system.

The Stop & Start cancel indicator will

come on.

Pressing the switch again will enable the

Stop & Start system and the Stop & Start

cancel indicator will turn off.

■

Automatic reactivation of the Stop &

Start system

Even if the Stop & Start system is disabled

by the Stop & Start cancel switch, it will be

automatically re-enabled once the engine

switch is turned off and then the engine is

started.

■

If the Stop & Start cancel switch is

pressed while the vehicle is stopped

●

When the engine is stopped by the Stop

& Start system, pressing the Stop & Start

cancel switch will restart the engine.

WARNING

■

When the Stop & Start system is

operating

●

Depress the brake pedal and apply the

parking brake when necessary while

the engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system (while the Stop & Start

indicator is on). (Except when the

brake hold system is operating or

when the vehicle comes to a con-

trolled stop while driving with the

dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range in vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode)

●

Do not allow anyone to leave the vehi-

cle while the engine is stopped by the

Stop & Start system (while the Stop &

Start indicator is on).

An accident may occur due to the

automatic engine start function.

●

Ensure that the engine is not stopped

by the Stop & Start system while the

vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area.

The engine may restart due to the

automatic engine start function, caus-

ing exhaust gases to collect and enter

the vehicle, possibly resulting in death

or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■

To ensure the system operates cor-

rectly

If any of the following situations occur,

the Stop & Start system may not operate

correctly. Have your vehicle checked by

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

While the driver’s seat belt is fastened,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light flashes.

●

Even though the driver’s seat belt is not

fastened, the driver’s and front passen-

ger’s seat belt reminder light does not

illuminate.

●

Even though the driver’s door is

closed, the open door warning light is

illuminated or the interior light is illumi-

nated when the interior light switch is

in the door position.

●

Even though the driver’s door is open,

the open door warning light does not

illuminate or the interior light does not

illuminate when the interior light switch

is in the door position.

Disabling the Stop & Start sys-

tem

332

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●

With the Stop & Start system disabled,

pressing the Stop & Start cancel switch

will re-enable the system but not stop the

engine.

From the next time the vehicle is stopped

(after Stop & Start system has been ena-

bled), the engine will be stopped.

After the engine is stopped by the Stop

& Start system when the vehicle is on

an incline, brake force is temporarily

maintained to prevent rolling back-

wards until the engine is restarted and

drive force is generated.

When drive force is generated, the

maintained brake force is automatically

canceled.

This function operates on flat sur-

faces as well as steep inclines.

Sound may be generated from the

brakes, but this is not a malfunction.

Brake pedal response may change

and vibration may occur, but these

are not malfunctions.

: If equipped

Meter control switches

Hill-start assist control (when the

shift position is in D)

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)*

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system

that uses rear side radar sensors

installed on the inner side of the

rear bumper on the left and right

side to assist the driver in confirm-

ing safety when changing lanes.

WARNING

■

Cautions regarding the use of the sys-

tem

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking care

to observe your surroundings.

The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplemen-

tary function which alerts the driver that a

vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside

rear view mirrors or is approaching rap-

idly from behind into a blind spot. Do not

overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. As

the function cannot judge if it is safe to

change lanes, over reliance could lead to

an accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

As the system may not function correctly

under certain conditions, the driver’s own

visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

System components

333

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off.

Outside rear view mirror indicators

When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot

of the outside rear view mirrors or

approaching rapidly from behind into a

blind spot, the outside rear view mirror

indicator on the detected side will illumi-

nate. If the turn signal lever is operated

toward the detected side, the outside rear

view mirror indicator flashes.

■

Outside rear view mirror indicator visi-

bility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir-

ror indicator may be difficult to see.

■

When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable”

is shown on the multi-information dis-

play

Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the

rear bumper around the sensors. (P.346)

The system should return to normal opera-

tion after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc.

from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sen-

sors may not operate normally when driving

in extremely hot or cold environments.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

334

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Certification

335

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

336

4-5. Using the driving support systems

337

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

338

4-5. Using the driving support systems

339

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

340

4-5. Using the driving support systems

341

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

342

4-5. Using the driving support systems

343

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

344

4-5. Using the driving support systems

345

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

346

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Use the meter control switches to turn

on/off the function.

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select and

then press .

When the BSM function is disabled, the

BSM OFF indicator illuminates. (Each time

the engine switch is turned off then

changed to IGNITION ON mode, the

Blind Spot Monitor will be enabled auto-

matically.)

WARNING

■

Handling the rear side radar sensor

Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed

behind the left and right sides of the rear

bumper respectively. Observe the fol-

lowing to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor

can operate correctly.

●

Keep the sensors and the surrounding

areas on the rear bumper clean at all

times.

If a sensor or its surrounding area on the

rear bumper is dirty or covered with

snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not

operate and a warning message

(P.333) will be displayed. In this situa-

tion, clear off the dirt or snow and drive

the vehicle with the operation conditions

of the BSM function (P.348) satisfied

for approximately 10 minutes. If the

warning message does not disappear,

have the vehicle inspected by any autho-

rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), alumi-

num tape, etc. to a sensor or its sur-

rounding area on the rear bumper.

●

Do not subject a sensor or its sur-

rounding area on the rear bumper to a

strong impact.

If a sensor is moved even slightly off

position, the system may malfunction

and vehicles may not be detected cor-

rectly.In the following situations, have

your vehicle inspected by any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

• A sensor or its surrounding area is

subject to a strong impact.

• If the surrounding area of a sensor is

scratched or dented, or part of them

has become disconnected.

●

Do not disassemble the sensor.

●

Do not modify the sensor or surround-

ing area on the rear bumper.

●

If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to

be removed/installed or replaced,

contact any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

●

Do not paint the rear bumper any

color other than an official Lexus color.

Turning the Blind Spot Monitor

on/off

347

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor

The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the following vehi-

cles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehi-

cles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.

Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear

view mirrors (the blind spots)

Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible

using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

■

The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of each detection area is:

Approximately 0.5 m (1.6 ft.) to 3.5 m (11.5 ft.) from either side of the vehicle

Approximately 1 m (3.3 ft.) forward of the rear bumper

Approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) from the rear bumper

Approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) to 60 m (197 ft.) from the rear bumper

: The area between the side of the vehicle and 0.5 m (1.6 ft.) from the side of the vehicle

cannot be detected.

Blind Spot Monitor operation

348

4-5. Using the driving support systems

: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is,

the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indi-

cator to illuminate or flash.

■

The Blind Spot Monitor is operational

when

The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when

all of the following conditions are met:

●

The Blind Spot Monitor is on.

●

The shift position is in a position other

than R.

●

The vehicle speed is greater than approx-

imately 16 km/h (10 mph).

■

The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a

vehicle when

The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle

present in the detection area in the follow-

ing situations:

●

A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes

your vehicle.

●

You overtake a vehicle in an adjacent lane

slowly.

●

Another vehicle enters the detection

area when it changes lanes.

■

Conditions under which the Blind Spot

Monitor will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to

detect the following types of vehicles and/or

objects:

●

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,

etc.

●

Vehicles traveling in the opposite direc-

tion

●

Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles

and similar stationary objects

●

Following vehicles that are in the same

lane

●

Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your

vehicle

●

Vehicles which are being overtaken rap-

idly by your vehicle

: Depending on the conditions, detection

of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■

Conditions under which the Blind Spot

Monitor may not function correctly

●

The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect

vehicles correctly in the following situa-

tions:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

rounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is

covering the sensor or surrounding area

on the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is

wet with standing water during bad

weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When multiple vehicles are approaching

with only a small gap between each vehi-

cle

• When the distance between your vehicle

and a following vehicle is short

• When there is a significant difference in

speed between your vehicle and the vehi-

cle that enters the detection area

• When the difference in speed between

your vehicle and another vehicle is

changing

• When a vehicle enters a detection area

traveling at about the same speed as your

vehicle

• As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehi-

cle remains in the detection area

• When driving up and down consecutive

steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the

road, etc.

• When driving on roads with sharp bends,

consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When vehicle lanes are wide, or when

driving on the edge of a lane, and the

vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away

from your vehicle

• When an accessory (such as a bicycle

carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehi-

cle

• When there is a significant difference in

height between your vehicle and the

vehicle that enters the detection area

• Immediately after the Blind Spot Monitor

is turned on

●

Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor

349

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or

object may increase in the following situ-

ations:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

rounding area

• When the distance between your vehicle

and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the

detection area is short

• When driving up and down consecutive

steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the

road, etc.

• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when

driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehi-

cle traveling in a lane other than the adja-

cent lanes enters the detection area

• When driving on roads with sharp bends,

consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When the tires are slipping or spinning

• When the distance between your vehicle

and a following vehicle is short

• When an accessory (such as a bicycle

carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehi-

cle

■

Lexus parking assist-sensor

Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect

static objects in the detection area

when driving at a low speed or backing

up. (P.351)

■

RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert)

function (if equipped)

Radar sensors are used to detect

approaching vehicles in the detection

areas behind the vehicle when backing

up. (P.355)

■

RCD (Rear camera detection)

function (if equipped)

A rear camera sensor is used to detect

pedestrians in the detection area

behind the vehicle when backing up.

(P.359)

PKSA (Parking Support

Alert)

The Parking Support Alert system

consists of the following functions

that operate when driving at a low

speed or backing up, such as when

parking. When the system deter-

mines that a collision with a

detected object, such as a wall, or

pedestrian is high, a warning oper-

ates to urge the driver to take eva-

sive action.

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)

system

350

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Adjusting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on

the multi-information display. The vol-

ume of buzzers for the Lexus parking

assist-sensor, RCTA function and RCD

function will be adjusted simultane-

ously.

Use the meter control switches to

change settings. (P.94)

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “PKSA”

and then press .

3Press or to select and

then press .

Each time the switch is pressed, the volume

level will change between 1, 2, and 3.

■

Muting a buzzer

A mute button will be displayed on the

multi-information display when an

object or pedestrian is detected. To

mute the buzzer, press .

The buzzers for the Lexus parking

assist-sensor, RCTA function and RCD

function will be muted simultaneously.

Mute will be canceled automatically in

the following situations:

When the shift position is changed.

When the vehicle speed exceeds a

certain speed.

When the operating function is tem-

porarily canceled.

When the operating function is disa-

bled manually.

When the engine switch is turned

off.

Setting the buzzer volume

351

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Types of sensors

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

■

Display

When an object, such as a wall, is

detected by a sensor, the approximate

distance to the object will be displayed

on the multi-information display,

head-up display (if equipped) and

Center Display. (As the distance to the

object becomes short, the distance

segmentsmay blink.)



Multi-information display and

head-up display

Front corner sensor detection

Front center sensor detection

Rear corner sensor detection

Rear center sensor detection



Center Display

Front corner sensor detection

Front center sensor detection

Rear corner sensor detection

Rear center sensor detection

Use the meter control switches to ena-

ble/disable the Lexus parking

assist-sensor. (P.94)

Lexus parking assist-sensor

The distance from your vehicle to

objects, such as a wall, when paral-

lel parking or maneuvering into a

garage is measured by the sensors

and communicated via the

multi-information display, head-up

display (if equipped), Center Dis-

play and a buzzer. Always check the

surrounding area when using this

system.

System components

Turning Lexus parking assist-sen-

sor on/off

352

4-5. Using the driving support systems

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “PKSA”

and then press .

3Press or to select and

then press .

When the Lexus parking assist-sensor

function is disabled, the Lexus parking

assist-sensor OFF indicator (P.82)

illuminates.

To re-enable the system when it was

disabled, select on the multi-infor-

mation display, select and then On.

If disabled using this method, the sys-

tem will not be re-enabled by turning

the engine switch off and then to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

WARNING

■

When using the Lexus parking

assist-sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle

being unable to be driven safely and pos-

sibly cause an accident.

●

Do not use the sensor at speeds in

excess of 10 km/h (6 mph).

●

The sensors’ detection areas and reac-

tion times are limited. When moving

forward or reversing, check the areas

surrounding the vehicle (especially the

sides of the vehicle) for safety, and

drive slowly, using the brake to control

the vehicle’s speed.

●

Do not install accessories within the

sensors’ detection areas.

●

The area directly under the bumpers is

not detected. Thin posts or objects

lower than the sensor may not be

detected when approached, even if

they have been detected once.

■

When to disable the function

In the following situations, disable the

function as it may operate even though

there is no possibility of a collision.

●

The vehicle is equipped with a fender

pole, wireless antenna or fog lights.

●

The front or rear bumper or a sensor

receives a strong impact.

●

A non-genuine Lexus suspension

(lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.

●

Towing eyelets are installed.

●

A backlit licence plate is installed.

■

When using Lexus parking assist-sen-

sor

In the following situations, the system

may not function correctly due to a sen-

sor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle

checked by any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-

able repairer.

●

The Lexus parking assist-sensor oper-

ation display flashes or shows continu-

ously, and a beep sounds when no

objects are detected.

●

If the area around a sensor collides

with something, or is subjected to

strong impact.

●

If the bumper or grille collides with

something.

●

If the display flashes or is displayed

continuously and a buzzer does not

sound, except when the mute function

has been turned on.

353

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

The system can be operated when

●

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

●

Lexus parking assist-sensor function is

on.

●

The vehicle speed is less than about 10

km/h (6 mph).

●

A shift position other than P is selected.

■

Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the

multi-information display. (P.350)

■

If “Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is dis-

played on the multi-information display

A sensor may be covered with water drops,

ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the water drops,

ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return

the system to normal.

If a sensor is dirty, the position of the dirty

sensor will be shown on the display.

Due to ice forming on a sensor at low tem-

peratures, a warning message may be dis-

played or the sensor may not be able to

detect an object. Once the ice melts, the

system will return to normal.

■

If “Parking Assist Unavailable” is dis-

played on the multi-information display

Water may be continuously flowing over the

sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain.

When the system determines that it is nor-

mal, the system will return to normal.

■

If a battery terminal has been discon-

nected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized. To initial-

ize the system, drive the vehicle straight

ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of

approximately 35 km/h (22 mph) or more.

Additionally, for vehicles with the Parking

Support Brake function, turn the steering

wheel fully to the left and right with the vehi-

cle stopped.

■

Sensor detection information

●

The following situations may occur dur-

ing use.

• The sensors may be able to only detect

objects near the front and rear bumpers.

• Depending on the shape of the object

and other factors, the detection distance

may shorten, or detection may be impos-

sible.

• There will be a short delay between

object detection and display. Even at low

speeds, there is a possibility that the

object will come within the sensor’s

detection areas before the display is

shown and the warning beep sounds.

• It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due

to the volume of the audio system or air

flow noise of the air conditioning system.

• It may be difficult to hear the buzzer if

buzzers for other systems are sounding.

■

Conditions under which the function

may not function correctly

Certain vehicle conditions and the sur-

rounding environment may affect the ability

of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Par-

ticular instances where this may occur are

listed below.

●

There is dirt, snow, water drops or ice on

a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will

resolve this problem.)

●

A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will

WARNING

●

If a display error occurs, first check the

sensor.

If the error occurs even when there is

no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is

likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

■

Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or

steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor mal-

functioning.

●

When using a high pressure washer to

wash the vehicle, do not spray the sen-

sors directly, as doing so may cause a

sensor to malfunction.

●

When using steam to clean the vehicle,

do not direct steam too close to the

sensors as doing so may cause a sen-

sor to malfunction.

354

4-5. Using the driving support systems

resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is

frozen the sensor display may be dis-

played abnormally, or objects, such as a

wall, may not be detected.

●

A sensor is covered in any way.

●

When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is extremely hot or cold.

●

On an extremely bumpy road, on an

incline, on gravel, or on grass.

●

The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to

vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air

brakes of large vehicles, or other loud

noises producing ultrasonic waves.

●

There is another vehicle equipped with

parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

●

A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray

or heavy rain.

●

If a sensor is hit by a large amount of

water, such as when driving on a flooded

road.

●

If the vehicle is significantly tilted.

●

The vehicle is approaching a tall or

curved curb.

●

If objects draw too close to the sensor.

■

Objects which may not be properly

detected

The shape of the object may prevent the

sensor from detecting it. Pay particular

attention to the following objects:

●

Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

●

Cotton, snow and other materials that

absorb sound waves

●

Sharply-angled objects

●

Low objects

●

Tall objects with upper sections project-

ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-

cle

People may not be detected if they are

wearing certain types of clothing.

■

Detection range of the sensors

Approximately 100 cm (3.3 ft.)

Approximately 150 cm (4.9 ft.)

Approximately 60 cm (2.0 ft.)

The diagram shows the detection range of

the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot

detect objects that are extremely close to

the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change

depending on the shape of the object, etc.

■

Buzzer operation and approximate

distance to object

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are

operating. When 2 or more objects are

detected simultaneously, the buzzer

sounds for the nearest object.

Buzzer: Sounds intermittently

Front center sensor: Approximately 100

cm (3.3 ft.) to 60 cm (2.0 ft.)

Rear center sensor: Approximately 150

cm (4.9 ft.) to 60 cm (2.0 ft.)

System detection range

355

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Buzzer: Sounds in short intervals

Approximately 60 cm (2.0 ft.) to 45 cm

(1.5 ft.)

Buzzer: Sounds in extremely short

intervals

Approximately 45 cm (1.5 ft.) to 30 cm

(1.0 ft.)

Buzzer: Sounds continuously

Less than approximately 30 cm (1.0 ft.)

: The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle

approaches an object.

Automatic buzzer mute function: After a

buzzer begins sounding, if the distance

between the vehicle and the detected

object does not become shorter, the

buzzer will be muted automatically.

: If equipped

Meter control switches

Turning the RCTA function on/off.

When the RCTA function is disabled, the

RCTA OFF indicator illuminates.

Outside rear view mirror indicators

When a vehicle approaching from the right

or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,

both outside rear view mirror indicators

will flash.

RCTA (Rear crossing traffic

alert) function*

The RCTA function uses the BSM

rear side radar sensors installed

behind the rear bumper. This func-

tion is intended to assist the driver

in checking areas that are not easily

visible when backing up.

System components

356

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Center Display

If a vehicle approaching from the right or

left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,

the RCTA icon (P.357) for the detected

side will be displayed on the Center Dis-

play. This illustration shows an example of a

vehicle approaching from both sides of the

vehicle.

RCTA buzzer

If a vehicle approaching from the right or

left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a

buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds

for approximately 1 second immediately

after the RCTA function is turned on.

Use the meter control switches to ena-

ble/disable the RCTA function.

(P.94)

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “PKSA”

and then press .

3Press or to select “RCTA”

and then press .

When the RCTA function is disabled, the

RCTA OFF indicator (P.82) illuminates.

(Each time the engine switch is turned off

then changed to IGNITION ON mode,

the RCTA function will be enabled auto-

matically.)

■

Outside rear view mirror indicator visi-

bility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir-

ror indicator may be difficult to see.

■

Hearing the RCTA buzzer

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear

over loud noises, such as if the audio system

volume is high.

■

When “RCTA Not Available” is shown

on the multi-information display

Water, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to

the rear bumper around the sensors.

(P.346) Removing the water, snow, mud,

etc., from the attached to the rear bumper

around the sensors to normal.

Additionally, the function may not function

normally when used in extremely hot or

cold environments.

■

Rear side radar sensors

P.346

Turning the RCTA function

on/off

WARNING

■

Cautions regarding the use of the

function

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking care

to observe your surroundings.

The RCTA function is only a supplemen-

tary function which alerts the driver that a

vehicle is approaching from the right or

left at the rear of the vehicle. As the

RCTA function may not function cor-

rectly under certain conditions, the

driver’s own visual confirmation of safety

is necessary. Over reliance on this func-

tion may lead to an accident resulting

death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■

Before using the RCTA function

Do not place obstacles near the sensors.

357

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Operation of the RCTA function

The RCTA function uses rear side

radar sensors to detect vehicles

approaching from the right or left at

the rear of the vehicle and alerts the

driver of the presence of such vehicles

by flashing the outside rear view mirror

indicators and sounding a buzzer.

Approaching vehicles

Detection areas of approaching

vehicles

■

RCTA icon display

When a vehicle approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle is

detected, the following will be dis-

played on the Center Display.

Example (Panoramic view monitor):

Vehicles are approaching from both

sides of the vehicle

■

RCTA function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be

detected in are outlined below.

The buzzer can alert the driver of

faster vehicles approaching from far-

ther away.

Example:

■

The RCTA function is operational when

The RCTA function operates when all of the

following conditions are met:

●

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

●

The RCTA function is on.

RCTA function

Approaching vehi-

cle speed

Approximate

alert distance

28 km/h (18 mph)

(fast) 20 m (65 ft.)

8 km/h (5 mph)

(slow) 5.5 m (18 ft.)

358

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●

The shift position is in R.

●

The vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 8 km/h (5 mph).

●

The approaching vehicle speed is

between approximately 8 km/h (5 mph)

and 28 km/h (18 mph).

■

Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the

multi-information display. (P.350)

■

Conditions under which the RCTA func-

tion will not detect a vehicle

The RCTA function is not designed to

detect the following types of vehicles and/or

objects:

●

Vehicles approaching from directly

behind

●

Vehicles backing up in a parking space

next to your vehicle

●

Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect

due to obstructions

●

Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles

and similar stationary objects

●

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,

etc.

●

Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

●

Vehicles approaching from the parking

spaces next to your vehicle

: Depending on the conditions, detection

of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■

Conditions under which the RCTA func-

tion may not function correctly

●

The RCTA function may not detect vehi-

cles correctly in the following situations:

• When a sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

rounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is

covering a sensor or its surrounding area

on the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is

wet with standing water during bad

weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When multiple vehicles are approaching

with only a small gap between each vehi-

cle

• If a vehicle is approaching the rear of

your vehicle rapidly

• When a towing eyelet is installed to the

rear of the vehicle.

• When backing up on a slope with a sharp

change in grade

• When backing out of a shallow angle

parking spot

• Immediately after the RCTA function is

turned on

• Immediately after the engine is started

with the RCTA function on

• When the sensors cannot detect a vehi-

cle due to obstructions

359

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●

Instances of the RCTA function unneces-

sarily detecting a vehicle and/or object

may increase in the following situations:

• When a vehicle passes by the side of your

vehicle

• When the parking space faces a street

and vehicles are being driven on the

street

• When the distance between your vehicle

and metal objects, such as a guardrail,

wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may

reflect electrical waves toward the rear of

the vehicle, is short

• When a towing eyelet is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

: If equipped

Pedestrian detection icon

Displayed automatically when a pedestrian

is detected.

RCD OFF icon

When the RCD function is disabled, the

RCD OFF icon illuminates. (Each time the

engine switch is turned off then changed to

IGNITION ON mode, the RCD function

will be enabled automatically.)

Use the meter control switches to ena-

ble/disable the RCD function. (P.94)

RCD (Rear Camera Detec-

tion) function*

When the vehicle is backing up, the

rear camera detection function can

detect pedestrians in the detection

area behind the vehicle. If a pedes-

trian is detected, a buzzer will

sound and an icon will be displayed

on the Center Display to inform the

driver of the pedestrian.

Center Display

Turning the RCD function on/off

360

4-5. Using the driving support systems

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “PKSA”

and then press .

3Press or to select “RCD”

and then press .

When the RCD function is disabled, the

RCD OFF indicator (P.82) illuminates.

If the rear camera detection function

detects a pedestrian in the detection

area, the buzzer and pedestrian detec-

tion will operate as follows:

If a pedestrian is detected in area

Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly

Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3

times and then stays on

If a pedestrian is detected in area

Buzzer (When the vehicle is sta-

tionary): Sounds 3 times

Buzzer (When the vehicle is back-

ing up, when a pedestrian

approaches the rear of the vehicle):

Sounds repeatedly

Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3

times and then stays on

If the system determines that your

vehicle may collide with a pedes-

trian in area

Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly

Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3

times and then stays on

■

The rear camera detection function is

operational when

●

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

●

RCD function is on.

●

The shift position is in R.

■

Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the

multi-information display. (P.350)

■

If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable

Remove the Dirt of Rear Camera” is dis-

played on the multi-information display

A rear camera lens may be dirty or covered

with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is

removed from the rear camera lens, the sys-

tem should return to normal. (It may be nec-

essary to drive the vehicle for some time

before the system returns to normal.)

■

If “Rear Camera Detection Unavaila-

ble” is displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display

●

If this message is displayed after the bat-

tery has been disconnected and recon-

nected, fully turn the steering wheel to

the left and then the right on level ground.

●

If this message is displayed only when the

R shift position is selected, the rear cam-

era lens may be dirty. Clean the rear

camera lens.

When a pedestrian is detected

361

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

●

Some pedestrians, such as the following,

may not be detected by the rear camera

detection function, preventing the func-

tion from operating properly:

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or

squatting

• Pedestrians who are lying down

• Pedestrians who are running

• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the

detection area

• People riding a bicycle, skateboard, or

other light vehicle

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing

such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making

their silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians whose body is partially hid-

den by an object, such as a cart or

umbrella

• Pedestrians which are obscured by dark-

ness, such as at night

●

In some situations, such as the following,

pedestrians may not be detected by the

rear camera detection function, prevent-

ing the function from operating properly:

• When backing up in inclement weather

(rain, snow, fog, etc.)

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,

snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• When a very bright light, such as the sun,

or the headlights of another vehicle,

shines directly into the rear camera

• When backing up in a place where the

surrounding brightness changes sud-

denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a

garage or underground parking lot

• When backing up in a dim environment

such as during dusk or in an underground

parking lot

●

Even though there are no pedestrians in

the detection area, some objects, such as

the following, may be detected, possibly

causing the rear camera detection func-

tion to operate.

• Three dimensional objects, such as a

pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehi-

cle

• Moving objects, such as a car or motor-

cycle

• Objects moving toward your vehicle

when backing up, such as flags or pud-

dles (or airborne matter, such as smoke,

steam, rain, or snow)

• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails,

road repairs, white lines, pedestrian

crossings or fallen leaves on the road

• Metal covers (gratings), such as those

used for drainage ditches

• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet

road surface

• The roadside or bumps on the road

• Shadows on the road

●

In some situations, such as the following,

the rear camera detection function may

operate even though there are no pedes-

trians in the detection area.

• When backing up toward the roadside or

a bump on the road

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as

when carrying a heavy load

•When backing up toward an

incline/decline

• If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

• If an electronic component, such as a

backlit license plate or rear fog light, is

installed near the rear camera

• If a bumper protector, such as an addi-

tional trim strip, is installed to the rear

bumper

• If the orientation of the rear camera has

been changed

• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of

the vehicle

• When water is flowing over the rear cam-

era lens

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,

snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• If there is a flashing light in the detection

area, such as the emergency flashers of

another vehicle

●

Situations in which the rear camera

detection function may be difficult to

notice

• If buzzer may be difficult to hear if the

surrounding area is noisy, the volume of

the audio system volume is high, the air

conditioning system is being used, etc.

• If the temperature in the cabin is

362

4-5. Using the driving support systems

extremely high or low, the audio system

screen may not operate correctly.

: If equipped

■

Parking Support Brake function

(static objects)

Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect

static objects, such as a wall, in the

detection area when driving at a low

speed or backing up. (P.367)

■

Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) (if

equipped)

Rear radar sensors are used to detect

approaching vehicles in the detection

area behind the vehicle when backing

up. (P.372)

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake)*

The Parking Support Brake system

consists of the following functions

that operate when driving at a low

speed or backing up, such as when

parking. When the system deter-

mines that a collision with a

detected object or pedestrian is

high, a warning operates to urge

the driver to take evasive action. If

the system determines that the pos-

sibility of a collision with a detected

object or pedestrian is extremely

high, the brakes are automatically

applied to help avoid the collision or

help reduce the impact of the colli-

sion.

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)

system

363

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) (if equipped)

A rear camera sensor is used to detect

pedestrians in the detection area

behind the vehicle when backing up.

(P.375)

The Parking Support Brake can be

enabled/disabled on the multi-informa-

tion display. All of the Parking Support

Brake functions (static objects,

rear-crossing vehicles, and rear pedes-

trians) are enabled/disabled simultane-

ously.

Use the meter control switches to ena-

ble/disable the parking support brake.

(P.94)

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select

and then press .

When the Parking Support Brake is disa-

bled, the PKSB OFF indicator (P.82)

illuminates.

To re-enable the system when it was disa-

bled, select on the multi-information

display, select and then On. If disa-

bled using this method, the system will not

be re-enabled by turning the engine switch

off and then to IGNITION ON mode.

WARNING

■

Limitations of the Parking Support

Brake system

Do not overly rely on the system, as

doing so may lead to an accident. Always

drive while checking the safety of the

surroundings of the vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle and road con-

ditions, weather, etc., the system may not

operate.

The detection capabilities of sensors,

radars and camera are limited. Always

drive while checking the safety of the

surroundings of the vehicle.

●

Do not attempt to test the operation of

this system by driving the vehicle

toward another vehicle, a person or

detected object, as it may not operate

properly, possibly leading to an acci-

dent.

●

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive carefully, taking

care to observe your surroundings.

The Parking Support Brake system is

designed to provide support to lessen

the severity of collisions. However, it

may not operate in some situations.

●

The Parking Support Brake system is

not designed to stop the vehicle com-

pletely. Additionally, even if the system

has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary

to depress the brake pedal immedi-

ately as brake control will be canceled

after approximately 2 seconds.

NOTICE

■

If “Parking Support Brake Unavaila-

ble” is displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display

If this message is displayed immediately

after the engine switch is changed to

IGNITION ON mode, operate the vehi-

cle carefully, paying attention to your

surroundings. It may be necessary to

drive the vehicle for a certain amount of

time before the system returns to normal.

(If the system is not return to normal after

driving for a while, clean the rear camera

lens.)

Enabling/Disabling the Parking

Support Brake

364

4-5. Using the driving support systems

If the engine output restriction control

or brake control operates, a buzzer will

sound and a message will be displayed

on the Center Display and multi-infor-

mation display, to alert the driver.

Depending on the situation, engine output

restriction control will operate to either

limit acceleration or restrict output as

much as possible.

On vehicles with a head-up display, the

head-up display will display the same mes-

sage as the multi-information display.

Engine output restriction control is

operating (acceleration restriction)

Acceleration greater than a certain

amount is restricted by the system.

Center Display: No warning displayed

Multi-information display: “Object

Detected Acceleration Reduced”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Does not sound

Engine output restriction control is

operating (output restricted as

much as possible)

The system has determined that stron-

ger-than-normal brake operation is neces-

sary.

Center Display: “BRAKE!”

Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

Brake control is operating

The system determined that emergency

braking is necessary.

Center Display: “BRAKE!”

Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

Vehicle stopped by system opera-

tion

The vehicle has been stopped by brake

control operation.

Center Display: “Press Brake Pedal”

Multi-information display: “Switch to

Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is not

depressed, “Press Brake Pedal” will be dis-

played.)

PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

If the Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that a collision with a detected

object or pedestrian is possible, the

engine output will be restricted to

restrain any increase in the vehicle

speed. (Engine output restriction con-

trol: See figure 2.)

Additionally, if the accelerator pedal

continues to be depressed, the brakes

will be applied automatically to reduce

the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See

figure 3.)

Figure 1 When the PKSB (Parking

Support Brake) is disabled

Displays and buzzers for engine

output restriction control and

brake control

System overview

365

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Engine output

Braking force

Time

Figure 2 When engine output

restriction control operates

Engine output

Braking force

Time

Engine output restriction control

begins operating

System determines that possibility

of collision with detected object is

high

Engine output reduced

Example: Multi-information display:

“BRAKE!”

Figure 3 When brake control oper-

ates

Engine output

Braking force

Time

Engine output restriction control

begins operating

System determines that possibility

of collision with detected object is

high

Engine output reduced

System determines that possibility

of collision with detected object is

extremely high

Brake control begins operating

Brake control strength increased

Example: Multi-information display:

“BRAKE!”

Example: Multi-information display:

“Switch to Brake”

■

If the Parking Support Brake has oper-

ated

If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of

the Parking Support Brake, the Parking

Support Brake will be disabled and the

PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the

Parking Support Brake operates unneces-

sarily, brake control can be canceled by

depressing the brake pedal or waiting for

approximately 2 seconds for it to automati-

cally be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be

366

4-5. Using the driving support systems

operated by depressing the accelerator

pedal.

■

Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake

To re-enable the Parking Support Brake

when it has been disabled due to operation

of the Parking Support Brake, either enable

the system again (P.363), or turn the

engine switch off and then back to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

Additionally, if any of the following condi-

tions are met, the system will be re-enabled

automatically and the PKSB OFF indicator

will turn off:

●

The P shift position is selected

●

The object is no longer detected in the

traveling direction of the vehicle

●

The traveling direction of the vehicle

changes

: Except when the Parking Support Brake

function (rear pedestrians) operated.

■

If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable”

is displayed on the multi-information

display

●

If this message is displayed only when the

R shift position is selected, the rear cam-

era lens may be dirty. Clean the camera

lens. If this message is displayed when the

shift position is any position other than R,

a sensor on the front or rear bumper may

be dirty. Clean the sensors and their sur-

rounding area on the bumpers.

●

Initialization may not have been per-

formed after a battery terminal was dis-

connected and reconnected. Initialize the

system. (P.366)

If this message continues to be displayed

even after initialization, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer.

■

If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable”

and “Parking Assist Unavailable” are

displayed on the multi-information dis-

play

Water may be continuously flowing over the

sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain.

When the system determines that it is nor-

mal, the system will return to normal.

■

If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable”

and “Clean Parking Assist Sensor” are

displayed on the multi-information dis-

play

●

A sensor may be covered with water

drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the

water drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the

sensor to return the system to normal. If

this message continues to be displayed

even after cleaning the sensor, or is dis-

played even though the sensor is clean,

have the vehicle inspected by any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

A sensor may be frozen. Once the ice

melts, the system will return to normal.

■

If a battery terminal has been discon-

nected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized. To initial-

ize the system, drive the vehicle straight

ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of

approximately 35 km/h (22 mph) or more.

Additionally, for vehicles with the Parking

Support Brake function, turn the steering

wheel fully to the left and right with the vehi-

cle stopped.

367

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

:If equipped

This function will operate in situations

such as the following if an object is

detected in the traveling direction of

the vehicle.

When traveling at a low speed and

the brake pedal is not depressed, or

is depressed late

When the accelerator pedal is

depressed excessively

When the vehicle moves in the unin-

tended direction due to the wrong

shift position being selected

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (static objects)*

If the sensors detect a static object,

such as a wall, in the travelling

direction of the vehicle and the sys-

tem determines that a collision may

occur due to the vehicle suddenly

moving forward due to an acciden-

tal accelerator pedal operation, the

vehicle moving the unintended

direction due to the wrong shift

position being selected, or while

parking or traveling at low speeds,

the system will operate to lessen

the impact with the detected static

object and reduce the resulting

damage.

Examples of function operation

368

4-5. Using the driving support systems

P.351

Types of sensors

WARNING

■

To ensure the Parking Support Brake

can operate properly

Observe the following precautions

regarding the sensors (



P.351). Failure

to do so may cause a sensor to not oper-

ate properly, and may cause an accident.

●

Do not modify, disassemble or paint

the sensors.

●

Do not replace a sensor with a part

other than a genuine part.

●

Do not subject a sensor or its sur-

rounding area to a strong impact.

●

Do not damage the sensors, and

always keep them clean.

■

Handling the suspension

Do not modify the suspension, as

changes to the height or inclination of the

vehicle may prevent the sensors from

detecting objects correctly or cause the

system to not operate or operate unnec-

essarily.

■

If the Parking Support Brake function

(static objects) operates unnecessar-

ily, such as at a railroad crossing

In the event that the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) operates

unnecessarily, such as at a railroad cross-

ing, brake control will be canceled after

approximately 2 seconds, allowing you

to proceed forward and leave the area,

brake control can also be canceled by

depressing the brake pedal. Depressing

the accelerator pedal after brake control

is canceled will allow you to proceed for-

ward and leave the area.

■

Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or

steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor mal-

functioning.

●

When using a high pressure washer to

wash the vehicle, do not spray the sen-

sors directly, as doing so may cause a

sensor to malfunction.

●

When using steam to clean the vehicle,

do not direct steam too close to the

sensors as doing so may cause a sen-

sor to malfunction.

■

When to disable the Parking Support

Brake

In the following situations, disable the

Parking Support Brake as the system

may operate even though there is no

possibility of a collision.

●

When inspecting the vehicle using a

chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free

roller

●

When loading the vehicle onto a boat,

truck or other transport vessel

●

If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

●

If the front of the vehicle is raised or

lowered due to the carried load

369

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

The Parking Support Brake function

(static object) will operate when

The function will operate when the PKSB

OFF indicator is not illuminated (P.84)

and all of the following conditions are met:

●

Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or

less.

• There is a static object in the traveling

direction of the vehicle and 2 to 4 m (6 to

13 ft.) away.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that a stronger-than-normal brake opera-

tion is necessary to avoid a collision.

●

Brake control

•Engine output restriction control is oper-

ating.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that an immediate brake operation is nec-

essary to avoid a collision.

■

The Parking Support Brake function

(static objects) will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if any of the

following conditions are met:

●

Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• The system determines that the collision

has become avoidable with normal brake

operation.

• The static object is no longer 2 to 4 m (6

to 13 ft.) away from the vehicle or in the

traveling direction of the vehicle.

●

Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed

since the vehicle was stopped by brake

control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the

vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• The static object is no longer 2 to 4 m (6

to 13 ft.) away from the vehicle or in the

traveling direction of the vehicle.

■

Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake

function (static objects)

P.366

■

Detection range of the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects)

The detection range of the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) differs from

the detection range of the Lexus parking

assist-sensor. (P.354) Therefore, even if

the Lexus parking assist-sensor detects an

object and provides a warning, the Parking

Support Brake function (static objects) may

not start operating.

■

Objects that the Parking Support Brake

function (static objects) may not detect

The sensors may not be able to detect cer-

tain objects, such as the following:

●

Pedestrian

●

Cotton cloth, snow, and other materials

that are poor reflectors of ultrasonic

waves

●

Objects which are not perpendicular to

the ground, are not perpendicular to the

traveling direction of the vehicle, are une-

ven or are waving

●

Low objects

●

Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes

and signposts

●

Objects that are extremely close to the

bumper

●

Sharply-angled objects

●

Tall objects with upper sections project-

ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-

cle

■

Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) may not

operate

When driving with the shift position in N

■

Lexus parking assist-sensor buzzer

Regardless of whether the Lexus parking

WARNING

●

When equipment that may obstruct a

sensor is installed, such as a towing

eyelet, bumper protector (an addi-

tional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or

snow plow

●

When using an automatic car wash

370

4-5. Using the driving support systems

assist-sensor buzzer is enabled or not

(P.351), if the Parking Support Brake

function (static objects) is enabled

(P.363), the front or rear sensors detect

an object and brake control is performed,

the Lexus parking assist-sensor buzzer will

sound to notify the driver of the approxi-

mate distance to the object.

■

Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) may

operate even if there is no possibility of a

collision

In some situations, such as the following, the

Parking Support Brake function (static

objects) may operate even though there is

no possibility of a collision.

●

Vehicle surroundings

• When driving on a narrow road

• When driving on a gravel road or in an

area with tall grass

• When driving toward a banner, flag,

low-hanging branch or boom barrier

(such as those used at railroad crossings,

toll gates and parking lots)

• When driving on a narrow path sur-

rounded by a structure, such as in a tun-

nel or on an iron bridge

• When parallel parking

• When there is a rut or hole in the surface

of the road

• When driving on a metal cover (grating),

such as those used for drainage ditches

• When driving on a steep slope

• If a sensor is hit by a large amount of

water, such as when driving on a flooded

road

●

Weather

• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt,

etc. (when cleared, the system will return

to normal)

• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor

• When driving in inclement weather such

as fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When strong winds are blowing

●

Other ultrasonic wave sources

• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors,

motorcycle engines, air brakes of large

vehicles, the clearance sonar of other

vehicles or other devices which produce

ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle

• If a sticker or an electronic component,

such as a backlit license plate (especially

fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole

or wireless antenna is installed near a

sensor

●

Changes in the vehicle posture

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

• If the orientation of a sensor has been

changed due to a collision or other

impact

■

Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) may not

operate properly

In some situations, such as the following, this

function may not operate properly.

●

Weather

• When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is extremely hot or cold

• When strong winds are blowing

371

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• If a sensor is covered with water drops,

ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the sys-

tem will return to normal)

• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor

• When driving in inclement weather such

as fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When the sensor is frozen (Once the

sensor thaws, the system will return to

normal)

●

Vehicle surroundings

• When an object that cannot be detected

is between the vehicle and a detected

object

• If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle,

bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the

vehicle or runs out from the side of the

vehicle

• The vehicle is approaching a tall or

curved curb.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on an

incline, on gravel, or on grass.

• If objects draw too close to the sensor.

●

Other ultrasonic waves sources

• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors,

motorcycle engines, air brakes of large

vehicles, the clearance sonar of other

vehicles or other devices which produce

ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle

• If a sticker or an electronic component,

such as a backlit license plate (especially

fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole

or wireless antenna is installed near a

sensor

●

Changes in the vehicle posture

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

• If the orientation of a sensor has been

changed due to a collision or other

impact

• When equipment that may obstruct a

sensor is installed, such as a towing eye-

let, bumper protector (an additional trim

strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

• If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

• If a sensor has been painted or covered

with a sticker, etc.

372

4-5. Using the driving support systems

:If equipped

This function will operate in situations

such as the following if a vehicle is

detected in the traveling direction of

the vehicle.

When reversing, a vehicle is

approaching and the brake pedal is

not depressed, or is depressed late

P.346

■

The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) will operate

when

The function will operate when the PKSB

OFF indicator is not illuminated (P.84)

and all of the following conditions are met:

●

Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or

less.

• Vehicles which are approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a

traveling speed of approximately 8 km/h

(5 mph) or more.

• The shift position is in R.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that a stronger than normal brake opera-

tion is necessary to avoid a collision with

an approaching vehicle.

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (rear-crossing vehicles)*

If a rear radar sensor detects a vehi-

cle approaching from the right or

left at the rear of the vehicle and the

system determines that the possi-

bility of a collision is high, this func-

tion will perform brake control to

reduce the likelihood of an impact

with the approaching vehicle.

Examples of function operation

Types of sensors

WARNING

■

To ensure the Parking Support Brake

(rear-crossing vehicles) can operate

properly

Observe the following precautions

regarding the rear side radar sensors

(P.346). Failure to do so may cause a

sensor to not operate properly, and may

cause an accident.

●

Do not modify, disassemble or paint

the sensors.

●

Do not replace a rear side radar sen-

sor with a part other than a genuine

part.

●

Do not damage the rear side radar

sensors, and always keep the radar

sensors and their surrounding area on

the bumper clean.

●

If the area around a rear side radar

sensor is subjected to an impact, the

system may not operate properly due

to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

373

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●

Brake control

•Engine output restriction control is oper-

ating.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that an emergency brake operation is

necessary to avoid a collision with an

approaching vehicle.

■

The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operat-

ing when

The function will stop operating if any of the

following conditions are met:

●

Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• The collision becomes avoidable with

normal brake operation.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching from

the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

●

Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed

since the vehicle was stopped by brake

control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the

vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching from

the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

■

Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake

function (rear-crossing vehicles)

P.366

■

Detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)

The detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) dif-

fers from the detection area of the RCTA

function (P.357). Therefore, even if the

RCTA function detects a vehicle and pro-

vides an alert, the Parking Support Brake

function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not

start operating.

■

Conditions under which the Parking

Support Brake function (rear-crossing

vehicles) will not detect a vehicle

The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) is not designed to

detect the following types of vehicles and/or

objects:

●

Vehicles approaching from directly

behind

●

Vehicles backing up in a parking space

next to your vehicle

●

Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect

due to obstructions

●

Vehicles which suddenly accelerate or

decelerate near your vehicle

●

Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles

and similar stationary objects

●

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,

etc.

●

Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

●

Vehicles approaching from the parking

spaces next to your vehicle

●

Objects which are extremely close to a

radar sensor

●

Vehicles which are approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a

traveling speed of less than approxi-

mately 8 km/h (5 mph)

●

Vehicles which are approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a

traveling speed of more than approxi-

mately 24 km/h (15 mph)

■

PKSB buzzer

If the Parking Support Brake is enabled and

brake control is performed, a buzzer will

sound to notify the driver.

■

Situations in which the system may

operate even though there is no possi-

bility of a collision

In some situations such as the following, the

Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) may operate even

though there is no possibility of a collision.

●

When the parking space faces a street

and vehicles are being driven on the

374

4-5. Using the driving support systems

street

●

When a detected vehicle turns while

approaching the vehicle

●

When a vehicle passes by the side of your

vehicle

●

When the distance between your vehicle

and metal objects, such as a guardrail,

wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may

reflect electrical waves toward the rear of

the vehicle, is short

●

When there are spinning objects near

your vehicle such as the fan of an air con-

ditioning unit

●

When water is splashed or sprayed

toward the rear bumper, such as from a

sprinkler

■

Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)

may not operate properly

In some situations, such as the following, the

radar sensors may not detect an object and

this function may not operate properly

●

Stationary objects

●

When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is extremely hot or cold

●

If the rear bumper is covered with ice,

snow, dirt, etc.

●

When it is raining heavily or water strikes

the vehicle

●

If the vehicle is significantly tilted

●

When equipment that may obstruct a

sensor is installed, such as a towing eye-

let, bumper protector (an additional trim

strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

●

If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

●

If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

●

If an electronic component, such as a

backlit license plate (especially fluores-

cent type), fog lights, fender pole or wire-

less antenna is installed near a radar

sensor

●

If the orientation of a radar sensor has

been changed

●

When multiple vehicles are approaching

with only a small gap between each vehi-

cle

●

If a vehicle is approaching the rear of

your vehicle rapidly

●

Situations in which the radar sensor may

not detect a vehicle

• When a vehicle approaches from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle while

you are turning while backing up

• When turning while backing up

375

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• When backing out of a shallow angle

parking spot

• When backing up on a slope with a sharp

change in grade

• When a vehicle turns into the detection

area

: If equipped

When a pedestrian is detected behind

the vehicle while backing up, the brake

pedal is not depressed or is depressed

late.

Displays a message to urge the driver

to take evasive action when a pedes-

trian is detected in the detection area

behind the vehicle. (A message will

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (rear pedestrians)*

If the rear camera sensor detects a

pedestrian behind the vehicle while

backing up and the system deter-

mines that the possibility of collid-

ing with the detected pedestrian is

high, a buzzer will sound. If the sys-

tem determines that the possibility

of colliding with the detected

pedestrian is extremely high, the

brakes will be applied automatically

to help reduce the impact of the

collision.

Examples of system operation

Center Display

376

4-5. Using the driving support systems

also be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display and head-up display [if

equipped].)

Pedestrian detection icon

Brake reminder

■

Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians) will operate when

The function will operate when the PKSB

OFF indicator is not illuminated (P.84)

and all of the following conditions are met:

●

Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or

less.

• The shift position is in R.

• The rear camera sensor detects a pedes-

trian behind the vehicle while backing up

and the system determines that the possi-

bility of colliding with the detected

pedestrian is high.

●

Brake control

• Engine output restriction control is oper-

ating.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that an emergency brake operation is

necessary to avoid a collision with a

pedestrians.

■

The Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) will stop operating

when

The function will stop operating if any of the

following conditions are met:

●

Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• The collision becomes avoidable with

normal brake operation.

• The pedestrian is no longer detected

behind your vehicle.

●

Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed

since the vehicle was stopped by brake

control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the

vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• The pedestrian is no longer detected

behind your vehicle.

■

Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake

function (rear pedestrians)

P.366

WARNING

■

If the Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) operates unneces-

sarily

Depress the brake pedal immediately

after the Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) operates. (Operation

of the function is canceled by depressing

the brake pedal.)

■

Correct use of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear pedestrians)

Do not overly rely on the Parking Sup-

port Brake function (rear pedestrians).

Depending on the road conditions, vehi-

cle conditions and weather, this function

may not operate correctly. As the detec-

tion performance of the rear camera is

limited, always drive safely, taking care to

observe your surroundings.

Additionally, if a warning message is dis-

played on the center display indicating

that the Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) is unavailable, the

function cannot be used. Even if these

warnings are not output, the driver is

always responsible for paying attention

to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving

safely.

377

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear pedestrians)

The detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear pedestrians) differs

from the detection area of the RCD func-

tion (P.360). Therefore, even if the RCD

function detects a pedestrian and provides

an alert, the Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) may not start operating.

■

Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

●

Some pedestrians, such as the following,

may not be detected by the Parking Sup-

port Brake function (rear pedestrians),

preventing the function from operating

properly:

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or

squatting

• Pedestrians who are lying down

• Pedestrians who are running

• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the

detection area

• People riding a bicycle, skateboard, or

other light vehicle

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing

such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making

their silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians whose body is partially hid-

den by an object, such as a cart or

umbrella

• Pedestrians which are obscured by dark-

ness, such as at night

●

In some situations, such as the following,

pedestrians may not be detected by the

Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians), preventing the function

from operating properly:

• When backing up in inclement weather

(rain, snow, fog, etc.)

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,

snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• When a very bright light, such as the sun,

or the headlights of another vehicle,

shines directly into the rear camera

• When backing up in a place where the

surrounding brightness changes sud-

denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a

garage or underground parking lot

• When backing up in a dim environment

such as during dusk or in an underground

parking lot

●

Even though there are no pedestrians in

the detection area, some objects, such as

the following, may be detected, possibly

causing the Parking Support Brake func-

tion (rear pedestrians) to operate.

• Three dimensional objects, such as a

pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehi-

cle

• Moving objects, such as a car or motor-

cycle

• Objects moving toward your vehicle

when backing up, such as flags or pud-

dles (or airborne matter, such as smoke,

steam, rain, or snow)

• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails,

road repairs, white lines, pedestrian

crossings, puddles or fallen leaves on the

road

• Metal covers (gratings), such as those

used for drainage ditches

• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet

road surface

• The roadside or bumps on the road

• Shadows on the road

●

In some situations, such as the following,

the Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians) may operate even though

there are no pedestrians in the detection

area.

• When backing up toward the roadside or

a bump on the road

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as

when carrying a heavy load

•When backing up toward an

incline/decline

• If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

• If an electronic component, such as a

backlit license plate or rear fog light, is

installed near the rear camera

• If a bumper protector, such as an addi-

tional trim strip, is installed to the rear

bumper

• If the orientation of the rear camera has

been changed

• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of

the vehicle

• When water is flowing over the rear cam-

era lens

378

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,

snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• If there is a flashing light in the detection

area, such as the emergency flashers of

another vehicle



Vehicles without Adaptive Variable

Suspension System

1Normal mode

Provides an optimal balance of fuel econ-

omy, quietness, and dynamic performance.

Suitable for city driving.

Press the switch to change the driving

mode to normal mode when not in normal

mode.

2Eco drive mode

Helps the driver accelerate in an

eco-friendly manner and improve fuel

economy through moderate throttle char-

acteristics and by controlling the operation

of the air conditioning system (heat-

ing/cooling).

When not in Eco drive mode, if the driving

mode select switch is turned backward, the

Eco drive mode indicator will come on.

3Sport mode

Controls the transmission and engine to

provide quick, powerful acceleration. This

mode also changes the steering feel, mak-

ing it suitable for when agile driving

Driving mode select switch

The driving modes can be selected

to suit driving condition.

Selecting a drive mode

379

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

response is desired, such as when driving

on roads with many curves.

When not in sport mode, if the driving

mode select switch is turned forward, the

sport mode indicator will comes on.



Vehicles with Adaptive Variable

Suspension System

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

1Normal mode/Custom mode

Normal mode and custom mode are

selected by pressing the driving mode

select switch. Each time the switch is

pressed, the driving mode changes

between normal mode and custom mode.

When normal mode is selected, the normal

mode indicator comes on.

When custom mode is selected, the cus-

tom mode indicator comes on.

Press the switch to change the driving

mode to normal mode when not in normal

mode.

•Normal mode

Provides an optimal balance of fuel econ-

omy, quietness, and dynamic performance.

Suitable for city driving.

When the shift position is in D, an appropri-

ate gear for sporty driving may automati-

cally be selected according to driver

performance and driving conditions.

• Custom mode

Allows you to drive with the powertrain,

chassis and air conditioning system func-

tions set to your preferred settings. Cus-

tom mode settings can only be changed on

the drive mode customization display of

the Center Display. (P.396)

2Comfort mode

By controlling the suspension, riding com-

fort is further enhanced. Suitable for city

driving.

When not in comfort mode and the driving

mode select switch is turned backward, the

comfort mode indicator comes on.

3Eco drive mode

Helps the driver accelerate in an

eco-friendly manner and improve fuel

economy through moderate throttle char-

acteristics and by controlling the operation

of the air conditioning system (heat-

ing/cooling).

When in comfort mode, if the driving mode

select switch is turned backward, the Eco

drive mode indicator comes on.

4Sport mode

• Sport S mode

Controls the transmission and engine to

provide quick, powerful acceleration. This

mode is suitable for when agile driving

response is desired, such as when driving

on roads with many curves.

When not in Sport S mode, if the driving

mode select switch is turned forward, the

Sport S mode indicator comes on.

380

4-5. Using the driving support systems

•Sport S+ mode

Helps to ensure steering performance and

driving stability by simultaneously con-

trolling the steering and suspension in

addition to the transmission and engine.

Suitable for sportier driving.

When in Sport S mode, if the driving mode

select switch is turned forward, the Sport

S+ mode indicator comes on.

■

If the driving mode select switch is oper-

ated while the opening screen is being

displayed

If the driving mode select switch is operated

while the opening screen is being displayed,

the driving mode will be changed and the

meter display will change accordingly after

the opening screen operation has com-

pleted.

■

Operation of the air conditioning sys-

tem in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cool-

ing operations and fan speed of the air con-

ditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency.

To improve air conditioning performance,

perform the following operations:

●

Adjust the fan speed (P.403)

●

Turn off Eco drive mode

■

Automatic deactivation of sport mode

and custom mode

If the engine switch is turned off after driv-

ing in sport mode or custom mode, the

drive mode will be changed to normal

mode.

■

Driving mode pop-up display

When the driving mode is changed, the

selected driving mode will be temporarily

displayed on the side display. (P.397)

: If equipped

■

Situations in which the vehicle height

control may not operate properly

●

In the following situations, the vehicle

height may change slowly or may not

change to the correct height:

• When the vehicle comes into contact

with snow, ice, stone, etc.

• When the ambient temperature is low

• When the accumulator tank pressure is

low

●

In the following situations, the vehicle

height may not change:

• If the hood or trunk is not fully closed

• If the brake pedal depressed and the

vehicle is stopped

• When the vehicle is on a significantly

uneven or undulating road

• When the vehicle is on a slanted road or a

slope

■

Operating sound of the air suspension

compressor and valves

In the following situations the air suspension

compressor and valves may operate and a

sound may be heard, but this does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

Electronically modulated air

suspension*

The height of the vehicle when driv-

ing can be selected using the vehi-

cle height adjustment switch. The

selected height level will be main-

tained regardless of the number of

passengers or weight of cargo.

Additionally, settings of the follow-

ing functions can be changed:

Enabling/Disabling controls of

access mode

Temporarily disabling vehicle

height control

381

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●

When passengers enter or exit the vehi-

cle or cargo is loaded or unloaded, caus-

ing the vehicle height to change

●

When the height of the vehicle is

changed using the vehicle height adjust-

ment switch

●

When the doors are opened/closed

●

When the doors are locked/unlocked

■

When the accumulator tank pressure is

low

When the accumulator tank pressure is low,

the air suspension compressor and valves

may operate repeatedly even though the

vehicle height is not being changed. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

■

When “Air Suspension System Malfunc-

tion Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on

the multi-information display

The system may not operate properly. Have

the vehicle inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

To adjust the vehicle height to one

appropriate for road and driving con-

ditions, press the vehicle height adjust-

ment switch.

Turns high mode on/off.

When high mode is enabled, the high

mode indicator on the meter will illuminate.

The vehicle height will increase by approxi-

mately 20 mm (0.8 in.) from its normal

WARNING

■

Precautions for the electronically

modulated air suspension

●

Even if the engine is not running, the

vehicle height may change through

vehicle height control. Be sure to keep

your hands and feet away from the

area underneath the vehicle and

between the tires and vehicle body.

Otherwise part of your body may get

caught, possibly causing an injury.

●

In situations such as the following,

make sure to disable all functions of

the vehicle height control of the elec-

tronically modulated air suspension.

Otherwise, the vehicle height may

change and part or your body may be

caught under the vehicle, possibly

causing injury.

• When the vehicle is parked on a curb

• If any of the wheels is not touching the

ground

• If the vehicle needs to be jacked up

• If the vehicle is to be tied down

• If the vehicle is to be towed

NOTICE

■

Parking precaution

●

If the vehicle is parked for a long time,

the vehicle height may change due to

changes in the ambient temperature.

When parking the vehicle, make sure

that the area above and below the

vehicle is clear, so that the vehicle will

not contact anything if its height

changes.

●

Be careful when parking the vehicle in

an area with a low ceiling or near low

hanging objects, as the vehicle height

will increase when passengers exit the

vehicle and exit control of access

mode operates.

●

When the doors are closed or locked,

the vehicle height may decrease.

When parking in a parking lot with a

device which raises to contact the bot-

tom of the vehicle, make sure to disa-

ble the vehicle height control.

Selecting the vehicle height

382

4-5. Using the driving support systems

position.

When the vehicle height is increased by a

control of access mode press the vehicle

height adjustment switch twice to ena-

ble/disable high mode.

■

The vehicle height adjustment switch

can be used to change the mode when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

System protection function

If the vehicle height is repeatedly increased

and decreased using the vehicle height

adjustment switch, etc., the system may not

operate temporarily.

In order to improve the ease of enter-

ing and exiting the vehicle, the vehicle

height will automatically increase when

the P shift position is selected and a

door is opened.

When any of the following conditions

are met, the vehicle will return to its

previous height:

A certain amount of time has

elapsed since the doors were closed

The vehicle speed reaches approxi-

mately 5 km/h (3 mph)

The doors are locked using the

smart entry & start system or wire-

less remote control

■

Enabling/Disabling access mode

1Press the or meter control

switch to select .

2Press the or meter control

switch to select “Vehicle Settings”

and then press .

3Press the or meter control

switch to select and then

press .

4Press the or meter control

switch to select “Access Mode” and

then press .

The setting will change between ena-

bled/disabled each time the meter

control switch is pressed.

■

When the vehicle height has been

increased by a control of access mode

Press the vehicle height adjustment switch

with the engine switch in any mode to return

the vehicle to its previous vehicle height.

WARNING

■

When operating the vehicle height

adjustment switch

When operating the vehicle height

adjustment switch, make sure to check

the safety of the area around the vehicle,

as the vehicle height may change and

part of someone’s body may be caught

under the vehicle, possibly causing injury.

Vehicle height control when

entering/exiting the vehicle

(“Access Mode”)

383

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Access mode operation

●

Access mode will not operate if the vehi-

cle is not parked on a level road surface.

●

Depending on the current vehicle height,

access mode may not operate.

●

After the doors are unlocked, if access

mode operates, the vehicle height will

increase by approximately 20 mm (0.8

in.) from its normal position. After the

vehicle has been driven, if access mode

operates, the vehicle height will increase

by approximately 10 mm (0.4 in.) from its

normal position.

●

If the doors are opened and closed

repeatedly, the system may not operate

temporarily.

Vehicle height control can be tempo-

rarily disabled using the meter control

switches. (P.94)

When to temporarily disable vehicle height

control:P.381

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press .

3Press or to select

and then press .

4Press or to select “Height

Control” and then press .

This setting is memorized even if the

engine switch is turned off.

Even if the vehicle height control func-

tions are disabled, they will be enabled

automatically when the vehicle speed

reaches approximately 30 km/h (19

mph).

Temporarily disabling vehicle

height control

384

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

ECB (Electronically Controlled

Brake System) (vehicles with Lexus

Safety System + A)

The electronically controlled system

generates braking force correspond-

ing to the brake operation

■

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the

brakes are applied suddenly, or if the

brakes are applied while driving on a

slippery road surface

■

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of brak-

ing force after the brake pedal is

depressed when the system detects a

panic stop situation

■

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding

when swerving suddenly or turning on

slippery road surfaces.

■

TRC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and pre-

vent the drive wheels from spinning

when starting the vehicle or accelerat-

ing on slippery roads

■

Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward move-

ment of the vehicle when starting on an

uphill

■

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce

the amount of effort needed to turn the

steering wheel.

■

Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-

tem (if equipped)

By independently controlling the

damping force of the shock absorbers

for each of the 4 wheels according to

the road and driving conditions, this

system helps riding comfort with supe-

rior vehicle stability, and helps good

vehicle posture.

Also, the damping force changes

depending on the selected driving

mode. (P.378)

■

VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Inte-

grated Management)

Provides integrated control of the

ABS, brake assist, TRC, VSC, hill-start

assist control, EPS and Adaptive Varia-

ble Suspension System (if equipped)

Helps to maintain vehicle stability when

swerving on slippery road surfaces by

controlling the brakes, engine output,

steering assist, and steering ratio

■

Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard

Lights (if equipped)

The rear side radar sensors detect fol-

Driving assist systems

To keep driving safety and perfor-

mance, the following systems oper-

ate automatically in response to

various driving situations. Be aware,

however, that these systems are

supplementary and should not be

relied upon too heavily when oper-

ating the vehicle.

Summary of the driving assist

systems

385

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

lowing vehicles driving in the same

lane. If the system determines that the

possibility of a rear-end collision is

high, the emergency flashers will flash

rapidly to warn the driver of the follow-

ing vehicle. Simultaneously, a message

will be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display to notify the driver of the

approach of the following vehicle.

■

Emergency brake signal

When the brakes are applied suddenly,

the stop lights automatically flash to

alert the vehicle behind.

■

The Secondary Collision Brake (if

equipped)

When the SRS airbag sensor detects a

collision and the system operates, the

brakes and stop lights are automati-

cally controlled to reduce the vehicle

speed and help reduce the possibility

of further damage due to a secondary

collision.

■

When the TRC/VSC systems are oper-

ating (vehicles without Lexus Safety Sys-

tem + A)

The slip indicator light will flash while the

TRC/VSC systems are operating.

■

When the TRC/VSC/ABS systems are

operating (vehicles with Lexus Safety

System + A)

The slip indicator light will flash while the

TRC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.

■

Disabling the TRC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow,

the TRC system may reduce power from

the engine to the wheels. Pressing the

switch to turn the system off may make it

easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to

free it.

To turn the TRC system off, quickly press

and release the switch.

The “Traction Control Turned Off” will be

shown on the multi-information display.

Press the switch again to turn the sys-

tem back on.

■

Turning both TRC and VSC systems

To turn the TRC and VSC systems off, press

and hold the switch for more than 3

seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will come on

and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will

be shown on the multi-information display.

Press the switch again to turn the sys-

tem back on.

: On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision

System), PCS will also be disabled (only

386

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Pre-Collision warning is available). The

PCS warning light will come on and a

message will be displayed on the

multi-information display. (P.285,

293)

■

When the message is displayed on the

multi-information display showing that

TRC has been disabled even if the

switch has not been pressed

TRC is temporary deactivated. If the infor-

mation continues to show, contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

Operating conditions of hill-start assist

control

When the following four conditions are met,

the hill-start assist control will operate:

●

The shift position is in a position other

than P or N (when stating off for-

ward/backward on an upward incline)

●

The vehicle is stopped

●

The accelerator pedal is not depressed

●

The parking brake is not engaged

●

Engine switch is turned to IGNITION

ON mode

■

Automatic system cancelation of

hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any

of the following situations:

●

Shift the shift position to P or N

●

The accelerator pedal is depressed

●

The parking brake is engaged

●

2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the

brake pedal is released

●

Engine switch is turned Off

■

Sounds and vibrations caused by the

ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRC and

hill-start assist control systems

●

A sound may be heard from the engine

compartment when the brake pedal is

depressed repeatedly, when the engine is

started or just after the vehicle begins to

move. This sound does not indicate that a

malfunction has occurred in any of these

systems.

●

Any of the following conditions may

occur when the above systems are oper-

ating. None of these indicates that a mal-

function has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle

body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard also after

the vehicle comes to a stop.

• Vehicles without Lexus Safety System +

A: The brake pedal may pulsate slightly

after the ABS is activated.

• Vehicles without Lexus Safety System +

A: The brake pedal may move down

slightly after the ABS is activated.

■

ECB operating sound

ECB operating sound may be heard in the

following cases, but it does not indicate that

a malfunction has occurred.

●

Operating sound heard from the engine

compartment when the brake pedal is

operated.

●

Motor sound of the brake system heard

from the front part of the vehicle when

the driver’s door is opened.

●

Operating sound heard from the engine

compartment when one or two minutes

passed after the stop of the engine.

■

EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a

motor sound (whirring sound) may be

heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■

Automatic reactivation of TRC and

VSC systems

After turning the TRC and VSC systems off,

the systems will be automatically re-ena-

bled in the following situations:

●

When the engine switch is turned off

●

If only the TRC system is turned off, the

TRC will turn on when vehicle speed

increases

If both the TRC and VSC systems are

turned off, automatic re-enabling will not

occur when vehicle speed increases.

387

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■

Reduced effectiveness of the EPS sys-

tem

The effectiveness of the EPS system is

reduced to prevent the system from over-

heating when there is frequent steering

input over an extended period of time. The

steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.

Should this occur, refrain from excessive

steering input or stop the vehicle and turn

the engine off. The EPS system should

return to normal within 10 minutes.

■

Operating conditions of Automatic

Rear Flashing Hazard Lights

When the following two conditions are met,

the Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard Lights

will operate:

●

The relative speed between your vehicle

and the following vehicle is between

approximately 30 and 100 km/h (19 and

62 mph).

●

Your vehicle is being driven at approxi-

mately 10 km/h (7 mph) or less or at any

speed with the brake pedal depressed.

■

Situations in which the Automatic Rear

Flashing Hazard Lights may not operate

properly

●

In the following situations, the system may

not detect a following vehicle properly:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

rounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is

covering the sensor or surrounding area

on the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is

wet with standing water during bad

weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When driving up and down consecutive

steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the

road, etc.

• When the following vehicle is not

approaching from straight behind your

vehicle

• When the following vehicle is approach-

ing from an angle

• If a vehicle suddenly cuts behind your

vehicle

• When the following vehicle is surrounded

by other vehicles

• When a bicycle carrier or other acces-

sory is installed to the rear of your vehicle

●

In the following situations, the system may

operate even though there is no possibil-

ity of a collision

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

rounding area

• When your vehicle is surrounded by

other vehicles

• When your vehicle is stopped to make a

turn at an intersection, etc. and a vehicle

passes your vehicle from straight behind

• When your vehicle is stopped on the

roadside, etc. and a vehicle passes close

to the side of your vehicle

• When a following vehicle closely

approaches your vehicle before overtak-

ing

• When a following vehicle suddenly

approaches to close to your vehicle

■

When “FHL Not Available” is shown on

the multi-information display

The Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard Lights

function is suspended.

In this case, ice, snow, mud, etc., may be

attached to the bumper in the area around

the sensor. (P.346) The system should

return to normal operation after removing

the ice, snow, mud, etc. from the rear

bumper. Additionally, the sensors may not

operate normally when driving in extremely

hot or cold environments.

■

Operating conditions of emergency

brake signal

When the following conditions are met, the

emergency brake signal will operates:

●

The emergency flashers are off.

●

Actual vehicle speed is over 55 km/h

(35 mph).

●

The system judges from the vehicle

deceleration that it is a sudden braking

operation.

■

Automatic system cancelation of emer-

gency brake signal

The emergency brake signal will be

canceled in any of the following situations:

●

The emergency flashers are turned on.

388

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●

The system judges from the vehicle

deceleration that is not a sudden braking

operation.

■

Secondary Collision Brake operating

conditions

The system operates when the SRS airbag

sensor detects a collision while the vehicle

is in motion. However, the system does not

operate in any of the following situations.

●

When driving at a low speed

●

Components are damaged

■

Secondary Collision Brake automatic

cancellation

The system is automatically canceled in any

of the following situations.

●

The vehicle speed has decreased to a

certain speed

●

A certain amount of time elapses during

operation

●

The accelerator pedal is depressed a

large amount

WARNING

■

The ABS does not operate effectively

when

●

The limits of tire gripping performance

have been exceeded (such as exces-

sively worn tires on a snow covered

road).

●

The vehicle hydroplanes while driving

at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■

Stopping distance when the ABS is

operating may exceed that of normal

conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the

vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-

tain a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you, especially in the following

situations:

●

When driving on dirt, gravel or

snow-covered roads

●

When driving with tire chains

●

When driving over bumps in the road

●

When driving over roads with potholes

or uneven surfaces

■

TRC/VSC may not operate effec-

tively when

Directional control and power may not

be achievable while driving on slippery

road surfaces, even if the TRC/VSC sys-

tem is operating. Drive the vehicle care-

fully in conditions where stability and

power may be lost.

■

Hill-start assist control does not oper-

ate effectively when

●

Do not overly rely on hill-start assist

control. Hill-start assist control may

not operate effectively on steep

inclines and roads covered with ice.

●

Unlike the parking brake, hill-start

assist control is not intended to hold

the vehicle stationary for an extended

period of time. Do not attempt to use

hill-start assist control to hold the vehi-

cle on an incline, as doing so may lead

to an accident.

■

When the TRC/VSC is activated

(vehicles without Lexus Safety Sys-

tem + A)

The slip indicator light flashes. Always

drive carefully. Reckless driving may

cause an accident. Exercise particular

care when the indicator light flashes.

■

When the TRC/ABS/VSC is acti-

vated (vehicles without Lexus Safety

System + A)

The slip indicator light flashes. Always

drive carefully. Reckless driving may

cause an accident. Exercise particular

care when the indicator light flashes.

389

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■

When the TRC/VSC systems are

turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed

appropriate to the road conditions. As

these are the systems to help ensure

vehicle stability and driving force, do not

turn the TRC/VSC systems off unless

necessary.

■

Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the speci-

fied size, brand, tread pattern and total

load capacity. In addition, make sure that

the tires are inflated to the recom-

mended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRC and VSC systems will not

function correctly if different tires are

installed on the vehicle.

Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for further information when

replacing tires or wheels.

■

Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or

modifying the suspension will affect the

driving assist systems, and may cause a

system to malfunction.

■

Secondary Collision Brake

Do not rely solely upon the Secondary

Collision Brake. This system is designed

to help reduce the possibility of further

damage due to a secondary collision,

however, that effect changes according

to various conditions. Overly relying on

the system may result in death or serious

injury.

■

Handling the rear side radar sensor

(vehicles with Automatic Rear Flash-

ing Hazard Lights)



P.346

390

4-6. Driving tips

4-6.Driving t ips

Use fluids that are appropriate to

the prevailing outside temperatures.

•Engine oil

• Engine coolant

•Washer fluid

Have a service technician inspect

the condition of the battery.

Have the vehicle fitted with four

snow tires or purchase a set of tire

chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the specified size

and brand, and that chains match the size

of the tires.

: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehi-

cles with front and rear tires of differing

sizes.

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary prepara-

tions and inspections before driving

the vehicle in winter. Always drive

the vehicle in a manner appropriate

to the prevailing weather condi-

tions.

Preparation for winter

WARNING

■

Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of

vehicle control and cause death or seri-

ous injury.

●

Use tires of the specified size.

●

Maintain the recommended level of air

pressure.

●

Do not drive at speeds in excess of the

speed limit or the speed limit specified

for the snow tires being used.

●

Use snow tires on all, not just some

wheels.

■

When installing tire chains

Before installing tire chains, make sure to

disable all functions of the vehicle height

control of the electronically modulated

air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may change while installing the

tire chains and part or your body may be

caught under the vehicle, possibly caus-

ing injury. (P.383)

■

Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle

being unable to be driven safely, and may

cause death or serious injury.

●

Do not drive in excess of the speed

limit specified for the tire chains being

used, or 50 km/h (30 mph), which-

ever is lower.

●

Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces

or over potholes.

●

Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt

steering, sudden braking and shifting

operations that cause sudden engine

braking.

●

Slow down sufficiently before entering

a curve to ensure that vehicle control is

maintained.

●

Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

system. (if equipped)

391

4-6. Driving tips

Driving

Perform the following according to the

driving conditions:

Do not try to forcibly open a window

or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour

warm water over the frozen area to

melt the ice. Wipe away the water

immediately to prevent it from

freezing.

To ensure proper operation of the

climate control system fan, remove

any snow that has accumulated on

the air inlet vents in front of the

windshield.

Check for and remove any excess

ice or snow that may have accumu-

lated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s

roof, chassis, around the tires or on

the brakes.

Remove any snow or mud from the

bottom of your shoes before getting

in the vehicle.

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a

safe distance between you and the

vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced

speed suitable to road conditions.

Park the vehicle and shift the shift posi-

tion to P without setting the parking

brake. The parking brake may freeze

up, preventing it from being released. If

the vehicle is parked without setting

the parking brake, make sure to block

the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous

because it may cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly, possibly leading to

an accident.



Vehicles with front and rear tires of

the same size

Use the correct tire chain size when

mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire

size.

Side chain (3 mm [0.12 in.] in diam-

eter)

Cross chain (4 mm [0.16 in.] in

diameter)

NOTICE

■

Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow

tires from any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-

able repairer or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attach-

ment of snow tires affects the operation

of the tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters.

Before driving the vehicle

When driving the vehicle

When parking the vehicle

Selecting tire chains

392

4-6. Driving tips



Vehicles with front and rear tires of

differing sizes

Tire chains cannot be mounted.

Snow tires should be used instead.

Regulations regarding the use of tire

chains vary depending on location and

type of road. Always check local regu-

lations before installing chains.

■

Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when

installing and removing chains:

●

Install and remove tire chains in a safe

location.

●

Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not

install tire chains on the front tires.

●

Install tire chains on the rear tires as

tightly as possible. Retighten chains after

driving 0.51.0 km (1/41/2 mile).

●

Install tire chains following the instruc-

tions provided with the tire chains.

To enable the windshield wipers to be

lifted when heavy snow or icy condi-

tions are expected, change the rest

position of the windshield wipers from

the retracted position below the hood

to the service position using the wiper

lever. (P.246)

Regulations on the use of tire

chains

NOTICE

■

Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters may not function correctly

when tire chains are fitted.

Windshield wipers

393

Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Remote Touch............................ 394

Center Display........................... 396

Rear Multi Operation Panel

........................................................398

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge......401

5-3. Using the air conditioning system

and defogger

Front automatic air conditioning

system.........................................403

Rear automatic air conditioning

system.......................................... 413

Heated steering wheel/seat heat-

ers/seat ventilators................. 416

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list.........................420

5-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features ........... 424

Trunk features............................. 429

5-6. Using the other interior features

Other interior features ...........432

394

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

5-1.Remote Touch/Display

■

Switches

“MAP” button

Vehicles with navigation function:

Press this button to display the vehicle’s

current position.

Vehicles without navigation function:

Press this button to display the global map

screen.

“MENU” button

Press this button to display the menu

screen.

Back button

Press this button to display the previous

screen.

Touchpad

Slide your finger on the touchpad and

move the pointer to select a function, letter

and screen button.

Press the touchpad to enter the selected

function, letter or screen button. Certain

finger movements on the touchpad can

perform functions, such as changing map

scalings and scrolling list screens.

Sub function button

When is displayed on the screen, a

function screen assigned to the screen can

be displayed.

■

Using the touchpad

1Select: Touch the touchpad to

select the desired button on the

screen.

2Enter: Buttons on the screen can be

selected by either depressing or

double tapping the touchpad.

Once a button has been selected,

the screen will change.

■

Touch operation

Operations are performed by touching

the touchpad with your finger.

Trace

Trace the pad surface while maintaining

contact with the touchpad. Moving the

cursor and the pointer.

Remote Touch

The Remote Touch can be used to

operate the Center Display.

For details on the Remote touch,

refer to “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Remote Touch operation

395

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Interior features

Double tap

Tap the touchpad twice, quickly. Select the

button on the screen.

Flick

Quick and short movement along the

touchpad with you finger. Move the list

screen.

Pinch in/Pinch out

Slide fingers toward each other or apart on

the touchpad. Change the scale of the

map.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the Remote

Touch

Observe the following precautions. Fail-

ure to do so may cause damage to the

Remote Touch.

●

Do not allow food, liquid, stickers or lit

cigarettes to contact the Remote

Touch.

●

Do not subject the Remote Touch to

excessive pressure or strong impact.

●

Do not push the touchpad with a

strong force or use a sharp pointed

object to operate the pad.

396

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

■

Menu screen

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch to display the menu

screen.

This system can also be operated by the

touch screen. For details, refer to “NAVI-

GATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

The displays shown in the illustrations

are used for example only and may dif-

fer from the actual vehicle.

: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

: This function is not made available in

some models or areas.

■

Split-screen display

Different information can be displayed on the left and right sides of the screen. For

Center Display

Center Display overview

Switch Function

Select to display the

“Destination” screen.

*1,

Select to display the

audio control screen.

Select to display the

hands-free control

screen.

Select to display the

“Apps” screen.

*1, 2

Select to display the

home screen of Apple

CarPlay.

*1, 2

Select to display the

Android Auto screen.

*1,

Select to display the

information screen.

(P.105)

Select to display the

setup screen.

Select to display the air

conditioning control

screen. (P.406)

Switch Function

397

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Interior features

example, audio control screen can be displayed and operated while the fuel con-

sumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the left of the

display is called the main display, and the small screen to the right is called the side

display.

■

Main display

For details about the functions and

operation of the main display, refer to

the respective section and “NAVIGA-

TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

■

Side display

The following functions can be dis-

played and operated on the side dis-

play.

Select or to display the desired

screen.

Navigation system

Audio

Vehicle information (P.107)

Air conditioning system (P.409)

Show/hide the side display

: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

■

Screen display during low temperatures

When the ambient temperature is

extremely low, screen response may be

delayed even if the Remote Touch is oper-

ated.

398

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

:If equipped

■

Home screen

Touch to display the audio control

screen.

Refer to “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Touch to display the rear air condi-

tioning control screen. (P.414,

418)

Touch to display the rear seat

adjustment screen. (P.172, 181,

183)

Touch to display the relaxation seat

(if equipped) control screen.

(P.175)

Touch to display the rear sun-

shade/rear interior light control

screen. (P.421, 422, 436)

Touch to display the Rear Multi

Operation Panel settings screen.

(P.398)

Touch to display/hide the shortcut

screen.

Shortcut screen

The following can be adjusted or operated:

• Rear air conditioning system tempera-

ture setting (P.414)

• Rear seat heaters/rear seat ventilators

(P.418)

• Audio system

Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-

MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

• Rear door sunshades/rear quarter sun-

shades/rear sunshade (P.436)

button

Press to display the home screen.

When the screen is on, press and

hold to turn the screen off.

■

Rear Multi Operation Panel set-

tings screen

Screen operation settings and the

brightness of the screen can be

changed.

Rear Multi Operation Panel*

The Rear Multi Operation Panel

built-into the rear armrest can be

used to operate the rear audio sys-

tem, air conditioning system, seat,

relaxation seat, shades or lights.

Rear Multi Operation Panel

overview

399

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Interior features

Touch to turn the screen off.

Press the buttun to display the

home screen.

Touch to adjust the brightness of

the screen.

Touch to display the automatic

screen transition settings screen.

Touch to lock the Rear Multi Oper-

ation Panel.

■

Auto screen change settings

screen

Touch to turn the automatic screen

transition function on/off.

Touch to set whether the screen will

transition to the home screen or

turn off when the automatic screen

transition function operates.

Touch to set the amount of time

(10/30/60/120 seconds) the Rear

Multi Operation Panel must be idle

before the automatic screen transi-

tion function operates.

When the screen is off, press the

button to turn the screen on and display

the previously displayed screen. Press

again to display the home screen.

■

Unlocking the Rear Multi Opera-

tion Panel

Touch and hold until the unlock sta-

tus indicators ( ) are completely illu-

minated to unlock the Rear Multi

Operation Panel.

■

Operating the Rear Multi Operation

Panel

●

When operating the Rear Multi Opera-

tion Panel, only use the tip of a finger. The

Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be

operated with a fingernail, pen, etc.

●

Use only one finger when operating the

Rear Multi Operation Panel. The Rear

Multi Operation Panel cannot be oper-

ated with multiple fingers.

●

When the engine switch is changed to

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode,

if a hand object, liquid or foreign matter is

touching the Rear Multi Operation Panel,

it may not operate correctly. In this case,

remove anything touching the Rear Multi

Operation Panel and wait for approxi-

mately 30 seconds before operating it

again.

400

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

If the Rear Multi Operation Panel still

cannot be operated normally, press and

hold the button to turn the Rear

Multi Operation Panel off, and then press

the button again to turn it back

on and operate it.

●

In the following situations, the Rear Multi

Operation Panel may not operate prop-

erly:

• If wearing gloves during operation, non

response may occur.

• If a wet hand is used to operate the Rear

Multi Operation Panel.

• If a screen cover or coating is applied to

on the Rear Multi Operation Panel.

• If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty

or has liquid attached to it, incorrect

operation or non-response may occur.

• If the Rear Multi Operation Panel

receives electro magnetic waves, incor-

rect operation or non-response may

occur.

• If a mobile phone or other wireless com-

munication device brought near the Rear

Multi Operation Panel.

●

If the a metal object, such as the follow-

ing, is touching or covering the Rear

Multi Operation Panel:

•Coins

•Keys

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Magnetic isolation cards

• Metallic foil, such as the inner packaging

of a cigarette box

• Disposable heat packs

• Discs, such as a CD or DVD, Cables,

such as a USB cable

• Mobile devices, such as smartphones,

mobile phones, tablets, etc.

●

Make sure to keep the Rear Multi Oper-

ation Panel clean. If the Rear Multi Oper-

ation Panel is dirty, it may not operate

correctly. (When cleaning the Rear Multi

Operation Panel, turn the screen off to

avoid unexpected operation.)

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the Rear Multi

Operation Panel

Observe the following precautions. Fail-

ure to do so may cause damage to the

Rear Multi Operation Panel.

●

Keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel

free of liquids, such as drinks or rain, as

they may cause a short circuit.

●

Do not sit on or set heavy objects on

the Rear Multi Operation Panel.

●

Do not push the Rear Multi Operation

Panel with a strong force or use a

sharp pointed object to operate the

panel.

401

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Interior features

5-2.Lexus Climate C oncierge

Select .

The indicator on the Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen illuminates, and the

automatic air conditioning system, seat

heaters and ventilators, and heated steer-

ing wheel operate in automatic mode.

If any of the system is operated manually,

the indicator turns off. However, all other

functions continue to operate in automatic

mode.

■

Changing Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen between

front/rear (vehicles with 4-ZONE

climate control)

Select “Rear” to display the rear air

conditioning system screen.

Select “Front” to display the front air condi-

tioning system screen.

■

When using the Lexus Climate Con-

cierge

Lexus Climate Concierge can be operated

on the sub function menu or option control

screen. (P.406)

■

Automatic air conditioning system

(P.403, 413)

The temperature can be adjusted inde-

pendently for each seat.

■

Seat heaters and ventilators (if

equipped) (P.416)

Heating or ventilation is automatically

selected according to the set tempera-

ture of the air conditioning system, the

outside temperature, etc.

■

Heated steering wheel (if

equipped) (P.416)

Heated steering wheel operates auto-

Lexus Climate Concierge

The seat heaters (if equipped), seat

ventilators (if equipped) and heated

steering wheel (if equipped) are

each automatically controlled

according to the set temperature of

the air conditioning system, the out-

side and cabin temperature, etc.

Lexus Climate Concierge allows a

comfortable condition to be main-

tained without adjusting each sys-

tem.

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch to display the main

menu and move the cursor to

to display the climate control short-

cut buttons. Then, select to dis-

play the Lexus Climate Concierge

control screen.

Turning on Lexus Climate Con-

cierge

Operation of each system

402

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

matically according to the set tempera-

ture of the air conditioning system, the

outside temperature, etc.

■

Passenger detection functions

●

When a passenger is detected in the

front passenger seat, the seat heater and

ventilator will operate automatically.

●

When a passenger is detected in a rear

seat, the seat heater and ventilator will

operate automatically. (vehicles with

power rear seat)

■

Seat heater/ventilator operation

When automatic mode is selected using the

seat heater/ventilator switch, passenger

detection is not performed.

■

Rear seat heater operation (vehicles

with DUAL-ZONE climate control)

The rear seat heaters are not controlled by

the Lexus Climate Concierge.

403

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

5-3.Using the a ir conditioning system and defogger

Left-hand side temperature control switch

Automatic mode switch

Off switch

Fan speed decreases switch

Fan speed increases switch

Windshield defogger switch

Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch

Outside/recirculated air mode switch

Right-hand side temperature control switch

■

Adjusting the temperature

Operate the temperature control

switch upwards to increase the tem-

perature and downwards to decrease

the temperature.

■

Setting the fan speed

Operate the switch to increase the

fan speed and the switch to

decrease the fan speed.

Front automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temper-

ature setting.

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main menu and

move the cursor to to display the climate control shortcut buttons. Then,

select to display the air conditioning control screen.

The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.

Air conditioning controls

404

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Press the off switch to turn the fan off.

■

Changing the air flow mode

P.406

■

Switching between outside air and

recirculated air modes

Press the outside/recirculated air

mode switch.

The mode changes as follows each time

the switch is pressed.

automatic mode  (outside air

mode)  (recirculated air mode)

 automatic mode

When the system is switched to automatic

mode, the air conditioning system operates

automatically.

■

Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the wind-

shield and front side windows.

Press the windshield defogger switch.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode

switch to outside air mode if the recircu-

lated air mode is used. (It may switch auto-

matically.)

To defog the windshield and the side win-

dows quickly, turn the air flow and temper-

ature up.

To return to the previous mode, press the

windshield defogger switch again when the

windshield is defogged.

■

Defogging the rear window and

outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear

window, and to remove raindrops, dew

and frost from the outside rear view

mirrors.

Press the rear window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers switch.

The defoggers will automatically turn off

after a while. The operation time changes

according to the ambient temperature and

vehicle speed.

■

Blower customization

P.409

■

Windshield wiper de-icer (if

equipped)

P.410

■

Fogging up of the windows

The windows will easily fog up when the

humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C”

on will dehumidify the air from the outlets

and defog the windshield effectively.

●

If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog

up more easily.

●

The windows may fog up if the recircu-

lated air mode is used.

■

When driving on dusty roads

Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the

vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake mode be set to outside air

mode and the fan speed to any setting

except off.

■

Outside/recirculated air mode

●

Setting to the recirculated air mode tem-

porarily is recommended in preventing

dirty air from entering the vehicle interior

and helping to cool the vehicle when the

outside air temperature is high.

●

Outside/recirculated air mode may auto-

matically switch depending on the tem-

perature setting or the inside

temperature.

■

Registering air conditioning settings to

electronic keys

●

Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic

key and turning the engine switch to

IGNITION ON mode will recall that

key’s registered air conditioning settings.

405

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

●

When the engine switch is turned off, the

current air conditioning settings will auto-

matically be registered to the electronic

key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

●

The system may not operate correctly if

more than one electronic key is in the

vicinity or if the smart entry & start system

is used to unlock a passenger door.

●

The doors that can recall the air condi-

tioning setting

when unlocked using the

smart entry & start system can be

changed. For details, contact any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

: The doors that can recall the driving

position memory are changed at the

same time.

■

Operation of the air conditioning sys-

tem in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning sys-

tem is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel

efficiency:

●

Engine speed and compressor operation

controlled to restrict heating/cooling

capacity

●

Fan speed restricted when automatic

mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance,

perform the following operations:

●

Adjust the fan speed

●

Turn off Eco drive mode (P.378)

■

When the outside temperature falls to

nearly 0°C (32°F)

The dehumidification function may not

operate even when “A/C” is selected.

■

Ventilation and air conditioning odors

●

To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning

system to the outside air mode.

●

During use, various odors from inside and

outside the vehicle may enter into and

accumulate in the air conditioning sys-

tem. This may then cause odor to be

emitted from the vents.

●

To reduce potential odors from occur-

ring:

• It is recommended that the air condition-

ing system be set to outside air mode

prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be

delayed for a short period of time imme-

diately after the air conditioning system is

started in automatic mode or pollen

removal mode.

●

When parking, the system automatically

switches to outside air mode to encour-

age better air circulation throughout the

vehicle, helping to reduce odors that

occur when starting the vehicle.

■

Air conditioning filter

P.488

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

WARNING

■

To prevent the windshield from fog-

ging up

Do not use the windshield defogger

switch during cool air operation in

extremely humid weather. The difference

between the temperature of the outside

air and that of the windshield can cause

the outer surface of the windshield to fog

up, blocking your vision.

■

When the outside rear view mirror

defoggers are operating

Do not touch the outside rear view mir-

ror surfaces, as they can become very

hot and burn you.

NOTICE

■

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system

on longer than necessary when the

engine is off.

406

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■

Main control screen

Using the touchpad of the Remote

Touch, select the button on the screen.

This system can also be operated by the

touch screen.



Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate

control

Sub menu

Selecting the sub menu item to switch the

main screen.

: Display the air conditioning control

screen

: Display the heated steering

wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventila-

tor control screen (if equipped)

: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat

ventilator control screen (if equipped)

: Display the Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen

: Display the option control screen

Adjust the left side seat tempera-

ture setting

Adjust the fan speed setting

Select the air flow mode

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

: Air flows to the feet

: Air flows to the feet and the wind-

shield defogger operates

Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

Switch the following functions on

and off

“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification

function

If the indicator is turned off, the system will

blow ambient temperature airor heated air.

: Select front seat concentrated

airflow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)

: Changing the fan speed setting

during the automatic mode operation

(Blower customization)

: Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(P.401)

“DUAL”: Adjust the temperature for driver

and passenger seats separately (“DUAL”

mode) (P.412)

Air conditioning control screen

407

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features



Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-

trol

Sub menu

Selecting the sub menu item to switch the

main screen.

: Display the front air conditioning

control screen

: Display the heated steering

wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventila-

tor control screen

: Display the rear air conditioning con-

trol screen

: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat

ventilator control screen

: Display the Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen

: Display the option control screen

Adjust the left side seat tempera-

ture setting

Select the right side seat air flow

mode

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

: Air flows to the feet

: Air flows to the feet and the wind-

shield defogger operates

Select the left side seat air flow

mode

Adjust the fan speed setting

Switch the following functions on

and off

“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification

function

If the indicator is turned off, the system will

blow ambient temperature airor heated air.

: Select front seat concentrated

airflow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)

: Changing the fan speed setting

during the automatic mode operation

(Blower customization)

: Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(P.401)

“4-ZONE”: Adjust the temperature for the

driver, front passenger and left and right

rear passenger seats separately

(“4-ZONE” mode) (P.412)

Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

■

Option control screen

Select on the sub menu to display

the option control screen.

The functions can be switched on and off.

When the function is on, the indicator illu-

minates on the screen.

408

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger



Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate

control

Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(P.401)

Adjusting the temperature for

driver and passenger seats sepa-

rately (“DUAL” mode) (P.412)

Cooling and dehumidification func-

tion

If the “A/C” indicator is turned off, the sys-

tem will blow ambient temperature airor

heated air.

nanoe™

system on/off

Select front seat concentrated air-

flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)

Prevent ice from building up on the

windshield and wiper blades

(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if

equipped)

Removing pollen from the air (Pol-

len removal mode)

: nanoe™ and the nanoe™ mark are

trademarks of Panasonic Corporation.



Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-

trol

Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(P.401)

Adjust the temperature for driver,

passenger and rear seats sepa-

rately (“4-ZONE” mode) (P.412)

Cooling and dehumidification func-

tion

If the “A/C” indicator is turned off, the sys-

tem will blow ambient temperature airor

heated air.

nanoe™

system on/off

Select front seat concentrated air-

flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)

Prevent ice from building up on the

windshield and wiper blades

(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if

equipped)

Removing pollen from the air (Pol-

len removal mode)

: nanoe™ and the nanoe™ mark are

trademarks of Panasonic Corporation.

409

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

■

Side display



Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate

control

Display the front seat heaters/front

seat ventilators control screen

(P.417)

Adjust the fan speed setting

Select the air flow mode

Set cooling and dehumidification

function on/off

If the indicator is turned off, the system will

blow ambient temperature airor heated air.

Select front seat concentrated air-

flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)

Adjusting the temperature for

driver and passenger seats sepa-

rately (“DUAL” mode) (P.412)

Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(P.401)



Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-

trol

Display the front seat heaters/front

seat ventilators control screen

(P.417)

Select the left side seat air flow

mode

Adjust the fan speed setting

Select the right side seat air flow

mode

Set cooling and dehumidification

function on/off

If the indicator is turned off, the system will

blow ambient temperature airor heated air.

Select front seat concentrated air-

flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)

Adjust the temperature for driver,

passenger and rear seats sepa-

rately (“4-ZONE” mode) (P.412)

Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(P.401)

■

Blower customization

Fan speed setting during the automatic

mode operation can be customized.

Each time is selected, the fan speed

setting mode changes as follows.

“NORMAL”  “ECO”  “FAST” 

410

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

“NORMAL”

■

Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from

building up on the windshield and wiper

blades.

The windshield de-icer will automatically

turn off after a while.

■

Pollen removal mode

Outside air mode switches to

(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed

from the air and the air flows to the upper

part of the body.

Usually the system will automatically turn

off after a while.

In order to prevent the windshield from fog-

ging up when the outside air is cold, the

dehumidification function may operate or

the outside/recirculated air mode may not

switch to (recirculated air) mode.

Pollen is filtered even if the pollen removal

mode is turned off.

■

nanoe™ system

This vehicle incorporates a biocidal prod-

uct.

Ionised air generated by a device incorpo-

rated in the vehicle purifies the air in the

cabin by suppressing bacteria.

Active substance: Free radicals generated

in situ from ambient air or water

nanoe™ helps to provide purified air by

emitting electrically charged water parti-

cles through the front center vent on the

driver’s side*.

●

When the fan is turned on and nanoe™

on the option control screen is selected,

the nanoe™ system is activated.

●

When the fan is operated in the following

conditions, system performance will be

maximized. If the following conditions are

not met, performance will be limited.

• The , or air outlets are

being used.

• The front center vent on driver’s side is

open.

●

When nanoe™ is generated, a small

amount of ozone is emitted and may be

faintly smelled in some situations. How-

ever, this is approximately the same as the

amount that already exists in nature, such

as in forests, and it has no affect on the

human body.

●

A slight noise may be heard during oper-

ation. This is not a malfunction.

: According to temperature and humidity

conditions, fan speed and direction of

the air flow, the nanoe™ system may not

operate at full capacity.

1Press the automatic mode switch.

2Press the outside/recirculated air

mode switch to switch to automatic

air intake mode.

The air conditioning system automatically

WARNING

■

To prevent burns (vehicles with wind-

shield wiper de-icer)

Do not touch the glass at lower part of

the windshield or to the side of the front

pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer

is on.

■

nanoe™ generator

Do not disassemble or repair the genera-

tor because it contains high voltage

parts. Contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer if the generator

needs repair.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the nanoe™

Do not insert anything into the driver’s

side vent, attach anything to it, or use

sprays around the driver’s side vent.

These things may cause the generator

not to work properly.

Using automatic mode

411

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

switches between outside air and recircu-

lated air modes.

3Adjust the temperature setting.

4To stop the operation, press the off

switch.

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes

are operated, the automatic mode indica-

tor goes off. However, automatic mode for

functions other than that operated is main-

tained.

■

Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically accord-

ing to the temperature setting and the

ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until

warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-

ately after the automatic mode switch is

pressed or “AUTO” is selected.

Cool air may blow around the upper body

even when the heater is on due to sunlight.

■

Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects

exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-

matically switches between outside air and

recirculated air modes.

When the dehumidification function is off,

and the fan is operating, turning automatic

mode on will activate the dehumidification

function.

This function automatically controls the

air conditioning airflow so that priority

is given to the front seats. When the

front passenger seat is not occupied,

airflow may switch to only the driver's

seat. Unnecessary air conditioning is

suppressed, contributing to increased

fuel efficiency.

Front seat concentrated airflow mode

operates in the following situations.

No passengers are detected in the

rear seats

The windshield defogger is not

operating

Pollen removal mode is not operat-

ing

While operating, the indicator is turned

on.

■

Manually turning front seat con-

centrated airflow mode on/off

In front seat concentrated airflow

mode, directing airflow to the front

seats only and to all seats can be

switched via switch operation. When

the mode has been switched manually,

automatic airflow control stops operat-

ing.

Select on the option control

screen (P.407) and switch the air-

flow.

Indicator illuminated: Airflow to the

front seats only

Indicator off: Airflow to all the seats.

■

Operation of automatic airflow control

●

In order to maintain a comfortable inte-

rior, airflow may be directed to seats

without passengers immediately after the

engine is started and at other times

depending on the outside temperature.

●

After the engine is started, if passengers

move around inside or enter/exit the vehi-

cle, the system cannot accurately detect

the presence of passengers and auto-

matic airflow control will not operate.

Front seat concentrated airflow

mode (S-FLOW)

412

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■

Operation of manual airflow control

Even if the function is manually switched to

directing airflow to only the front seats,

when a rear seat is occupied, it may auto-

matically direct airflow to all seats.

■

To return to automatic airflow control

1With the indicator off, turn the engine

switch off.

2After 60 minutes or more elapse, turn

the engine switch to IGNITION ON

mode.



Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate

control

To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform

any of the following procedures:

Select “DUAL” on the main control

screen. (P.406)

Select “DUAL” on the option con-

trol screen.

Adjust the passenger’s side temper-

ature setting.

The indicator on the main control screen

comes on when the “DUAL” mode is on.



Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-

trol

To turn on the “4-ZONE” mode, per-

form any of the following procedures:

Select “4-ZONE” on the main con-

trol screen. (P.406)

Select “4-ZONE” on the option

control screen.

Adjust a passenger seat tempera-

ture setting.

The indicator on the main control screen

comes on when the “4-ZONE” mode is on.

■

Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume changes

according to the selected air flow

mode.

■

Adjusting the position of and open-

ing and closing the air outlets



Front center/front side

1Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

2Turn the knob to open or close the

vent

Adjusting the temperature for

the driver and passenger seats

separately

Air outlet layout and operations

413

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features



Rear center/rear side

1Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

2Turn the knob to open or close the

vent

: If equipped

■

Center Display

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch to display the main

menu and move the cursor to to

display the climate control shortcut

buttons. Then, select to display the

rear air conditioning control screen.

This system can also be operated by the

touch screen.

Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Select the left side rear seat air flow

WARNING

■

To prevent the windshield defogger

from operating improperly

Do not place anything on the instrument

panel which may cover the air outlets.

Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,

preventing the windshield defoggers

from defogging.

Rear automatic air condi-

tioning system*

The air outlets and fan speed are

automatically adjusted according

to the temperature setting.

The rear air conditioning system

can be operated using the Center

Display and Rear Multi Operation

Panel.

Rear air conditioning control

screen

414

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

mode

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

: Air flows to the feet

Adjust the rear seats fan speed set-

ting

Select the right side rear seat air

flow mode

Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Switch the following functions on

and off

“REAR Off”: Turn the rear seats fan off

“REAR AUTO”: Set the rear seats auto-

matic mode on/off (P.415)

: Disables operation of the rear air

conditioning system using the Rear Multi

Operation Panel

■

Rear Multi Operation Panel

Touch “Climate” on the home screen to

display the rear air conditioning con-

trol screen.(P.398)

Some functions of the rear air condi-

tioning system can also be operated

from the shortcut screen.

The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be

used to operate the rear air conditioning

system if the function is disabled.



Rear air conditioning control screen

Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Select the left side rear seat air flow

mode

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

: Air flows to the feet

Set the rear seats automatic mode

on/off (P.415)

Select the right side rear seat air

flow mode

Turn the rear seats fan off

Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Adjust the rear seats fan speed set-

ting



Shortcut screen

415

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting



Center Display

1Select “REAR AUTO” on the rear

air conditioning control screen.

(P.413)

2To stop the operation, select

“REAR Off” on the rear air condi-

tioning control screen. (P.413)

If the fan speed setting or air flow

modes are operated, the automatic

mode indicator goes off. However,

automatic mode for functions other

than that operated is maintained.



Rear Multi Operation Panel

1Select “AUTO” on the rear air con-

ditioning control screen. (P.414)

2To stop the operation, select “OFF”

on the rear air conditioning control

screen. (P.413)

If the fan speed setting or air flow

modes are operated, the automatic

mode indicator goes off. However,

automatic mode for functions other

than that operated is maintained.

■

Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically accord-

ing to the temperature setting and the

ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until

warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-

ately after “REAR AUTO” is selected or

“AUTO” is touched.

Cool air may blow around the upper body

even when the heater is on due to sunlight.

The temperature setting of the rear

seats can be adjusted using the follow-

ing methods:

When the “4-ZONE” indicator is

off: Adjust the driver’s seat tempera-

ture.

Adjust the temperature setting of each

rear seat using the Center Display or Rear

Multi Operation Panel.

Adjust the temperature setting of

each rear seat using the Center Dis-

play (rear air conditioning control

screen) or Rear Multi Operation

Panel.

The temperature setting of each rear seat

can be changed independently.

■

Rear center outlets and rear side

outlets

1Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

Using automatic mode

Adjusting the temperature set-

ting of the rear seats

Air outlet layout and operations

416

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

2Turn the knob to open or close the

vent

: If equipped

NOTICE

■

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system

on longer than necessary when the

engine is off.

Heated steering wheel*/seat

heaters*/seat ventilators*

Heated steering wheel

Warms up the grip of the steering

wheel

Front seat heaters/Rear seat

heaters

Warm up the seat upholstery

Front seat ventilators/Rear seat

ventilators

Maintain good ventilation by pulling

air through the seat upholstery

The Center Display and Rear Multi

Operation Panel/rear control

panel can be used to operate the

heated steering wheel, seat heaters

and seat ventilators.

WARNING

■

To prevent minor burn injuries

Care should be taken if anyone in the fol-

lowing categories comes in contact with

the steering wheel or seats when the

heater is on:

●

Babies, small children, the elderly, the

sick and the physically challenged

●

Persons with sensitive skin

●

Persons who are fatigued

●

Persons who have taken alcohol or

drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

417

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

■

Center Display

Press the switch to display the heated

steering wheel/front seat heater/front

seat ventilator control screen.

Vehicles without heated steering

wheel

Vehicles with heated steering

wheel

The heated steering wheel/front seat

heater/front seat ventilator control screen

can also be displayed by pressing the

“MENU” button on the Remote Touch and

then moving the cursor to and select-

ing from the displayed shortcut menu.

To display the rear seat heater/rear seat

ventilator control screen, select . (if

equipped)



Main screen

Using the touchpad of the Remote

Touch, select the button on the screen.

This system can also be operated by the

touch screen.

Adjust the seat ventilator fan speed

level

The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 lev-

els. (Low, Mid or Hi)

Adjust the seat heater temperature

level

The seat heater can be adjusted in 3 levels.

(Low, Mid or Hi)

Adjust the heated steering wheel

temperature level

The heated steering wheel can be adjusted

in 2 levels. (Low or Hi)

Change the following functions to

automatic mode.

When the automatic mode is on, the indi-

cator illuminates on the screen.

: Left-hand side seat heater/seat

ventilator

: Heated steering wheel

: Right-hand side seat heater/seat

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the seat heat-

ers and seat ventilators

Do not put heavy objects that have an

uneven surface on the seat and do not

stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)

into the seat.

■

To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the functions when the

engine is off.

Control screen

418

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

ventilator

: Available on the front seat control

screen only



Side screen

Display the air conditioning control

screen: P.409

Adjust the front seat heater tem-

perature level

Each time the switch is selected, the tem-

perature level and level indicator (orange)

change as follows:

AUTOHiMidLoOFF

Adjust the front seat ventilator fan

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan

speed level and level indicator (blue)

change as follows:

AUTOHiMidLoOFF

Adjust the heated steering wheel

temperature level

Each time the switch is selected, the tem-

perature level and level indicator change

as follows:

AUTOHiLoOFF

■

Rear Multi Operation Panel (if

equipped)

Touch “Climate” on the home screen to

display the air conditioning control

screen.(P.398)

The rear seat heaters and rear seat ventila-

tors can also be operated from the short-

cut screen.

The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be

used to operate the rear air conditioning

system if the function is disabled. (P.413)



Rear air conditioning control screen

Adjust the rear seat heater temper-

ature level

Each time the switch is selected, the tem-

perature level and level indicator (orange)

change as follows:

AUTOHiMidLoOFF

Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan

speed level and level indicator (blue)

change as follows:

AUTOHiMidLoOFF



Shortcut screen

Adjust the rear seat heater temper-

419

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

ature level

Each time the switch is selected, the tem-

perature level and level indicator (orange)

change as follows:

AUTOHiMidLoOFF

Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan

speed level and level indicator (blue)

change as follows:

AUTOHiMidLoOFF

■

Rear control panel (if equipped)

Increases the rear seat heater tem-

perature level

The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 lev-

els. (Low, Mid or Hi)

Enables/Disables the automatic

mode of the rear seat heaters

Decreases the rear seat heater

temperature level

If this switch is selected when the rear seat

heater temperature level is set to Lo, the

rear seat heater will turn off.

■

The heated steering wheel, seat heaters

and seat ventilators can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

Air conditioning system-linked control

mode

When the seat ventilator fan speed level is

Hi, the seat ventilator fan speed becomes

higher according to the fan speed of the air

conditioning system.

■

When the air conditioning system is

operating in front seat concentrated air-

flow mode (S-FLOW)

If a passenger is not detected in the front

passenger seat, the seat ventilator and seat

heater of the front passenger’s seat will be

turned off if on. (P.411)

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

WARNING

■

To prevent overheating and minor

burn injuries

Observe the following precautions when

using the seat heaters.

●

Do not cover the seat with a blanket or

cushion when using the seat heater.

●

Do not use seat heater more than nec-

essary.

420

5-4. Using the interior lights

5-4.Using the interior lights

Rear personal lights (P.421)

Inside door handle lights

Front personal lights (P.421)

Front interior lights (P.421)

Clock light

Footwell lights

Engine switch light

Door trim ornament lights

Door courtesy lights

Seat belt buckle lights

Outer foot lights

Rear interior light (P.421)

Shift lever lights

Interior lights list

Location of the interior lights

421

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior features

■

Turning the door position on

Press the door-linked interior light

switch

The lights are turned on and off according

to whether the doors are opened/closed.

When the door position is on, the indicator

illuminates.

■

Turning the lights on/off



Front

Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)

When a door is opened while the door

position is on, the lights turn on.



Rear

On/off

The rear interior lights turn on/off together

the front interior lights.

When a door is opened while the door

position is on, the lights turn on.

■

Using the Rear Multi Operation

Panel (if equipped)

1Display the home screen and then

touch “Shade/Lamp”. (P.398)

2To turn on/off the rear interior

lights, touch the respective button.

■

Turning the lights on/off



Front

Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)

When a door is opened while the door

position is on, the lights turn on.

Operating the interior lights

Operating the personal lights

422

5-4. Using the interior lights



Rear

On/dimmed/off

When a door is opened while the door

position is on, the lights turn on.

■

Using the Rear Multi Operation

Panel (if equipped)

1Display the home screen and then

touch “Shade/Lamp”. (P.398)

2To turn on/dimmed/off the rear per-

sonal lights, touch the respective

button.

■

Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off accord-

ing to the engine switch mode, the pres-

ence of the electronic key, whether the

doors are locked/unlocked, and whether

the doors are opened/closed.

■

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged

If the interior lights remain on when the

engine switch is turned off, the lights will go

off automatically after 20 minutes.

■

When front interior light or front per-

sonal lights do not respond as normal

●

When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to

the lens surface

●

When operated with a wet hand

●

When wearing gloves, etc.

■

The interior lights may turn on automati-

cally when

If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or

in the event of a strong rear impact, the inte-

rior lights will turn on automatically.

The interior lights will turn off automatically

after approximately 20 minutes.

The interior lights can be turned off manu-

ally. However, in order to help prevent fur-

ther collisions, it is recommended that they

be left on until safety can be ensured.

(The interior lights may not turn on auto-

matically depending on the force of the

impact and conditions of the collision.)

■

Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.546)

NOTICE

■

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than

necessary when the engine is not run-

ning.

423

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior features

NOTICE

■

Removing light lenses

Never remove the lens for the front inte-

rior light and front personal lights. Other-

wise, the lights will be damaged. If a lens

needs to be removed, contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

424

5-5. Using the storage features

5-5.Using the storag e features



Vehicles without power rear seat

Glove box (P.425)

Auxiliary boxes (P.428)

Cup holders (P.426)

Console box (P.427)

Coin holder (P.426)

List of storage features

Location of the storage features

425

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features



Vehicles with power rear seat

Glove box (P.425)

Auxiliary boxes (P.428)

Cup holders (P.426)

Console box (P.427)

Coin holder (P.426)

1Open (push button)

2Unlock with the mechanical key

3Lock with the mechanical key

WARNING

■

Items that should not be left in the

storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray

cans in the storage spaces, as this may

cause the following when cabin tempera-

ture becomes high:

●

Glasses may be deformed by heat or

cracked if they come into contact with

other stored items.

●

Lighters or spray cans may explode. If

they come into contact with other

stored items, the lighter may catch fire

or the spray can may release gas,

causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

426

5-5. Using the storage features

■

Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail

lights are on.

■

Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in

the glove box. (P.125)

■

Removing the partition

The partition inside the glove box can be

removed by pulling it.

Push the button.

■

Coin holder light

The Coin holder light turns on when the tail

lights are on.



Front

Press in and release the button.



Rear (vehicles without power rear

seat)

Pull the armrest down then push in the

cup holder trim to extend the cup hold-

ers.



Rear (vehicles with power rear seat)

Press in and release the button.

WARNING

■

Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event

of sudden braking or sudden swerving,

an accident may occur due to an occu-

pant being struck by the open glove box

or the items stored inside.

Coin holder

WARNING

■

Caution while driving

Keep the coin holder closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden braking.

Cup holders

427

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

■

When stowing the rear cup holders

(vehicles without power rear seat)

Stow the cup holder with the armrest down.

The cup holder cannot be stowed if the

armrest is not down.

Press a button to open the console box.

The console box can be opened from

either side.

■

Tray in the console box

The tray can be slid and removed.

■

Console box light

The console box light turns on when the tail

lights are on.

WARNING

■

Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or

beverage cans in the cup holders.

Inappropriate items must not be stored in

the cup holders even if the lid is closed.

Other items may be thrown out of the

holders in the event of an accident or

sudden braking and cause injury. If possi-

ble, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

■

When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the rear cup

holder (vehicles without power rear

seat)

Stow the cup holder before stowing the

armrest.

■

To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the lid of the power outlet in the

front cup holder when the power outlet is

not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that

enter the power outlet may cause a short

circuit.

Console box

WARNING

■

Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■

Tray

Do not insert items exceeding the height

of the tray. Doing so may prevent open-

ing and closing of the lid.

428

5-5. Using the storage features



Overhead (if equipped)

Press in the button.

This box is useful for temporarily storing

sunglasses and similar small items.



Rear seat (vehicles without power

rear seat)

Pull the armrest down then push the

knob and lift the lid to open it.



Rear seat (vehicles with power rear

seat)

Pull the armrest down then press the

button to open the lid.

Auxiliary boxes

WARNING

■

Caution while driving

Do not leave the auxiliary box open while

driving.

Items may fall out and cause death or

serious injury in case of an accident or

sudden stop.

■

Items unsuitable for storing (over-

head)

Do not store items heavier than 0.2 kg

(0.4 lb.).

Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to

open and the items inside may fall out,

resulting in an accident.

429

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

The cargo net is provided for securing

loose items on the floor or items inside

the trunk.

Raise the cargo hooks on the floor.

Hook the net on the cargo hooks.



Rear (if equipped)

Pull the strap upwards to lift the lug-

gage mat and remove it.



Side

Pull the strap upwards to lift the lug-

gage mat and remove it.

Trunk features

Cargo net

WARNING

■

When the cargo net is not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo

hooks on the floor to their stowed posi-

tions.

Shopping bag hooks

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the grocery

bag hooks

Do not hang any object heavier than 5 kg

(11 lb.) on the grocery bag hooks.

Luggage mats

430

5-5. Using the storage features



Front

1Pull the strap upwards and lift up

the luggage mat.

2Lift the luggage mat until it engages

with the hook.

To return the luggage mat to its original

position, push the hook and lower the

luggage mat.



Front

Auxiliary boxes are under the luggage

mats.



Rear (if equipped)

Auxiliary boxes are under the luggage

mats.

A warning reflector can be stowed.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the hook for

the front luggage mat

Do not hang a grocery bag or any other

object from the hook.

Auxiliary boxes

431

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

1Loosen the belt

2Tighten the belt

■

Using a belt to hold an object

1Loosen the belt

2Pass the belt through the clip

3Tighten the belt

Depending on the size and shape of an

object, such as the case of a warning

reflector, the object may not be able to be

secured with the belts or stowed in an aux-

iliary box.

■

Stowing the belt

1Fold the belt

2Secure the belt with the clip

To prevent damage to the warning reflec-

tor storage belt when it is not in use, stow

the belt.

First-aid kit storage belt

Warning reflector storage belt

432

5-6. Using the other interior features

5-6.Using the other interior features

The USB charging ports are used to

supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to

external devices.

The USB charging ports are for charg-

ing only. They are not designed for data

transfer or other purposes.

Depending on the external device, it

may not charge properly. Refer to the

manual included with the device

before using a USB charging port.

■

Using the USB charging ports

Open the auxiliary boxes lid.



Vehicles without power rear seat



Vehicles with power rear seat

■

The USB charging ports can be used

when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode.

■

Situations in which the USB charging

ports may not operate correctly

●

If a device which consumes more than 2.1

A at 5 V is connected

●

If a device designed to communicate with

a personal computer, such as a USB

memory device, is connected

●

If the connected external device is turned

off (depending on device)

●

If the temperature inside the vehicle is

high, such as after the vehicle has been

parked in the sun

■

About connected external devices

Depending on the connected external

device, charging may occasionally be sus-

pended and then start again. This is not a

malfunction.

Other interior features

USB charging ports

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the USB charg-

ing ports

●

Do not insert foreign objects into the

ports.

●

Do not spill water or other liquids into

the ports.

●

When the USB charging ports are not

in use, close the lids. If a foreign object

or liquid enters a port may cause a

short circuit.

●

Do not apply excessive force to or

impact the USB charging ports.

●

Do not disassemble or modify the USB

charging ports.

433

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features



Vehicle without power rear seat

Pull the armrest down for use.



Vehicle with power rear seat

Pull the lock release lever and fold the

rear seatback down.

An assist grip installed on the ceiling

can be used to support your body

while sitting on the seat.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to external

devices

●

Do not leave external devices in the

vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in

damage to an external device.

●

Do not push down on or apply unnec-

essary force to an external device or

the cable of an external device while it

is connected.

■

To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the USB charging ports for a

long period of time with the engine

stopped.

Armrest

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the arm-

rest.

Assist grips

WARNING

■

Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in

or out of the vehicle or rising from your

seat.

Doing so could damage the assist grip, or

could cause you to injure yourself by fall-

ing over.

434

5-6. Using the other interior features

To use the coat hook, push it on.

The GPS clock’s time is automatically

adjusted by utilizing GPS time infor-

mation. For details, refer to “NAVIGA-

TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

The power outlet can be used for 12 V

accessories that run on less than 10 A.



Front

Open the cup holder, and open the lid.



Console box

Open the console box and open the

lid.



Rear

Open the lid.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a

heavy load on the assist grip.

Coat hooks

WARNING

■

Items that must not be hung on the

hook

Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard

or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS

curtain shield airbags deploy, these items

may become projectiles that cause death

or serious injury.

Clock

Power outlets

435

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

■

The power outlet can be used when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode.

1To set the visor in the forward posi-

tion, flip it down.

2To set the visor in the side position,

flip down, unhook, and swing it to

the side.

3To use the side extender, place the

visor in the side position, then slide

it backward.



Front

Slide the cover to open.

The vanity light turns on.

NOTICE

■

To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the

power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■

To prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use an accessory that uses more

than 12 V 10 A.

■

To prevent incorrect operation of the

vehicle

When turning the engine switch off,

make sure to disconnect accessories

designed for charging, such as portable

chargers, power banks, etc. from the

power outlets.

If such an accessory is left connected, the

following may occur:

●

The doors cannot be locked using the

smart entry & start system or wireless

remote control.

●

The opening screen will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

●

The interior lights, instrument panel

lights, etc. will illuminate.

■

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged

Do not use the power outlet longer than

necessary when the engine is not run-

ning.

Sun visors

Vanity mirrors

436

5-6. Using the other interior features



Rear

Press the button to open.

The vanity light turns on.

■

To prevent battery discharge

If the vanity lights remain on when the

engine switch is turned off, the lights will go

off automatically after 20 minutes.

The rear door/rear quarter sunshades

can be extended and retracted using

the driver’s power window switch and

Rear Multi Operation Panel.

■

From driver’s seat

Operate the driver’s power window

switch.

Rear quarter sunshade (if

equipped)

Rear door sunshade

1Extend

2Retract

: If the driver’s power window switch is

operated when a rear door sun-

shade/rear quarter sunshade is

retracted or being retracted, the rear

window will open.

■

From rear seat

The rear seat power window switches

cannot be used to extend the rear door

sunshades/rear quarter sunshades.



Rear shade/lamp control screen

1Display the home screen and then

touch “Shade/Lamp”. (P.398)

2To fully extend/retract a rear

door/rear quarter sunshade, touch

the respective button.

NOTICE

■

When not in use

Keep the rear vanity mirror closed.

■

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged

Do not leave the vanity lights on for

extended periods while the engine is

stopped.

Rear door/rear quarter sun-

shades (if equipped)

437

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features



Shortcut screen

To fully extend/retract a rear door/rear

quarter sunshade, touch the respective

button.

■

Operating conditions

●

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

●

The rear side windows are fully closed.

■

Operation of rear door sunshades/rear

quarter sunshades when extended

If a rear door power window switch is oper-

ated when the rear door sunshade/rear

quarter sunshade is extended, the rear door

sunshade/rear quarter sunshade will retract

while the rear window is opening.

■

Operating the rear door/rear quarter

sunshades after turning the engine

switch off

The rear door/rear quarter sunshades can

be operated for a while even after the

engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY

mode or off.

However, they cannot be operated using

the driver’s power window switch after

either front door is opened.

■

Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between a rear

door sunshade and the window frame, the

rear door sunshade will stop and then

extend/retract slightly.

■

When reconnecting the battery

The rear door/rear quarter sunshades will

always be retracted the first time the button

is pressed.

The rear sunshade can be can be

extended and retracted using the rear

sunshade switch and Rear Multi Oper-

ation Panel.

■

From front seat

Extend/retract

WARNING

■

When the rear door/rear quarter sun-

shades are being extended or

retracted

Do not place fingers or other objects in

the shade mechanism or in the opening

as injury may result.

■

Jam protection function

Never use any part of your body to inten-

tionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

NOTICE

■

To ensure normal operation of the

sunshades

Observe the following precautions:

●

Do not place excessive load on the

motor or other components.

●

Do not place objects where they may

hinder opening and closing opera-

tions.

●

Do not attach items to the rear

door/rear quarter sunshades.

●

Keep the opening clean and clear of

obstructions.

●

Do not operate the rear door/rear

quarter sunshades continuously for

long periods of time.

Rear sunshade

438

5-6. Using the other interior features

■

From rear seat



Vehicles without power rear seat

Extend/retract



Vehicles with power rear seat (Rear

shade/lamp control screen)

1Display the home screen and then

touch “Shade/Lamp”. (P.398)

2To fully extend/retract a rear door

sunshade, touch the respective but-

ton.



Vehicles with power rear seat

(shortcut screen)

To fully extend/retract a rear door sun-

shade, touch the respective button.

■

The rear sunshade can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

■

Operating the rear sunshade after turn-

ing the engine switch off

The rear sunshade can be operated for a

while even after the engine switch is

switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned

off.

■

Reverse operation feature

To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear

sunshade automatically lowers when the

shift position is shifted to R.

However, the rear sunshade is raised again

if any of the following occurs:

●

The switch is pressed again.

●

The shift position is shifted to P.

●

The shift position is shifted out of P and R,

and the vehicle reaches a speed of 15

km/h (9 mph).

If the engine is turned off when the rear sun-

shade has been lowered due to the reverse

operation feature, it will not be raised even

when the engine is turned on again and the

vehicle reaches a speed of 15 km/h (9

mph). To raise the sunshade again, press the

switch.

439

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

WARNING

■

When the rear sunshade is being

extended or retracted

Do not place fingers or other objects in

the shade mechanism or in the opening

as injury may result.

NOTICE

■

To ensure normal operation of the

sunshade

Observe the following precautions:

●

Do not place excessive load on the

motor or other components.

●

Do not place objects where they may

hinder opening and closing opera-

tions.

●

Do not attach items to the rear sun-

shade.

●

Keep the opening clean and clear of

obstructions.

●

Do not operate the rear sunshade con-

tinuously for long periods of time.

440

5-6. Using the other interior features

441

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehi-

cle exterior................................ 442

Cleaning and protecting the vehi-

cle interior................................. 445

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

........................................................448

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

........................................................450

Hood ............................................... 451

Positioning a floor jack............ 452

Engine compartment............... 453

Battery ........................................... 463

Tires ................................................ 465

Replacing the tire......................482

Tire inflation pressure..............486

Wheels ..........................................487

Air conditioning filter...............488

Electronic key battery.............490

Checking and replacing fuses

........................................................ 492

Light bulbs....................................495

442

6-1. Maintenance and care

6-1.Maintenance and care

Working from top to bottom, liber-

ally apply water to the vehicle body,

wheel wells and underside of the

vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a

sponge or soft cloth, such as a

chamois.

For hard-to-remove marks, use car

wash soap and rinse thoroughly with

water.

Wipe away any water.

Wax the vehicle when the water-

proof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface,

apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■

Self-restoring coat

The vehicle body has a self-restoring coat-

ing that is resistant to small surface

scratches caused in a car wash etc.

●

The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from

when the vehicle is delivered from the

plant.

●

The restoration time differs depending on

the depth of the scratch and outside tem-

perature.

The restoration time may become

shorter when the coating is warmed by

applying warm water.

●

Deep scratches caused by keys, coins,

etc. cannot be restored.

●

Do not use wax that contains abrasives.

■

Automatic car washes

●

Before washing the vehicle:

• Fold the mirrors

• Turn off the power trunk lid

Start washing from the front of the vehicle.

Extend the mirrors before driving.

●

Brushes used in automatic car washes

may scratch the vehicle surface, parts

(wheel, etc.) and harm your vehicle’s

paint.

●

When it is necessary to set the engine

switch to ACCESSORY mode with the

shift position held in N, refer to P.225.

■

High pressure car washes

As water may enter the cabin, do not bring

the nozzle tip near the gaps around the

doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray

these areas continuously.

■

When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the

electronic key is within the effective range,

the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In

that case, follow the following correction

procedures to wash the vehicle:

●

Place the key in a position 2 m (6 ft.) or

more separate from the vehicle while the

vehicle is being washed. (Take care to

ensure that the key is not stolen.)

●

Set the electronic key to battery-saving

mode to disable the smart entry & start

system.(P.127)

■

Wheels and wheel ornaments

●

Remove any dirt immediately by using a

neutral detergent.

●

Wash detergent off with water immedi-

ately after use.

●

To protect the paint from damage, make

sure to observe the following precau-

tions.

•Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive

detergent

• Do not use hard brushes

• Do not use detergent on the wheels when

they are hot, such as after driving or park-

ing in hot weather

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle exterior

Perform cleaning in a manner

appropriate to each component

and its material.

Cleaning instructions

443

6-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

■

Brake caliper coating (F SPORT mod-

els)

●

When using detergent, use neutral deter-

gent. Do not use hard brushes or abra-

sive cleaners, as they will damage the

coating.

●

Do not use detergent on the brake cali-

pers when they are hot.

●

Wash detergent off immediately after

use.

■

Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■

Front side windows water-repellent

coating (if equipped)

●

The following precautions can extend the

effectiveness of the water-repellent coat-

ing.

• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side

windows regularly.

• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate

on the windows for a long period.

Clean the windows with a soft, damp

cloth as soon as possible.

• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that

contain abrasives when cleaning the win-

dows.

• Do not use any metallic objects to

remove condensation build up.

●

When the water-repellent performance

has become insufficient, the coating can

be repaired. Contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

Plated portions

If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as

follows:

●

Use a soft cloth dampened with an

approximately 5% solution of neutral

detergent and water to clean the dirt off.

●

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to

remove any remaining moisture.

●

To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet

wipes or a similar product.

WARNING

■

When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the

engine compartment. Doing so may

cause the electrical components, etc. to

catch fire.

■

When cleaning the windshield

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-

ers may operate unexpectedly in the fol-

lowing situations, and may result in hands

being caught or other serious injuries

and cause damage to the wiper blades.

Off

AUTO

●

When the upper part of the windshield

where the raindrop sensor is located is

touched by hand

●

When a wet rag or similar is held close

to the raindrop sensor

●

If something bumps against the wind-

shield

●

If you directly touch the raindrop sen-

sor body or if something bumps into

the raindrop sensor

444

6-1. Maintenance and care

WARNING

■

Precautions regarding the exhaust

pipes and rear bumper diffusers

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes

and rear bumper diffusers to become

quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not

to touch the pipes and diffusers until they

have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot

exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers

can cause burns.

■

Precaution regarding the front

bumper (vehicles with Lexus Safety

System + A)

If the paint of the front bumper is chipped

or scratched, the Lexus Safety System +

A may not function correctly. If this

occurs, consult any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer.

■

Precaution regarding the rear

bumper

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped

or scratched, the following systems may

not function correctly. If this occurs, con-

sult any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

Lexus Safety System + A (if equipped)

●

BSM (if equipped)

●

Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard

Lights (if equipped)

●

RCTA (if equipped)

●

PKSB (if equipped)

NOTICE

■

To prevent paint deterioration and

corrosion on the body and compo-

nents (aluminum wheels, etc.)

●

Wash the vehicle immediately in the

following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the

paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings or

bird droppings are present on the

paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated

with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron

powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled

with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline

are spilled on the paint surface

●

If the paint is chipped or scratched,

have it repaired immediately.

●

To prevent the wheels from corroding,

remove any dirt and store in a place

with low humidity when storing the

wheels.

■

Cleaning the exterior lights

●

Wash carefully. Do not use organic

substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the

lights.

●

Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the

lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■

When using an automatic car wash

Set the wiper switch to the off position.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-

ers may operate and the wiper blades

may be damaged.

445

6-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

Remove dirt and dust using a vac-

uum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces

with a cloth dampened with luke-

warm water.

If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off

with a soft cloth dampened with

neutral detergent diluted to approx-

imately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from

the cloth and thoroughly wipe off

remaining traces of detergent and

water.

■

Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type

cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush

to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping cir-

cles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces

and let them dry. Excellent results are

obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as

possible.

■

Handling the seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water

using a cloth or sponge. Also check the

belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying

or cuts.

■

When cleaning the carpeted portions of

the glove box, console box, etc.

If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a

possibility that the surface of the carpet

could be damaged.

NOTICE

■

When using a high pressure car wash

●

When washing the vehicle, do not

spray the camera or its surrounding

area directly with a high pressure

washer. Shock applied from high pres-

sure water may cause the device to not

operate normally.

●

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or resin manufactured

cover), connectors or the following

parts. The parts may be damaged if

they come into contact with high-pres-

sure water.

• Traction related parts

•Steering parts

•Suspension parts

• Brake parts

●

Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 30

cm (11.9 in.) away from the vehicle

body. Otherwise resin section, such as

moldings and bumpers, may be

deformed and damaged.

Also, do not continuously hold the nozzle

in the same place.

●

Do not spray the lower part of the

windshield continuously.

If water enters the air conditioning sys-

tem intake located near the lower part of

the windshield, the air conditioning sys-

tem may not operate correctly.

●

Do not wash the underside of the vehi-

cle using a high pressure car washer.

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle interior

Perform cleaning in a manner

appropriate to each component

and its material.

Protecting the vehicle interior

446

6-1. Maintenance and care

WARNING

■

Water in the vehicle

●

Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehi-

cle.

Doing so may cause electrical compo-

nents, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

●

Do not get any of the SRS components

or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(P.30)

An electrical malfunction may cause

the airbags to deploy or not function

properly, resulting in death or serious

injury.

■

Cleaning the interior (especially

instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner.

The instrument panel may reflect off the

windshield, obstructing the driver’s view

and leading to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■

Cleaning detergents

●

Do not use the following types of

detergent, as they may discolor the

vehicle interior or cause streaks or

damage to painted surfaces:

• Areas other than the seats and steer-

ing wheel: Organic substances such as

benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic

solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions,

such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

• Steering wheel: Organic substances,

such as thinner, and cleaner that con-

tains alcohol

●

Do not use polish wax or polish

cleaner. The instrument panel’s or

other interior part’s painted surface

may be damaged.

■

Preventing damage to leather sur-

faces

Observe the following precautions to

avoid damage to and deterioration of

leather surfaces:

●

Remove any dust or dirt from leather

surfaces immediately.

●

Do not expose the vehicle to direct

sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, espe-

cially during summer.

●

Do not place items made of vinyl, plas-

tic, or containing wax on the uphol-

stery, as they may stick to the leather

surface if the vehicle interior heats up

significantly.

■

Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system

may be damaged if water comes into

contact with electrical components such

as the audio system above or under the

floor of the vehicle. Water may also

cause the body to rust.

■

When cleaning the inside of the wind-

shield (vehicles with Lexus Safety

System + A or Lexus Safety System +)

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the

lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

(P.250, 262)

■

Cleaning the inside of the rear win-

dow

●

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the

rear window, as this may cause dam-

age to the rear window defogger

heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth

dampened with lukewarm water to

gently wipe the window clean. Wipe

the window in strokes running parallel

to the heater wires or antenna.

●

Be careful not to scratch or damage

the heater wires or antenna.

447

6-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

Remove dirt using a water-damp-

ened soft cloth or synthetic chamois.

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft

cloth to remove any remaining

moisture.

■

Cleaning the areas with satin-finish

metal accents

The metal areas use a layer of real metal for

the surface. It is necessary to clean them

regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for

long periods of time, they may be difficult to

clean.

Remove dirt and dust using a vac-

uum cleaner.

Wipe off any excess dirt and dust

with a soft cloth dampened with

diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approxi-

mately 5% neutral wool detergent.

Wring out any excess water from

the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all

remaining traces of detergent.

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft

cloth to remove any remaining

moisture. Allow the leather to dry in

a shaded and ventilated area.

■

Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of

the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain

the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

Remove dirt and dust using a vac-

uum cleaner.

Wipe it off with a soft cloth damp-

ened with neutral detergent diluted

to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from

the cloth and thoroughly wipe off

remaining traces of detergent and

water.

To remove dust from the fabric, use

a vacuum cleaner or adhesive tape.

Use a cloth dampened with water to

gently wipe the fabric clean.

Do not use detergents to clean the fabric.

Cleaning the areas with satin-fin-

ish metal accents

Cleaning the leather areas

Cleaning the synthetic leather

areas

Cleaning fabric portions of the

instrument panel

448

6-2. Maintenance

6-2.Maintenance

■

Where to go for maintenance service?

In order to maintain your vehicle in the best

possible condition, Lexus recommends that

maintenance service operations as well as

other inspections and repairs be carried out

by authorized Lexus retailers or Lexus

authorized repairers, or any reliable repair-

ers. For repairs and services covered by

your warranty, please visit an authorized

Lexus retailer or repairer, who will use gen-

uine Lexus parts in repairing any difficulties

you may encounter. There can also be

advantages in utilizing authorized Lexus

retailers or repairers for non-warranty

repairs and services, as members of the

Lexus network will be able to expertly assist

you with any difficulties you may encounter.

Your Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer will per-

form all of the scheduled maintenance on

your vehicle reliably and economically due

to their experience with Lexus vehicles.

Scheduled maintenance should be

performed at specified intervals

according to the maintenance sched-

ule.

For full details of your maintenance sched-

ule, refer to the “Lexus Service Booklet” or

“Lexus Warranty Booklet”.

What about do-it-yourself mainte-

nance?

Many maintenance items are easy to do

yourself if you have a little mechanical abil-

ity and a few basic automotive tools.

Note, however, that some maintenance

tasks require special tools and skills. These

are best performed by qualified techni-

cians. Even if you’re an experienced

do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend

that repairs and maintenance be con-

ducted by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer. Any authorized Lexus retailer or

repairer will keep a record of maintenance,

which could be useful should you ever

require Warranty Service. Should you

choose to select a qualified and equipped

professional other than an authorized

Lexus repairer to service or maintain your

vehicle, we recommend that you request

that a record of maintenance be kept.

■

Does your vehicle need repairs?

Be on the alert for changes in performance

and sounds, and visual tip-offs that indicate

service is needed. Some important clues

are:

●

Engine missing, stumbling or pinging

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driv-

ing, day-to-day care and regular

maintenance are essential. Lexus

recommends the maintenance

below.

WARNING

■

If your vehicle is not properly main-

tained

Improper maintenance could result in

serious damage to the vehicle and possi-

ble death or serious injury.

■

Handling of the battery

Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds which are known to cause brain

damage. Wash your hands after han-

dling. (P.463)

Scheduled maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance

449

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

●

Appreciable loss of power

●

Strange engine noises

●

A fluid leak under the vehicle (However,

water dripping from the air conditioning

system after use is normal.)

●

Change in exhaust sound (This may indi-

cate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak.

Drive with the windows open and have

the exhaust system checked immedi-

ately.)

●

Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal

when cornering, uneven tire wear

●

Vehicle pulls to one side when driven

straight on a level road

●

Strange noises related to suspension

movement

●

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feel-

ing brake pedal, pedal almost touches the

floor, vehicle pulls to one side when brak-

ing

●

Engine coolant temperature continually

higher than normal (P.86, 89)

If you notice any of these clues, take your

vehicle to any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer as soon as possible.

Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.

450

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6-3.Do-it-yourself mainten ance

Do-it-yourself service pre-

cautions

If you perform maintenance by

yourself, be sure to follow the cor-

rect procedure as given in these

sections.

Maintenance

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition

(P.463)

•Grease

• Conventional

wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

Engine/inter-

cooler coolant

level (P.460)

• “Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant” or a

similar high quality

ethylene gly-

col-based non-sili-

cate, non-amine,

non-nitrite and

non-borate coolant

with long-life hybrid

organic acid tech-

nology

“Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant” is

pre-mixed with 50%

coolant and 50%

deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for

adding coolant)

Engine oil level

(P.458)

•“Toyota Genuine

Motor Oil” or equiv-

alent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for

adding engine oil)

Fuses (P.492)

•Fuse with same

amperage rating as

original

Radiator, con-

denser, inter-

cooler radiator

and intercooler

sub radiator

(P.461)



Tire inflation pres-

sure (P.486)

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air

source

Washer fluid

(P.462)

• Water or washer

fluid containing anti-

freeze (for winter

use)

•Funnel (used only for

adding water or

washer fluid)

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many

mechanisms and fluids that may move

suddenly, become hot, or become elec-

trically energized. To avoid death or seri-

ous injury, observe the following

precautions.

■

When working on the engine com-

partment

●

Keep hands, clothing and tools away

from the moving fan and engine drive

belt.

●

Be careful not to touch the engine,

radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right

after driving as they may be hot. Oil

and other fluids may also be hot.

●

Do not leave anything that may burn

easily, such as paper and rags, in the

engine compartment.

Items Parts and tools

451

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

1Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and

lift the hood.

WARNING

●

Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose

an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are

flammable.

●

Take care because brake fluid can

harm your hands or eyes and damage

painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your

hands or in your eyes, flush the

affected area with clean water imme-

diately.

If you still experience discomfort, con-

sult a doctor.

■

When working near the electric cool-

ing fan or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off.

With the engine switch in IGNITION

ON mode, the electric cooling fan may

automatically start to run if the air condi-

tioning is on and/or the coolant tempera-

ture is high. (



P.461)

■

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or

falling material, fluid spray, etc. from get-

ting in your eyes.

NOTICE

■

If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter

removed may cause excessive engine

wear due to dirt in the air.

■

If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go

down slightly as the brake pads wear or

when the fluid level in the accumulator is

high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it

may indicate a serious problem.

Hood

Opening the hood

WARNING

■

Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and

locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may

open while the vehicle is in motion and

cause an accident, which may result in

death or serious injury.

452

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■

Front



2WD models



AWD models

■

Rear

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the

instructions in the manual provided

with the jack and perform the oper-

ation safely.

When raising your vehicle with a

floor jack, position the jack cor-

rectly. Improper placement may

damage your vehicle or cause

injury.

Location of the jack point

453

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care



LS500

Fuse boxes (P.492)

Engine oil level dipstick (P.458)

Engine oil filler cap (P.459)

Engine coolant reservoir (P.460)

Intercooler coolant reservoir (P.460)

Washer fluid tank (P.462)

Radiator (P.461)

Intercooler radiator (P.461)

Electric cooling fan

Condenser (P.461)

Intercooler sub radiator (P.461)

Engine compartment

Components

454

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance



LS350

Fuse boxes (P.492)

Engine oil level dipstick (P.458)

Engine coolant reservoir (P.460)

Engine oil filler cap (P.459)

Washer fluid tank (P.462)

Radiator (P.461)

Electric cooling fan

Condenser (P.461)

■

Battery

P.463

455

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■

Removing the engine compartment cover



Outside (LS500)



Outside (LS350)



Front (LS500)

Engine compartment cover

456

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance



Front (LS350)

■

Installing the clips

1Push up center portion

2Insert

3Press

■

Removing the engine cover



LS500

Lift the front of the engine cover

straight up and then pull it forward.



LS350

1Push the tab in and open the engine

compartment cover.

NOTICE

■

Checking the engine compartment

cover after installation

Make sure that the cover is securely

installed in its original position.

Engine cover

457

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

2Remove the engine cover.

■

Installing the engine cover



LS500

Engage the claws of the engine cover

to install it.



LS350

1Install the engine cover.

2Install the engine compartment

cover.

■

Removing the service cover

1Pull up the passenger side end of

the rubber strip to disengage it

from the vehicle body.

2Remove the service cover.

Push the tabs and lift away the service

cover.

■

Installing the service cover

1Install the service cover.

Make sure to engage the claws on the

windshield side of the service cover when

NOTICE

■

Checking the engine cover after

installation

Make sure that the cover is securely

installed in its original position.

Service cover

458

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

installing the service cover.

2Engage the rubber strip to the vehi-

cle body.

With the engine at operating tempera-

ture and turned off, check the oil level

on the dipstick.

■

Checking the engine oil

1Park the vehicle on level ground.

After warming up the engine and

turning it off, wait more than 5 min-

utes for the oil to drain back into the

bottom of the engine.

2Holding a rag under the end, pull

the dipstick out.



LS500



LS350

3Wipe the dipstick clean.

4Reinsert the dipstick fully.

5Holding a rag under the end, pull

the dipstick out and check the oil

level.

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ

NOTICE

■

Checking the service cover after

installation

Make sure that the cover is securely

installed in its original position.

Checking and adding the engine

oil

459

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

depending on the type of vehicle or

engine.

6Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it

fully.

■

Checking the oil type and prepar-

ing the item needed

Make sure to check the oil type and

prepare the items needed before add-

ing oil.

Engine oil selection

P.539

Oil quantity (Low  Full)

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)

Item

Clean funnel

■

Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low

level mark, add engine oil of the same

type as that already in the engine.



LS500



LS350

1Remove the oil filler cap by turning

it counterclockwise.

2Add engine oil slowly, checking the

dipstick.

3Install the oil filler cap by turning it

clockwise.

■

Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be con-

sumed while driving. In the following situa-

tions, oil consumption may increase, and

engine oil may need to be refilled in

between oil maintenance intervals.

●

When the engine is new, for example

directly after purchasing the vehicle or

after replacing the engine

●

If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate

viscosity is used

●

When driving at high engine speeds or

with a heavy load, or when driving while

accelerating or decelerating frequently

●

When leaving the engine idling for a long

time, or when driving frequently through

heavy traffic

■

After changing the engine oil

The engine oil maintenance data should be

reset. Perform the following procedures:

1Press or of the meter control

switch to select .

2Press or to select “Vehicle Set-

tings” and then press .

460

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

3Press or to select “Oil Mainte-

nance” and then press .

4Press or to select “Yes” and

then press .

A message will be displayed on the

multi-information display when the reset

procedure has been completed.

■

Engine coolant reservoir

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is

between the “F” and “L” lines on the

reservoir when the engine is cold.



LS500



LS350

Reservoir cap

“F” line

“L” line

If the level is on or below the “L” line, add

coolant up to the “F” line. (P.530)

■

Intercooler coolant reservoir

(LS500)

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is

between the “F” and “L” lines on the

WARNING

■

Used engine oil

●

Used engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as inflamma-

tion and skin cancer, so care should be

taken to avoid prolonged and

repeated contact. To remove used

engine oil from your skin, wash thor-

oughly with soap and water.

●

Dispose of used oil and filters only in a

safe and acceptable manner. Do not

dispose of used oil and filters in house-

hold trash, in sewers or onto the

ground.

Call any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer, service station or auto

parts store for information concerning

recycling or disposal.

●

Do not leave used engine oil within the

reach of children.

NOTICE

■

To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■

When replacing the engine oil

●

Be careful not to spill engine oil on the

vehicle components.

●

Avoid overfilling, or the engine could

be damaged.

●

Check the oil level on the dipstick

every time you refill the vehicle.

●

Be sure the engine oil filler cap is prop-

erly tightened.

Checking the coolant

461

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“F” line

“L” line

If the level is on or below the “L” line, add

coolant up to the “F” line. (P.530)

■

Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or a similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,

and non-borate coolant with long-life

hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-

ture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized

water. (Minimum temperature: -35°C

[-31°F])

For more details about coolant, contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

If the coolant level drops within a short

time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine

coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and

water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer, test the

cap and check for leaks in the cooling sys-

tem.

Check the radiator, condenser, inter-

cooler radiator and intercooler sub

radiator and clear away any foreign

objects. If either of the above parts is

extremely dirty or you are not sure of

their condition, have your vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

WARNING

■

When the engine is hot

LS500: Do not remove the engine cool-

ant reservoir cap, the intercooler coolant

reservoir cap and the coolant inlet cap.

(P.533)

LS350: Do not remove the engine cool-

ant reservoir cap and the coolant inlet

cap. (P.533)

The cooling system may be under pres-

sure and may spray hot coolant if the cap

is removed, causing serious injuries, such

as burns.

NOTICE

■

When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor

straight antifreeze. The correct mixture

of water and antifreeze must be used to

provide proper lubrication, corrosion

protection and cooling. Be sure to read

the antifreeze or coolant label.

■

If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to pre-

vent it from damaging parts or paint.

Checking the radiator, con-

denser, intercooler radiator (if

equipped) and intercooler sub

radiator (if equipped)

462

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

If any washer does not work or the

warning message appears on the

multi-information display, the washer

tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

WARNING

■

When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator, condenser,

intercooler radiator or intercooler sub

radiator as they may be hot and cause

serious injuries, such as burns.

Adding the washer fluid

WARNING

■

When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine

is hot or running as washer fluid contains

alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on

the engine, etc.

NOTICE

■

Do not use any fluid other than

washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine anti-

freeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the

vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as

damaging the pump leading to problems

of the washer fluid not spraying.

■

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as neces-

sary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed

on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

463

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

The battery is located in the trunk

under the luggage mat.

Removing the luggage mat: P.429

■

Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces

hydrogen gas which is flammable and

explosive. Therefore, observe the following

precautions before recharging:

●

If recharging with the battery installed on

the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the

ground cable.

●

Make sure the charger is off when con-

necting and disconnecting the charger

cables to the battery.

■

After recharging/reconnecting the bat-

tery

●

Unlocking the doors using the smart

entry & start system may not be possible

immediately after reconnecting the bat-

tery. If this happens, use the wireless

remote control or the mechanical key to

lock/unlock the doors.

●

Start the engine with the engine switch in

ACCESSORY mode. The engine may

not start with the engine switch turned off.

However, the engine will operate nor-

mally from the second attempt.

●

The engine switch mode is recorded by

the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected,

the vehicle will return the engine switch

mode to the status it was in before the

battery was disconnected. Make sure to

turn off the engine switch before discon-

necting the battery. Take extra care when

connecting the battery if the engine

switch mode prior to discharge is

unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple

attempts, contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

Battery

Location

WARNING

■

Chemicals in the battery

The battery contains poisonous and cor-

rosive sulfuric acid and may produce

hydrogen gas which is flammable and

explosive. To reduce the risk of death or

serious injury, take the following precau-

tions while working on or near the bat-

tery:

●

Do not cause sparks by touching the

battery terminals with tools.

●

Do not smoke or light a match near the

battery.

●

Avoid contact with eyes, skin and

clothes.

●

Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

●

Wear protective safety glasses when

working near the battery.

●

Keep children away from the battery.

■

When there is insufficient battery

fluid

Do not use if there is insufficient fluid in

the battery. There is a possible danger

that the battery may explode.

■

Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open

area. Do not charge the battery in a

garage or closed room where there is

insufficient ventilation.

464

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Make sure that the battery terminals

are not corroded and that there are no

loose connections, cracks, or loose

clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

Check the battery condition by indica-

tor color.



Type A

Blue: Good condition

Red: Charging is necessary.

Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Clear: Replacement is necessary.

Have the battery checked by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

WARNING

■

Emergency measures regarding

electrolyte

●

If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get immediate

medical attention. If possible, continue

to apply water with a sponge or cloth

while traveling to the nearest medical

facility.

●

If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If

you feel pain or burning, get medical

attention immediately.

●

If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your

skin. Immediately take off the clothing

and follow the procedure above if nec-

essary.

●

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk.

Get emergency medical attention

immediately.

■

When replacing the battery

Use a battery designed for this vehicle.

Failure to do so may cause gas (hydro-

gen) to enter the passenger compart-

ment, causing a fire or explosion.

For replacement of the battery, contact

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

NOTICE

■

When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the

engine is running. Also, be sure all acces-

sories are turned off.

Exterior

Checking the battery condition

465

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

repairer.



Type B

Blue: Good condition

White: Charging is necessary.

Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Red: Not working properly.

Have the battery checked by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Check if the treadwear indicators are

showing on the tires. Also check the

tires for uneven wear, such as excessive

wear on one side of the tread.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is

shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, etc.,

molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indica-

tors are showing on a tire.

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accord-

ance with maintenance schedules

and treadwear.

Checking tires

466

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■

When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

●

The treadwear indicators are showing on

a tire.

●

You have tire damage such as cuts, splits,

cracks deep enough to expose the fabric,

and bulges indicating internal damage

●

A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be

properly repaired due to the size or loca-

tion of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked

by a qualified technician even if it has sel-

dom or never been used or damage is not

obvious.

■

If the tread on snow tires wears down

below 4 mm (0.16 in.)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is

lost.

Rotate the tires in the order shown.



Vehicles with front and rear tires of

the same size



Vehicles with front and rear tires of

differing sizes

WARNING

■

When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to

prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to

parts of the drive train as well as danger-

ous handling characteristics, which may

lead to an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

●

Do not mix tires of different makes,

models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably

different treadwear.

●

Do not use tire sizes other than those

recommended by Lexus.

●

Do not mix differently constructed

tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply

tires).

●

Do not mix summer, all season and

snow tires.

●

Do not use tires that have been used

on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know

how they were used previously.

NOTICE

■

Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on

roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire

inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-

ing ability of the tires. In addition, driving

on rough roads may cause damage to

the tires themselves, as well as the vehi-

cle’s wheels and body.

Tire rotation

467

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

To equalize tire wear and help extend tire

life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is

carried out approximately every 10000

km (6000 miles) for 2WD models or

5000 km (3000 miles) for AWD models.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure

warning system after tire rotation.



For XXX/XXRXX size tires

When run-flat tires are installed, the

vehicle can be driven for a maximum of

80 km (50 miles) at a speed below 80

km/h (50 mph) after any tire goes flat.

(However, the vehicle speed may not

increase to near 80 km/h [50 mph]

depending on weather or driving con-

ditions.)

Make sure to replace the flat tire before the

vehicle has been driven for near 80 km

(50 miles). Also, do not use a repaired tire.



For XXX/XXRFXX size tires

When run-flat tires are installed, the

vehicle can be driven for a maximum of

160 km (100 miles) at a speed below

80 km/h (50 mph) after any tire goes

flat. (However, the vehicle speed may

not increase to near 80 km/h [50

mph] depending on weather or driving

conditions.)

Make sure to replace the flat tire before the

vehicle has been driven for near 160 km

(100 miles). Also, do not use a repaired

tire.

A run-flat tire has a or

mark on the side wall.

■

Run-flat tires

●

The run-flat tires are for only this vehicle.

Do not use the tires on other vehicles.

●

Do not mix run-flat tires and normal tires.

●

If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used, it

may be impossible to sufficiently demon-

strate the performance of run-flat tires.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire

pressure warning system that uses tire

pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters to detect low tire inflation pressure

before serious problems arise.

The tire pressure detected by the

tire pressure warning system can be

displayed on the multi-information

display. (P.93)

If the tire pressure drops below a

predetermined level, the driver is

warned by a screen display and a

warning light. (P.511)

Run-flat tires Tire pressure warning system

468

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■

Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not

replace routine tire inflation pressure

checks. Make sure to check tire inflation

pressure as part of your routine of daily

vehicle checks.

■

Tire inflation pressure

●

It may take a few minutes to display the

tire inflation pressure after the engine

switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

It may also take a few minutes to display

the tire inflation pressure after inflation

pressure has been adjusted.

●

Tire inflation pressure changes with tem-

perature. The displayed values may also

be different from the values measured

using a tire pressure gauge.

■

Situations in which the tire pressure

warning system may not operate prop-

erly

●

In the following cases, the tire pressure

warning system may not operate prop-

erly.

• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.

• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that

is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.

• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that

is not of the specified size.

• If tire chains, etc. are installed.

• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is

equipped.

• If a window tint that affects the radio wave

signals is installed.

• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehi-

cle, particularly around the wheels or

wheel housings.

• If the tire inflation pressure is much higher

than the specified level.

• If wheels not equipped with tire pressure

warning valves and transmitter are used.

• If the ID code on the tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters is not regis-

tered in the tire pressure warning

computer.

●

Performance may be affected in the fol-

lowing situations.

• When driving near a TV tower, electric

power plant, gas station, radio station,

large display, airport or other facility that

generates strong radio waves or electri-

cal noise

• When carrying a portable radio, cellular

phone, cordless phone or other wireless

communication device

If tire position information is not correctly

displayed due to the radio wave conditions,

the display may be corrected by changing

the location of the vehicle as the radio wave

conditions may change.

●

When the vehicle is stopped, the time

taken for the warning to start or turn off

may be longer.

●

When the inflation pressure of a tire

drops rapidly, for example when a tire has

burst, the warning may not operate.

■

Warning performance of the tire pres-

sure warning system

The warning of the tire pressure warning

system will change in accordance with driv-

ing conditions. For this reason, the system

may give a warning even if the tire pressure

does not reach a low enough level, or if the

pressure is higher than the pressure that

was adjusted to when the system was initial-

ized.

469

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■

Tire pressure warning system certification

470

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

471

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

472

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

473

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

474

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

475

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

476

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

477

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

When replacing the tires or wheels, the

tire pressure warning valve and trans-

mitters must be installed to the wheels

which will be installed to the vehicle.

When new tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters are installed,

new ID codes must be registered in the

tire pressure warning computer and

the tire pressure warning system must

be initialized. (P.480)

■

Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitters are not registered,

the tire pressure warning system will not

work properly. In this case, after driving for

about 10 minutes, the tire pressure warning

light will blink for approximately 1 minute

and then illuminate to indicate a system

malfunction.

Installing tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters

478

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■

The tire pressure warning system

must be initialized in the following

circumstances:

When the tire inflation pressure is

changed such as when changing

traveling speed or load weight.

When the tire inflation pressure is

changed such as when the tire size

is changed.

When rotating the tires.

After performing the transmitter ID

code registration procedure.

(P.480)

When the tire pressure warning system

is initialized, the current tire inflation

pressure is set as the benchmark pres-

sure.

■

How to initialize the tire pressure

warning system

1Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn

the engine switch off and wait 20

minutes or more.

The initialization procedure cannot be

started while the vehicle is moving.

2Adjust the tire inflation pressure to

the specified cold tire inflation pres-

sure level.

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the

specified cold tire inflation pressure level.

The tire pressure warning system will oper-

ate based on this pressure level.

3Start the engine.

4Press or of the meter con-

trol switch to select .

5Press or to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press .

6Press or to select “TPWS”

and then press .

7Press or to select “Set

Pressure”. Then press and hold

until the tire pressure warning light

blinks 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the

multi-information display.

“---” will be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display for the inflation pressure of

each tire while initialization is being per-

NOTICE

■

Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,

tire pressure warning valves, trans-

mitters and tire valve caps

●

When removing or fitting the wheels,

tires or the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters, contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer as the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters may be dam-

aged if not handled correctly.

●

Make sure to install the tire valve caps.

If the tire valve caps are not installed,

water may enter the valves of the tire

pressure warning valve and transmit-

ters and the valves may become stuck.

●

When replacing tire valve caps, do not

use tire valve caps other than those

specified. The cap may become stuck.

Initializing the tire pressure

warning system

479

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

formed.

8Drive straight (with occasional left

and right turns) at approximately

40 km/h (25 mph) or more for

approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

Initialization is complete when the position

of each tire is determined and the inflation

pressure of each tire is displayed on the

multi-information display.

Initialization may take longer than normal

to complete if the vehicle speed cannot be

maintained at approximately 40 km/h (25

mph) or more. If initialization cannot be

completed after driving for 1 hour or more,

park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the

engine switch off and wait 20 minutes or

more before performing the driving proce-

dure again. (P.479)

■

Initialization procedure

●

Make sure to perform the initialization

procedure after adjusting the tire inflation

pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before

performing the initialization procedure or

adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

●

If the engine switch is turned off during

initialization, it is not necessary to restart

the initialization procedure from the

beginning as it will begin automatically

when the engine switch is turned back to

IGNITION ON mode.

●

If initialization has accidentally been

started when it is not necessary, adjust

the tire inflation pressure to the specified

level when the tires are cold and then

perform the initialization procedure

again.

●

While the position of each tire is being

determined and the inflation pressures

are not being displayed on the

multi-information display, if the inflation

pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure

warning light will come on.

■

If the tire pressure warning system is not

initialized properly

●

In the following situations, initialization

may take longer than usual to be com-

pleted or may not be possible. (Usually,

the vehicle will need to be driven for

approximately 10 to 30 minutes to com-

plete initialization.) If initialization is not

complete after driving approximately 30

minutes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved

road, it may take longer to complete ini-

tialization.

• If the vehicle is backed up while perform-

ing initialization, data collected during ini-

tialization will be cleared and it will take

longer than normal to complete.

• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or

another situation where other vehicles

are driven close by, it may take time for

the system to recognize the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitters of your

vehicle over those of other vehicles.

If initialization is not complete after driving

for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in

a safe place for approximately 20 minutes

and then drive the vehicle again.

●

In the following situations, initialization

will not be started or was not completed

properly and the system will not operate

properly. Perform the initialization proce-

dure again.

• If, when attempting to start initialization,

the tire pressure warning light does not

blink 3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been driven for

about 20 minutes after performing ini-

tialization, the tire pressure warning light

blinks for approximately 1 minute and

then illuminates.

●

If initialization cannot be completed after

performing the above procedure, con-

tact any authorized Lexus retailer or

480

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Every tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter has a unique ID code.

When replacing a tire pressure warn-

ing valve and transmitter, it is necessary

to register the ID codes.

The ID codes can be registered on

of the multi-information display.

1Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn

the engine switch off, wait 20 min-

utes or more, and then start the

engine.

2Press or of the meter con-

trol switch to select .

3Press or to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press .

4Press or to select “TPWS”

and then press .

5Press or to select “Change

Wheel Set”. Then press and hold

until the tire pressure warning

light blinks slowly 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the

multi-information display.

When registration is being performed, the

tire pressure warning light will blink for

approximately 1 minute then illuminate and

“---” will be displayed for the inflation pres-

sure of each tire on the multi-information

display.

6Drive straight (with occasional left

and right turns) at approximately

40 km/h (25 mph) or more for

approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

Registration is complete when the tire

pressure warning light turns off and the

inflation pressure of each tire is displayed

on the multi-information display.

Registration may take longer than normal

to complete if the vehicle speed cannot be

maintained at approximately 40 km/h (25

mph) or more. If registration cannot be

completed after driving for 1 hour or more,

perform the registration procedure again

from the beginning. (P.481)

After registering the ID codes, make sure

to initialize the tire pressure warning sys-

tem. (P.478)

■

When registering ID codes

●

Before performing ID code registration,

make sure that no wheels with tire pres-

sure warning valve and transmitters

installed are near the vehicle.

●

Make sure to initialize the tire pressure

WARNING

■

When initializing the tire pressure

warning system

Do not initialize the tire pressure warning

system without first adjusting the tire

inflation pressure to the specified level.

Otherwise, the tire pressure warning

light may not come on even if the tire

inflation pressure is low, or it may come

on when the tire inflation pressure is

actually normal.

Registering ID codes

481

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

warning system after registering the ID

codes. If the system is initialized before

registering the ID codes, the initialized

values will be invalid.

●

As the tires will be warm when registra-

tion is completed, make sure to allow the

tires to cool before performing initializa-

tion.

■

Canceling ID code registration

●

To cancel ID code registration after it has

been started, turn the engine switch off

before driving the vehicle.

If the vehicle is driven after ID code regis-

tration is started, to cancel registration,

perform the ID code registration start

procedure again and turn the engine

switch off before driving.

●

If ID code registration has been canceled,

the tire pressure warning light will blink

for approximately 1 minute when the

engine switch is turned to IGNITION

ON mode and then illuminate. The tire

pressure warning system will be opera-

tional when the tire pressure warning

light turns off.

●

If the warning light does not turn off even

after several minutes have elapsed, ID

code registration may not have been can-

celled correctly. To cancel registration,

perform the ID code registration start

procedure again and then turn the engine

switch off before driving.

■

If ID codes are not registered properly

●

In the following situations, ID code regis-

tration may take longer than usual to be

completed or may not be possible. (Usu-

ally, the vehicle will need to be driven for

approximately 10 to 30 minutes to com-

plete ID code registration.)

If ID code registration is not complete

after driving for approximately 30 min-

utes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved

road, it may take longer than normal to

complete registration.

• If the vehicle is backed up while perform-

ing registration, data collected during

registration will be cleared, and it will take

longer than normal to complete.

• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or

another situation where other vehicles

are driven close by, it may take time for

the system to recognize the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitters of your

vehicle over those of other vehicles.

• If a wheel with a tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter installed is inside or

near the vehicle, registration of the ID

codes for the installed wheels may not be

possible.

If ID registration is not complete after driv-

ing for approximately 1 hour, park the vehi-

cle in a safe place for approximately 20

minutes and then perform the ID code reg-

istration procedure again.

●

In the following situations, ID code regis-

tration will not be started or was not com-

pleted properly and the system will not

operate properly. Perform the ID code

registration procedure again.

• If, when attempting to start ID code regis-

tration, the tire pressure warning light

does not blink slowly 3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been driven for

about 10 minutes after performing ID

code registration, the tire pressure warn-

ing light blinks for approximately 1 minute

and then illuminates.

●

If ID code registration cannot be com-

pleted after performing the above proce-

dure, contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer.

482

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a

hard, flat surface.

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift position to P.

Disabling the height control. (if

equipped) (P.383)

Stop the engine.

■

Jack and tools

As your vehicle is equipped with run-flat

tires, the following tools for replacing a tire

are not included with your vehicle. They can

be purchased at any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

●

Wheel nut wrench

●

Jack

●

Jack handle

Replacing the tire

When raising your vehicle with a

jack, position the jack correctly.

Improper placement may damage

your vehicle or cause injury.

If necessary tire replacement

seems difficult to perform, contact

any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer.

Before jacking up the vehicle

WARNING

■

Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause

the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,

leading to death or serious injury.

●

Do not use the tire jack for any pur-

pose other than replacing tires or

installing and removing tire chains.

●

Do not use other tire jacks for replac-

ing tires on this vehicle.

●

Put the jack properly in its jack point.

●

Do not put any part of your body under

the vehicle while it is supported by the

jack.

●

Do not start the engine or drive the

vehicle while the vehicle is supported

by the jack.

●

Do not raise the vehicle while some-

one is inside.

●

When raising the vehicle, do not put an

object on or under the jack.

●

Do not raise the vehicle to a height

greater than that required to replace

the tire.

●

Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get

under the vehicle.

●

Make sure to disable all functions of

the vehicle height control of the elec-

tronically modulated air suspension

and then stopping the engine.

(



P.383)

●

When lowering the vehicle, make sure

that there is no-one near the vehicle. If

there are people nearby, warn them

vocally before lowering.

483

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

1Chock the tires.

2Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one

turn).

3Turn the tire jack portion by

hand until the notch of the jack is in

contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under

the rocker panel. They indicate the jack

point positions.

4Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.

5Remove all the wheel nuts and the

tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place

WARNING

■

Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with

power trunk lid

In cases such as when replacing tires,

make sure to turn off the trunk opener

main switch (P.125). Failure to do so

may cause the trunk lid to operate unin-

tentionally if the power trunk lid switch is

accidentally touched, resulting in hands

and fingers being caught and injured.

Removing a tire

Tire Wheel chock posi-

tions

Front left-hand side Behind the rear

right-hand side tire

Front right-hand

side

Behind the rear

left-hand side tire

Rear left-hand side In front of the front

right-hand side tire

Rear right-hand side In front of the front

left-hand side tire

484

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

the tire so that the wheel design faces up to

avoid scratching the wheel surface.

1Remove any dirt or foreign matter

from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact

surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while

the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to

come off.

2Install the tire and loosely tighten

each wheel nut by hand by approxi-

mately the same amount.

Turn the wheel nuts until the washers come

into contact with the disc wheel.

Disc wheel

Washer

3Lower the vehicle.

4Firmly tighten each wheel nut two

or three times in the order shown in

the illustration.

WARNING

■

Replacing a tire

Do not touch the disc wheels or the area

around the brakes immediately after the

vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc

wheels and the area around the brakes

will be extremely hot. Touching these

areas with hands, feet or other body

parts while changing a tire, etc. may

result in burns.

Installing the tire

485

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Tightening torque:

140 N•m (14.3 kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf)

WARNING

■

When installing the tire

Failure to follow these precautions could

cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the

tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●

Never use oil or grease on the wheel

bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel

nuts to be excessively tightened, lead-

ing to bolt or disc wheel damage. In

addition, the oil or grease can cause

the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel

may fall off, causing a serious accident.

Remove any oil or grease from the

wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

●

Have the wheel nuts tightened with a

torque wrench to 140 N•m (14.3

kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf) as soon as possible

after changing wheels.

●

Do not attach a heavily damaged

wheel ornament, as it may fly off the

wheel while the vehicle is moving.

●

When installing a tire, only use wheel

nuts that have been specifically

designed for that wheel.

●

If there are any cracks or deformations

in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt

holes of the wheel, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

NOTICE

■

Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,

tire pressure warning valves, trans-

mitters and tire valve caps

P.477

486

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■

Effects of incorrect tire inflation pres-

sure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure

may result in the following:

●

Reduced fuel economy

●

Reduced driving comfort and poor han-

dling

●

Reduced tire life due to wear

●

Reduced safety

●

Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it

checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

■

Instructions for checking tire inflation

pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure,

observe the following:

●

Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at

least 3 hours or has not been driven for

more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an

accurate cold tire inflation pressure read-

ing.

●

Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly

inflated based only on its appearance.

●

It is normal for the tire inflation pressure

to be higher after driving as heat is gen-

erated in the tire. Do not reduce tire infla-

tion pressure after driving.

●

Passengers and luggage weight should

be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

Tire inflation pressure

Make sure to maintain proper tire

inflation pressure. Tire inflation

pressure should be checked at least

once per month. However, Lexus

recommends that tire inflation

pressure be checked once every

two weeks.

WARNING

■

Proper inflation is critical to save tire

performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the

following conditions may occur which

could lead to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury:

●

Excessive wear

●

Uneven wear

●

Poor handling

●

Possibility of blowouts resulting from

overheated tires

●

Air leaking from between tire and

wheel

●

Wheel deformation and/or tire dam-

age

●

Greater possibility of tire damage

while driving (due to road hazards,

expansion joints, sharp edges in the

road, etc.)

NOTICE

■

When inspecting and adjusting tire

inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or mois-

ture may get into the valve and cause an

air leak, resulting in decreased tire infla-

tion pressure.

487

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

When replacing wheels, care should

be taken to ensure that they are equiv-

alent to those removed in load capac-

ity, diameter, rim width and inset

Replacement wheels are available at

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

: Conventionally referred to as offset.

Lexus does not recommend using the

following:

Wheels of different sizes or types

Used wheels

Bent wheels that have been straight-

ened

■

When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped

with tire pressure warning valves and trans-

mitters that allow the tire pressure warning

system to provide advance warning in the

event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.

Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire

pressure warning valves and transmitters

must be installed. (P.477)

Use only Lexus wheel nuts and

wheel nut wrenches designed for

use with your aluminum wheels.

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily

corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate

from the wheel or cause a loss of

handling control.

Wheel selection

WARNING

■

When replacing wheels

●

Do not use wheels that are a different

size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a

loss of handling control.

●

Never use an inner tube in a leaking

wheel which is designed for a tubeless

tire.

Doing so may result in an accident,

causing death or serious injury.

■

Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.

Doing so could cause the tire to leak air

during driving, possibly causing an acci-

dent.

NOTICE

■

Replacing tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters

●

Because tire repair or replacement

may affect the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters, make sure to

have tires serviced by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer or

other qualified service shop. In addi-

tion, make sure to purchase your tire

pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters at any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer.

●

Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels

are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and trans-

mitters may not work properly with

non-genuine wheels.

Aluminum wheel precautions

488

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

When rotating, repairing or chang-

ing your tires, check that the wheel

nuts are still tight after driving 1600

km (1000 miles).

Be careful not to damage the alumi-

num wheels when using tire chains.

Use only Lexus genuine balance

weights or equivalent and a plastic

or rubber hammer when balancing

your wheels. 1Turn the engine switch off.

2Open the glove box. Remove the

partition. (P.426)

3Remove the panel.

4Unlock the filter cover ( ), pull the

filter cover out of the claws ( ),

and remove the filter cover.

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be

changed regularly to maintain air

conditioning efficiency.

Removing the air conditioning

filter

489

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

5Remove the filter case.

6Remove the air conditioning filter

from the filter case and replace it

with a new one.

The “ UP” marks shown on the filter

and the filter case should be pointing up.

■

Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning fil-

ter according to the maintenance schedule.

In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic

flow, early replacement may be required.

(For scheduled maintenance information,

please refer to the “Lexus Service Booklet”

or “Lexus Warranty Booklet”.)

■

If air flow from the vents decreases dra-

matically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter

and replace if necessary.

■

Air conditioning filter with deodorizing

function

When fragrances are placed in your vehi-

cle, the deodorizing effect may become

significantly weakened in a short period.

When an air conditioning odor comes out

continuously, replace the air conditioning

filter.

NOTICE

■

When using the air conditioning sys-

tem

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without

a filter may cause damage to the system.

■

To prevent damage to the filter cover

When moving the filter cover in the

direction of arrow to release the fitting,

pay attention not to apply excessive force

to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may

be damaged.

490

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■

If the electronic key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

●

The smart entry & start system and wire-

less remote control will not function

properly.

●

The operational range will be reduced.

■

When the card key battery needs to be

replaced (if equipped)

The battery for the card key is available only

at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can

replace the battery for you.

Flathead screwdriver

Small flathead screwdriver

Lithium battery CR2032

■

Use a CR2032 lithium battery

●

Batteries can be purchased at any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer, local electrical appliance shops

or camera stores.

●

Replace only with the same or equivalent

type recommended by the manufacturer.

●

Dispose of used batteries according to

local laws.

1Take out the mechanical key.

2Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip

of the flathead screwdriver with a tape.

3Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal

facing up.

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one

if it is depleted.

As the key may be damaged if the

following procedure is not per-

formed properly, it is recom-

mended that key battery

replacement be performed by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Items to prepare

Replacing the battery

491

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

WARNING

■

Battery precautions

Observe the following precautions.Fail-

ure to do so may result in death or seri-

ous injury.

●

Do not swallow the battery. Doing so

may cause chemical burns.

●

A coin battery or button battery is

used in the electronic key. If a battery is

swallowed, it may cause severe chemi-

cal burns in as little as 2 hours and may

result in death or serious injury.

●

Keep away new and removed batteries

from children.

●

If the cover cannot be firmly closed,

stop using the electronic key and stow

the key in the place where children

cannot reach, and then contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

If you accidentally swallow a battery or

put a battery into a part of your body,

get emergency medical attention

immediately.

■

To prevent battery explosion or leak-

age of flammable liquid or gas

●

Replace the battery with a new battery

of the same type. If a wrong type of

battery is used, it may explode.

●

Do not expose batteries to extremely

low pressure due to high altitude or

extremely high temperatures.

●

Do not burn, break or cut a battery.

■

Lithium battery precautions

CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS

REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT

TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUC-

TIONS

NOTICE

■

When replacing the battery

Use a flathead screwdriver of appropri-

ate size. Applying excessive force may

deform or damage the cover.

■

For normal operation after replacing

the battery

Observe the following precautions to

prevent accidents:

●

Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to

rust.

●

Do not touch or move any other com-

ponent inside the remote control.

●

Do not bend either of the battery ter-

minals.

492

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

1Turn the engine switch off.

2Open the fuse box cover.



Engine compartment: type A fuse

box (LS500)

Remove the service cover (P.457) and

push the tabs in and lift the lid off.



Engine compartment: type A fuse

box (LS350)

Remove the service cover (P.457) and

push the tabs in and lift the lid off.



Engine compartment: type B fuse

box

Remove the engine compartment cover

(P.455) and push the tabs in and lift the

lid off.



Driver’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and remove the lid.

Make sure to push the tab in during

removal or installation.



Passenger’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and remove the lid.

Make sure to push the tab in during

removal or installation.

Checking and replacing

fuses

If any of the electrical components

do not operate, a fuse may have

blown. If this happens, check and

replace the fuses as necessary.

Checking and replacing fuses

493

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care



Trunk

Remove the luggage mat. (P.429)

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

3Remove the fuse with the pullout

tool.

Only type A fuse can be removed

using the pullout tool.

4Check if the fuse is blown.

Type A and B:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of

an appropriate amperage rating. The

amperage rating can be found on the fuse

box lid.

Type C and D:

Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.



Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

494

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance



Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse



Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse



Type D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

■

After a fuse is replaced

●

When installing the lid, make sure that the

tab is installed securely.

●

If the lights do not turn on even after the

fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need

replacement.

●

If the replaced fuse blows again, have the

vehicle inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting

the wiring harness from damage.

WARNING

■

To prevent system breakdowns and

vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to

the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

●

Never use a fuse of a higher amperage

rating than that indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse.

●

Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or

equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even

as a temporary fix.

●

Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

■

Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload

determined and repaired by any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon

as possible.

495

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■

LED Lights

The lights consist of a number of LEDs. If

any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle

to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer

to have the light replaced.

■

Condensation build-up on the inside of

the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the

inside of the headlight lens does not indi-

cate a malfunction. Contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer for more informa-

tion in the following situations:

●

Large drops of water have built up on the

inside of the lens.

●

Water has built up inside the headlight.

Light bulbs

If any lights burn out, have it

replaced by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

496

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

497

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers .................498

If your vehicle has to be stopped in

an emergency..........................498

If the vehicle is trapped in rising

water............................................ 499

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

.........................................................501

If you think something is wrong

........................................................505

Fuel pump shut off system .....506

If a warning light turns on or a

warning buzzer sounds .......507

If a warning message is displayed

......................................................... 515

If you have a flat tire...................518

If the engine will not start ........ 519

If you lose your keys.................520

If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened ........................................ 521

If the electronic key does not

operate properly..................... 521

If the vehicle battery is discharged

........................................................ 524

If your vehicle overheats........530

If the vehicle becomes stuck

........................................................ 534

498

7-1. Essential information

7-1.Essential inf ormation

Press the switch to flash all of the turn

signal lights.

To turn them off, press the switch once

again.

■

Emergency flashers

●

If the emergency flashers are used for a

long time while the engine is not running,

the battery may discharge.

●

If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

or in the event of a strong rear impact, the

emergency flashers will turn on automati-

cally.

The emergency flashers will turn off auto-

matically after operating for approxi-

mately 20 minutes. To manually turn the

emergency flashers off, press the switch

twice.

(The emergency flashers may not turn on

automatically depending on the force of

the impact and conditions of the colli-

sion.)

1Steadily step on the brake pedal

with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly

as this will increase the effort required to

slow the vehicle.

2Shift the shift position to N.



If the shift position is shifted to N

3After slowing down, stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place by the road.

4Stop the engine.



If the shift position cannot be shifted

to N

3Keep depressing the brake pedal

with both feet to reduce vehicle

speed as much as possible.

4To stop the engine, press and hold

the engine switch for 2 consecutive

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to

warn other drivers when the vehicle

has to be stopped on the road due

to a breakdown, etc.

Operating instructions

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it

becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way, stop the

vehicle using the following proce-

dure:

Stopping the vehicle

499

7-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

seconds or more, or press it briefly

3 times or more in succession.

5Stop the vehicle in a safe place by

the road.

Remove the seat belt first.

If the door can be opened, open the

door and exit the vehicle.

If the door can not be opened, open

the window using the power window

switch and exit the vehicle through

the window.

If the window can not be opened

using the power window switch,

remain calm, wait until the water

level inside the vehicle rises to the

point that the water pressure inside

of the vehicle equals the water pres-

sure outside of the vehicle, and then

open the door and exit the vehicle.

WARNING

■

If the engine has to be turned off while

driving

Power assist for the steering wheel will

be lost, making the steering wheel heav-

ier to turn. Decelerate as much as possi-

ble before turning off the engine.

If the vehicle is trapped in

rising water

In the event the vehicle is sub-

merged in water, remain calm and

perform the following.

WARNING

■

Using an emergency hammer

for

emergency escape

The rear window of this vehicle can be

shattered by an emergency hammer

used for emergency escape, however,

since the windshield, front side windows

and rear side windows are laminated

glass they can not be shattered by an

emergency hammer

: Contact your Lexus dealer or

aftermarket accessory manufacturer

for further information about an emer-

gency hammer.

500

7-1. Essential information

WARNING

■

Escaping the vehicle from the window

There are cases where escaping the

vehicle from the window is not possible

due to seating position, passenger body

type, etc.

When using an emergency hammer,

consider your seat location and the size

of the window opening to ensure that the

opening is accessible and large enough

to escape.

501

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

7-2.Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be

towed

If towing is necessary, we recom-

mend having your vehicle towed by

any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer or commercial

towing service, using a wheel-lift

type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all

towing, and abide by all state/pro-

vincial and local laws.

If towing your vehicle with a

wheel-lift type truck from the front,

the vehicle’s rear wheels and axles

must be in good conditions.

(P.503, 501) If they are dam-

aged, use a towing dolly or flatbed

truck.

For AWD models: If towing your

vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck,

use a towing dolly. (P.503, 501)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■

When towing the vehicle



2WD models

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all

four wheels raised off the ground. If the

vehicle is towed with the tires contacting

the ground, the drivetrain and related

parts may be damaged or an accident

may occur due to a change in direction

of the vehicle.



AWD models

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all

four wheels raised off the ground. If the

vehicle is towed with the tires contacting

the ground, the drivetrain or related

parts may be damaged, the vehicle may

fly off the truck.

502

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

In the following situations, it is not pos-

sible to be towed by another vehicle

using cables or chains, as the rear

wheels may be locked due to the park-

ing lock. Contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer or commercial

towing service.

There is a malfunction in the P posi-

tion control system. (P.219, 515)

There is a malfunction in the engine

immobilizer system. (P.64)

There is a malfunction in the smart

entry & start system. (P.521)

The battery is discharged.

(P.524)

The following may indicate a problem

with your transmission. Contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer or commercial towing service

before towing.

WARNING

■

While towing

●

When towing using cables or chains,

avoid sudden starts, etc. which place

excessive stress on the towing eyelets,

cables or chains. The towing eyelets,

cables or chains may become dam-

aged, broken debris may hit people,

and cause serious damage.

●

Make sure to disable all functions of

the vehicle height control of the elec-

tronically modulated air suspension.

Otherwise, the vehicle height may

change and part of your body may be

caught under the vehicle, possibly

causing injury. (



P.383)

●

Do not turn the engine switch off.

This may lead to an accident as the

rear wheels will be locked by the park-

ing lock.

■

Installing towing eyelets to the vehi-

cle

Make sure that towing eyelets are

installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelets

may come loose during towing.

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the vehicle

when towing using a wheel-lift type

truck

●

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear

when the engine switch is off. The

steering lock mechanism is not strong

enough to hold the front wheels

straight.

●

When raising the vehicle, ensure ade-

quate ground clearance for towing at

the opposite end of the raised vehicle.

Without adequate clearance, the vehi-

cle could be damaged while being

towed.

■

To prevent damage to the vehicle

when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either

from the front or rear.

■

To prevent damage to the vehicle dur-

ing emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the

suspension components.

Situations when it is not possible

to be towed by another vehicle

Situations when it is necessary to

contact dealers before towing

503

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

The engine is running but the vehi-

cle does not move.

The vehicle makes an abnormal

sound.



From the front

Use a towing dolly under the rear

wheels.



From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the front

wheels.

When using a flat-bed truck to trans-

port the vehicle, use tire strapping

belts. Refer to the owner’s manual of

the flat-bed truck for the tire strapping

method.

In order to suppress vehicle movement

during transportation, set the parking

brake and turn the engine switch off.

If a tow truck is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tem-

porarily towed using cables or chains

secured to the emergency towing eye-

lets. This should only be attempted on

hard surfaced roads for short distances

at under 30 km/h (18 mph).

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s

wheels, drive train, axles, steering and

brakes must be in good condition.

Towing with a wheel-lift type

truck

NOTICE

■

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to pre-

vent body damage.

Using a flatbed truck

Emergency towing

504

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

To have your vehicle towed by another

vehicle, the towing eyelet must be

installed to your vehicle. Install the tow-

ing eyelet using the following proce-

dure.

1Take out the phillips-head screw-

driver and towing eyelet.

Phillips-head screwdriver

Towing eyelet

2Remove the eyelet cover using a

flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag

between the screwdriver and the vehicle

body as shown in the illustration.

3Insert the towing eyelet into the

hole and tighten partially by hand.

4Tighten down the towing eyelet

securely using a phillips-head

screwdriver or hard metal bar.

5Securely attach cables or chains to

the towing eyelet.

Take care not to damage the vehicle body.

6Enter the vehicle being towed and

start the engine.

If the engine does not start, turn the engine

switch to IGNITION ON mode.

7Shift the shift position to N and

release the parking brake.

Turn automatic mode off. (P.228)

■

While towing

If the engine is not running, the power assist

for the brakes and steering will not function,

making steering and braking more difficult.

Emergency towing procedure

505

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■

Wheel nut wrench

Wheel nut wrench can be purchased at any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

Fluid leaks under the vehicle.

(Water dripping from the air condi-

tioning after use is normal.)

Flat-looking tires or uneven tire

wear

Engine coolant temperature gauge

continually points higher than nor-

mal.

Changes in exhaust sound

Excessive tire squeal when corner-

ing

Strange noises related to the sus-

pension system

Pinging or other noises related to

the engine

Engine missing, stumbling or run-

ning roughly

Appreciable loss of power

If you think something is

wrong

If you notice any of the following

symptoms, your vehicle probably

needs adjustment or repair. Con-

tact any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any

reliable repairer as soon as possi-

ble.

Visible symptoms

Audible symptoms

Operational symptoms

506

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side

when braking

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side

when driving on a level road

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy

feeling, pedal almost touches the

floor

Follow the procedure below to restart

the engine after the system is activated.

1Turn the engine switch to ACCES-

SORY mode or turn it off.

2Restart the engine.

Fuel pump shut off system

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage

when the engine stalls or when an

airbag inflates upon collision, the

fuel pump shut off system stops the

supply of fuel to the engine.

Restarting the engine

NOTICE

■

Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the

ground, the fuel system has been dam-

aged and is in need of repair. Do not

restart the engine.

507

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

■

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

■

High coolant temperature warning light

(warning buzzer)

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or

flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessar-

ily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,

have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers

Warning light Details/Actions

(red)

Indicates that:

The brake fluid level is low; or

The brake system is malfunctioning

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-

able repairer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

Indicates that the brake pads are worn out (only the right-side pads can

be detected)

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

Warning light Details/Actions

(yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in:

The electronically controlled brake system (vehicles with Lexus Safety

System + A); or

The electric parking brake

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Handling method (P.530)

508

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■

Charging system warning light

(warning buzzer)

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■

Low engine oil pressure warning light

(warning buzzer)

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■

Malfunction indicator lamp (warning buzzer)

■

SRS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-

able repairer.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-

able repairer.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

The emission control system (on some models);

The electronic engine control system;

The electronic throttle control system; or

The electronic automatic transmission control system

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-

able repairer.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

The SRS airbag system; or

The seat belt pretensioner system

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

509

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■

Pop Up Hood warning light (warning buzzer)

■

ABS warning light (warning buzzer)

■

Inappropriate pedal operation warning light

(warning buzzer)

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the Pop Up Hood system has operated

The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated.

Have it replaced by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

Indicates a malfunction in the Pop Up Hood system

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

The ABS; or

The brake assist system

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in:

The Brake Override System

The Drive-Start Control

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

Indicates that the shift position was changed and Drive-Start Control

was operated while depressing the accelerator pedal.

Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals are being depressed

simultaneously, and the Brake Override System is operating.

Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

510

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

■

Low fuel level warning light

■

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)

: Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver and

front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the

buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain

speed.

Warning light Details/Actions

(red)

(yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 13 L (3.4 gal., 2.8 Imp.

gal.) or less

Refuel the vehicle.

Warning light Details/Actions

Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts

Fasten the seat belt.

If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat

belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning

buzzer) turn off.

511

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■

Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)

: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:

The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passenger that his or

her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently

for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

■

Tire pressure warning light

■

LTA indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

(except F SPORT

models)

(F SPORT models)

Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts

Fasten the seat belt.

Warning light Details/Actions

When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system

Have the system checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure such as

Natural causes

Flat tire

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Handling method (P.513)

Warning light Details/Actions

(orange)

(if equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(P.306)

512

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■

Stop & Start cancel indicator (warning buzzer)

■

RCD OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

■

PCS warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the Stop & Start system

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

(if equipped)

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the function temporarily cannot be used due to the cam-

era being dirty, etc.

Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(P.360, 515)

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes or illumi-

nates)

(if equipped)

When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:

Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily unavailable,

corrective action may be necessary.

Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(P.260, 271, 516)

If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.

P.285, 293

513

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■

Slip indicator

■

Parking brake indicator (warning buzzer)

■

Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)

■

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard

due to being in a noisy location or audio

sound.

■

Front passenger detection sensor, seat

belt reminder and warning buzzer

●

If luggage is placed on the front passen-

ger seat, the front passenger detection

sensor may cause the warning light to

flash and the warning buzzer to sound

even if a passenger is not sitting in the

seat.

●

If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sen-

sor may not detect a passenger, and the

warning light may not operate properly.

■

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes

on while driving

The malfunction indicator lamp will come

on if the fuel tank becomes completely

empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the

vehicle immediately. The malfunction indi-

cator lamp will go off after several trips.

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not

go off, contact any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer as soon as possible.

■

Electric power steering system warning

light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes insuffi-

cient or the voltage temporarily drops, the

electric power steering system warning

light may come on and the warning buzzer

may sound.

■

When the tire pressure warning light

comes on

Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punc-

tured.

If a tire is punctured: P.518

If none of the tires are punctured:

Turn the engine switch off then turn it to

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

The VSC system;

The TRC system; or

The hill-start assist control system

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.

514

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IGNITION ON mode. Check if the tire

pressure warning light comes on or blinks.



If the tire pressure warning light blinks for

approximately 1 minute then stays on

There may be a malfunction in the tire

pressure warning system. Have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer immediately.



If the tire pressure warning light comes

1After the temperature of the tires has

lowered sufficiently, check the inflation

pressure of each tire and adjust them to

the specified level.

2If the warning light does not turn off

even after several minutes have

elapsed, check that the inflation pres-

sure of each tire is at the specified level

and perform initialization. (P.478)

■

The tire pressure warning light may

come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come

on due to natural causes such as natural air

leaks and tire inflation pressure changes

caused by temperature. In this case, adjust-

ing the tire inflation pressure will turn off the

warning light (after a few minutes).

■

Conditions that the tire pressure warn-

ing system may not function properly

P.468

WARNING

■

If both the ABS and the brake system

warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immedi-

ately and contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer.

The vehicle will become extremely

unstable during braking, and the ABS

system may fail, which could cause an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

■

When the electric power steering

system warning light comes on

When the light comes on yellow, the

assist to the power steering is restricted.

When the light comes on red, the assist

to the power steering is lost and handling

operations of the steering wheel become

extremely heavy.

When steering wheel operations are

heavier than usual, grip the steering

wheel firmly and operate it using more

force than usual.

■

If the tire pressure warning light

comes on

Be sure to observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so could cause a loss of

vehicle control and result in death or

serious injury.

●

Decelerate to the lowest appropriate

speed as soon as possible. Do not

drive over 80 km/h (50 mph).

●

Check and adjust the tire inflation

pressure immediately.

●

If the tire pressure warning light comes

on even after tire inflation pressure

adjustment, it is probable that you have

a flat tire. Have the flat tire replaced by

the nearest any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

●

Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-

ing.

If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you

could lose control of the steering

wheel or the brakes.

■

If a blowout or sudden air leakage

should occur

The tire pressure warning system may

not activate immediately.

515

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■

Warning messages

The warning messages explained below

may differ from the actual messages

according to operation conditions and vehi-

cle specifications.

■

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard

due to being in a noisy location or audio

sound.

■

If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or

Replace” is displayed

The engine oil level is low. Check the level

of the engine oil, and add if necessary.

This message may appear if the vehicle is

stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a

level surface and check to see if the mes-

sage disappears.

NOTICE

■

To ensure the tire pressure warning

system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifi-

cations or makers, as the tire pressure

warning system may not operate prop-

erly.

If a warning message is dis-

played

The multi-information display

shows warnings for system malfunc-

tions and incorrectly performed

operations, and messages that indi-

cate a need for maintenance.

When a message is displayed, per-

form the appropriate corrective

action for the message.

If a warning message is displayed

again after the appropriate actions

have been performed, contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Additionally, if a warning light

comes on or flashes at the same

time that a warning message is dis-

played, take the appropriate cor-

rective action for the warning light.

(P.507)

516

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■

If “Engine Stopped Steering Power

Low” is displayed

This message is displayed if the engine is

stopped while driving.

When steering wheel operations are heav-

ier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly

and operate it using more force than usual.

■

If “Auto Power Off to Conserve Battery”

is displayed

Power was turned off due to the automatic

power off function. Next time when starting

the engine, increase the engine speed

slightly and maintain that level for approxi-

mately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.

■

If “Headlight System Malfunction Visit

Your Dealer” is displayed

The following systems may be malfunction-

ing. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer imme-

diately.

●

The LED headlight system

●

The automatic headlight leveling system

●

AHS (Adaptive High-beam System) (if

equipped)

●

AHB (Automatic High Beam) (if

equipped)

●

Multi Weather Lights

■

If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable

See Owner's Manual” is displayed (on

some models)

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range system is suspended tem-

porarily or until the problem shown in the

message is resolved. (causes and coping

methods: P.260, 271)

■

If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable” is

displayed (on some models)

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range system cannot be used

temporarily. Use the system when it

becomes available again.

■

If a message that indicates the malfunc-

tion of front camera is displayed

The following systems may be suspended

until the problem shown in the message is

resolved. (P.260, 271, 512)

●

PCS (Pre-Collision system) (if equipped)

●

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped)

●

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range (if equipped)

●

RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)

●

AHS (Adaptive High-beam System) (if

equipped)

●

AHB (Automatic High Beam) (if

equipped)

■

If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is

displayed

Indicates that the engine oil should be

scheduled to be changed.

Check the engine oil and change it if neces-

sary. After changing the engine oil, make

sure to reset the message. (P.459)

■

If “Oil Maintenance Required” is dis-

played

Indicates that the engine oil should be

changed.

Check and change the engine oil, and oil fil-

ter by any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer. After changing the engine oil,

make sure to reset the message. (P.459)

■

If “Shift System Malfunction Driving

Unavailable” is displayed

There is a malfunction in the shift control

system. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer imme-

diately.

■

If a message that indicates the need for

the shift lever operation is displayed

To prevent the shift lever from being oper-

ated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly, a message that requires shift-

ing the shift position may be displayed on

the multi-information display. In that case,

follow the instruction of the message and

shift the shift position.

517

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■

If a message that indicates the need for

visiting your Lexus dealer is displayed

The system or part shown on the

multi-information display is malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer immedi-

ately.

■

If a message that indicates the need for

referring to Owner’s Manual is dis-

played

●

If any of the following messages are

shown on the multi-information display,

follow the instructions.

• “Engine Coolant Temp High” (P.530)

•“Battery Low” (P.524)

• “Transmission Fluid Temp High”

(P.220)

●

If any of the following messages are

shown on the multi-information display, it

may indicate a malfunction. Have the

vehicle inspected by any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer immedi-

ately.

• “Entry & Start System Malfunction”

• “Shift System Malfunction”

• “P Switch Malfunction”

• “Shift System Unavailable”

●

If any of the following messages are

shown on the multi-information display, it

may indicate a malfunction. Immediately

stop the vehicle and contact any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

• “Braking Power Low”

• “Charging System Malfunction”

• “Oil Pressure Low”

NOTICE

■

If “High Power Consumption Partial

Limit On AC/Heater Operation” is

displayed frequently

There is a possible malfunction relating

to the charging system or the battery

may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer.

518

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Take your vehicle to the nearest

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer, or authorized tire dealer as

soon as possible if any tire goes flat.



For XXX/XXRXX size tires

The vehicle can be driven for a maximum

of 80 km (50 miles) at a speed below 80

km/h (50 mph) after the tire pressure

warning light comes on. (P.511)



For XXX/XXRFXX size tires

The vehicle can be driven for a maximum

of 160 km (100 miles) at a speed below 80

km/h (50 mph) after the tire pressure

warning light comes on. (P.511)

A run-flat tire has a or mark

on the side wall.

■

In some conditions (such as at high tem-

peratures)

For XXX/XXRXX size tires: You cannot

continue driving for up to 50 km (80

miles).

For XXX/XXRFXX size tires: You cannot

continue driving for up to 100 km (160

miles).

■

For the detailed information on run-flat

tires

See the tire warranty booklet.

If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is not equipped with a

spare tire, but instead you can con-

tinue driving the vehicle with

run-flat tires even if any tire goes

flat.

In this case, slow down and drive

with extra caution.

Run-flat tires

NOTICE

■

When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels,

tires or the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter, contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer as the

tire pressure warning valve and transmit-

ter may be damaged if not handled cor-

rectly.

■

When driving over bumps

If a vehicle has a flat tire, the vehicle

height will be lower than usual. Ensure

that nothing strikes the bottom of the

vehicle.

■

To avoid damage to the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid seal-

ants, the tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter may not operate properly. If a

liquid sealant is used, contact any author-

ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer or other

qualified service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire pres-

sure warning valve and transmitter when

replacing the tire. (P.477)

519

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

One of the following may be the cause

of the problem:

There may not be sufficient fuel in

the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine again fol-

lowing correct starting procedures.

(P.216)

There may be a malfunction in the

engine immobilizer system.

(P.64)

There may be a malfunction in the

shift control system.

(P.219, 516)

: It may not be possible to shift the shift

position from P.

One of the following may be the cause

of the problem:

The battery may be discharged.

(P.524)

The battery terminal connections

may be loose or corroded.

(P.463)

The engine starting system may be

malfunctioning due to an electrical

problem such as electronic key battery

depletion or a blown fuse. However, an

interim measure is available to start the

engine. (P.519)

One of the following may be the cause

of the problem:

One or both of the battery terminals

may be disconnected. (P.463)

The battery may be discharged.

(P.524)

There may be a malfunction in the

steering lock system.

Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer if the problem cannot be repaired,

or if repair procedures are unknown.

When the engine does not start, the

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even

though correct starting procedures

are being followed (P.216), con-

sider each of the following points:

The engine will not start even

though the starter motor oper-

ates normally.

The starter motor turns over

slowly, the interior lights and

headlights are dim, or the horn

does not sound or sounds at a low

volume.

The starter motor does not turn

over

The starter motor does not turn

over, the interior lights and head-

lights do not turn on, or the horn

does not sound.

Starting the engine in an emer-

gency

520

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

following steps can be used as an

interim measure to start the engine if

the engine switch is functioning nor-

mally.

Do not use this starting procedure

except in cases of emergency.

1Press the parking brake switch to

check that the parking brake is set.

(P.227)

Parking brake indicator will come on.

2Turn the engine switch to ACCES-

SORY mode.

3Press and hold the engine switch

for about 15 seconds while

depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using

the above steps, the system may be

malfunctioning. Have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer.

If you lose your keys

New genuine mechanical keys can

be made by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer

using another mechanical key and

the key number stamped on your

key number plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such

as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

NOTICE

■

When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk

of vehicle theft increases significantly.

Visit any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer immediately with all remaining

electronic keys and the card key (if

equipped) that were provided with your

vehicle.

521

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

Remove the cover inside the trunk and

pull the lever.

■

When the electronic key does not work

properly

●

Make sure that the smart entry & start

system has not been disabled using the

Remote Touch or at any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer. If it has been disa-

bled, re-enable it.

●

Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is

set, cancel the function. (P.127)

■

Unlocking the door

Use the mechanical key (P.112) in

If the fuel filler door cannot

be opened

If the fuel filler door opener switch

cannot be operated, contact any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer to service the vehicle. In

case where refueling is urgently

necessary, the following procedure

can be used to open the fuel filler

door.

Opening the fuel filler door

If the electronic key does not

operate properly

If communication between the

electronic key and vehicle is inter-

rupted (P.127) or the electronic

key cannot be used because the

battery is depleted, the smart entry

& start system and wireless remote

control cannot be used. In such

cases, the doors and trunk can be

opened and the engine can be

started by following the procedure

below.

NOTICE

■

In case of a smart entry & start system

malfunction or other key-related

problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic

keys provided with your vehicle, to any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Locking and unlocking the

doors, unlocking the trunk

522

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

order to perform the following opera-

tions:

1Pull the driver’s door handle and

insert the mechanical key.

2Unlock the door. (P.77)

3Remove the key, return the handle,

and then pull the handle again.

■

Locking the door

1With the door open, push down the

inside lock button.



For the front doors

2Close the door while pulling the

door handle.



For the rear doors

2Close the door.

■

Trunk

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to

open. (P.77)

■

Key linked functions

1Closes the windows and the moon roof

(turn and hold)

2Opens the windows and the moon roof

(turn and hold)

These settings must be customized at any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

523

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

1Depress the brake pedal.

2Touch the Lexus emblem side of the

electronic key to the engine switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a

buzzer sounds and the engine switch will

turn to IGNITION ON mode.

When the smart entry & start system is

deactivated in customization setting, the

engine switch will turn to ACCESSORY

mode.

3Firmly depress the brake pedal and

check that is shown on the

multi-information display.

4Press the engine switch.

In the event that the engine still cannot

be started, contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

Stopping the engine

Set the parking brake, shift the shift position

to P and press the engine switch as you nor-

mally do when stopping the engine.

■

Electronic key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary

measure, it is recommended that the elec-

tronic key battery be replaced immediately

when the battery is depleted. (P.490)

■

Alarm

Using the mechanical key to lock the doors

or trunk will not set the alarm system.

If a door or trunk is unlocked using the

mechanical key when the alarm system is

set, the alarm may be triggered. (P.77)

■

Changing engine switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the

engine switch in step 3 above. The engine

does not start and modes will be changed

each time the switch is pressed. (P.218)

WARNING

■

When using the mechanical key and

operating the power windows or

moon roof

Operate the power window or moon

roof after checking to make sure that

there is no possibility of any passenger

having any of their body parts caught in

the window or moon roof.

Also, do not allow children to operate the

mechanical key. It is possible for children

and other passengers to get caught in

the power window or moon roof.

Starting the engine

524

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a set of jumper (or booster)

cables and a second vehicle with a

12-volt battery, you can jump start your

vehicle by following the steps below.



Method connecting jumper (or

booster) cables to the battery

1Confirm that the electronic key is

being carried.

When connecting the jumper (or booster)

cables, depending on the situation, the

alarm may activate and doors locked.

(P.78)

2Open the trunk lid and remove the

luggage mat. (P.429)

In the event that the trunk opener cannot

be used, use the mechanical key to open

the trunk. (P.521)

3Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the

clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on the second vehicle. Then,

connect a negative cable clamp to on the second vehicle and connect the

clamp at the other end of the negative cable to .

Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle)

Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)

Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)

Negative (-) battery terminal (your vehicle)

If the vehicle battery is dis-

charged

The following procedures may be

used to start the engine if the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged.

You can also call any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

Restarting the engine

525

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

4Start the engine of the second vehi-

cle. Increase the engine speed

slightly and maintain at that level for

approximately 5 minutes to

recharge the battery of your vehi-

cle.

5Open and close any of the doors of

your vehicle with the engine switch

off.

6Maintain the engine speed of the

second vehicle and start the engine

of your vehicle by turning the

engine switch to IGNITION ON

mode.

7Once the vehicle’s engine has

started, remove the jumper cables

in the exact reverse order from

which they were connected.

8Press the Stop & Start cancel

switch to disable the Stop & Start

system. (P.331)



Method connecting jumper (or

booster) cables to the exclusive

jump starting terminal

1Confirm that the electronic key is

being carried.

When connecting the jumper (or booster)

cables, depending on the situation, the

alarm may activate and doors locked.

(P.78)

2Open the hood. Remove the ser-

vice cover. (P.451, 457)

3Open the fuse box cover.

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

4Open the exclusive jump starting

terminal cover.

5Remove the engine cover.

(P.456)

6Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the

clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on the second vehicle. Then,

526

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

connect a negative cable clamp to on the second vehicle and connect the

clamp at the other end of the negative cable to .

LS500

LS350

Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle)

Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)

Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)

Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting

terminal and any moving parts as shown in the illustration

7Start the engine of the second vehi-

cle. Increase the engine speed

slightly and maintain at that level for

approximately 5 minutes to

recharge the battery of your vehi-

cle.

527

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

8Open and close any of the doors of

your vehicle with the engine switch

off.

9Maintain the engine speed of the

second vehicle and start the engine

of your vehicle by turning the

engine switch to IGNITION ON

mode.

10 Once the vehicle’s engine has

started, remove the jumper cables

in the exact reverse order from

which they were connected.

11 Close the exclusive jump starting

terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse

box cover to its original position.

12 Install the service cover. (P.457)

13 Install the engine cover. (P.457)

14 Press the Stop & Start cancel

switch to disable the Stop & Start

system. (P.331)

Once the engine starts, have the vehi-

cle inspected at any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,

or any reliable repairer as soon as pos-

sible.

■

Starting the engine when the battery is

discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-start-

ing.

■

To prevent battery discharge

●

Turn off the headlights and the audio sys-

tem while the engine is off. (Except when

the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start

system.)

●

Turn off any unnecessary electrical com-

ponents when the vehicle is running at a

low speed for an extended period, such

as in heavy traffic.

■

When the battery is removed or dis-

charged

●

Information stored in the ECU is cleared.

When the battery is depleted, have the

vehicle inspected at any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

Some systems may require initialization.

(P.563)

■

When removing the battery terminals

When the battery terminals are removed,

the information stored in the ECU is

cleared. Before removing the battery termi-

nals, contact any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer as soon as possible.

■

Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will dis-

charge gradually even when the vehicle is

not in use, due to natural discharge and the

draining effects of certain electrical appli-

ances. If the vehicle is left for a long time,

the battery may discharge, and the engine

may be unable to start. (The battery

recharges automatically during driving.)

■

After jump starting the vehicle

Be sure to disable the Stop & Start system

so that the battery can be charged.

(P.331)

■

When recharging or replacing the bat-

tery

●

In some cases, it may not be possible to

unlock the doors using the smart entry &

start system when the battery is dis-

charged. Use the wireless remote control

or the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the doors.

●

The engine may not start on the first

attempt after the battery has recharged

but will start normally after the second

attempt. This is not a malfunction.

●

The engine switch mode is memorized by

the vehicle. When the battery is recon-

nected, the system will return to the

mode it was in before the battery was dis-

charged. Before disconnecting the bat-

tery, turn the engine switch off.

528

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you are unsure what mode the engine

switch was in before the battery dis-

charged, be especially careful when

reconnecting the battery.

●

For a while after the battery terminals

have been disconnected and recon-

nected, for a while after the battery has

been replaced, the Stop & Start system

may not automatically stop the engine for

approximately 5 to 60 minutes.

■

When replacing the battery

●

Use a Central Degassing type battery

(European Regulations).

●

Use a genuine battery specifically

designed for use with the Stop & Start

system or a battery with equivalent speci-

fications to a genuine battery. If an unsup-

ported battery is used, Stop & Start

system functions may be restricted to

protect the battery.

Also, battery performance may decrease

and the engine may not be able to restart.

Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer for details.

●

Use a battery with the same case size as

the previous battery and an equivalent

20 hour rate capacity (20HR) or greater.

• If the sizes differ, the battery cannot be

properly secured.

• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if

the time period where the vehicle is not

used is a short time, the battery may dis-

charge and the engine may not be able to

start.

●

Use a battery with a handle. If a battery

without a handle is used, removal is more

difficult.

●

After replacing, firmly attach the follow-

ing items to the exhaust hole of the bat-

tery.

• Use the exhaust hose that was attached

to the battery before replacing and con-

firm that it is firmly connected to the hole

section of the vehicle.

• Use the exhaust hole plug included with

the battery replaced or the one installed

on the battery prior to the replacement.

(Depending on the battery to be

replaced, the exhaust hole may be

plugged.)

Exhaust hole plug

Exhaust hole

Exhaust hose

For details, consult any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer.

WARNING

■

When removing the battery terminals

Always remove the negative (-) terminal

first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts

any metal in the surrounding area when

the positive (+) terminal is removed, a

spark may occur, leading to a fire in addi-

tion to electrical shocks and death or

serious injury.

■

Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to

prevent accidentally igniting the flamma-

ble gas that may be emitted from the bat-

tery:

●

Make sure each jumper cable is con-

nected to the correct terminal and that

it is not unintentionally in contact with

any other than the intended terminal.

529

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

WARNING

●

Do not allow the other end of the

jumper cable connected to the “+” ter-

minal to come into contact with any

other parts or metal surfaces in the

area, such as brackets or unpainted

metal.

●

Do not allow the + and - clamps of the

jumper cables to come into contact

with each other.

●

Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette

lighters or allow open flame near the

battery.

■

Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and cor-

rosive acidic electrolyte, while related

parts contain lead and lead compounds.

Observe the following precautions when

handling the battery:

●

When working with the battery, always

wear safety glasses and take care not

to allow any battery fluids (acid) to

come into contact with skin, clothing

or the vehicle body.

●

Do not lean over the battery.

●

In the event that battery fluid comes

into contact with the skin or eyes,

immediately wash the affected area

with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the

affected area until medical attention

can be received.

●

Always wash your hands after handling

the battery support, terminals, and

other battery-related parts.

●

Do not allow children near the battery.

■

After recharging the battery

Have the battery inspected at any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer as soon as possible.

If the battery is deteriorating, continued

use may cause the battery to emit a mal-

odorous gas, which may be detrimental

to the health of passengers.

■

When replacing the battery

●

When the vent plug and indicator are

close to the hold down clamp, the bat-

tery fluid (sulfuric acid) may leak.

●

For information regarding battery

replacement, contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

●

After replacing, securely attach the

exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to

the exhaust hole of the replaced bat-

tery. If not properly installed, gases

(hydrogen) may leak into the vehicle

interior, and there is the possible dan-

ger of the gas igniting and exploding.

NOTICE

■

When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables,

ensure that they do not become entan-

gled in the cooling fan or engine drive

belt.

■

To prevent damaging the vehicle

The exclusive jump starting terminal is to

be used when charging the battery from

another vehicle in an emergency. It can-

not be used to jump start another vehicle.

530

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1Stop the vehicle in a safe place and

turn off the air conditioning system,

and then stop the engine.

2If you see steam:

Carefully lift the hood after the

steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

3After the engine has cooled down

sufficiently, inspect the hoses and

radiator core (radiator) for any

leaks.



LS500



LS350

Radiators

Cooling fan

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immedi-

ately contact any authorized Lexus retailer

or Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-

ble repairer.

4The coolant level is satisfactory if it

is between the “F” and “L” lines on

the reservoir.



Engine (LS500)

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that

your vehicle is overheating.

The engine coolant temperature

gauge (P.86, 89) is in the red

zone or a loss of engine power is

experienced. (For example, the

vehicle speed does not increase.)

“Engine Coolant Temp High Stop

in a Safe Place See Owner’s

Manual” is shown on the

multi-information display.

Steam comes out from under the

hood.

Correction procedures

531

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

Reservoir

“F” line

“L” line

Coolant inlet cap



Engine (LS350)

Reservoir

“F” line

“L” line

Coolant inlet cap



Intercooler (LS500)

Reservoir

“F” line

“L” line

5Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if

coolant is unavailable.



Engine (LS500)

P.532



Engine (LS350)

P.532



Intercooler (LS500)

Remove the engine compartment cover

and add coolant.

532

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

6Start the engine and turn the air

conditioning system on to check

that the radiator cooling fan oper-

ates and to check for coolant leaks

from the radiator or hoses.

The fan operates when the air conditioning

system is turned on immediately after a

cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating

by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it

is difficult to check these, turn the air con-

ditioning system on and off repeatedly.

(The fan may not operate in freezing tem-

peratures.)

7If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and

contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

If the fan is operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the

nearest any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

■

When adding engine coolant (LS500)

Add coolant in accordance with the follow-

ing procedure.

1Remove the engine compartment

cover.

2Remove the engine cover. (P.456)

3Remove the caps and .

4Add coolant through the inlet of the cap

up to the “F” line , and then

replace the cap .

5Add coolant through the inlet of the cap

until it is full, and then replace the

cap .

6Install the engine compartment cover

and engine cover. (P.457)

■

When adding engine coolant (LS350)

Add coolant in accordance with the follow-

ing procedure.

533

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

1Remove the engine compartment

cover.

2Remove the engine cover. (P.456)

3Remove the caps and .

4Add coolant through the inlet of the cap

up to the “F” line , and then

replace the cap .

5Add coolant through the inlet of the cap

until it is full, and then replace the

cap .

6Install the engine compartment cover

and engine cover. (P.457)

WARNING

■

When inspecting under the hood of

your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious

injury such as burns.

●

If steam is seen coming from under the

hood, do not open the hood until the

steam has subsided. The engine com-

partment may be very hot.

●

Keep hands and clothing (especially a

tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the

fan and belts.

Failure to do so may cause the hands

or clothing to be caught, resulting in

serious injury.

●

Do not loosen the coolant inlet cap,

the engine coolant reservoir cap or the

intercooler coolant reservoir cap while

the engine and radiator are hot.

High temperature steam or coolant

could spray out.

NOTICE

■

When adding engine coolant

Add coolant slowly after the engine has

cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool

coolant to a hot engine too quickly can

cause damage to the engine.

■

To prevent damage to the cooling sys-

tem

Observe the following precautions:

●

Avoid contaminating the coolant with

foreign matter (such as sand or dust

etc.).

●

Do not use any coolant additive.

534

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1Stop the engine. Set the parking

brake and shift the shift position to

2Remove the mud, snow or sand

from around the rear wheels.

3Place wood, stones or some other

material under the rear wheels to

help provide traction.

4Restart the engine.

5Shift the shift position to D or R and

release the parking brake. Then,

while exercising caution, depress

the accelerator pedal.

■

When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press the switch to turn off TRC.

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following proce-

dures if the tires spin or the vehicle

becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Recovering procedure

WARNING

■

When attempting to free a stuck vehi-

cle

If you choose to push the vehicle back

and forth to free it, make sure the sur-

rounding area is clear to avoid striking

other vehicles, objects or people. The

vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge

back suddenly as it becomes free. Use

extreme caution.

■

When shifting the shift position

Be careful not to shift the shift position

with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid accel-

eration of the vehicle that may cause an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

NOTICE

■

To avoid damaging the transmission

and other components

●

Avoid spinning the rear wheels and

depressing the accelerator pedal

more than necessary.

●

If the vehicle remains stuck even after

these procedures are performed, the

vehicle may require towing to be freed.

535

Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,

etc.) ..............................................536

Fuel information.........................545

8-2. Customization

Customizable features ...........546

8-3. Initialization

Items to initialize ........................563

536

8-1. Specifications

8-1.Specificatio ns



Dimensions



Weights

: Unladen vehicles

: Without electronically modulated air suspension

: With electronically modulated air suspension

:Except F SPORT models

: F SPORT models

:LS500

:LS350

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length 5235 mm (206.1 in.)

Overall width 1900 mm (74.8 in.)

Overall height

2WD models 1460 mm (57.5 in.)

1450 mm (57.1 in.)

AWD models 1470 mm (57.9 in.)

1460 mm (57.5 in.)

Wheelbase 3125 mm (123.0 in.)

Tread

Front

2WD models 1630 mm (64.2 in.)

AWD models 1630 mm (64.2 in.)

1635 mm (64.4 in.)

Rear 1635 mm (64.4 in.)

1615 mm (63.6 in.)

Gross vehicle mass 2760 kg (6085 lb.)

2585 kg (5699 lb.)

Maximum permissible axle capac-

ity

Front 1420 kg (3131 lb.)

Rear 1550 kg (3417 lb.)

537

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

■

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the legal identifier for your

vehicle. This is the primary identifica-

tion number for your Lexus. It is used in

registering the ownership of your vehi-

cle.

This number is stamped on the top left

of the instrument panel.

This number is also stamped under the

right-hand front seat.

This number is also on the manufac-

turer’s label.

■

Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown.



LS500



LS350

Vehicle identification

538

8-1. Specifications



LS500



LS350

Engine

Model V35A-FTS

Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline (with

turbocharger)

Bore and stroke 85.5  100.0 mm (3.37  3.94 in.)

Displacement 3445 cm

(210.2 cu. in.)

Valve clearance Automatic adjustment

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Model 8GR-FKS

Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke 94.0  83.0 mm (3.70  3.27 in.)

Displacement 3456 cm

(210.9 cu. in.)

Valve clearance Automatic adjustment

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type

When you find these types of fuel label at the

gas station, use only the fuel with one of the

following labels.

EU area:

Unleaded gasoline conforming to European

standard EN228 only

Except EU area:

Unleaded gasoline only

539

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

■

Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Ref-

erence

])

: The engine oil capacity is a reference

quantity to be used when changing the

engine oil. Warm up and turn off the

engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and

check the oil level on the dipstick.

■

Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in

your Lexus vehicle. Lexus recom-

mends the use of approved “Toyota

Genuine Motor Oil”. Another motor

oil of matching quality can also be

used.

Oil grade:

0W-20 and 5W-30:

API grade SM “Energy-Conserving”,

SN “Resource-Conserving”, SN PLUS

“Resource-Conserving” or SP

“Resource-Conserving”; or ILSAC

GF-6A multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

Temperature range anticipated

before next oil change

Preferred

SAE 0W-20 is filled into your Lexus

vehicle at manufacturing, and the best

choice for good fuel economy and

good starting in cold weather. If SAE

0W-20 oil is not available, SAE

5W-30 oil may be used. However, it

should be replaced with SAE 0W-20

at the next oil change.

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here

as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the

characteristic of the oil which allows

cold startability. Oils with a lower

value before the W allow for easier

starting of the engine in cold

weather.

• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the vis-

cosity characteristic of the oil when

the oil is at high temperature. An oil

Research Octane Number 95 or higher

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 82.0 L (21.7 gal., 18.0 Imp. gal.)

Lubrication system

With filter



LS500

7.1 L (7.5 qt., 6.2 Imp. qt.)



LS350

5.8 L (6.1 qt., 5.1 Imp. qt.)

Without fil-

ter



LS500

6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp. qt.)



LS350

5.5 L (5.8 qt., 4.8 Imp. qt.)

540

8-1. Specifications

with a higher viscosity (one with a

higher value) may be better suited if

the vehicle is operated at high

speeds, or under extreme load con-

ditions.

How to read oil container labels:

Either or both API registered marks

are added to some oil containers to

help you select the oil you should use.

API Service Symbol

Top portion: “API SERVICE SP” means the

oil quality designation by American Petro-

leum Institute (API).

Center portion: “SAE 0W-20” means the

SAE viscosity grade.

Lower portion: “Resource-Conserving”

means that the oil has fuel-saving and envi-

ronmental protection capabilities.

ILSAC Certification Mark

The International Lubricant Specification

Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certifica-

tion Mark is displayed on the front of the

container.

Cooling system

Capacity

(Reference)

LS500



Engine

10.5 L (11.1 qt., 9.2 Imp. qt.)



Intercooler

4.3 L (4.5 qt., 3.8 Imp. qt.)

LS350 11.0 L (11.6 qt., 9.7 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate,

non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with

long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

541

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.

If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

Ignition system (spark plug)

LS500 LS350

Make DENSO EC22HPR-D7 DENSO FK20HBR8

Gap 0.7 mm (0.028 in.) 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)

NOTICE

■

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Electrical system (battery)

Open voltage at 20°C (68°F):

12.3 V or higher

(Turn the engine switch off and turn on the head-

lights for 20 to 30 seconds.)

Charging rates

Quick charge

Slow charge

15 A max.

5 A max.

Automatic transmission

Fluid capacity

LS500 8.9 L (9.4 qt., 7.8 Imp. qt.)

LS350 8.8 L (9.3 qt., 7.7 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

■

Transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibra-

tion, or damage the transmission of your vehicle.

542

8-1. Specifications

: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with Toyota genuine gear oil at the factory. Use Lexus

approved Toyota genuine gear oil or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the

above specification. Please contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer for further details.

: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.

Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of

matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for further details.

: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.

Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of

matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for further details.

Transfer (AWD models)

Oil capacity 0.70 L (0.74 qt., 0.62 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity

Toyota Genuine Transfer gear oil LL 80 or equivalent

Front differential (AWD models)

Oil capacity 0.65 L (0.69 qt., 0.57 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85

GL-5 or equivalent

Rear differential

Oil capacity 1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85

GL-5 or equivalent

Brakes

Pedal clearance

121 mm (4.8 in.) Min.

122 mm (4.8 in.) Min.

Pedal free play 1  6 mm (0.04  0.24 in.)

Brake pad wear limit 1 mm (0.04 in.)

543

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 500 N (51 kgf, 112 lbf) while

the engine is running.

When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that the brake sys-

tem warning light is not illuminated when the engine is running. (If the brake system

warning light is illuminated, refer to P.507.)

: Make sure to confirm that the brake warning light (yellow) does not illuminate. (If the

brake warning light illuminates, refer to P.507.)

: Vehicles without Lexus Safety System + A

: Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A



19-inch tires

Parking brake indicator

When pushing the parking brake switch for 1 to 2

seconds: comes on

When pulling the parking brake switch for 1 to 2

seconds: turns off

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4

Steering

Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Tires and wheels

Tire size 245/50R19 101W

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold

tire inflation pressure)

Vehicle speed

Front wheel

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar,

psi)

Rear wheel

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar,

psi)

More than 190 km/h

(118 mph) 310 (3.1, 45) 310 (3.1, 45)

190 km/h (118 mph)

or less 250 (2.5, 36) 250 (2.5, 36)

Wheel size 19  8J

Wheel nut torque 140 N•m (14.3 kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf)

544

8-1. Specifications



20-inch tires (type A)



20-inch tires (type B)

Tire size 245/45R20 99Y

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold

tire inflation pressure)

Vehicle speed

Front wheel

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar,

psi)

Rear wheel

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar,

psi)

More than 220 km/h

(137 mph) 310 (3.1, 45) 310 (3.1, 45)

220 km/h (137 mph)

or less 250 (2.5, 36) 250 (2.5, 36)

Wheel size 20  8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque 140 N•m (14.3 kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf)

Tire size Front tires: 245/45RF20 99Y

Rear tires: 275/40RF20 102Y

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold

tire inflation pressure)

Vehicle speed

Front wheel

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar,

psi)

Rear wheel

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar,

psi)

More than 220 km/h

(137 mph) 310 (3.1, 45) 310 (3.1, 45)

220 km/h (137 mph)

or less 250 (2.5, 36) 250 (2.5, 36)

Wheel size Front wheels: 20  8 1/2J

Rear wheels: 20  9 1/2J

Wheel nut torque 140 N•m (14.3 kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf)

545

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

■

Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a

gasoline engine

Lexus allows the use of ethanol blended

gasoline where the ethanol content is up to

10%. Make sure that the ethanol blended

gasoline to be used has a Research Octane

Number that follows the above.

■

If your engine knocks

●

Consult any authorized Lexus retailer or

Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

You may occasionally notice light knock-

ing for a short time while accelerating or

driving uphill. This is normal and there is

no need for concern.

Fuel information

When you find these types of fuel

label at the gas station, use only the

fuel with one of the following labels.

EU area:

You must only use unleaded gaso-

line conforming to European stand-

ard EN228.

Select premium unleaded gasoline

with a Research Octane Number of

95 or higher for optimum engine

performance.

Except EU area:

You must only use unleaded gaso-

line.

Select premium unleaded gasoline

with a Research Octane Number of

95 or higher for optimum engine

performance.

NOTICE

■

Notice on fuel quality

●

Do not use improper fuels. If improper

fuels are used, the engine will be dam-

aged.

●

Do not use gasoline with metallic addi-

tives, for example manganese, iron or

lead, otherwise it may cause damage

on your engine or emission control

system.

●

Do not add aftermarket fuel additives

which contain metallic additives.

●

EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold under

names such as “E50” or “E85” and

fuel containing a large amount of etha-

nol should not be used. The use of

these fuels will damage the vehicle’s

fuel system. In case of any doubt, ask

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

Except EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold

under names such as “E50” or “E85”

and fuel containing a large amount of

ethanol should not be used. Your vehi-

cle can use gasoline mixed with 10%

max ethanol. The use of fuel with more

than 10% ethanol content (E10) will

damage the vehicle’s fuel system. You

must ensure that refueling is carried

out only from a source where fuel

specification and quality can be guar-

anteed. In case of any doubt, ask any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

●

Do not use the methanol blended gas-

oline such as M15, M85, M100.

The use of gasoline containing metha-

nol may cause engine damage or fail-

ure.

546

8-2. Customization

8-2.Customization

■

Changing by using the meter con-

trol switches

1Press or to select .

2Operate the meter control

switches to select the desired item

to be customized.

3According to the display, select the

desired setting and then press .

To go back to the previous screen or exit

the customize mode, press .

■

Changing by using the Remote

Touch

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup” on the menu screen

and select “Vehicle”.

3Select “Vehicle Customization” or

“Drive Mode Customization”.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to

the list of settings that can be changed for

details.

For details on the Remote Touch, refer

to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-

MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-

UAL”.

■

Changing by using the Rear Multi

Operation Panel (if equipped)

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel and

then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Left” or “Right”.

3Touch .

4Touch a button to change the set-

ting.

■

When customizing using the Remote

Touch

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the

parking brake, and shift the shift position to

P. Also, to prevent battery discharge, leave

the engine running while customizing the

features.

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of

electronic features that can be per-

sonalized to your preferences. The

settings of these features can be

changed by using the meter control

switches, the Remote Touch, Rear

Multi Operation Panel or at any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

Customizing vehicle features

WARNING

■

During customization

As the engine needs to be running dur-

ing customization, ensure that the vehicle

is parked in a place with adequate venti-

lation. In a closed area such as a garage,

exhaust gases including harmful carbon

monoxide (CO) may collect and enter

the vehicle. This may lead to death or a

serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■

During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that

the engine is running while customizing

features.

547

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being cus-

tomized. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or

any reliable repairer for further details.

Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch

Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches

Settings that can be changed using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (if

equipped)

Settings that can be changed by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-

ized repairer, or any reliable repairer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

■

Seat belts (P.26)

: If equipped

: Vehicles with Active Assist for seat belts

Customizable features

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Easy Access Buckle

On Off — — — O

Retraction of front seat belts

when vehicle speed reaches

approximately 20 km/h (12

mph)

On Off — — — O

Retraction of front seat belt

when corresponding front

door is opened or seat belt is

released

On Off — — — O

548

8-2. Customization

■

Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P.86, 89, 93)

Function

Default setting Customized set-

ting

Language

English

French

— O — —

German

Spanish

Italian

Russian

Traditional Chi-

nese

Turkish

Arabic

Units L/100 km km/L O O — —

Drive information 1

Current fuel con-

sumption

Customizable

items: P.96 — O — —

Average fuel

economy (after

reset)

Drive information 2

Distance (driving

range)

Average vehicle

speed (after

reset)

Clock

24-hour display 12-hour display — O — —

Pop-up display On Off — O — —

Accent color Color 1 Color 2 O O — —

Rev indicator

5000 r/min.

2000 - 6400

r/min.

2000 - 6800

r/min.

— O — —

Off

549

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

: For details about each function: P.99

: The default setting varies according to country.

: The customized setting varies according to country.

: F SPORT models

:LS500

:LS350

■

Head-up Display

(P.101)

:If equipped

Rev peak

On Off — O — —

Eco Driving Indicator Light On Off — O — —

Suggestion function On

On (when the

vehicle is

stopped) O — — O

Off

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Gauge information Tachometer

Eco Driving Indi-

cator — O — —

No content

Route guidance to destina-

tion/street name

On Off — O — —

Driving support system dis-

play On Off — O — —

Compass

On Off — O — —

Audio system operation sta-

tus On Off — O — —

Function

Default setting Customized set-

ting

550

8-2. Customization

■

Door lock (P.114, 119, 521)

■

Smart entry & start system and wireless remote control (P.114, 126)

■

Smart entry & start system (P.114, 126)

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Unlocking using a mechani-

cal key

All doors

unlocked in one

step

Driver’s door

unlocked in one

step, all doors

unlocked in two

step

— — — O

Speed linked door locking

function On Off O — — O

Shift position linked door

locking function Off On O — — O

Shift position linked door

unlocking function Off On O — — O

Driver’s door linked door

unlocking function On Off O — — O

Locking/unlocking of the

trunk when all doors are

locked/unlocked

On Off — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Operation signal (Emer-

gency flashers) On Off O — — O

Time elapsed before auto-

matic door lock function is

activated if door is not

opened after being unlocked

30 seconds

60 seconds

— — — O

120 seconds

Open door warning buzzer On Off — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Smart entry & start system On Off O — — O

Smart door unlocking All the doors Driver’s door O — — O

551

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■

Wireless remote control (P.112, 114, 119)

■

Trunk (P.119)

:If equipped

Time elapsed before unlock-

ing all the door when gripping

and holding the driver’s door

handle

2 seconds

Off

— — — O1.5 seconds

2.5 seconds

Number of consecutive door

lock operations

As many as

desired 2 times — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Wireless remote control On Off — — — O

Unlocking operation

All doors

unlocked in one

step

Driver’s door

unlocked in one

step, all doors

unlocked in two

step

O — — O

Trunk unlocking operation Press and hold

(short)

One short press

— — — O

Push twice

Press and hold

(long)

Off

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid

(kick sensor)

On Off — O — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

552

8-2. Customization

■

Front seats (P.165)

:If equipped

■

Power rear seats

(P.172)

:If equipped

■

Driving position memory (P.177)

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Driver’s seat position linked

head restraint height opera-

tion

Off On — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Automatic rear seat opera-

tion (door-linked rear seat

return function and

shift-linked rear seat reclining

function)

On Off — — O —

Door linked rear seat with

ottoman seatback position for

exiting

More upright

than upright posi-

tion

Upright position — — O —

Shift-linked rear seat reclining

function On Off — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Selecting doors linked to the

memory recall function Driver’s door All doors — — — O

Driver’s seat slide movement

when exiting the vehicle Full Off O — — O

Partial

Driver’s seat height move-

ment when exiting the vehicle Off Full O — — O

Partial

553

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■

Outside rear view mirrors (P.195)

■

Power windows and moon roof (P.198, 201)

■

Reverse warning buzzer (P.220)

■

Automatic light control system (P.232)

Steering wheel movement Tilt only

Off

O — — OTelescopic only

Tilt and telescopic

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Automatic mirror folding and

extending operation

Linked to the

locking/ unlock-

ing of the doors

Off

— — — O

Linked to opera-

tion of the engine

switch

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Mechanical key linked opera-

tion Off On — — — O

Wireless remote control

linked operation Off On — — — O

Wireless remote control

linked operation signal

(buzzer)

On Off — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Signal (buzzer) when the shift

position is in R Single Intermittent — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 O — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

554

8-2. Customization

■

Lights (P.232)

■

AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)

(P.235)

:If equipped

Extended Headlight Lighting

system (Time elapsed before

headlights automatically turn

off)

30 seconds

60 seconds

— — — O90 seconds

120 seconds

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Welcome lighting On Off — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

System Control All operations

Automatic high

beam/low beam

changing opera-

tion only

— — — O

Clearance between a vehicle

ahead and the shaded high

beams

Wide

Narrow

— — — O

Standard

Vehicle speed at which the

brightness and illuminated

area adjustment of the high

beams changes mode

Approximately

120 km/h (75

mph) or more

Approximately

100 km/h (63

mph) or more — — — O

Approximately

80 km/h (50

mph) or more

Intensity adjustment of the

high beams when driving

around a curve (illuminates

the area in the direction vehi-

cle is turning more brightly)

On Off — — — O

Projection distance adjust-

ment of the low beams

according to the distance to a

preceding vehicle

On Off — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

555

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■

Multi Weather Lights (P.241)

■

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

(P.273, 285)

:If equipped

■

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

(P.294)

:If equipped

■

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

(P.297)

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Multi Weather Lights On Off — — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

PCS (Pre-Collision System) On Off — O — —

Adjust alert timing Middle Early — O — —

Late

Pedestrian alert

On Off — O — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

FCTA function On Off — O — —

Adjust alert timing Middle Early — O — —

Late

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Lane centering function On Off — O — —

Steering assist function On Off — O — —

Alert type Steering wheel

vibration Buzzer — O — —

Alert sensitivity High Standard — O — —

Vehicle sway warning func-

tion On Off — O — —

556

8-2. Customization

:If equipped

■

RSA (Road Sign Assist)

(P.307)

: If equipped

: RSA function becomes On when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

: If a Speed limit with supplemental mark is exceeded, the notification buzzer does not

operate.

: Vehicles with navigation system

Vehicle sway warning sensi-

tivity Standard High — O — —

Low

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

RSA (Road Sign Assist)

On Off — O — —

Excess speed notification

method

Display only

No notification

— O — —

Display and

buzzer

Excess speed notification

level 2 km/h (1 mph) 5 km/h (3 mph) — O — —

10 km/h (5 mph)

No overtaking notification

method Display only

No notification

— O — —

Display and steer-

ing wheel vibra-

tion

Other notifications method

(No-entry notification)

Display only

No notification

— O — —

Display and

buzzer

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

557

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

(P.311)

: If equipped

: Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A

■

Stop & Start system (P.325)

■

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

(P.332)

:If equipped

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Curve speed reduction func-

tion strength

High Low — O — —

Off

Dynamic Radar Cruise Con-

trol with Road Sign Assist Off On — O — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Change the Stop & Start sys-

tem duration when the A/C is

Standard Extended — O — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) On Off — O — —

Outside rear view mirror indi-

cator brightness Bright Dim — O — —

Alert timing for presence of

approaching vehicle (sensitiv-

ity)

Intermediate

Early

— O — —

Late

Only when vehi-

cle detected in

blind spot

558

8-2. Customization

■

PKSA (Parking Support Alert) (P.349)

■

Lexus parking assist-sensor (P.351)

■

RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert) function

(P.355)

:If equipped

■

RCD (Rear camera detection) function

(P.359)

:If equipped

■

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)

(P.362)

:If equipped

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Buzzer volume Level2 Level1 — O — —

Level3

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Lexus parking assist-sensor On Off — O — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

RCTA (Rear crossing traffic

alert) function On Off — O — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

RCD (Rear camera detec-

tion) function On Off — O — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake) function On Off — O — —

559

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■

Driving mode select switch (P.378)

:If equipped

■

Electronically modulated air suspension

(P.380)

:If equipped

■

Automatic air conditioning system (P.403)

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Powertrain control in custom

mode

Normal Power O — — —

Eco

Chassis control in custom

mode

Normal Sport O — — —

Comfort

Air conditioning operation in

custom mode

Normal Eco O — — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Vehicle height control On Off — O — —

Ingress/egress height control

function On Off — O — —

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Switching between outside

air and recirculated air mode

linked to “AUTO” switch

operation

On Off O — — O

A/C auto switch operation On Off O — — O

Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity Standard -3 to 3 O — — O

560

8-2. Customization

■

Seat heater/seat ventilators

(P.416)

: If equipped

: Vehicles without power rear seat

■

Heated steering wheel

(P.416)

:If equipped

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Driver’s seat temperature

preference in automatic

mode

Standard -2 (cooler) to 2

(warmer) O — — O

Passenger’s seat tempera-

ture preference in automatic

mode

Standard -2 (cooler) to 2

(warmer) O — — O

Left-hand rear seat tempera-

ture preference in automatic

mode

Standard -2 (cooler) to 2

(warmer) O — — O

Right-hand rear seat temper-

ature preference in automatic

mode

Standard -2 (cooler) to 2

(warmer) O — — O

Engine switch linked auto-

matic activation of the

left-hand rear seat heater

Off On O — — O

Engine switch linked auto-

matic activation of the

right-hand rear seat heater

Off On O — — O

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Steering wheel heating pref-

erence in automatic mode Standard -2 (low) to 2

(high) O — — O

561

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■

Illumination (P.420)

■

Vehicle customization

●

When the speed linked door locking

function and shift position linked door

locking function are both on, the door

lock operates as follows.

• When shifting the shift position to any

position other than P, all the doors will be

locked.

• If the vehicle is started with all the doors

locked, the speed linked door locking

function will not operate.

• If the vehicle is started with any door

unlocked, the speed linked door locking

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

Time elapsed before the inte-

rior lights turn off 15 seconds

Off

O — — O7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation after the engine

switch is turned off On Off — — — O

Operation when the doors

are unlocked On Off — — — O

Operation when you

approach the vehicle with the

electronic key on your person

On Off — — — O

Footwell lights On Off — — — O

Door trim ornament lights On Off — — — O

Time elapsed before the outer

foot lights turn off 15 seconds

Off

O — — O7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation of the outer foot

lights when you approach the

vehicle with the electronic

key on your person

On Off — — — O

Operation of the outer foot

lights when the doors are

unlocked

On Off — — — O

Operation of the outer foot

lights when a door is opened On Off — — — O

Fading out of the outer foot

lights when they turn off Long Short — — — O

562

8-2. Customization

function will operate.

●

When the smart entry & start system is

off, the entry unlock function cannot be

customized.

●

When the doors remain closed after

unlocking the doors and the timer acti-

vated automatic door lock function acti-

vates, signals will be generated in

accordance with the operational signal

(Emergency flashers) function setting.

●

Some settings can be changed using a

switch or the audio system screen. If a

setting is changed using a switch, the

changed setting will not be reflected on

the audio system screen until the engine

switch is turned off and then to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

■

Clock settings screen

If the clock adjustment screen is displayed

continuously when attempting to change

the clock settings, the system may be mal-

functioning. Have the vehicle inspected by

any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.

563

8-3. Initialization

Vehicle specifications

8-3.Initializat ion

:If equipped

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such

cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on

the vehicle:

List of items to initialize

Item When to initialize Reference

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake)

• After reconnecting or changing the

battery P.366

Lexus parking

assist-sensor

• After reconnecting or changing the

battery P.353

Oil maintenance • After maintenance is performed P.459

Tire pressure warning

system

• When the tire inflation pressure is

changed, such as when changing

traveling speed or load weight.

• When the tire inflation pressure is

changed, such as when the tire size is

changed.

• When rotating the tires.

• After performing the transmitter ID

code registration procedure.

P.478

Panoramic view moni-

tor

• Battery has been reinstalled.

• The steering wheel has been moved

while the battery was being reinstalled.

• Battery power is low.

Refer to the “NAVI-

GATION AND MUL-

TIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MAN-

UAL”.

564

8-3. Initialization

565

Index

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

........................................................ 566

Alphabetical Index ...................569

566

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

1-1.What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you lose your mechanical keys,

new genuine mechanical keys can

be made by any authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer.

(P.520)

If you lose your electronic keys, the

risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-

cantly. Contact any authorized

Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer

immediately. (P.520)

Is the electronic key battery weak or

depleted? (P.490)

Is the engine switch in IGNITION

ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the engine

switch off. (P.218)

Is the electronic key left inside the

vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that

you have the electronic key on your per-

son.

The function may not operate prop-

erly due to the condition of the radio

wave. (P.127)

Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from

inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Open the rear door from outside and then

unlock the child-protector lock. (P.118)

The function to prevent the elec-

tronic key from being left inside the

trunk will operate and you can open

the trunk as usual. Take the key out

from the trunk. (P.123)

Did you press the engine switch

while firmly depressing the brake

pedal? (P.216)

If you have a problem, check the

following before contacting any

authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus

authorized repairer, or any reliable

repairer.

The doors cannot be locked,

unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

The electronic key does not

operate properly

The doors cannot be locked or

unlocked

The rear door cannot be opened

The trunk lid is closed with the

electronic key left inside

If you think something is wrong

The engine does not start

567

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

Is the electronic key anywhere

detectable inside the vehicle?

(P.126)

Is the steering wheel unlocked?

(P.216)

Is the electronic key battery weak or

depleted?

In this case, the engine can be started in a

temporary way. (P.523)

Is the battery discharged?

(P.524)

It is locked automatically to prevent

theft of the vehicle. (P.216)

Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at

the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the

window lock switch is pressed. (P.200)

The auto power off function will be

operated if the vehicle is left in

ACCESSORY mode for a period of

time. (P.218)

The seat belt reminder light is flash-

ing

Are the driver and the front passenger

wearing the seat belts? (P.510)

The parking brake indicator is on

Is the parking brake released? (P.227)

Depending on the situation, other

types of warning buzzer may also

sound. (P.507, 515)

Did anyone inside the vehicle open

a door or anything move inside the

vehicle during setting the alarm?

The sensor detects them and the alarm

sounds. (P.77)

Do one of the following to deactivate

or stop the alarms:

Unlock the doors or open the trunk

using the entry function or wireless

remote control.

Starting the engine. (The alarm will

be deactivated or stopped after a

few seconds.)

Is the message displayed on the

multi-information display?

Check the message on the multi-informa-

tion display. (P.515)

The steering wheel cannot be

turned after the engine is

stopped

The windows do not open or

close by operating the power

window switches

The engine switch is turned off

automatically

A warning buzzer sounds during

driving

An alarm is activated and the

horn sounds

A warning buzzer sounds when

leaving the vehicle

568

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

When a warning light turns on or a

warning message is displayed, refer

to P.507, 515.

Slow down the vehicle, drive with

extra caution, and take your vehicle

to the nearest authorized Lexus

retailer or Lexus authorized

repairer, or any reliable repairer, or

authorized tire dealer as soon as

possible to have the tire replaced.

(P.518)

Try the procedure for when the vehi-

cle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or

snow. (P.534)

A warning light turns on or a

warning message is displayed

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

The vehicle becomes stuck

569

Alphabetical Index

A/C

Air conditioning filter............................... 488

Front automatic air conditioning system

.........................................................................403

Front seat concentrated airflow mode

(S-FLOW).................................................... 411

Pollen removal mode............................... 410

Rear automatic air conditioning system

...........................................................................413

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ............. 384

Warning light.............................................. 509

Adaptive High-beam System .................235

Adaptive Variable Suspension System384

AHB (Automatic High Beam)............... 238

AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)...235

Air conditioning filter.................................488

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter............................... 488

Front automatic air conditioning system

.........................................................................403

Front seat concentrated airflow mode

(S-FLOW).................................................... 411

Pollen removal mode............................... 410

Rear automatic air conditioning system

...........................................................................413

Airbag manual on-off system...................... 41

Airbags

Airbag manual on-off system...................41

Airbag operating conditions................... 32

Airbag precautions for your child........35

Correct driving posture ............................ 25

Curtain shield airbag operating condi-

tions .................................................................. 33

Curtain shield airbag precautions........35

General airbag precautions ...................35

Locations of airbags....................................30

Modification and disposal of airbags . 37

Side airbag operating conditions.........33

Side airbag precautions ............................35

Side and curtain shield airbags operating

conditions......................................................33

Side and curtain shield airbags precau-

tions ..................................................................35

SRS airbags......................................................30

SRS warning light......................................508

Alarm ................................................................... 77

Warning buzzer........................................ 507

Antennas (smart entry & start system). 126

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............. 384

Warning light..............................................509

Approach warning .......................................317

Armrest............................................................433

Assist grips......................................................433

Audio system-linked display ..................... 98

Automatic headlight leveling system...233

Automatic High Beam.............................. 238

Automatic light control system ..............232

Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard Lights

......................................................................... 384

Automatic transmission..............................219

M mode ..........................................................225

Paddle shift switches ....................224, 225

Snow mode...................................................223

Auxiliary boxes..................................428, 430

Average fuel economy.................................96

Average vehicle speed.................................96

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs............................... 495

Battery

Battery checking ........................................463

If the battery is discharged ....................524

Preparing and checking before winter

......................................................................... 390

Warning light..............................................508

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM).......................332

Boost gauge......................................................97

570

Alphabetical Index

Brake

Brake hold.....................................................230

Fluid ..................................................................542

Parking brake...............................................227

Warning light...............................................507

Brake assist.................................................... 384

Break-in tips ..................................................208

Brightness control

Instrument panel light control........88, 92

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).......................332

Buzzer

Hands off steering wheel warning (LTA)

........................................................................ 305

Card key............................................................110

Care

Exterior............................................................442

Interior .............................................................445

Seat belts........................................................445

Wheels and wheel ornaments............442

Cargo net........................................................429

Center Display............................................. 396

Chains................................................................391

Child restraint system

Points to remember..................................... 43

Riding with children..................................... 42

Child safety

Airbag precautions......................................35

Battery precautions......................463, 529

Child restraint system................................. 43

Heated steering wheel and seat heater

precautions..................................................416

How your child should wear the seat belt

.............................................................................27

Installing child restraints ............................43

Moon roof precautions ..........................202

Power window lock switch.................. 200

Power window precautions.................. 199

Rear door child-protectors.....................118

Removed electronic key battery precau-

tions ................................................................ 491

Seat belt precautions .................................. 42

Trunk precautions.........................................119

Child-protectors ............................................ 118

Cleaning

Exterior............................................................442

Interior .............................................................445

Radar sensor.....................................251, 263

Seat belts........................................................445

Wheels and wheel ornaments............442

Clock............................................... 86, 89, 434

Clock light...................................................... 420

Coat hooks .....................................................434

Coin holder.....................................................426

Condenser.......................................................461

Console box...................................................427

Consumption screen...................................105

Cooling system............................................ 460

Engine overheating..................................530

Cornering lights............................................234

Cruise control

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range .............................307, 311

Warning message.....................................325

Cup holders....................................................426

Current fuel consumption...........................96

Curtain shield airbags.................................. 30

Customizable features ..............................546

Daytime running light system..................232

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors.................... 404

Rear window............................................... 404

Windshield................................................... 404

Differential

Front differential oil....................................542

Rear differential oil.....................................542

Digital Rearview Mirror .............................187

571

Alphabetical Index

Dimension...................................................... 536

Display

Center Display............................................396

Cruise control .............................................323

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range......................................... 311

Head-up display............................................101

Lexus parking assist-sensor.................. 351

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................302

Multi-information display..........................93

Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians) ..............................................375

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)........359

RCTA...............................................................357

Warning message...................................... 515

Distance until next engine oil change...87,

Do-it-yourself maintenance.................... 448

Door courtesy lights .................................. 420

Door lock

Doors.................................................................. 114

Smart entry & start system......................126

Wireless remote control............................112

Doors

Automatic door locking and unlocking

system .............................................................118

Door closer.......................................................117

Door glasses.................................................198

Door lock.......................................................... 114

Open door warning buzzer ...........115, 117

Outside rear view mirrors...................... 195

Rear door child-protectors.....................118

Double locking system .................................76

Drive distance...................................................96

Drive info 1/Drive info 2...............................96

Driver’s seat position memory

Driving position memory.........................177

Memory recall function ............................179

Power easy access system.....................177

Drive-Start Control (DSC).......................213

Driving

Break-in tips.................................................208

Correct driving posture ............................25

Driving mode select switch ..................378

Procedures....................................................207

Winter drive tips........................................ 390

Driving information display.........................95

Driving position memory............................177

Memory recall function............................ 179

Power easy access system .....................177

Driving range....................................................96

Driving support system information display

.............................................................................99

DSC (Drive-Start Control).......................213

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range................................307, 311

Warning message.......................................321

ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake Sys-

tem)................................................................ 384

Eco Driving Indicator ..........................97, 105

Eco Driving Indicator Light.........................97

Elapsed time......................................................96

Electric Power Steering (EPS).............. 384

Warning light ................................................510

Electronic key.................................................. 110

Battery-saving function.............................127

If the electronic key does not operate

properly ........................................................ 521

Replacing the battery.............................. 490

Electronically Controlled Brake System

(ECB)............................................................ 384

Electronically modulated air suspension

.........................................................................380

Emergency brake signal ..........................385

Emergency flashers.................................... 498

Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer sounds..................507

If a warning light turns on...................... 507

572

Alphabetical Index

If a warning message is displayed...... 515

If the battery is discharged....................524

If the electronic key does not operate

properly.........................................................521

If the engine will not start ........................ 519

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

...........................................................................521

If the vehicle is trapped in rising water

.........................................................................499

If you have a flat tire...................................518

If you lose your keys.................................520

If you think something is wrong.........505

If your vehicle becomes stuck.............534

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an

emergency................................................ 498

If your vehicle needs to be towed......501

If your vehicle overheats....................... 530

Engine

ACCESSORY mode .............................. 218

Compartment..............................................453

Engine compartment cover.................455

Engine cover................................................456

Engine switch.................................................216

Fuel pump shut off system.................... 506

Hood................................................................. 451

How to start the engine............................216

Identification number...............................537

If the engine will not start ........................ 519

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an

emergency................................................ 498

Ignition switch (engine switch) .............216

Overheating................................................ 530

Tachometer ........................................... 86, 89

Engine compartment cover.................... 455

Engine coolant

Capacity........................................................ 540

Checking ...................................................... 460

Preparing and checking before winter

........................................................................ 390

Engine coolant temperature gauge86, 89

Engine cover..................................................456

Engine immobilizer system.........................64

Engine oil

Capacity ........................................................ 539

Checking....................................................... 458

Preparing and checking before winter

......................................................................... 390

Warning light..............................................508

Engine oil maintenance data.................. 459

Engine switch..................................................216

Auto power off function........................... 218

Changing the engine switch modes.218

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an

emergency................................................498

EPS (Electric Power Steering).............. 384

Warning light ................................................510

ERA-GLONASS/EVAK........................... 60

Extended headlight lighting system .....233

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) .........293

First-aid kit storage belt..............................431

Flat tire

Tire pressure warning system .............467

Floor mats...........................................................24

Fluid

Automatic transmission ........................... 541

Brake................................................................542

Washer............................................................462

Fog lights

Switch...............................................................242

Footwell light................................................. 420

Front automatic air conditioning system

......................................................................... 403

Front Cross Traffic Alert (FCTA) .........293

Front seats

Adjustment.....................................................165

Cleaning.........................................................445

Correct driving posture ............................25

Driving position memory .........................177

Head restraints............................................. 182

573

Alphabetical Index

Memory recall function ............................179

Power easy access system.....................177

Refresh system..............................................170

Seat heaters....................................................416

Seat position memory ...............................177

Seat ventilators..............................................416

Front turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs................................495

Turn signal lever......................................... 226

Fuel

Capacity........................................................ 538

Fuel gauge.............................................. 86, 89

Fuel pump shut off system.................... 506

Information....................................................545

Refueling ........................................................248

Type................................................................. 538

Warning light................................................510

Fuel consumption

Average fuel economy ..............................96

Current fuel consumption........................96

Fuel filler door

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

...........................................................................521

Refueling ........................................................248

Fuel gauge.................................................86, 89

Fuel pump shut off system....................... 506

Fuses..................................................................492

Gauges.......................................................86, 89

Gear Position .................................................. 98

G-force ...............................................................97

Glove box .......................................................425

Glove box light..............................................426

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid................... 122

Head restraints...............................................182

Headlights

Adaptive High-beam System..............235

Automatic High Beam system........... 238

Extended headlight lighting system..233

Light switch ...................................................232

Replacing light bulbs............................... 495

Head-up display ............................................. 101

Driving information display area...........101

Driving support system display area.104

Eco Driving Indicator................................105

HUD (Head-up display) switch..........103

Navigation system-linked display.........101

Pop-up display.............................................104

Settings.............................................................103

Heated steering wheel................................416

Heaters

Front automatic air conditioning system

......................................................................... 403

Heated steering wheel............................. 416

Outside rear view mirrors.................... 404

Rear automatic air conditioning system

........................................................................... 413

Seat heaters ................................................... 416

Height control

Electronically modulated air suspension

...........................................................................381

Hill-start assist control............................... 384

Hood

Open................................................................. 451

Pop Up Hood.................................................38

Hooks

Coat hooks...................................................434

Retaining hooks (floor mat)..................... 24

Horn....................................................................185

HUD (Head-up display) switch ..............103

Identification

Engine..............................................................537

Vehicle ............................................................537

Ignition switch (engine switch) ................216

Auto power off function........................... 218

574

Alphabetical Index

Changing the engine switch modes. 218

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an

emergency................................................ 498

Indicators............................................................84

Initialization

Items to initialize .........................................563

Maintenance ................................................459

Power windows........................................... 198

Tire pressure warning system.............478

Inside door handle lights.......................... 420

Inside rear view mirror......................186, 187

Installing a CRS to a front passenger seat

.............................................................................44

Installing a CRS to a power rear seat.....45

Instrument panel light control...........88, 92

Intercooler .......................................................461

Intercooler coolant

Capacity........................................................ 540

Checking ...................................................... 460

Interior lights ................................................. 420

Front interior light ......................................420

Rear interior light .......................................420

Jack

Positioning a floor jack............................452

Jam protection function

Moon roof...................................................... 201

Power trunk lid..............................................123

Power windows........................................... 198

Rear door sunshade.................................436

Keyless entry

Smart entry & start system......................126

Wireless remote control............................112

Keys

Battery-saving function.............................127

Electronic key.................................................110

Engine switch.................................................216

If the electronic key does not operate

properly ........................................................ 521

If you lose your keys ................................ 520

Key number plate..........................................110

Keyless entry .........................................114, 126

Mechanical key..............................................110

Replacing the battery.............................. 490

Warning buzzer.......................................... 126

Wireless remote control ........................... 112

Knee airbags.................................................... 30

Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)

Operation......................................................297

Warning messages..................................306

Language (multi-information display)....99

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever .................................. 451

Hood lock release lever.......................... 451

Shift lever......................................................... 219

Turn signal lever .........................................226

Wiper lever...................................................243

Lexus climate concierge............................401

Lexus parking assist-sensor.......... 349, 351

Function ........................................................... 351

Warning message........................353, 366

Lexus Safety System +

AHB (Automatic High Beam)........... 238

AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)235

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range .........................................311

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................297

PCS (Pre-Collision System)...............285

RSA (Road Sign Assist)..........................307

Lexus Safety System + A

AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)235

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range .............................307, 311

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)......293

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................297

575

Alphabetical Index

PCS (Pre-Collision System)................ 273

RSA (Road Sign Assist)..........................307

License plate lights

Light switch...................................................232

Replacing light bulbs................................495

Light bulbs

Replacing.......................................................495

Lights

Adaptive High-beam System..............235

Automatic High Beam system............238

Extended headlight lighting system .233

Fog light switch........................................... 242

Front interior lights......................................421

Front personal lights...................................421

Headlight switch......................................... 232

Interior lights.................................................420

Interior lights list..........................................420

Rear interior lights .......................................421

Rear personal lights....................................421

Replacing light bulbs................................495

Trunk lid light..................................................123

Trunk light........................................................123

Turn signal lever......................................... 226

Vanity lights ..................................................435

Welcome light illumination control ..233

Lock steering column..................................216

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

Operation......................................................297

Warning messages.................................. 306

Luggage mats................................................429

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance ................ 450

Maintenance data......................................536

Maintenance requirements..................448

Malfunction indicator lamp.....................508

Menu icons ........................................................94

Meter

Changing the main meter location......93

Clock......................................................... 86, 89

Indicators...........................................................84

Instrument panel light control....... 88, 92

Meter control switches ..............................94

Meters.......................................................86, 89

Multi-information display ..........................93

Settings...............................................................99

Units.................................................................... 98

Warning lights............................................ 507

Warning message......................................515

Mirrors

Digital Rearview Mirror ........................... 187

Inside rear view mirror.............................186

Outside rear view mirror defoggers404

Outside rear view mirrors......................195

Vanity mirrors............................................. 435

Moon roof

Door lock linked moon roof operation

...........................................................................201

Jam protection function...........................201

Operation....................................................... 201

Multi Weather Lights

Switch.................................................................241

Multi-information display.............................93

Audio system-linked display.................. 98

Boost gauge....................................................97

Cruise control..............................................323

Drive information 1/Drive information 2

.............................................................................96

Driving information display......................95

Driving support system information dis-

play....................................................................99

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range .........................................311

Eco Driving Indicator..................................97

Gear Position ................................................ 98

G-force..............................................................97

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)................... 302

Menu icons.......................................................94

Meter control switches ..............................94

Navigation system-linked display........ 98

576

Alphabetical Index

Pop-up display...............................................93

Settings...............................................................99

Stop & Start system information...........96

Suggestion function...................................100

Tire pressure ................................................467

Units ....................................................................98

Warning message...................................... 515

nanoe™.............................................................410

Navigation system-linked display ...98, 101

“ODO TRIP” switch.............................. 87, 92

Odometer................................................. 87, 92

Odometer and trip meter display

Display items.......................................... 87, 92

“ODO TRIP” switch........................... 87, 92

Pop-up display......................................88, 92

Oil

Engine oil .......................................................539

Front differential oil ...................................542

Rear differential oil.....................................542

Opener

Fuel filler door..............................................248

Hood................................................................. 451

Trunk ....................................................................121

Outer foot lights

Location..........................................................420

Outside door handle lights ..................... 420

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment..................................................... 195

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ...................332

Folding ............................................................. 196

Linked mirror function when reversing

.......................................................................... 195

Mirror position memory...........................177

Outside rear view mirror defoggers404

RCTA function............................................355

Outside temperature ...........................86, 89

Overheating.................................................. 530

Paddle shift switches....................... 224, 225

Parking assist sensors (Lexus parking

assist-sensor)...............................................351

Parking brake

Operation...................................................... 227

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

..........................................................................229

Warning light ................................................513

Warning message.....................................229

Parking lights

Light switch ...................................................232

Replacing light bulbs............................... 495

Parking Support Brake function (for

rear-crossing vehicles)...........................372

Function ..........................................................372

Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians).................................................375

Function ..........................................................375

Parking Support Brake function (static

objects)..........................................................367

Function ..........................................................367

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

Function ..............................................273, 285

PCS OFF switch .......................................288

Warning light ................................................ 512

Personal lights .............................................. 420

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)...............349

PKSB (Parking Support Brake).............362

Warning message.................................... 366

Pollen removal mode ..................................410

Pop Up Hood .................................................. 38

Power easy access system.........................177

Power outlets.................................................434

Power rear seat.............................................. 172

Power steering (Electric power steering

system) ......................................................... 384

Warning light ................................................510

577

Alphabetical Index

Power trunk lid.................................................121

Power windows

Door lock linked window operation. 199

Jam protection function........................... 198

Operation.......................................................198

Window lock switch................................ 200

Pre-Collision System (PCS)

Function..............................................273, 285

PCS OFF switch....................................... 288

Warning light.................................................512

Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range) ....307, 311

Radiator.............................................................461

RCD (Rear camera detection) ..............349

Function..........................................................359

Warning message.................................... 360

RCTA

Function..........................................................355

Warning message.....................................356

RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert)........349

Rear automatic air conditioning system413

Rear crossing traffic alert (RCTA)....... 355

Rear door sunshades..................................436

Rear fog lights

Switch .............................................................. 242

Rear Multi Operation Panel...................398

Rear seat position memory........................ 181

Rear seats......................................................... 172

Adjustment......................................................172

Head restraints............................................. 182

Rear seat position memory .....................181

Relaxation system........................................175

Seat heaters....................................................416

Seat ventilators..............................................416

Rear sunshades.............................................437

Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs................................495

Turn signal lever......................................... 226

Rear view mirror

Digital Rearview Mirror ........................... 187

Inside rear view mirror.............................186

Outside rear view mirrors......................195

Rear window defogger............................. 404

Refueling

Capacity ........................................................ 538

Fuel types......................................................538

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

........................................................................... 521

Opening the fuel tank cap.....................248

Remote Touch...............................................394

Replacing

Electronic key battery............................. 490

Fuses.................................................................492

Light bulbs.................................................... 495

Tires...................................................................482

Rev indicator......................................................91

Rev peak..............................................................91

Road Sign Assist...........................................307

RSA (Road Sign Assist).............................307

Run-flat tires.........................................467, 518

Seat belt buckle lights ............................... 420

Seat belt reminder light.....................510, 511

Seat belts ............................................................26

Active Assist ....................................................29

Child restraint system installation .........43

Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt

..........................................................................445

Easy Access Buckle ....................................28

Emergency Locking Retractor ..............28

How to wear your seat belt ..................... 27

How your child should wear the seat belt

............................................................................. 27

Pregnant women, proper seat belt use

.............................................................................26

Reminder light and buzzer ...........510, 511

Seat belt pretensioners ..............................29

578

Alphabetical Index

SRS warning light......................................508

Seat heaters.....................................................416

Seat position memory .........................177, 181

Seat ventilators...............................................416

Seats

Adjustment........................................... 165, 172

Adjustment precautions.......................... 165

Child seats/child restraint system installa-

tion .................................................................... 43

Cleaning.........................................................445

Driving position memory.........................177

Front seat refresh system.........................170

Head restraints............................................. 182

Power easy access system.....................177

Properly sitting in the seat ........................ 25

Rear seat relaxation system....................175

Seat heaters....................................................416

Seat position memory ......................177, 181

Seat ventilators..............................................416

Secondary Collision Brake..................... 385

Sensor

Automatic headlight system................. 232

Automatic High Beam system............238

Digital Rearview Mirror........................... 190

Inside rear view mirror............................. 186

Lexus parking assist-sensor.................. 351

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................297

Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles)...................... 372

Parking Support Brake function (static

objects)....................................................... 368

Radar sensor....................... 250, 262, 346

Rain-sensing windshield wipers.........245

Shift lever

Automatic transmission............................219

Shift lever light.............................................. 420

Shopping bag hooks...................................429

Side airbags...................................................... 30

Side mirrors

Adjustment..................................................... 195

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ...................332

Folding..............................................................196

Linked mirror function when reversing

...........................................................................195

Mirror position memory...........................177

RCTA function...........................................355

Side turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............................... 495

Turn signal lever .........................................226

Side windows..................................................198

Smart entry & start system

Antenna location......................................... 126

Entry functions................................................ 114

Starting the engine ..................................... 216

Snow mode.....................................................223

Snow tires....................................................... 390

“SOS” button ................................................... 60

Spark plug........................................................541

Specifications................................................ 536

Speedometer...........................................86, 89

Steering lock

Column lock release................................. 216

Steering lock system warning message

........................................................................... 216

Steering wheel

Adjustment.....................................................185

Heated steering wheel............................. 416

Meter control switches ..............................94

Power easy access system .....................177

Steering wheel position memory.........177

Stop & Start system

Pop-up display..................................... 88, 92

System information display......................96

Warning light ................................................ 512

Stop & Start system information display96

Stop lights

Emergency brake signal .......................385

Replacing light bulbs............................... 495

Storage features...........................................424

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes stuck............... 534

Suggestion function .....................................100

579

Alphabetical Index

Sun visors........................................................ 435

Sunshade

Roof ................................................................... 201

Switches

Activating the Adaptive High-beam Sys-

tem.................................................................235

Activating the Automatic High Beam

.........................................................................238

Automatic High Beam system............238

Brake Hold switch.....................................230

Cruise control switch ..............................323

Digital Rearview Mirror control switches

...........................................................................187

Door lock switches...................................... 116

Driving mode select switch..................378

Driving position memory switches ..... 177

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range switch.......................... 311

Emergency flashers switch.................. 498

Engine switch.................................................216

Fog light switch........................................... 242

Heated steering wheel switch...............416

HUD (Head-up display) switch.......... 103

Ignition switch................................................216

Instrument panel light control switches

...................................................................88, 92

Light switches.............................................. 232

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch.....302

Meter control switches..............................94

Moon roof switches................................... 201

Multi Weather Lights.................................241

“ODO TRIP” switch........................... 87, 92

Outside rear view mirror switches.... 195

Paddle shift switches.................... 224, 225

Parking brake switch ................................227

PCS OFF switch....................................... 288

PKSB (Parking Support Brake) switch

.........................................................................363

Power door lock switch ............................ 116

Power window switches......................... 198

RCD (Rear Camera Detection) switch

......................................................................... 359

Rear door sunshade switch..................436

Rear seat heater........................................... 414

Rear seat position memory switches..181

Rear seat ventilator .................................... 414

Rear sunshades switch............................437

Rear window and outside rear view mir-

ror defoggers switch............................ 403

Seat heater switches.................................. 416

Seat ventilator switches............................ 416

Snow mode switch....................................223

Stop & Start cancel switch ..................... 331

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch

...........................................................................185

Tire pressure warning reset switch...478

Trunk closer switch.....................................123

Trunk opener main switch...................... 125

Trunk opener switch.................................... 121

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch......311

VSC OFF switch ......................................385

Window lock switch................................ 200

Windshield wiper and washer switch

..........................................................................243

Windshield wiper de-icer switch.......407

Tachometer..............................................86, 89

Rev indicator .....................................................91

Rev peak..............................................................91

Tail lights

Light switch ...................................................232

Replacing light bulbs............................... 495

Theft deterrent system

Alarm................................................................... 77

Double locking system...............................76

Engine immobilizer system......................64

Tire inflation pressure

Maintenance data..................................... 543

580

Alphabetical Index

Tire inflation pressure display function

.........................................................................467

Warning light..................................................511

Tire pressure display...................................467

Tire pressure warning system

Function..........................................................467

Initializing........................................................478

Installing tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters....................................... 477

Registering ID codes.............................. 480

Warning light..................................................511

Tires

Chains ...............................................................391

Checking .......................................................465

If you have a flat tire...................................518

Inflation pressure....................................... 486

Replacing.......................................................482

Rotating tires................................................466

Run-flat tires.......................................467, 518

Size....................................................................543

Snow tires..................................................... 390

Tire inflation pressure display function

.........................................................................467

Tire pressure warning system.............467

Warning light..................................................511

Top tether anchorages .................................54

Towing

Emergency towing..................................... 501

Towing eyelet ............................................. 504

Trailer towing.................................................215

Traction Control (TRC)............................ 384

Trailer towing..................................................215

Transmission

Automatic transmission............................219

Driving mode select switch..................378

M mode..........................................................225

Paddle shift switches.................... 224, 225

Snow mode .................................................. 223

TRC (Traction Control)............................ 384

Trip meters................................................ 87, 92

Trunk ....................................................................119

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid................122

Power trunk lid ............................................... 121

Smart entry & start system ....................... 121

Trunk closer switch.....................................123

Trunk easy closer.........................................123

Trunk features..............................................429

Trunk grip.........................................................123

Trunk lid light..................................................123

Trunk light ........................................................123

Trunk opener main switch...................... 125

Trunk opener switch.................................... 121

Wireless remote control........................... 121

Trunk lid light...................................................123

Trunk light.........................................................123

Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............................... 495

Turn signal lever .........................................226

USB charging ports ....................................432

Vanity lights................................................... 435

Vanity mirrors............................................... 435

VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Man-

agement) ..................................................... 384

Vehicle data recording....................................7

Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Manage-

ment (VDIM) ............................................. 384

Vehicle identification number ................537

Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)........... 384

Ventilators (seat ventilators)....................416

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)........... 384

Warning buzzers

ABS..................................................................509

Airbags...........................................................508

581

Alphabetical Index

Approach warning......................................317

Brake hold...................................................... 513

Brake system ...............................................507

Charging system.......................................508

Downshifting.................................... 224, 225

Electric power steering ........................... 510

Engine.............................................................508

Hands off steering wheel warning (LTA)

........................................................................ 305

High coolant temperature ....................507

Inappropriate pedal operation .......... 509

Low engine oil pressure........................508

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)297, 300, 511

Open door...............................................115, 117

Open window.............................................. 199

PKSA (Parking Support Alert) .......... 350

Pop Up Hood ............................................509

Pre-collision braking.................... 273, 287

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)..........512

Seat belt.................................................. 510, 511

Warning lights.............................................. 507

ABS.................................................................. 509

Brake hold operated indicator ............ 513

Brake system ...............................................507

Charging system.......................................508

Electric power steering ........................... 510

High coolant temperature ....................507

Inappropriate pedal operation warning

light ............................................................... 509

Low engine oil pressure........................508

Low fuel level ................................................510

LTA indicator.................................................. 511

Malfunction indicator lamp..................508

Parking brake indicator........................... 513

Pop Up Hood ............................................509

Pre-collision system ...................................512

RCD OFF indicator ...................................512

Seat belt reminder light................... 510, 511

Slip indicator.................................................. 513

SRS...................................................................508

Stop & Start cancel indicator.................512

Tire pressure ...................................................511

Warning messages.......................................515

Warning reflector storage belt ...............431

Washer

Adding.............................................................462

Preparing and checking before winter

......................................................................... 390

Switch...............................................................243

Washing and waxing ..................................442

Weight

Weight............................................................ 536

Wheels

Replacing wheels.......................................482

Size................................................................... 543

Window lock switch................................... 200

Windows

Power windows...........................................198

Rear window defogger.......................... 404

Washer............................................................243

Windshield wiper de-icer..........................410

Windshield wipers

Position............................................................246

Rain-sensing windshield wipers.........243

Winter driving tips......................................390

Wireless remote control

Battery-Saving Function...........................127

Locking/Unlocking...................................... 112

Replacing the battery.............................. 490

For information regarding the

equipment listed below, refer to

the “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-

MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

· Navigation system

· Audio/visual system

· Rear seat entertainment system

· Lexus parking assist monitor

582

Alphabetical Index

583

Alphabetical Index

584

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever (P.451)

Trunk opener (P.121)

Fuel filler door opener (P.249)

Fuel filler door (P.249)

Hood lock release lever (P.451)

Tire inflation pressure (P.543)

Fuel tank capacity (Ref-

erence) 82.0 L (21.7 gal., 18.0 Imp. gal.)

Fuel type

EU area: Unleaded gasoline conforming to Euro-

pean standard EN228 only

Except EU area: Unleaded gasoline only

P.538

P.545

Cold tire inflation pres-

sure P.543

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill  ref-

erence)

P.539

Engine oil type P.539

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Lexus LS 350 - 2020 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 144.72 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Lexus LS 350 - 2020

Lexus LS 350 - 2020 User Manual - German - 608 pages

Lexus LS 350 - 2020 User Manual - Dutch - 586 pages

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Lexus LS 350 - 2020 Manual

Product: